Epson Aculaser c4200 Service Manual

SERVICE MANUAL
A4 Full Color Laser Printer
EPSON AcuLaser C4200
SEPG05001
Notice:
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
All effort have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly
appreciate being informed of them.
The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences thereof.
EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Copyright © 2005 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

I&I CS/Quality Management & PL Department
PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1)Personal injury and 2) damage to equipment.
DANGER Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in performing
procedures preceded by DANGER Headings.
WARNING Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.
The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.
DANGER
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE OR
REPAIR PROCEDURES.
2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR ALL
ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK.
3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL
INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON POWER
SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.
WARNING
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN.
2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING
PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT TO
THE POWER SOURCE.
3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR
REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.
4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-STATIC
WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF SECOND-
SOURCE ICs OR OTHER NON-APPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE EPSON WARRANTY.
About This Manual
This manual describes basic functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance and repair procedures of the printer. The instructions and procedures included
herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on the preceding page.
Manual Configuration Symbols Used in this Manual

This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix. Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional
CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a
Provides a general overview and specifications of the product. procedure or an action. Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and always read
CHAPTER 2.OPERATING PRINCIPLES NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.
Describes the theory of electrical and mechanical operations of the
product. A D J U S T M E N T Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition
CHAPTER 3.TROUBLESHOOTING R E Q U IR E D that is necessary to keep the product’s quality.
Describes the step-by-step procedures for the troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 4.DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY
Describes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling and assembling
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition
the product. C A U T IO N
CHAPTER 5.ADJUSTMENT that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of,
Provides Epson-approved methods for adjustment. equipment.
CHAPTER 6.MAINTENANCE
Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the lists of Epson-
C H E C K May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
approved lubricants and adhesives required for servicing the product.
P O IN T condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may also
APPENDIX Provides the following additional information for reference:
provide additional information that is related to a specific subject, or
• Connector pin assignments
comment on the results achieved through a previous action.
• Electric circuit boards components layout
• Electrical circuit boards schematics Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition
• Exploded diagram & Parts List W A R N IN G
that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss of life.
Abbreviations
A lot of abbreviations are used throughout this manual. Some of them are common ones and the others are original ones. The list below includes the most of the major abbreviations
and may include those which are not used in this manual as this is intended to be used in every quarter.
[A] [D] [I]

ADC........................................ Auto Density Control DB ...................................................Developing Bias I/F.................................................................Interface
ALM ................................................................Alarm Deve ..........................................................Developer I/L ............................................................... Interlock
Assy ........................................................... Assembly Diag .......................................................... Diagnostic ID ....................................................... Image Density
Aux. ............................................................Auxiliary dpi..........................................................dots per inch
[J]
DTS ........................................................ Detack Saw
[B] Jxx..................................................................Jack xx
Dup.................................................................Duplex
B/W................................................. Black and White [K]
BCR ............................................... Bias Charge Roll [E]
Bk .....................................................................Black Elec................................................................Electric [L]
BCR ............................................... Bias Charge Roll EP ............................................. Electro Photography L.......................................................................... Left
BRKT ............................................................Bracket ESS............................................Electric Sub System L......................................................................... Low
BTR ............................................. Bias Transfer Roll L/H............................................................ Left Hand
[F]
BUR ..................................................... Back Up Roll L/P ........................................................... Low Paper
F ........................................................................Front
LD .......................................................... Laser Diode
[C] FDR ................................................................ Feeder
LEF ................................................. Long Edge Feed
C ........................................................................Cyan FG....................................................... Frame Ground
LVPS ............................ Low Voltage Power Supply
CCW ........................................... Counter Clockwise FIP .....................................Fault Isolation Procedure
Cl. ................................................................... Clutch FRU ...................................... Field Replaceable Unit [M]
Clk ................................................................... Clock FX............................................................. Fuji Xerox M..................................................................Magenta
CHK.................................................................Check M/N.................................................... Multi National
[G]
CK....................................................................Check Mag .............................................................Magnetic
GG ........................................................ Guide Gauge
Conpane...............................................Control Panel MCU ...................................... Machine Control Unit
GND .............................................................. Ground
Cont ...........................................................Controller Mech ....................................................... Mechanical
CR...........................................................Charge Roll [H] MOT ................................................................Motor
CRU...............................Customer Replaceable Unit H........................................................................ High MSI ............................................Multi Sheet Inserter
CRUM ................................................ CRU Memory H/R .............................................................Heat Roll [N]
CST...............................................................Cassette HCF ........................................ High Capacity Feeder N/F ...................................................... Normal Force
CVR ................................................................. Cover HCS ....................................... High Capacity Stacker N/P ..............................................................No Paper
CW............................................................ Clockwise Hex ....................................................... Hexadecimal NPS ................................................. No Paper Sensor
HVPS ........................... High Voltage Power Supply NV ........................................................ Non Volatile
NVM ...................................... Non Volatile Memory
(to continue to next page)

[O] [T]
OHP ............................................Overhead Projector T ..........................................Tooth (number of Gear)
OPC ..................................Organic Photo Conductor Temp ..................................................... Temperature
OPT.................................................................Option TR.................................................................Transfer
TTL ............................... Transistor-Transistor Logic
[P]
Pyy .................................................................Plug yy [U]
P/J ........................................................Plug and Jack
[V]
P/H .................................................... Paper Handling
P/R ........................................................Pressure Roll [W]
PL ...................................................................... Plate [X]
PLT .................................................................... Plate Xero....................................................... Xerographic
PPM ................................................ Print Per Minute
[Y]
PV ........................................................ Print Volume
Y.....................................................................Yellow
PWB ....................................... Printed Wiring Board
YMCBk ...................... Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black
PWBA.............................................. PWB Assembly
YMCK........................ Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black
[Q]
[Z]
[R]
R ....................................................................... Right
R ........................................................................ Rear
R/H ......................................................... Right Hand
RDY.................................................................Ready
Regi........................................................ Registration
ROS .......................................Raster Output Scanner
RRP................Removal and Replacement Procedure
RTN ................................................................ Return
[S]
SEF ................................................. Short Edge Feed
SG .......................................................Signal Ground
SNR ................................................................ Sensor
SNS................................................................. Sensor
Sol................................................................Solenoid
SOS...................................................... Start Of Scan
SPI .......................................................Scan Per Inch
STD..............................................................Standard
STK................................................................ Stacker
STND...........................................................Standard
SW ..................................................................Switch
Sync ...................................................... Synchronous
Safety Information
To prevent possible accidents during maintenance work, strictly observe the WARNINGs and CAUTIONs described in this manual.
Never attempt to perform dangerous operations or any other operations which depart from the descriptions and procedures in this manual.
Other than the cautions and warnings stated below, there are many other situations and circumstances that could result in serious bodily injury. Always pay enough attention to
secure safety when working with the printer.
Power Supply Mechanical Components

Before starting any service procedure, turn the printer power off and unplug the power When servicing any driving assembly (e.g., gears), first turn the power off and unplug
cord from the wall outlet.When the power supply cable must be connected, be aware of the power cord, and then manually rotate the assembly.
the potential for electrical shock and do all tasks by following the procedures in this
manual.
W A R N IN G Do not touch any live parts other than the required parts while W A R N IN G Do not touch the driving part (e.g., gears) while the assembly
the printer is on. (printer) is operating.
As the LVPS ASSY (power supply section) is live even when the
power is off, never touch the live parts.
Do not touch any live parts unless instructed to do so.
High Temperature Assembly

When working with hot parts (FUSER etc.) make sure to turn the power off, unplug the
power cable, and leave the printer until it cools down sufficiently to work with to
prevent burn injury.
W A R N IN G As the inside of the printer is high-temperature state immediately

after the operation, leave it more than 40 minutes before working.
Ida_00_002A
Laser Beam
ROS ASSY
W A R N IN G Letting a laser beam get directly into your eyes could result in
loss of vision.
Never open the Cover where the Warning Label about Laser
Beam is affixed.
Before disassembling or assembling, be sure to turn the power
off.
If you need to work on the printer with power applied, strictly
follow the instructions in this manual.
Understand hazardous nature of the laser beam, use extreme
caution to avoid injury of yourself and anyone around you.
C H E C K Since the laser beam has a narrower frequency band and more
P O IN T coherent phases than any other light (sunlight, electric light),
the beam has excellent monochromaticity and convergence,
thus it reaches long distances.
Because of these characteristics, the laser beam converges into
one point, causing high density and high temperature, which is
harmful to the human body.
Reference: The laser beam in this printer is invisible. Ida_00_003A
Warning/Caution Labels Caution Label for Toner Cartridges
Warning labels and caution labels are attached on the corresponding locations on or in
the printer.
C H E C K In maintenance work, check that the labels are free from peeling
P O IN T and soiling.
Caution Label for High-temperature Surface
Ida_Sec00_010GA
Ida_00_004A
Caution Label about PHD ASSY and BTR ASSY Caution Label about MSI and Paper Tray
Ida_Sec00_005FA
Ida_00_006A
Ida_00_009A
Caution Label about FRAME ASSY DEVE Caution Label about ROS ASSY
Ida_Sec00_007GA
Ida_Sec00_008GA
Cautions relating to Toner cleaning Storage of Paper
To prevent ignition, explosion, burn, injury, etc., do not use a general vacuum Damp papers could cause printing quality troubles. To keep papers in their best
cleaner for cleaning dropped toner. (To do so may cause the toner to catch fire by condition, store them wrapping tightly with packing material or putting them into a
sparks in the vacuum cleaner.) plastic bag.
W A R N IN G Do not pick up dropped toner with a general vacuum cleaner.

To do so may cause ignition.
Leg_Sec001_014EA
Revision Status
Revision Date of Issue Description

A JUN 24, 2005 First release
EPSON AcuLaser C4200 Revision A
Contents
Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 1.12.2 Optional Products ..................................................................................... 32
1.13 Life Details ........................................................................................................ 33
1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 7
1.1.1 Engine Features ............................................................................................ 7 1.14 Engine Control (Appendix) ............................................................................... 34
1.1.2 Controller Features ....................................................................................... 7 1.15 Controller Specifications................................................................................... 36
1.1.3 Software Features ......................................................................................... 8 1.15.1 Controller Basic Specifications ................................................................ 36
1.2 Basic Specifications.............................................................................................. 9 1.15.2 Controller Configuration .......................................................................... 37
1.2.1 Process Specifications & System.................................................................. 9 1.15.3 External Interface Specifications.............................................................. 37
1.2.2 Printer Basic Specifications.......................................................................... 9 1.16 Control Panel..................................................................................................... 40
1.3 Paper Specifications ............................................................................................ 19 1.16.1 External Appearance and Names.............................................................. 40
1.3.1 Paper Type .................................................................................................. 19 1.16.2 Panel Settings List .................................................................................... 42
1.3.2 Paper that may cause printing defects, paper jams or printer malfunction. 19 1.16.3 Explanation of Menu and Settings............................................................ 53
1.3.3 Available Paper by Feeder.......................................................................... 20 1.16.4 Special Operations.................................................................................... 59
1.3.4 Printing Area............................................................................................... 20 1.17 Printer Status ..................................................................................................... 60
1.4 Reliability and Serviceability .............................................................................. 21 1.17.1 List of Printer Messages ........................................................................... 60
1.4.1 Reliability ................................................................................................... 21 1.17.2 Status Messages and Troubleshooting...................................................... 62
1.4.2 Durability.................................................................................................... 22 1.17.3 Warning Messages and Troubleshooting ................................................. 63
1.4.3 Serviceability .............................................................................................. 22 1.17.4 Error Messages and Troubleshooting ...................................................... 65
1.17.5 Service Call Error Messages..................................................................... 68
1.5 Service Conditions............................................................................................... 23
1.18 Expanding the RAM.......................................................................................... 70
1.6 Conditions for Storage and Transport ................................................................. 24
1.19 Handling Precautions ........................................................................................ 71
1.7 Electrical Characteristics ..................................................................................... 25
1.20 Status Sheet ....................................................................................................... 72
1.8 Compatible Specification .................................................................................... 26
1.21 Engine Status Sheet/Print Log Report............................................................... 76
1.9 Consumables/Periodic Replacement Unit ........................................................... 27
1.9.1 Specifications.............................................................................................. 27 1.22 Color Registration Sheet ................................................................................... 77
1.9.2 Conditions for Storage and Transport......................................................... 28 1.23 Form Overlay List ............................................................................................. 78
1.10 External Appearance and Unit Names .............................................................. 29 1.24 Paper Handling Algorithm ................................................................................ 79
1.10.1 Unit Names ............................................................................................... 29
1.11 Engine Restrictions............................................................................................ 31 Chapter 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES
1.11.1 Controls that Restrict Print Speed............................................................. 31
2.1 Print Process ........................................................................................................ 82
1.11.2 Controls that Restrict Print Start............................................................... 31
2.1.1 Print Process Overview .............................................................................. 82
1.11.3 Toner Duty Limiting Value ...................................................................... 31
2.1.2 Print Process Diagram ................................................................................ 83
1.12 Notes When Replacing Consumables and Installing Optional Products........... 32 2.1.3 Technical Explanation of Print Process...................................................... 84
1.12.1 Consumables............................................................................................. 32
1
2.2 Flow of Print Data ............................................................................................... 92 2.8.8 Fuser Control ............................................................................................ 131
2.2.1 Data Flow.................................................................................................... 92 2.9 Detection Mechanisms ...................................................................................... 132
2.3 Drive Transmission Path ..................................................................................... 93 2.10 Features of the Controller................................................................................ 134
2.3.1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN ................................................................................. 93 2.10.1 Power Supply.......................................................................................... 136
2.3.2 DRIVE ASSY DEVE ................................................................................. 94
2.3.3 DISPENSER ASSY (Y, M, C, K) .............................................................. 96
Chapter 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
2.3.4 DRIVE ASSY FUSER ............................................................................... 97
2.3.5 MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM....................................................................... 98 3.1 Procedure for Troubleshooting.......................................................................... 138
2.3.6 DRIVE ASSY (550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit) ......................................... 99 3.1.1 Procedure for Troubleshooting................................................................. 138
2.3.7 DRIVE ASSY 2ND (1,100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit) ........................... 100 3.1.2 Preliminary Check .................................................................................... 138
2.4 Feeding Paper .................................................................................................... 101 3.1.3 Precautions in Performing Troubleshooting Work................................... 139
2.4.1 Paper Feed Path (When options are not installed).................................... 101 3.1.4 Notes on Using FIP................................................................................... 140
2.4.2 Paper Feed Path (When the 550-sheet Paper Cassette is installed) .......... 102 3.2 Paper Jam .......................................................................................................... 141
2.4.3 Paper Feed Path (When the 1100-sheet Paper Cassette is installed) ........ 103 3.2.1 Paper Transferring Path and The Main Components ............................... 142
2.5 Main Structure and Function ............................................................................. 104 3.2.2 Paper Jam Handling (FIP) ........................................................................ 144
2.5.1 Paper Cassette........................................................................................... 104 3.2.3 Check Points for Frequent Paper Jam....................................................... 151
2.5.2 Paper Feeder ............................................................................................. 105 3.3 Level 1 FIP ........................................................................................................ 152
2.5.3 Optional Feeder (550-sheet Paper Cassette)............................................. 106 3.3.1 Level 1 FIP ............................................................................................... 152
2.5.4 Optional Feeder (1100-sheet Paper Cassette)........................................... 108 3.3.2 The flow of Level 1 FIP ........................................................................... 152
2.5.5 Retard & Regi Assy .................................................................................. 110 3.4 Level 2 FIP ........................................................................................................ 153
2.5.6 Front Assy In ............................................................................................ 111 3.4.1 List of Warnings and Errors ..................................................................... 153
2.5.7 Chute Assy Out......................................................................................... 112 3.4.2 List of Service Request............................................................................. 158
2.5.8 BTR Assy & Fuser Assy........................................................................... 114 3.4.3 Engine-related Trouble FIP ...................................................................... 163
2.5.9 Xerographics............................................................................................. 116 3.4.4 Controller-related Trouble FIP ................................................................. 209
2.5.10 Toner Cartridge....................................................................................... 117 3.4.5 Print Quality Trouble FIP ......................................................................... 211
2.5.11 Frame & Drive........................................................................................ 119 3.4.6 Other FIP .................................................................................................. 225
2.5.12 Electrical ................................................................................................. 120 3.5 Abnormal Noise-related Trouble....................................................................... 228
2.6 Switch and Sensor ............................................................................................. 122 3.5.1 Abnormal Noise-related Troubleshooting Entry Chart ............................ 228
2.7 Mode.................................................................................................................. 123 3.5.2 Abnormal Noise-related FIP..................................................................... 229
2.7.1 Printing Mode ........................................................................................... 123 3.6 Test Print ........................................................................................................... 233
2.7.2 Operating Modes ...................................................................................... 123
2.8 Control ............................................................................................................... 124 Chapter 4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
2.8.1 Paper Size Control .................................................................................... 124
2.8.2 Paper Feeder Selection Control ................................................................ 124 4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 236
2.8.3 ROS Light Intensity Control..................................................................... 124 4.1.1 Precautions................................................................................................ 236
2.8.4 Process Control......................................................................................... 125 4.1.2 Before starting work ................................................................................. 238
2.8.5 Color Registration Control ....................................................................... 128 4.1.3 Screws....................................................................................................... 239
2.8.6 BTR ASSY Control .................................................................................. 129 4.1.4 Tools ......................................................................................................... 240
2.8.7 Toner Control............................................................................................ 130 4.1.5 Conventions used in descriptions of procedures ...................................... 241
2
4.2 COVERS ........................................................................................................... 242 4.5.5 ROLL ASSY RETARD............................................................................ 282

4.2.1 COVER TOP MAIN................................................................................. 242 4.5.6 CHUTE ASSY REGI ............................................................................... 283
4.2.2 CONSOLE PANEL .................................................................................. 243 4.5.7 ROLL REGI METAL............................................................................... 284
4.2.3 COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD ............................................................... 244 4.5.8 ROLL REGI RUBBER ............................................................................ 285
4.2.4 COVER ASSY TOP PHD ........................................................................ 245 4.5.9 CLUTCH REGI........................................................................................ 286
4.2.5 COVER REAR ASSY.............................................................................. 246 4.5.10 CLUTCH TURN .................................................................................... 287
4.2.6 FAN REAR............................................................................................... 247 4.5.11 ROLL TURN MSI.................................................................................. 288
4.2.7 COVER SIDE R ASSY ............................................................................ 248 4.6 CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT ................................................................................ 289
4.2.8 COVER FRONT R ................................................................................... 249 4.6.1 FUSER ASSY........................................................................................... 289
4.2.9 TRAY ASSY MSI BASE......................................................................... 250 4.6.2 BTR ASSY ............................................................................................... 290
4.2.10 COVER ASSY MSI ............................................................................... 251 4.6.3 HOLDER ASSY CTD.............................................................................. 291
4.2.11 COVER FRONT L ASSY ...................................................................... 252 4.6.4 SENSOR TNR FULL............................................................................... 292
4.2.12 COVER SIDE L ASSY .......................................................................... 253 4.6.5 DRIVE ASSY FUSER ............................................................................. 294
4.2.13 COVER ASSY TOP, COVER TOP STOPPER..................................... 254 4.6.6 SOLENOID FEED MSI ........................................................................... 296
4.3 PAPER CASSETTE .......................................................................................... 255 4.6.7 SENSOR NO PAPER............................................................................... 299
4.3.1 ROLL ASSY RETARD............................................................................ 255 4.6.8 ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI ................................................................ 300
4.3.2 HOLDER ASSY RETARD...................................................................... 256 4.6.9 ROLL ASSY FEED.................................................................................. 302
4.3.3 KIT GUIDE SIDE L, KIT GUIDE SIDE R ............................................. 257 4.6.10 SENSOR FULL STACK........................................................................ 304
4.3.4 KIT GUIDE END ..................................................................................... 259 4.6.11 SENSOR DUP JAM............................................................................... 305
4.4 PAPER FEEDER............................................................................................... 261 4.6.12 ACTUATOR FULL STACK ................................................................. 307
4.4.1 CHUTE ASSY FEEDER.......................................................................... 261 4.6.13 MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM................................................................... 308
4.4.2 COVER CST ............................................................................................ 262 4.6.14 ACTUATOR DUP ................................................................................. 309
4.4.3 FEEDER ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY) ................................................. 263 4.6.15 ROLL DUP............................................................................................. 310
4.4.4 SWITCH ASSY SIZE .............................................................................. 266 4.6.16 ROLL EXIT............................................................................................ 311
4.4.5 SWITCH ................................................................................................... 267 4.6.17 CHUTE ASSY DUP IN ......................................................................... 312
4.4.6 HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG ..................................................................... 268 4.6.18 CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT ..................................................................... 315
4.4.7 PICK UP ASSY........................................................................................ 269 4.6.19 FAN FRONT .......................................................................................... 319
4.4.8 ROLL ASSY TURN, BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC ........................... 270 4.7 XEROGRAPHICS ............................................................................................ 320
4.4.9 SENSOR NO PAPER............................................................................... 271 4.7.1 ROS ASSY ............................................................................................... 320
4.4.10 SENSOR LOW PAPER ......................................................................... 272 4.7.2 HSG ASSY BIAS..................................................................................... 321
4.4.11 SOLENOID FEED ................................................................................. 273 4.8 DEVELOPMENT ............................................................................................. 322
4.4.12 ACTUATOR LOW PAPER ................................................................... 274 4.8.1 FRAME ASSY DEVE.............................................................................. 322
4.4.13 CHUTE UPPER (REFERENCE ONLY) ............................................... 275 4.8.2 CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC..................................................................... 324
4.4.14 ROLL ASSY FEED................................................................................ 276 4.8.3 DEVE ASSY (Y), (M), (C), (K)............................................................... 325
4.4.15 ACTUATOR NO PAPER ...................................................................... 277 4.8.4 DISPENSER ASSY-4 (REFERENCE ONLY)........................................ 326
4.5 RETARD & REGI ASSY ................................................................................. 278 4.8.5 DISPENSER ASSY (Y) ........................................................................... 329
4.5.1 ACTUATOR REGI .................................................................................. 278 4.8.6 DISPENSER ASSY (M) .......................................................................... 331
4.5.2 SENSOR REGI......................................................................................... 279 4.8.7 DISPENSER ASSY (C) ........................................................................... 333
4.5.3 CHUTE ASSY REGI IN .......................................................................... 280 4.8.8 DISPENSER ASSY (K) ........................................................................... 335
4.5.4 SENSOR OHP .......................................................................................... 281 4.8.9 SENSOR NO TNR (Y), (M), (C) ............................................................. 337
3
4.8.10 SENSOR NO TNR (K)........................................................................... 338 4.11.21 HOLDER ASSY RETARD.................................................................. 388
4.8.11 ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 ....................................................................... 339 4.11.22 KIT GUIDE SIDE L, KIT GUIDE SIDE R ......................................... 389
4.8.12 BOX ASSY CRUM READER ............................................................... 340 4.11.23 KIT GUIDE END ................................................................................. 391
4.9 DRIVE ............................................................................................................... 342 4.12 TWO TRAY OPTION FEEDER .................................................................... 393
4.9.1 DRIVE ASSY DEVE ............................................................................... 342 4.12.1 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY ....................................................... 393
4.9.2 DRIVE ASSY MAIN ............................................................................... 344 4.12.2 COVER ASSY LEFT............................................................................. 394
4.10 ELECTRICAL................................................................................................. 345 4.12.3 COVER ASSY RIGHT .......................................................................... 395
4.10.1 LVPS ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY)..................................................... 345 4.12.4 COVER ASSY FRONT ......................................................................... 396
4.10.2 LVPS....................................................................................................... 347 4.12.5 COVER CST .......................................................................................... 397
4.10.3 HARNESS ASSY AC INLET................................................................ 348 4.12.6 FEEDER ASSY LEFT ........................................................................... 398
4.10.4 HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK ........................................................... 349 4.12.7 FEEDER ASSY RIGHT......................................................................... 399
4.10.5 PWBA EEPROM.................................................................................... 350 4.12.8 SWITCH ASSY SIZE ............................................................................ 400
4.10.6 PWBA MCU IDTN ................................................................................ 351 4.12.9 CHUTE ASSY FEEDER........................................................................ 401
4.10.7 SENSOR HUM....................................................................................... 355 4.12.10 HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2............................................................... 402
4.10.8 HVPS ...................................................................................................... 356 4.12.11 PWBA OPTFDR 2T............................................................................. 403
4.10.9 ESS BOX (REFERENCE ONLY) ......................................................... 356 4.12.12 DRIVE ASSY 2ND .............................................................................. 404
4.10.10 PWBA ESS MAIN ............................................................................... 358 4.12.13 PICK UP ASSY 3RD ........................................................................... 405
4.10.11 PWBA ESS ROM................................................................................. 360 4.12.14 ROLL ASSY TURN............................................................................. 408
4.10.12 PWBA NIC C533 ................................................................................. 361 4.12.15 CLUTCH ASSY ................................................................................... 409
4.11 ONE TRAY OPTION FEEDER ..................................................................... 362 4.12.16 SENSOR NO PAPER........................................................................... 410
4.11.1 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY ....................................................... 362 4.12.17 SENSOR LOW PAPER ....................................................................... 411
4.11.2 HARNESS ASSY OPFREC................................................................... 363 4.12.18 SOLENOID FEED ............................................................................... 412
4.11.3 PWBA OPTFDR 1T ............................................................................... 365 4.12.19 ACTUATOR LOW PAPER ................................................................. 413
4.11.4 COVER RIGHT...................................................................................... 366 4.12.20 CHUTE UPPER (REFERENCE ONLY)............................................. 414
4.11.5 HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2 ................................................................. 367 4.12.21 ROLL ASSY FEED.............................................................................. 415
4.11.6 CHUTE ASSY FEEDER........................................................................ 369 4.12.22 ACTUATOR NO PAPER .................................................................... 416
4.11.7 COVER LEFT ........................................................................................ 370 4.12.23 PICK UP ASSY 4TH ........................................................................... 418
4.11.8 SWITCH ASSY SIZE ............................................................................ 371 4.12.24 ROLL ASSY TURN............................................................................. 421
4.11.9 PICK UP ASSY ...................................................................................... 373 4.12.25 CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC ..................................................... 422
4.11.10 ROLL ASSY TURN............................................................................. 376 4.12.26 SENSOR NO PAPER........................................................................... 423
4.11.11 CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC ..................................................... 377 4.12.27 SENSOR LOW PAPER ....................................................................... 424
4.11.12 SENSOR NO PAPER........................................................................... 378 4.12.28 SOLENOID FEED ............................................................................... 425
4.11.13 SENSOR LOW PAPER ....................................................................... 379 4.12.29 ACTUATOR LOW PAPER ................................................................. 426
4.11.14 SOLENOID FEED ............................................................................... 381 4.12.30 CHUTE UPPER (REFERENCE ONLY)............................................. 427
4.11.15 DRIVE ASSY....................................................................................... 382 4.12.31 ROLL ASSY FEED.............................................................................. 428
4.11.16 ACTUATOR LOW PAPER ................................................................. 383 4.12.32 ACTUATOR NO PAPER .................................................................... 429
4.11.17 CHUTE UPPER (REFERENCE ONLY) ............................................. 384 4.12.33 ROLL ASSY RETARD........................................................................ 431
4.11.18 ROLL ASSY FEED.............................................................................. 385 4.12.34 HOLDER ASSY RETARD.................................................................. 432
4.11.19 ACTUATOR NO PAPER .................................................................... 386 4.12.35 KIT GUIDE SIDE L, KIT GUIDE SIDE R ......................................... 433
4.11.20 ROLL ASSY RETARD........................................................................ 387 4.12.36 KIT GUIDE END ................................................................................. 435
4
4.12.37 FOOT ASSY A, FOOT ASSY B ......................................................... 437 7.7 Circuit Diagram ................................................................................................. 551
Chapter 5 ADJUSTMENT
5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 439
5.1.1 Precautions................................................................................................ 439
5.1.2 Adjustment Execution Timing.................................................................. 440
5.2 Adjustment/Action ............................................................................................ 441
5.2.1 Adjusting Color Registration Alignment.................................................. 441
5.2.2 Writing USB ID........................................................................................ 442
5.2.3 Firmware Update ...................................................................................... 444
Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE
6.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 452
6.2 Cleaning............................................................................................................. 454
6.3 Maintenance Menu ............................................................................................ 458
6.3.1 Entry into Maintenance Mode .................................................................. 458
6.3.2 Maintenance Menu Items ......................................................................... 459
6.4 Sheet for Servicing ............................................................................................ 460
6.4.1 Engine Status Sheet .................................................................................. 460
6.4.2 Print Log Report ....................................................................................... 464
6.5 Consumables and Components That Need Periodic Replacement.................... 466
6.5.1 Consumables............................................................................................. 466
6.5.2 Regular Replacement Parts....................................................................... 468
Chapter 7 APPENDIX
7.1 Connectors......................................................................................................... 471
7.1.1 The List of Plugs and Jacks ...................................................................... 471
7.1.2 P/J Layout Diagram .................................................................................. 474
7.2 Wire Net ............................................................................................................ 479
7.3 Wiring Connection Diagrams............................................................................ 482
7.3.1 Marks used in the Diagram....................................................................... 482
7.4 Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts ...................................................... 485
7.4.1 Configurations .......................................................................................... 485
7.4.2 Marks used in the Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts................ 488
7.5 Service Parts List ............................................................................................... 516
7.6 Exploded diagram.............................................................................................. 520
5
CHAPTER
1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
1.1 Overview 1.1.2 Controller Features

High-speed controller for latest tandem
This printer is a non-impact color page printer that takes advantage of a laser and
electrophotographic technologies. It provides 1200/600 dpi of resolution, and the 64-bit RISC CPU: Power PC 750FX 600 MHz
printing speed is 25 pages per minute (ppm) for color single-side printing, or 35 ppm 64-bit high-speed memory:DDR333 200 pin SO DIMM
for monochrome single-side printing. (compatible with the RAM for AcuLaser C9100)
Standard RAM: 128MB
1.1.1 Engine Features By installing additional RAM, the memory can be expanded up to 640MB
High-speed A4 tandem engine (128MB + 512MB). (The extended RAM must be installed to slot-1.
Changing the initial state of slot-0 is prohibited.)
Color Monochrome
Enhanced ASIC (FMV-FAIO)
Simplex printing 25.0 ppm 35.0 ppm The color management technologies are incorporated into the hardware to achieve
Duplex printing 14.8 ppm 20.4 ppm high-speed processing.
Note : When printing on A4-sized paper Three Built-in interfaces
Duplex print unit equipped as standard Parallel interface (IEEE 1284 compliant, Supports ECP)
(Duplex printing is not available on extra thick paper, OHP sheet (transparency),
labels, and envelopes.) USB interface (Rev. 2.0 HS)
Compatible with high quality plain paper that enables higher quality printing Ethernet interface (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T)
Printable on thick paper and transparency for laser printer Functions described below can be enhanced and increased in speed by expanding
memory with RAM DIMMs
This product is designed so that users can replace all the consumables.
CPGI drawing area
• Toner cartridges (C, M, Y and K)
• Photoconductor Unit Image creating speed
• Transfer Unit
Resolution
• Fuser Unit
Receive buffer
High-capacity paper supply
Print buffer for collate printing
Paper Feeder Capacity
Updating firmware is available (RCC compatible) when a Flash ROM DIMM is
MP tray up to 150 sheets installed
Standard
Lower cassette up to 550 sheets
Large capacity HDD such as 40GB can be installed
550-sheet paper cassette unit up to 550 sheets
Option
1,100-sheet paper cassette unit up to 1100 sheets
Maximum 2,350 sheets with 5 bins
Paper eject capacity is 250 sheets, face-down only
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Overview 7

1.1.3 Software Features

Color technologies
Smooth expanding of color images by ESC/Page-Color
Color/Monochrome auto-detect function
Supports 1200 dpi
Monitors printer status and printer environment by bi-directional EJL and MIB
Adobe PostScript3 is equipped as standard
Supports PCL5c with optional DIMM (1200 dpi not supported)
Engine controller ROM (only for Flash) can be upgraded
Panel display
Supports the new wide panel
Displays remaining amount of C, M, Y, and K toner on the panel
Displays toner cartridge presence, paper size, and remaining amount of papers
Help function
Supports 14 languages: English, French, Italian, German, Spanish,
Portuguese, Dutch, Swedish, Danish, Finnish, Norse, Chinese Simplified,
Chinese Traditional, and Korean
Supports EPSON Status Monitor 3
Employs new user interface suitable for business use
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Overview 8

1.2 Basic Specifications PRINTING SPEED MODE
Table 1-1. Printing Speed Mode

1.2.1 Process Specifications & System
Printing Speed Mode
Printing method: Semiconductor laser beam scan and electro photography The resolution is set to 600 dpi.
with dry double component non-electromagnetic toner Standard 1
Suitable for plain paper.
Light source: Semiconductor laser
Low speed 1
The resolution is set to 600 dpi.
Suitable for plain paper, thick paper, and envelopes.
Photoconductor: Negative organic photoconductor
Monochrome Low speed 1
Charging: Roller charger Suitable for plain paper, thick paper, and envelopes.
mode (B/W)
Development: Exposed area development The resolution is set to 600 dpi.
Low speed 2 Suitable for plain paper, thick paper, extra thick paper*,
Toner: Chemical toner and labels.
Primary transfer: Roller transfer method Low speed 3
Suitable for plain paper (high gross), and transparency.
Fixing: Heated roller method and flexible belt nip method
Standard 2
Suitable for plain paper
1.2.2 Printer Basic Specifications The resolution is set to 600 dpi.
Low speed 1
Suitable for plain paper, thick paper, and envelopes.
RESOLUTION The resolution is set to 1200 dpi.
Color mode Low speed 1
(F/C) Suitable for plain paper, thick paper, and envelopes.
600 dpi, 1200 dpi
Low speed 2
Suitable for plain paper, extra thick paper*, and labels.
WARMING UP TIME
Low speed 3
35 seconds or less: From turning the power on to ready-to-print status. Suitable for plain paper (high gross), and transparency.
(at: 22°C, 55% RH, rated voltage, memory standard) Note *: 164-216 g/m2
25 seconds or less: From standby mode to ready-to-print status.
(at 22°C, 55% RH, rated voltage, memory standard)
PRINT MODE
Color mode: Use four toners (CMYK) to print in full color.

Monochrome mode: Use only black toner (K) and the highest print speed is
available.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 9

PRINTING MODE BY PAPER TYPE FIRST PRINT TIME
Table 1-2. Printing Mode by Paper Type The time from receiving the Start command to when trailing edge of the paper leaves
Printing Speed Mode the paper eject roller. Note that the time given in the tables below does not apply when
Basic the printer is in the conditions described in “1.11 Engine Restrictions” (p31).
Paper Type <Video I/F Name> Gross*1 Paper 600 dpi
Weight 1200 dpi Table 1-3. First Print Time (Unit: seconds or less)
B/W FC
60 to Low Paper Source
(1) <Plain paper-L> N Standard 1 Standard 2
105g/m2 speed 1 Speed Mode MP Tray LC1 LC2 LC3 LC4
Normal
60 to Low (STD) (STD) (OPT) (OPT) (OPT)
(2) <Plain paper-H> N Standard 1 Standard 2
105g/m2 speed 1 Standard 1 10.2 10.5 11.1 11.7 11.9
60 to Low Low Standard 2 12.0 12.5 13.3 14.1 14.4
(3) <Plain paper-L> H X
105g/m2 speed 1 speed 1
Low speed 1 14.3 15.0 16.2 17.3 17.7
60 to Low Low
Normal-HQ (4) <Plain paper-L> SH X Low speed 2/
105g/m2 speed 2 speed 2 18.4 19.5 21.3 23.0 23.6
Low speed 3
<Plain (PPM- 60 to Low Low
(5) SH X Note : Paper size: A4
Down)> 105g/m2 speed 3 speed 3
106 to Low Low Low
Thick – <Heavier paper-L> H
163g/m2 speed 1 speed 1 speed 1
164 to Low Low
Extra Thick – <Heavier paper-H> SH X
216g/m2 speed 2 speed 2
Extra Thick <Heavier paper-H> 164 to Low Low
– SH X
Back Back Face 216g/m2 speed 2 speed 2
<Transparency Low Low
Transparency – SH – X
(PPM-Down)> speed 3 speed 3
Low Low
Envelope – <Envelope> H – X
speed 1 speed 1
Low Low
Label – <Label-H> SH – X
speed 2 speed 2
Note *1: Gross
N: Normal Gross
H: High Gross
SH:Super High Gross

CONTINUOUS PRINTING SPEED Duplex printing

Table 1-5. List of Continuous Printing speed (Unit: ppm)
Note that the time given in the tables below does not apply when the printer is in the
conditions described in “1.11 Engine Restrictions” (p31). Printing Speed Mode
Paper Size
Standard 1 Low speed 1 Low speed 2 Low Speed
Monochrome mode*1
Simplex printing LT/Executive JIS-B5/ MP tray 21.0 11.5 7.8 3.4
A5 LC1/2/3/4 21.0 11.5 7.8 3.4
Table 1-4. List of Continuous Printing Speed (Unit: ppm)
MP tray 20.4 11.2 7.6 3.3
A4
Printing Speed Mode LC1/2/3/4 20.4 11.2 7.6 3.3
Paper Size Standard Low Speed Low Speed Low Speed MP tray 18.7 10.2 6.9 3.1
Legal13” (GLG)
1 1 2 3*3 Legal14” (LGL) LC1/2/3/4 18.7 10.2 6.9 3.1
LT/Executive JIS-B5/
MP tray 35.2 18.3 12.2 8.2 Note *1: See “ Supported paper size, type and orientation” (p14) for details of paper
A5/HL
orientation.
LT/Executive JIS-B5/ 36.6
LC1/2/3/4 18.3 12.2 8.2 *2: Feed each of the papers at some intervals.
A5 35.0*3
*3: The speed is 35.0ppm only when feeding from LC4.
MP tray 33.7 17.5 11.7 8.0
A4
LC1/2/3/4 35.0 17.5 11.7 8.0
Legal13” (GLG) MP tray 29.4 15.2 10.1 7.2
Legal14” (LGL)
F4 LC1/2/3/4 30.4 15.2 10.1 7.2
Envelop/DL/ISO-B5/ MP tray – 17.6 – –

GLT LC1/2/3/4 – – – –
LT and under MP tray 35.2 17.6 11.7 8.2
LT ~ A4 MP tray 33.7 16.8 11.2 8.0
A4 ~ Legal14” (LGL) MP tray 29.4 14.7 9.8 7.2

Color mode*1 Duplex printing

Simplex printing Table 1-7. List of Continuous Printing Speed (Unit: ppm)
Table 1-6. List of Continuous Printing Speed (Unit: ppm) Printing Speed Mode
Paper Size
Printing Speed Mode Standard 1 Low Speed 1 Low Speed 2 Low Speed 3
Paper Size Standard Low Speed Low Speed Low Speed LT/Executive JIS-B5/ MP tray 15.2 11.5 7.8 3.4
1 1 2 3*2 A5 LC1/2/3/4 15.2 11.5 7.8 3.4
LT/Executive JIS-B5/ MP tray 14.8 11.2 7.6 3.3
MP tray 25.1 18.3 12.2 8.2
A5/HL A4
LC1/2/3/4 14.8 11.2 7.6 3.3
LT/Executive JIS-B5/
LC1/2/3/4 26.2 18.3 12.2 8.2 Legal13” (GLG) MP tray 13.6 10.2 6.9 3.1
A5
Legal14” (LGL) LC1/2/3/4 13.6 10.2 6.9 3.1
MP tray 24.1 17.5 11.7 8.0
A4
LC1/2/3/4 25.0 17.5 11.7 8.0 Note *1: See “ Supported paper size, type and orientation” (p14) for details of paper
orientation.
Legal13” (GLG) MP tray 21.0 15.2 10.1 7.2
Legal14” (LGL) *2: Feed each of the papers at some intervals.
F4 LC1/2/3/4 21.7 15.2 10.1 7.2
MP tray – 18.3 – –
DL/GLT/ISO-B5
LC1/2/3/4 – – – – PAPER FEED REFERENCE
LT and under MP tray 35.2 17.6 11.7 8.2
Reference position to feed paper (in any size) is always center of the feeders.
LT ~ A4 MP tray 33.7 16.8 11.2 8.0
A4 ~ Legal14” (LGL) MP tray 29.4 14.7 9.8 7.2

PAPER FEED COMBINATION WITH OPTIONAL CASSETTE
By attaching two types of optional paper feed cassette, the paper supply capacity can
Table 1-8. Paper Feed be increased as follows.
Sheet Capacity/ Available Paper Table 1-9. Combination with Optional Cassette
Feeder Paper Type*1/Paper Size
Height Capacity Basis Weight*2
Combination (1) (2) (3) (4)
Standard paper:
150 sheets 82 g/m2 MP tray 150 sheets { { { {
EPSON High Quality Plain Paper
150 sheets
Standard paper: RX-80 80 g/m2 Standard 550-sheet paper
4024 Paper (20lb) 75 g/m2 cassette 550 sheets { { { {
Plain paper/recycled paper:
(LC1)
15 mm A4, A5, B5, Letter, GLT, HLT, 60 to 105 g/m2 550-sheet paper
Executive, F4, LGL13”, LGL14” cassette 550 sheets – { – {
MP tray 15 mm Transparencies: A4, LT – (LC2)
Option
15 mm Labels: A4, LT – 1100-sheet paper
Standard
106 to 163 g/m2

cassette 1100 sheets – – { {
Thick Paper/Extra Thick Paper:
15 mm (LC3/4)
A4, A5, B5, LT, GLT, HLT, Executive 164 to 216 g/m2
15 mm envelopes, DL, ISO-B5 75 to 105 g/m2 700 1250 1800 2350
Total Capacity
sheets sheets sheets sheets
User defined size
15 mm Width 88.90mm to 220.00mm 60 to 216 g/m2 Note : These values are valid with RX-80 paper (80 g/m2) and EPSON high quality plain paper
Length 139.70mm to 355.60mm (82 g/m2).
550-sheet 550-sheet A4, A5, LT, B5, Executive,
60 to 105 g/m2
cassette (LC1) 61mm LGL13” (GLG), LGL14”
Duplex unit A4, A5, LT, B5, Executive,

– 64 to 163 g/m2
(built-in) LGL13” (GLG), LGL14”
550-sheet
Option
550-sheet A4, A5, LT, B5, Executive,

paper cassette 60 to 105 g/m2
61mm LGL13” (GLG), LGL14”
(LC2, 3, 4)
Note *1: Refer to “1.3 Paper Specifications” (p19).
*2: Environmental condition for the capacity: 22 ºC/55% RH.

SUPPORTED PAPER SIZE, TYPE AND ORIENTATION
Table 1-10. List of Supported Paper Size, Type and Orientation

Paper size Dimensions in mm (inches) 550-sheet Paper
Paper MP Tray Cassette Paper Orientation Duplex Printing
Vertical (length) Horizontal (width) (STD/OPT)
A4 297.00 210.00 { SEF z
A5 148.00 210.00 { SEF z
LT 279.40 (11.00") 215.90 (8.50") { SEF z
HLT 215.90 (8.50") 139.70 (5.50") { – SEF –
Standard
GLT 266.70 (10.50") 203.20 (8.00") { – SEF –

EXECUTIVE 266.70 (10.50") 184.15 (7.25") { SEF z
LGL13” (GLG) 330.20 (13.00") 215.90 (8.50") { SEF z
LGL14” 355.60 (14.00") 215.90 (8.50") { SEF z
F4 330.00 210.00 { – SEF –
User defined paper size 139.70 to 355.60 (5.5" to 14") 88.90 to 220.00 (3.5" to 8.5") { – Discretionary –
A4: 297.00 A4: 210.00 { – SEF –
Transparency
LT: 279.40 LT: 215.90 { – SEF –
Special paper
A4: 297.00 A4: 210.00 { – SEF –

Labels
LT: 279.40 LT: 215.90 { – SEF –
{*3
envelopes*2
DL 110.00 220.00 – LEF –
ISO-B5 250.00 176.00 {*3 – SEF –
Note *1: : Feeding is possible and paper size is automatically detected.

*2: {: Feeding is possible by specifying the size code with the controller.
*3: z: Duplex printing is available.
*4: –: Not available
*5: SEF (Short Edge Feed): Set paper to be loaded from its short side.
*6: LEF (Long Edge Feed): Set paper to be loaded from its long side.
*7: See “Envelope orientation” (p.15) for details of details of envelop orientation.

Envelope orientation PAPER EJECT CAPACITY
Number of sheets: 250 sheets, face down only (A4/LT, Standard paper)
Paper feed direction Thickness: 36 mm (Paper ejection automatically stops when the sensor
detected that the ejected papers has built up to a thickness of
36 mm)
Envelope type DL ISO-B5 Note : Environmental conditions for the capacity: 22 °C/55 % RH, standard paper (simplex/
Note *1: Set envelopes with its print surface facing down. duplex printing).
*2: Image quality and feed is not guaranteed when printing on the back side (flap side)
of envelopes.
*3: Envelopes with adhesive or tape are not available.
Printing surface set direction

Table 1-11. Printing Surface Set Direction
MP tray Optional paper cassette
Set direction (Printing surface) Face down Face up
Paper feed direction Top edge first Bottom edge first

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT Dimensions and weight with options installed

Table 1-13. Dimensions and Weights with Options Installed
Dimensions and weight of each unit
Width Depth Height Weight
Table 1-12. Dimensions and Weight (mm) (mm) (mm) (k)
Width Depth Height Weight Main unit
(mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) + 437 588 584 39
Main unit 437 588 457 31.5 550-sheet paper cassette
550-sheet paper cassette 429 509 154 7 Main unit

+ 584 695 796 53
1100-sheet paper cassette 584 695 364 21 1100-sheet paper cassette
Note 1: Manufacturing tolerance is ± 5 mm in dimensions and ± 0.5 kg in weight. Main unit

2: Consumables (Toner cartridges and Photoconductor unit) are not included in the main +
unit weight (controller is included). 550-sheet paper cassette 584 695 923 60
+
1100-sheet paper casette
Note 1: Manufacturing tolerance is ± 5 mm in dimensions and ± 0.5 kg in weight.

437mm 588mm 2: Consumables (Toner cartridges and Photoconductor unit) are not included in the main
unit weight (controller is included).
457mm
Figure 1-1. Dimensions (Main Unit)

CONSUMABLES AND PERIODIC REPLACEMENT UNIT POWER CONSUMPTION
Table 1-14. List of Consumables and Periodic Replacement Unit The maximum rated current and power consumption are measured with all engine
options and controller options installed.
Classification Replacement Unit
Toner cartridge Table 1-15. List of Power Consumption
(Black, Cyan, Yellow, Magenta) 110 V 240 V
Consumables Photoconductor unit Maximum rated current 10 A 5A
Transfer unit Maximum 900 W 960 W
Power consumption
Fuser unit Color 357 W 354 W
Continuous printing average
Retard Roll Monochrome 437 W 426 W
Developer Unit Assy. Average during standby with the heater on 70 W 71 W
Feed Roll Assy. MP Average in low power mode with the heater off 21 W 25 W
Periodic replacement units Power supply off 0W 0W
Retard Roll Assy. MP
Regi Roll Assy. Note : International Energy Star Standards: Color printer with 20 ppm print speed or higher:
45W or less
Feed Roll Assy. CST
Note : For detailed specifications, refer to “1.9 Consumables/Periodic Replacement Unit”
(p27).
CONSUMPTION CURRENT
550-sheet paper cassette (option)

POWER SUPPLY 5 V/ 0.1 A or less
Power supply operating voltage/frequency 24 V/ 0.5 A or less
AC 120 V ± 10 % 50 Hz /60 Hz ± 3 Hz 1100-sheet paper casette (option)
AC 220 V/240 V ± 10 % 50 Hz /60 Hz ± 3 Hz 5 V/ 0.1 A or less
Power supply for the controller
24 V/ 0.3 A or less
DC 5.0 V± 5%, 1 A or less
DC 3.3 V± 5%, 3 A or less

NOISE
Main unit
Item Printing Mode Standby Mode Sleep Mode

Sound pressure 55 dB 35 dB Background noise
Sound power 6.65 B 5.0 B Background noise
Note 1: The method of measuring and calculation conforms to ISO-7779 and ISO-9296.
2: Values mentioned above are actual measurement value.
EXHAUST GAS
Ozone density: 0.02 mg/m3 or less (the measuring method conforms to BAM)
Styrene density: TBD mg/m3 or less
Dust density: 0.075 mg/m3 or less (the measuring method conforms to BAM)
TVOC: TBD mg/m3 or less

1.3 Paper Specifications 1.3.2 Paper that may cause printing defects, paper jams
or printer malfunction
1.3.1 Paper Type Transfer paper (carbon paper, non-carbon paper), thermal paper, impact paper,
acid paper
Standard paper
Paper that is too thin or too thick
Monochrome: RX-80 paper, 4024 paper (20 lb)
Paper that is wet or damp
Color: EPSON Color Laser Paper
Paper with special coatings or color printer paper with processed surfaces
Plain paper
Glossy (too slick) paper, or paper with too rough surface
64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2
(Commonly used copy paper, recycled paper, high quality plain paper) Paper that the roughness is significantly different by side
Recommended recycled paper: Steinbeis Recycling Copy classic Paper with punch holes or perforations
Special Media Creased, curled or torn paper
EPSON transparency sheets (A4) Irregularly shaped paper or paper with non-perpendicular corners
Labels Labels that peel off easily
Thick paper (106 g/m2 to 216 g/m2) Paper with glue, staples or paper clips attached to it
Envelope Special paper for ink jet applications (super-fine, glossy, glossy film, etc.)
Paper previously used in a thermal or ink jet printer
C H E C K lb: Ream weight = Total weight of 500 sheets of 17" x 22" Transparencies for other color laser printers or color photocopiers
P O IN T sized paper
g/m : 1g/m2 = 0.2659763 lb
2 Paper that has been already printed by other color/monochrome laser printers or
photocopiers
Before purchasing a large amount of paper, test the paper if it
can be printed normally. Sheets of paper stuck together
Postcards for ink jet printers, unofficial postcards, and adhesive postcards
Iron print coated paper (for both ink jet and laser printers)
Paper that is deteriorated or discolored, due to temperatures lower than 190 ºC.
When postcards with illustrations are used, the paper feed roller may be soiled
with paper dust, and these postcards may not be fed properly. In this case, cleaning
is required in accordance with “ MAINTENANCE” (p451)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Paper Specifications 19

1.3.3 Available Paper by Feeder 1.3.4 Printing Area

Table 1-16. Types of Paper Feed
MAXIMUM PRINTABLE AREA
Special Paper
Paper with 355.60 mm length or less
Standard Plain Extra
Paper Feed Trans- Thick Enve- Width: 210.90 mm x Length: 351.60 mm
Paper Paper Labels Thick
parency Paper lopes Note : Printing prohibited areas for any type of paper are as follows;
Paper
Right and left margins: 2.5 mm
MP tray { Top and bottom margins: 2.0 mm
Duplex unit
{ X X X X
(built-in)
550-sheet GUARANTEED PRINTING AREA
paper cassette { X X X X
(LC1/2/3/4) The guaranteed printing area is shown below. The minimum left, right, top and bottom
margins are 4 mm for any type of paper.
Note 1: {: Paper feeding and image quality is guaranteed.
2: : Paper feeding and printing is possible. However, this is limited to types of paper for
general applications. Image quality is not guaranteed. 4mm 4mm
3: X: Feeding is not possible.
4mm
Guaranteed
printing area
4mm
Figure 1-2. Guaranteed Printing Area
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Paper Specifications 20

1.4 Reliability and Serviceability PRINTING START POSITION ACCURACY
Table 1-20. Printing Start Position Accuracy

1.4.1 Reliability
Simplex Printing Duplex Printing
MECHANICAL LIFETIME Main scanning direction
±2.5 mm ±2.5 mm
Reference point (c)
Table 1-17. Mechanical Lifetime
Sub-scanning direction
Unit Lifetime ±2.0 mm ±2.0 mm
Reference point (a)
Main unit 600,000 pages or 5 years, whichever comes first.
550-sheet paper cassette (option) 600,000 pages or 5 years, whichever comes first.
c a b
1100-sheet paper cassette (option) 600,000 pages or 5 years, whichever comes first.
MPBF
Feed direction
Table 1-18. MPBF Printable area
f
Unit Lifetime
Main unit 100,000 pages
Optional Feeder 100,000 pages d
PAPER FEED RELIABILITY e

Table 1-19. Paper Feed Reliability
Figure 1-3. Printing Start Position Accuracy
Standard Paper Plain Paper Special Paper
Reliability Issue 550-sheet 550-sheet 550-sheet

MP Tray Paper MP Tray Paper MP Tray Paper
Cassette Cassette Cassette
Simplex 1/3,000 1/5,000 1/2,000 1/3,000 1/100 –
Jam rate
Duplex 1/1,800 1/3,000 1/1,200 1/1,800 – –
Multiple-sheet feed rate 1/1,500 1/2,500 1/1,000 1/1,500 1/50 –
Note 1: Environmental conditions: Normal operating environment
2: Paper size: Regular size
3: Humidity: Newly unpacked paper
4: Paper type: The 550-sheet paper cassette does not use special paper (Refer to
“Supported paper size, type and orientation” (p.14))
5: Multiple-sheet feed rate: Conditions when adding new paper onto remaining paper in
the tray or cassette are not considered.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Reliability and Serviceability 21

SKEW 1.4.2 Durability

Table 1-21. Skew PRINT VOLUME (PAGES/MONTH)
A4 Simplex Printing Duplex Printing Average : 3, 000 pages/month
Main scanning direction (| a-b |) 1.2 mm 1.2 mm
Maximum : 90, 000 pages/month (monochrome:color = 1:1)
Sub-scanning direction (| c-d |) 0.8 mm 0.8 mm
Table 1-22. Length Standard of Measurement 1.4.3 Serviceability

A4
MEAN TIME TO REPAIR
Simplex printing Main scanning direction (e) 19 0mm
Duplex printing Sub-scanning direction (f) 114.5 mm MTTR : Average 30 minutes or less
(Time required for service personnel to determine and correct the
cause of the malfunction)
HEIGHT OF CURL OF OUTPUT PAPER
Table 1-23. Height of Curl of Output Paper

Paper Type Curl Height
Standard paper, Plain paper 30 mm or less
Other special papers No regulation
Note 1: The same for simplex and duplex printing
2: Measurement conditions: 22 ºC/55% at low speed 2
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Reliability and Serviceability 22

1.5 Service Conditions SPACE REQUIREMENTS
In order to ensure that the printer operates properly, provide at least as much space as
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY
shown in the diagram below.
Table 1-24. Ambient Temperature and Humidity
Temperature (ºC) Humidity (%RH) Other
Operating 5 to 32 15 to 85
No condensation 350mm
Non-operating -20 to 40 5 to 85
100mm
AIR PRESSURE (ALTITUDE)
65 to 101 kPa (0 to 3,100 m or less)

100mm
LEVELNESS
Difference between front and back: 10 mm or less (at 445 mm) 100mm
Difference between left and right: 10 mm or less (at 445 mm)
150mm
ILLUMINATION
3,000 lx or less (do not expose to direct sunlight)
Figure 1-4. Space Requirements
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Service Conditions 23

1.6 Conditions for Storage and Transport DROPPING
There should be no damage on 1 corner, 3 edges, and 6 sides of the packages under the
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY
conditions below.
Main unit Table 1-27. Dropping
Table 1-25. Ambient Temperature and Humidity (Main unit)
Drop
Condition Temperature (°C) Humidity*1 (%RH) Guaranteed Period
Standard Main unit 640 mm
Normal 12 months after 550-sheet paper cassette 910 mm
0 to 35 15 to 85
conditions manufacture Option
1100-sheet paper cassette 760 mm
Harsh High 35 to 40 High 80 to 95
Max. 48 hours
conditions Low -20 to 0 Low 5 to 15
Note *1: Non-condensing
VIBRATION
Optional products
There should be no damage under the following conditions
Table 1-26. Ambient Temperature and Humidity (Optional products)
Frequency: 5 to 55 Hz
Condition Temperature (°C) Humidity*1 (%RH) Guarantee period
Normal 12 months after Acceleration: 1.5 G
-20 to 50 5 to 85 However, between 5 to 10 Hz, constant 7.5 mm double
conditions manufacture
amplitude is assumed.
Harsh
High 50 to 60 High 85 to 95 Max. 48 hours
conditions Frequency sweep: Logarithmic sweep 10 minutes for one-way
Note *1: Non-condensing Direction of application: X, Y, Z directions
STORAGE ALTITUDE
Number of cycles: 3 cycles for each of XYZ directions (each 1 hour)
0 to 3,100m or less
For air transport, 0 to 15,000m. However, this assumes that the cargo compartment is
maintained at 70.9275 kPa or higher.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Conditions for Storage and Transport 24

1.7 Electrical Characteristics INSULATION RESISTANCE
10 MΩ or more
NOTE: The following sections do not include any optional units.
ELECTRICAL FAST TRANSIENT/BURSTS (AC LINE NOISE)

WITHSTAND VOLTAGE
Ensure the following conditions using evaluation methods compliant with
IEC61000-4-4. There should be no break down during application of the voltages shown below.
1 kV: No errors excluding insignificant dot errors Leak current should be 20mA or less when applying the voltage for one minute.
2 kV: No damage to parts Table 1-28. Withstand Voltage

Between Inlet and Non-charged Between Primary and Secondary
Metal Parts Power Transformers
120 V AC 2000 V AC 3000 V
INSTANTANEOUS OUTAGES
200 V series AC 3000 V AC 3000 V
No effect on printing quality.
DIP: 0.5 cycle 95 %
LEAK CURRENT
120 V: 3.5 mA or less

RESISTANCE TO STATIC ELECTRICITY
220-240 V: 3.5 mA or less
Ensure the following conditions using evaluation methods compliant with
IEC61000-4-2 CISPR 24.
Contact electric discharge 5 kV:
No error on any device after applying
Aerial electric discharge 10 kV:
No error on any device after applying
INRUSH CURRENT
1/2 cycle
100 A or less (0-peak): Including heater inrush
(with cold start or hot start/rated voltage: ± 10 %)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Electrical Characteristics 25

1.8 Compatible Specification POWER SUPPLY HARMONICS
Not applicable
SAFETY STANDARD
Table 1-29. Safety Standards

Model Type Applicable Standards POWER CONSUMPTION
UL60950 3rd Edition
120 V Conforms to International Energy Star Program standards
CSA C22.2 No.60950-00
IEC60950 3rd Edition
200 V series
EN60950 3rd Edition
MISCELLANEOUS
Toner: Have no affect on human body (conforms to OSHA,

SAFETY STANDARD (LASER TRANSMISSION) TSCA, EINECS)
OPC: Have no affect on human body (conforms to OSHA)
Table 1-30. Safety Standards (Laser Transmission)
Ozone generation: Conforms to UL478 5th edition
Model Type Applicable Standards
Materials: Does not contain any materials prohibited in each
120 V FDA21CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter J, Section 1010, 1040
country, nor harmful substances above the permitted
IEC60825 Class 1 Laser Product values
200 V series CE Directive
Nordic Agency Approvals
<Reference> Laser specifications:

• Wavelength (shortest to longest): 775 to 799 nm
• Maximum average radiant power: 10 mW
EMI STANDARDS
Table 1-31. EMI Standards

Model Type Applicable Standards
120 V FCC Part 15 Subpart B, Class B (ANSI C63.4)
EN55022 (CIRSPR Publication22), Class B
230 V EN61000-3-2 (Harmonics) Class A
EN61000-3-3 (Flicker)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Compatible Specification 26

1.9 Consumables/Periodic Replacement Unit Note *1: Approximate number of printed pages using A4 continuous printing at 5% image
occupation rate.
The cartridge lifetime varies according to the paper size and type of printing (toner
C A U T IO N The print page-based service life values of the Consumables and save mode etc.)
Periodical Replacement Parts are guidelines. The number of
Note :Refer to “1.13 Life Details” (p33) for details.
printable pages changes depending on how they are printed. The
number of printable pages decreases depending on the intermittent Periodic replacement parts specifications
printing (where a few pages, one to several pages, are printed each
time), paper size, paper orientation, thick paper printing, printed Table 1-33. Periodic Replacement Parts Specifications
document, frequent power-on/off, etc. Hence, the number of Name Life Time
printable pages of the consumables and periodical replacement ROLL ASSY RETARD 100,000 page
parts may become less than a half depending on the operating
DEVE ASSY 300,000 page
conditions and environment of the user.
45,000 page
ROLL ASSY FEED (MP)
(300,000 page*)
1.9.1 Specifications 45,000 page
HOLDER ASSY RETARD
Consumables (300,000 page*)
Table 1-32. Consumables CHUTE ASSY REGI 300,000 page
External ROLL ASSY FEED (CST) 300,000 page
Weight
Name Configuration Life Time Dimensions Note *: Cassette: When the usage rate of MP tray is 85:15
(g)
(mm)
355 (W)
9,000 pages*1
Toner Cartridge (K) Toner hopper 51 (D) 380
(TBD)
55 (H)
355 (W)
8,000 pages*1
Toner cartridge (Y) Toner hopper 51 (D) 350
(TBD)
53 (H)
355 (W)
Toner cartridge (C,
Toner hopper 8,000 pages*2 51 (D) 360
M)
53 (H)
Photoreceptor
328 (W)
Developer 35,000 pages
Photoconductor unit 113 (D) 3200
Intermediate roll (TBD)
244 (H)
Transfer
290 (W)
BTR 35,000 pages
Transfer unit 97 (D) 520
Waste Toner Box (TBD)
49 (H)
Heat roll
100,000 pages
Fuser unit Quarts lamp (For 120V/ TBD TBD
(TBD)
230V)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Consumables/Periodic Replacement Unit 27

1.9.2 Conditions for Storage and Transport

Temperature and humidity conditions
Condition Temperature (°C) Humidity*1 (%RH) Guarantee Period

Normal 24 months
0 to 35 15 to 80
conditions (unopened)
Harsh High 35 to 40 High 80 to 95

Max. of 1 month
conditions Low -20 to 0 Low 5 to 15
Note *1: Non-condensing
Note : Storage time after opening is 12 months in the normal operating environment.
Storage altitude
65 to 101 kPa (0 to 3,100m)
For air transport, 0 to 15,000m. However, this assumes that the cargo compartment
is maintained at 70.9275 kPa or higher.
Package dropping
There should be no damage on 1 corner, 3 edges, and 6 sides of the packages under
the conditions below.
Table 1-34. Package Dropping

Package name Drop
Toner cartridge (Y, M, C, K) 910 cm
Photoconductor unit 910 cm
Transfer unit 910 cm
Fuser unit 910 cm
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Consumables/Periodic Replacement Unit 28

1.10 External Appearance and Unit Names
1.10.1 Unit Names

Table 1-35. List of Unit Names
No. Name No. Name No. Name No. Name
1 Control panel 7 Power switch 13 Ethernet interface connector 19 Fuser unit
2 Cover B 8 Latch on cover A 14 AC inlet 20 Photoconductor unit
3 Top cover 9 Standard lower paper cassette 15 USB interface connector 21 Toner cartridge
4 Output tray 10 Expansion tray 16 Parallel interface connector 22 Cover D
5 Latch on cover B 11 MP tray (Multi-purpose tray) 17 Type B interface card slot cover
6 Cover A 12 Stopper 18 Transfer unit
Figure 1-5. Unit Name_1 Figure 1-6. Unit Name_2
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION External Appearance and Unit Names 29

Figure 1-7. Unit Name_3
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION External Appearance and Unit Names 30

1.11 Engine Restrictions Table 1-37. Color Mode
Total pages printed with Number of pages between each cleaning

PHD Standard Low Speed 1 Low Speed 2/3
1.11.1 Controls that Restrict Print Speed
25601 - 30720 26 18 13
CLEANING CYCLE 30720 - 26 18 13
On a temporary basis, printing is interrupted to perform cleaning in the conditions COOL DOWN
mentioned below. Necessary time for the cleaning is approximately 25 seconds
(including other controls). Printing is temporarily interrupted to cool down the fuser unit in the conditions
Cleaning may be carried out more frequently depending on the environment. mentioned below. Necessary time for the cool down depends on the temperature
of the fuser unit.
Table 1-36. Monochrome Mode
Number of pages between each cleaning 1. Temperature of the fuser unit edge exceeded the specified value.
Total pages printed with
PHD Standard Low Speed 1 Low Speed 2/3 2. Difference in temperature between the edge and the central portion of the fuser unit
0 - 1024 108 54 39 exceeded the specified level.
1025 - 5120 108 54 39 3. Temperature exceeded the higher limit that is set to each type of papers.
5121 - 10240 72 36 26 4. During continuous printing on small-sized papers, and when starting printing on large-
10241 - 15360 72 36 26 sized papers right after printing on small-sized papers.
15361 - 20480 72 36 26
20481 - 25600 54 27 20 1.11.2 Controls that Restrict Print Start
25601 - 30720 54 27 20 Necessary time to start printing may become longer immediately after shifting
30720 - 54 27 20 the print modes mentioned below.
1. Resolution
Table 1-37. Color Mode 2. Monochrome/Color
Total pages printed with Number of pages between each cleaning 3. Print speed
PHD Standard Low Speed 1 Low Speed 2/3 4. Paper type
0 - 1024 52 36 26
5. Size
1025 - 5120 52 36 26
5121 - 10240 35 24 17 1.11.3 Toner Duty Limiting Value
10241 - 15360 35 24 17
240 % (to prevent fuser unit from twisting paper jam)
15361 - 20480 35 24 17
20481 - 25600 26 18 13
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Engine Restrictions 31

1.12 Notes When Replacing Consumables and 1.12.2 Optional Products

Installing Optional Products 550-sheet Paper Cassette
Turn off the main unit before installing.
1.12.1 Consumables If the main unit is on when the cassette is installed, it is not detected.
Toner Cartridge Secure to the main unit with the attaching parts located on the top surface.
Toner cartridge can be replaced regardless of whether or not the main unit is
turned on. 1100-sheet Paper Cassette
Photoconductor Unit Turn off the main unit before installing.
This unit can be replaced regardless of whether or not the main unit is turned on. If the main unit is on when the unit is installed, it is not detected.
BTR Secure to the main unit or 550-sheet paper cassette with the attaching parts
This unit can be replaced regardless of whether or not the main unit is turned on. located on the top surface.
Fuser Unit Adding Controller Option Parts
Turn the printer off. Turn off the main unit before installing. The part will be damaged if the power
Leave the printer stand for at least 30 minutes after turning off the power as is on.
the Fuser is extremely hot after use. Remove the cover that is located beneath the controller.
Release the fixing levers on both right and left sides. Remove the three screws to pull out the cassette.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Notes When Replacing Consumables and Installing Optional Products 32
1.13 Life Details Color mode

Table 1-39. Color mode
Monochrome mode
Catalog LIFE (unit: pages)
Table 1-38. Monochrome mode Area
Unit specification
Coverage Continuous 4 P/J 1 P/J
Catalog LIFE (unit: pages) value printing
Area
Unit specification
Coverage Continuous 4 P/J 1 P/J Toner cartridge (K) 9,000 5% 9,000 9,000 9,000
value printing
Toner cartridge (C/
Toner cartridge (K) 9,000 5% 9,000 9,000 9,000 8,000 5% 8,000 8,000 8,000
M/Y)
5% 35,000 35,000 26,800 5% 35,000 35,000 26,800
10 % 35,000 35,000 26,800 10 % 35,000 35,000 25,600
Phoroconductor unit 35,000 Phoroconductor unit 35,000
20 % 35,000 35,000 26,800 20 % 29,000 29,000 24,100
50 % 35,000 35,000 25,600 50 % 12,000 12,000 12,000
5% --- (46,000) (37,000) 5% --- 35,000 (34,000)
10 % --- (45,000) (36,000) 10 % --- (39,000) (31,000)
Transfer unit 35,000 Transfer unit 35,000
20 % --- (42,000) (34,000) 20 % --- (32,000) (26,000)
50 % --- (37,000) (30,000) 50 % --- (22,000) (18,000)
100,000 or 100,000 or
Fuser unit 100,000 --- 100,000 100,000 Fuser unit 100,000 --- 100,000 100,000
less less
DEVE ASSY 300,000 --- 300,000 300,000 170,000 DEVE ASSY 300,000 --- 300,000 300,000 170,000
Note : Values in parentheses are theoretical values and may differ from the actual Note : Values in parentheses are theoretical values and may differ from the actual
measurement values. measurement values.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Life Details 33

1.14 Engine Control (Appendix)
Table 1-40. Engine Control

Timing Item Action Prerequisite Operating Time
1. At power-on
Retrieves toner accumulated in the cleaner with
Cleaning 2. When opening/closing the covers 42 sec.
the BTR.
once the number of printed pages exceeded 200 pages.
Toner transfer
Transfers toner into the pipe. When using new printer for the first time. 57 sec.
At power-on (Filling toner into the pipe)
Idling the developer assy 110 sec. (including
Repeats idling and cleaning to charge toner. After replacing the developer assy with a new one.
(Cleaning) cleaning operation)
Adjusting the CTD sensor
light intensity
Fuser unit warm-up Each time the printer is used. 25 sec.
Fuser unit sensor warm-up Warms the NC sensor When the sensor detected the temperature of -5 °C or less. 90 sec. (at -10 °C)
1. The number of accumulated printed pages exceeded 25
pages.
2. Carrying out printing immediately after the power-on.
Process control (SAD) Reads the density and gives feedback. 3. When shifting the print speed in accordance with the change 4 ~ 10 sec.
of paper type.
4. When shifting the resolution.
5. When shifting monochrome/color mode.
1. More than 80 pages are printed within 15 minutes.
2. Temperature has changed more than 6 °C since the last regi
Pre-printing operation control.
3. After replacing the PHD with a new one.
Regi control Process-directional color registration control 19 sec.
4. Temperature difference between environment temperature
and the fuser unit at power-on is more than 10 °C.
5. Printing is not carried out for more than 80 minutes.
6. Instruction from the controller.
1. Temperature of the fuser unit edge exceeded the specified
value.
Released when the temperature falls below the 2. Difference in temperature between the edge and the central
Cool-down of the fuser unit Max. 90 sec.
specified level. portion of the fuser unit exceeded the specified level.
3. Temperature exceeded the higher limit that is set to each type
of papers.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Engine Control (Appendix) 34

Table 1-40. Engine Control

Timing Item Action Prerequisite Operating Time
HAC mode Applies/Agitates toner. Images with 50 % print rate are continuously printed. 3 ~ 15 sec.
Adjusts the temperature to the one that is set to
Adjusting the temperature
each type of papers. (Starts printing when the When the paper type is changed. 15 sec.
of the fuser unit (stand-by)
temperature is settled to the specified value.)
The number of continuous print pages exceeded the specified
Cleaning
value.
1. Temperature of the fuser unit edge exceeded the specified
value.
2. Difference in temperature between the edge and the central
portion of the fuser unit exceeded the specified level.
Cool-down of the fuser unit 3. When printing on large-sized papers right after printing on
During printing small-sized papers.
(Print jobs are temporarily 4. When continuously printing on small-sized papers.
stopped or delayed in order to
Width = 150 mm or less:20 pages
perform the items right.)
Width = 186 mm or less:30 pages
Print jobs are temporarily stopped when shifting the following
print modes.
1. Resolution
2. Monochrome/Color
Shifting the print mode
3. Print speed
4. Paper type (When the current temperature is higher than the
predetermined level)
5. Paper size
Reduction in temperature of When the temperature of the fuser unit continues to fall during
Waits for the fuser unit to rise in temperature.
the fuser unit printing.
Draws the TC patch, reads the density, and
Process control (TC) The number of accumulated print pages is more than 25 pages. 9 sec.
gives feedback.
After printing operation Including agitation/refill of toner and the
Toner refill Density of the TC patch is thinner than the specified level. 65 sec.
cleaning
Cleaning Each time the printing is finished. 13 sec
Lateral regi control Executes during stand-by. Instruction from the controller. 47 sec.
Others Raises in temperature until it reaches the
Fuser unit warm-up Instruction from the controller. 25 sec.
temperature for stand-by.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Engine Control (Appendix) 35

1.15 Controller Specifications Printer Settings: Panel settings, EJL, PJL, HTTP, SNMP, and ENPC
Stores in 256K bytes serial type of EEPROM
1.15.1 Controller Basic Specifications

CPU: PowerPC750FX (600MHz)
Enhanced technology: CPGI, CRIT, RIT (FMV)
RAM
DIMM specification: DDR333 200 pin SO DIMM, CL=2.5
Number of slot: Two slots
(the standard RAM must be installed to slot-1)
Standard: 128 MB
Max.: 640 MB
Expansion: 12 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB
(SO DIMM)
ROM: 32-bit width (3.3V)
Program ROM: 16 MB (DIMM)
Font: In Program
Expansion ROM: 1 slot (ROM DIMM slot, 3.3V)
NOTE: Expansion ROM can be installed and removed only when turning off the
printer.
Slot A: P5C ROM module

Control Panel: LCD 22 digits, 5 lines, 3 LEDs, 6 buttons
Interface
Standard
• Parallel: 1 ch (IEEE1284 compliant bi-directional B-type
connector, Compatibility, Nibble, ECP)
• USB: 1 ch (Rev.2.0 HS), (D4 supported)
• Network: 1 ch (10Base-T/100Base-TX)
• Type-B: 1 slot (Level 3 compatible)
Option: 1 slot (Level 3 compatible)
HDD: 1 (Optional) (supports 40GB high-capacity type)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Controller Specifications 36

Printer mode 1.15.3 External Interface Specifications

Standard: ESC/ Page-Color, FX (B/W), ESCP2 (B/W),
The printer provides the following host interfaces.
I239X (B/W), ESC/Page (B/W), Adobe PostScript3
Parallel (IEEE1284 compliant) interface: Standard
Option: PCL5c
Ethernet (100BaseTX/10BaseT): Standard
Other: EJL, PJL, and RCC mode (firmware up grades)
DIAG mode (Engine adjustment), USB (Rev.2.0 HS) interface: Standard
EpsonNetConfig (Web) Optional Interface (Type-B) 1 slot: Optional
Auxiliary software: Status sheet, Reserve Job List, Form Overlay List,
Network Status Sheet, The locations of the respective interfaces are shown below;
USB Ext I/F statusSht (only when connecting with
EPSON D4 compliant device),
AUX Status Sheet (only when Type-B level 3 is
installed), PS3 Status Sheet,
Font Sample (for each mode),
Hex Dump, Optional I/F
Support Mode,
Printer Adjust Menu,
Maintenance Mode (engine status sheet),
Update function for engine firmware.
Installation method: Slide lip method: installed from the backside of the
main unit
Ethernet I/F
USB I/F
1.15.2 Controller Configuration <Orange LED> <Orange LED>
Parallel I/F - ON: 100BaseTX - ON: 100BaseTX
The factory default of this printer controller configuration is as follows. - OFF: 10BaseT - OFF: 10BaseT
Paper size: A4
Figure 1-8. Location of External Interfaces
PARALLEL INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
CMD: EJL, ESCPAGE-04, ESCPAGECOLOR-01, POSTSCRIPT, PJL, PCL*1;

Note *1: Only when P5C ROM module is installed

ETHERNET INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS USB INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
Printing protocols This printer supports USB2.0HS, and carries 18 digits serial ID number for the USB.
TCP/IP: LPR, FTP, IPP, PORT2501, PORT9100 The ID number is printed on the bottom of the Status Sheet. (See “Status Sheet”
(p.75).) Each digit describes as follows;
Microsoft Network: Net BIOS over TCP/IP, Net BIOS over NetBEUI
1, 2: Specific number for the printer model (36)
NetWare: 3: Page Printer (P)
Operating mode 4 to 13: Serial number of the unit
Standby (factory default), NDS Print Server, Bindery Print Server, 14: The year of an assembly day (lowest digit)
Remote Printer 15, 16: The month of an assembly day
17, 18: The day of an assembly day
AppleTalk
When the printer is connected to the computer by the USB port, the interface does not
Management protocols support D4. However, D4 support is available if the EPSON external LAN option is
TCP/IP: SNMP, HTTP, TELNET, DHCP, BOOTP, APIPA, PING, DDNS, connected.
mDNS*1, SNTP, SSDP, ENPC*2 The CMD of Device ID differs from the parallel interface with D4L3 being added.
CMD: EJL, ESCPAGE-04, ESCPAGECOLOR-01, POSTSCRIPT, PJL, PCL*1, D4L3*2;
Microsoft Network: Auto-IP, SSDP
MS Network(NetBEUI): SNMP, ENPC*2
*2: Available only for USB port
NetWare: SNMP, ENPC*2
AppleTalk: SNMP, ENPC*2
Note *1: mDNS is for Rendezvous use.
*2: These information should not be disclosed to users.
Entity type: See the following table
Table 1-41. Entity Type

Emulation Entity Type
PS LaserWriter
ESC/Page Color EPSONPAGECOLOR1
ESC/Page
I239X EPSONPRPXL24
FX EPSONFX
ESCP2 EPSONLQ2
PCL5C*1 EPSONPCL5C
Note : Only when P5C ROM module is installed

OPTIONAL INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
Main System Type: MTP1200dpi, PW10200dt1200dpi, PRG (*****) rev,

AP800ma, SPD0fast, D4
Note : The asterisks ***** indicate the ROM version
Printer Name: Same as the Product Name of the factory default
Product Name: Short Product Name (AL-C4200)
Emulation Type: See the following table
Entity Type: See the following table
Table 1-42. Emulation Type and Entity Type

Emulation Emulation Type Entity Type
PS POSTSCRIPT-00 LaserWriter
ESC/Page Color ESCPAGECOLOR-01 EPSONPAGECOLOR1
ESC/Page ESCPAGE-04
I239X PRPXL24-01 EPSONPRPXL24
FX ESCP9 EPSONFX
ESCP2 ESCPL2 EPSONLQ2
PCL5C*1 PCL5C-00 EPSONPCL5C

1.16 Control Panel LCD “ (2)” button Error LED (Red)

Data LED (Yellow) Ready LED (Green)
1.16.1 External Appearance and Names
Table 1-43. Indicators
Indicators Function
LCD 5 line x 22 characters (132 x 65 dot matrix)
On: Printer is ready to print.
Ready LED
Off: Printer is not ready to print.
On: Printer contains data that has not been processed yet. “ (1)” button “ (3)” button
Data LED Off: Printer has finished processing all print data. Cancel Job button
“ (4)” button Start/Stop button
Flashing: Printer is currently processing data.
Flashing 1: An error has occurred which permits continuing to print by pressing the Start/ Figure 1-9. External View of Control Panel
Stop button.
Error LED On: An error has occurred which requires the user to remove the cause of the error.
Flashing 2: An error has occurred which requires the user to clear the error and press the
Start/Stop button.
Table 1-44. Summary of Button Functions

Button
When Ready to Print When Not Ready to Print Error Has Occurred In Panel Setting Mode
Name
1. Pressing normally: 1. Recoverable error:
Start Into pause (not ready to print) Into On Line (ready to print) status Clears error Returns to normal mode
/Stop status 2. Pressing for 2 seconds or longer: 2. Non-recoverable error: (the same state as before entering panel setting mode)
Ejects paper forcibly Displays “Unable Clear Error”
1. Pressing normally: 1. Pressing normally: 1. Pressing normally:
Deletes printing data Deletes printing data Deletes printing data
Cancel Job Invalid
2. Pressing for 2 seconds or longer: 2. Pressing for 2 seconds or longer: 2. Pressing for 2 seconds or longer:
Deletes all printing data Deletes all printing data Deletes all printing data
1. When panel setting mode menu is displayed: Displays setting item
Enters the printer information menu Enters the printer information menu 2. When setting item for non-execution is displayed: Displays setting value
(3) Invalid
in the panel setting mode in the panel setting mode 3. When setting item for execution is displayed: Executes printing or processing
4. When setting value is displayed: Registers the setting value
Enters the printer information menu Enters the printer information menu 1. When panel setting mode menu is displayed: Returns to normal mode
(1) Invalid
in the panel setting mode in the panel setting mode 2. When setting item or setting value is displayed: Displays the previous higher rank in hierarchy
1. When panel setting mode menu is displayed: Displays the previous panel setting mode menu
Enters the printer information menu Enters the printer information menu
(2) Invalid 2. When setting item is displayed: Displays previous setting item
in the panel setting mode in the panel setting mode
3. When setting value is displayed: Displays previous setting value
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Control Panel 40

Table 1-44. Summary of Button Functions

Button
When Ready to Print When Not Ready to Print Error Has Occurred In Panel Setting Mode
Name
1. When panel setting mode menu is displayed: Displays the next panel setting mode menu
Enters the printer information menu Enters the printer information menu
(4) Invalid 2. When setting item is displayed: Displays next setting item
in the panel setting mode in the panel setting mode
3. When setting value is displayed: Displays next setting value

1.16.2 Panel Settings List Setting Setting Values

The printer settings are listed below. Color Pages*7 0 to 99999999
B/W Pages*7 0 to 99999999
NOTE: Underlined value in the Setting value column are factory default settings.
Note *1: Only displayed when print jobs are registered in the Quick Print Job.
Information Menu *2: Only displayed and executable when there is any Form Overlay exists.
*3: Only displayed and executable when the "Network I/F=On".
Setting Setting Values *4: Only displayed when a level3-supported Type-B host interface is connected and
turning the power on with "AUX I/F=On".
Status Sheet –
*5: Only displayed when a D4-compliant USB is connected and turning on the power
Reserve Job ListM*1 – with "USB I/F=On".
Form Overlay List*2 – *6: Not displayed on the panel, only executable in EJL. Should not be exposed to users.
NetworkStatus Sheet*3 – *7: This item is for display only and cannot be modified.
Color Resist Sheet – *8: Only displayed when the P5C module is installed.
AUX Status Sheet*4 –

USB Ext I/FStatusSht*5 –
PS3 Status Sheet –
Tray Menu
PS3 Font List –

Setting Setting Values
ESC/Page Font Sample*6 –
A4*1, A5, B5, LT, HLT, LGL,GLT, GLG, EXE, F4, MON,
P5C Font Sample*8 – MP Tray Size
C10, DL, C5, IB5
ESCP2 Font Sample – LC1 Size*2 A4, A5, B5, LT, LGL, GLG, EXE
FX Font Sample – LC2 Size*1,*2 A4, A5, B5, LT, LGL, GLG, EXE
1239X Font Sample – LC3 Size*1,*2 A4, A5, B5, LT, LGL, GLG, EXE
C Toner*7 E******F to EF LC4 Size*1,*2 A4, A5, B5, LT, LGL, GLG, EXE
M Toner*7 E******F to EF MP Type Plain, Letterhead, Recycled, Color, Transparency, Labels
Y Toner*7 E******F to EF LC1 Type Plain, SemiThk, Letterhead, Recycled, Color
K Toner*7 E******F to EF LC2 Type Plain, SemiThk, Letterhead, Recycled, Color
Photocon*7 E******F to EF LC3 Type Plain, SemiThk, Letterhead, Recycled, Color
Transfer*7 E******F to EF LC4 Type Plain, SemiThk, Letterhead, Recycled, Color
Fuser*7 E******F to EF Note *1: Displayed according to the installation status of the optional lower cassette.
Total Pages*7 0 to 99999999 550-sheet paper cassette is installed: displays up to LC2
1100-sheet paper cassette is installed: displays up to LC3

550-sheet paper cassette and 1100-sheet paper *2: Not valid for P5C.
cassette are installed: displays up to LC4 *3: Eco is not displayed on the panel, only settable in EJL. Should not be exposed to
(For details, refer to “Controller Configuration” (p.37).) users.
*2: This item is for display only and cannot be modified.
Emulation Menu

Parallel Auto, ESCP2, FX, I239X, PS3, P5C*1
USB Auto, ESCP2, FX, I239X, PS3, P5C*1
Network Auto, ESCP2, FX, I239X, PS3, P5C*1
AUX*2 Auto, ESCP2, FX, I239X, PS3, P5C*1
Note *1: Only displayed and executable when the P5C ROM module is installed
*2: Only displayed and executable when the Type-B interface is installed
Printing Menu

A4, A5, B5, LT, HLT, LGL, GLT, GLG, EXE, F4, MON,
Page Size
C10, DL, C5, C6, IB5, CTM*1
Wide A4 Off, On
Orientation Port, Land
Resolution 300, 600, 1200*2
RITech On, Off
Toner Save Off, On, Eco*3
Image Optimum*2 Auto, Off, On
Top Offset -99.0 to 0.0 to 99.0mm step 0.5mm
Left Offset -99.0 to 0.0 to 99.0mm step 0.5mm
T Offset B -99.0 to 0.0 to 99.0mm step 0.5mm
L Offset B -99.0 to 0.0 to 99.0mm step 0.5mm
Note *1: Paper size (width x length) for CTM (custom) are min. 88.9 x 139.7mm and max.
220 x 900mm. “Max. 220 x 355.6” is displayed on the printer driver.
Except service warranty for the paper width is up to 207.9mm.

Setup Menu Setting Setting Values

Page Protect*6 Auto, On
LCD Contrast 0 to 8 to 15
Lang Englishv
Panel Lock*5 Off, On
Langue Français
Sprache Deutsch Note *1: Displayed according to the installation status of the optional lower cassette.
Lingua Italiano
IDIOMA ESPAÑOL 550-sheet paper cassette and 1100-sheet paper
SPRÅK SVENSKA cassette are installed: displays up to LC4
Sprog Dansk *2: Not displayed on the panel, only executable in EJL and PJL. Not saved in the
Taal Neder lands EEPROM.
Kieli SUOMI *3: Duplex printing is only available for A4, A5, B5, LT, LGL, EXE, and GLG sized
Líng. Português papers. Simplex printing is available for other sizes of papers.
SPRÅK Norsk *4: Valid for ESC/Page, ESC/P2, FX, 1239X.
*5: Not displayed on the panel or printed on the status sheet. Settable in EJL and
EpsonNet WebAssist, etc.
*6: Not valid for P5C.
Time To Sleep*7 5, 15, 30, 60 , 120, 180, 240 Min *7: Supports the STANDBYTIME command (nonpublic) of EJL. The default setting is
60 minutes.
Time Out 0, 5 to 60 to 300 step 1
Paper Source Auto, MP, LC1, LC2*1, LC3*1, LC4*1
MP mode Normal, Last
Color Regist Menu
Manual Feed Off, 1st Page, EachPage
Copies 1 to 999
Quantity*2 1 to 999
Cyan Regist*1 -36 to 0 to 36 step 1
Duplex*3 Off, On
Magenta Regist*1 -36 to 0 to 36 step 1
Binding Long Edge, Short Edge
Yellow Regist*1 -36 to 0 to 36 step 1
Start Page Front, Back Note *1: Setting values are saved on the engine controller at the next printing, and the panel
Paper Type Normal, SemiThk, Thick, ExtraThk, Transparency display returns to "0".
Page Side Front, Back
Skip Blank Page*4,*6 Off, On
Auto Eject Page Off, On
Size Ignore Off, On
Auto Cont Off, On

Reset Menu Confidential Job Menu*1
Setting Setting Values Setting Setting Values

Clear Warning User xxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Clear All Warnings Enter Password*2 XXXX
Reset Job*3 xxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Reset All Copies*4 1 to 999
SelecType Init Delete*4, *5
Note *1: Not displayed when Confidential Job is not registered.
*2: To display this item, select Value (User name) and press Enter. Use 1 (Back), 2 (Up),
Quick Print Job Menu*1 3 (Enter), and 4 (Down) buttons to enter the password.
*3: Enter the password while Enter Password is displayed. If there is a print job that
matches the password, this item will be displayed.
*4: To display, select, and execute this item, select Value (Job name) and press Enter
User xxxxxxxxxxxxxx while the job is displayed. After the execution, the printer will cancel the SelecType
Job*2 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx mode.
*5: Returns to Job display after executing Delete and returns to User display if all the
Copies*3 1 to 999
jobs are completed. The printer will cancel the SelecType mode if there is no user.
Delete*3, *4
Note *1: Not displayed when none of the Verify job, Re-print job, or Stored job are registered.
*2: To display this item, select Value (User name) and press Enter while the user is
displayed. Parallel Menu*1
*3: To display, select, and execute this item, select Value (Job name) and press Enter
while the job is displayed. After the execution, the printer will cancel the SelecType Setting Setting Values
mode. Parallel I/F On, Off
*4: Returns to Job display after executing Delete and returns to User display if all the
Speed Fast, Normal
jobs are completed. The printer will cancel the SelecType mode if there is no user.
Bi-D Nibble, ECP, Off
Buffer Size Normal, Maximum, Minimum
Note *1: After this item is changed, the setting value takes effect after a warm boot or after the
power is turned on again.
While it is reflected immediately in the Status Sheet and EJL read-back, the actual
change takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned on again.

USB Menu Network Menu*1

USB I/F*1 On, Off Network I/F*1 On, Off
USB Speed*1 HS, FS Network Config*2 No, Yes
USB ExtI/FConfg*2 No, Yes Get IPAddress*2 Panel, Auto, PING
Get IPAddress*3 Panel, Auto, PING IP*2*3 0.0.0.0 to 192.168.192.168 to 255.255.255.255
IP*3, *4, *5 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 SM*2 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.0 to 255.255.255.255
SM*3 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 GW*2 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 to 255.255.255.255
GW*3 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 NetWare*2 On, Off

AppleTalk*2 On, Off
NetWare*3 On, Off
MS Network*2 On, Off
AppleTalk*3 On, Off
Rendezvous*2 On, Off
MS Network*3 On, Off
Link Speed*2 Auto, 100 Full, 100 Half, 10 Full, 10 Half
Rendezvous*3 On, Off
Buffer Size Normal, Maximum, Minimum
USB Ext I/F Init*3
Buffer Size*1 Normal, Maximum, Minimum power is turned on again.
Note *1: After this item is changed, the setting value takes effect after a warm boot or after the While it is reflected immediately in the Status Sheet and EJL read-back, the actual
power is turned on again. change takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned on again.
While it is reflected immediately in the Status Sheet and EJL read-back, the actual *2: Displayed only when “Network Config=Yes”. (Except these information can be
change takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is turned on again. printed on the status sheet regardless of the settings of I/F or Config.)
*2: Displayed only when the D4 support USB external device is connected. Changed to *3: The actual valid value is displayed (but cannot be changed) when “Get IPAddress =
“USB Config=No” automatically when the panel setting mode is finished. Auto”.
*3: Displayed only when the D4 support USB external device is connected, and “USB When “Panel” or “PING” is changed to “Auto” in the IP address setting, the printer
external device=Yes”. stores the previous setting value, which had been set in the “Panel” or “PING”. The
Content of the setting depends on the USB external device settings. stored value will be displayed when returning to “Panel” or “PING”.
*4: The actual valid value is displayed (but cannot be changed) when “Get IPAddress =
Auto”.
*5: When “Panel” or “PING” is changed to “Auto” in the IP address setting, the printer
stores the previous setting value, which had been set in the “Panel” or “PING”. The
stored value will be displayed when returning to “Panel” or “PING”.
The printer displays “192.168.192.168” if the settings are not made from the panel.

AUX menu*1, *2 ESC/Page menu*1

AUX I/F On, Off Auto CR On, Off
AUX Config*3 No, Yes Auto FF On, Off
Get IPAddress*3,*4 Panel, Auto, PING CR Function CR, CR+LF
IP*3, *4, *5 0.0.0.0 to 192.168.192.168 to 255.255.255.255 LF Function CR+LF, LF
SM*3, *4 0.0.0.0 to 192.168.192.168 to 255.255.255.255 FF Function CR+FF, FF
GW*3,*4 0.0.0.0 to 192.168.192.168 to 255.255.255.255 Error Code Ignore, Space
NetWare*3,*4 On, Off Avoid Error Off, On
AppleTalk*3,*4 On, Off PGI On, Off
MS Network*3,*4 On, Off TriColorSpace Normal, sRGB
Rendezvous*3, *4,*6 On, Off CM Media Type Off, Opt1, Opt2
AUX Init*3,*4 Process Mode 1, 2
Buffer Size Normal, Maximum, Minimum Note *1: Not displayed on the panel or the status sheet, only executable in EJL
power is turned on again. While it is reflected immediately in the Status Sheet and
EJL read-back, the actual change takes effect after a warm boot or after the power is
turned on again.
*2: Displayed only when the Type-B host interface is installed.
*3: Only displayed, selectable, and executable when the Type-B host interface is
installed. The mode automatically returns to "AUX Config = No" when the printer
status is switched to Online.
*4: Only displayed, selectable, and executable when "AUX Config = Yes". The setting
value switches to the Online status and becomes valid when the network card
restarts. Therefore, when changing the setting value, if the "AUX status sheet" of the
test print menu is executed before recovering from the panel setting mode, the
previous setting value before the change will be printed.
*5: The actual valid value is displayed (but cannot be changed) when "Get IP Address =
Auto". When "Panel" or "PING" is changed to "Auto" in the IP address setting, the
printer stores the previous setting value, which had been set in the "Panel" or
"PING". The stored value will be displayed when returning to "Panel" or "PING".
*6: Can be displayed and settable when Rendezvous support Type-B is installed.

*4: If the A4/LT configuration is set to LT, the default should be 60. If the configuration
P5C menu*5
is set to A4, the default should be 64.
*5: Only displayed when the P5C ROM module is installed.
FontSource Resident, Download*1, ROM A*2
Font Number 0 to available (Max 65535)
PS3 menu
Pitch*3 0.44 to 10.00 to 99.99 cpi step 0.01cpi
Height*3 4.00 to 12.00 to 999.75 pt step 0.25 pt Setting Setting Values
IBM-US, Roman-8, Roman-9, Error Sheet Off, On
ECM94-1, 8859-2 ISO, 8859-9 ISO,
8859-10ISO, 8859-15ISO, PcBlt775, Coloration Color, Mono
IBM-DN, PcMultiling, PcE.Europe, Image Protect Off, On
PcTk437, PcEur858, Pc1004,
WiAnsi, WiE.Europe, WiTurkish, Binary Off, On
WiBALT, DeskTop, PsText,
VeInternati, VeUS, MsPublishin,
Math-8, PsMath, VeMath,
SymSet PiFont, Legal, UK,
ANSI ASCII, Swedis2, Italian,
Spanish, German, Norweg1,
French2, Windows, McText,
Hebrew7, 8859-8 ISO, Hebrew8,
Arabic8, OCR A, OCR B,
Pc866Cyr, Pc866Ukr, WinCyr,
ISOCyr, Pc8Grk, Pc851Grk,
WinGrk, ISOGrk, Greek8,
Pc862Heb, Pc864Ara, HPWARA
Form 5 to 60*4 to 64*4 to 128 Lines
CR Function CR, CR+LF
LF Function LF, CR+LF
Tray Assign 4, 4K, 5S
Note *1: Only displayed when there is download fonts exist.
*2: Only displayed when an optional font is inserted to the ROM socket.
*3: Either of them is displayed depending on the selected font type. "Pitch" is displayed
if a fixed pitch font is selected and if a proportional font is selected, "Height" is
displayed. Neither of them is displayed if a bitmap font is selected. There may be
rare occasions that both "Pitch" and "Height" appears at a time. (Changing the Font
Source or the Font Number when PCL5 is not running internally will lead to such
occasion.)

ESCP2 menu FX menu

Courier, Prestige, Roman, Sans serif, Roman T, Orator S, Courier, Prestige, Roman, Sans serif, Script, Orator S, OCR
Font Font
Sans H, Script, OCR A, OCR B A, OCR B
Pitch 10cpi, 12cpi, 15cpi, Prop. Pitch 10cpi, 12cpi, 15cpi, Prop.
Condensed Off, On Condensed Off, On
T.Margin 0.40 to 0.50 to 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch T.Margin 0.40 to 0.50 to 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch
Text 1 to 66 to available (Max: 132) Lines Text 1 to 66 to available (Max: 132) Lines
PcUSA, Italic, PcMultilin, PcPortugue, PcUSA, Italic, PcMultilin,
PcCanFrenc, PcNordic, PcTurkish2, PcIcelandic, PcPortugue, PcCanFrenc, PcNordic,
PcE.Europe, BpBRASCII, BpAbicomp, Roman-8, CGTable PcTurkish2, PcIcelandic, PcE.Europe,
PcEur858, ISO Latin1, 8859-15ISO, PcSl437, BpBRASCII, BpAbicomp, Roman-8,
PcTurkish1, 8859-9 ISO, Mazowia, CodeMJK, PcEur858, ISO Latin1, 8859-15ISO
CGTable PcGk437, PcGk851, PcGk869, 8859-7 ISO,
USA, France, Germany, UK, Denmark, Sweden, Italy, Spain1,
PcCy855, PcCy866, PcUkr866, PcLit771, Country
Japan, Norway, Denmark2, Spain2, LatinAmeric
Bulgarian, Hebrew7, Hebrew8, PcHe862,
PcAr864, Auto CR On, Off
PcAr864Ara, PcAr720, PcLit774, Estonia, Auto LF Off, On
ISO Latin2, PcLat866
Bit Image Dark, Light, Bar Code
USA, France, Germany, UK, Denmark, Sweden, Italy, Spain1,
Country Japan, Norway, Denmark2, Spain2, LatinAmeric, Korea, Zero Char 0, Ø
Legal
Auto CR On, Off
Auto LF Off, On
Bit Image Dark, Light, Bar Code
Zero Char 0, Ø

1239X menu Printer Adjust Menu*1
Setting Setting Values This menu should not be disclosed to users.
Font Courier, Prestige, Gothic, Orator, Script, Presentor, Sans serif

Pitch 10cpi, 12cpi, 15cpi, 17cpi, 20cpi, 24cpi, Prop.
Code Page 437, 850, 858, 860, 863, 865
T.Margin 0.30 to 0.40 to 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch
Text 1 to 67 to available (Max: 132) Lines
Auto CR Off, On
Auto LF Off, On
Alt. Graphics Off, On
Bit Image Dark, Light
ZeroChar 0, Ø
CharacterSet 1, 2
Support Menu*1
This menu should not be disclosed to users.

HDD Format*2
PS3 HDD Init*2
LCD Backlight*3 Auto, On, Off
Note *1: Only displayed when the Support Mode has been selected by a special operation at
power-on.
*2: Can be displayed and executable when the HDD is installed. The capacity of the area
that can be used for PS3 is 2GB.
*3: Cannot be set in EJL or MIB.

Setting Setting Values Maintenance Menu*1

Dev Cleaning*2 *3
Normal 0 to 1 step 1 Setting Setting Values
SemiThk 0 to 2 step 1 Engine Status Sheet*2 –
BTR Normal*2 -20 to 0 to 30 Step 1 Print Log Report*2 –
BTR Label*2 -20 to 0 to 30 Step 1 Reset C Dev Counter*2 –
BTR Thick*2 -20 to 0 to 30 Step 1 Reset M Dev Counter*2 –
BTR ExtraThk*2 -20 to 0 to 30 Step 1
Reset Y Dev Counter*2 –
BTR Transparency*2 -20 to 0 to 30 Step 1
Reset K Dev Counter*2 –
BTR Envelope*2 -20 to 0 to 30 Step 1
Reset TransferCounter*2 –
BTR SemiThk*2 -20 to 0 to 30 Step 1
Clear Error Log*2 –
BTR Coated*2 -20 to 0 to 30 Step 1
Temp Normal*2 -6 to 0 to 6 Step 1 Note *1: Displayed only when the Maintenance Mode has been selected by a special
operation at power-on. Always displayed in English regardless of the Lang setting of
Temp Label*2 -6 to 0 to 6 Step 1 the Setup menu
Temp Thick*2 -6 to 0 to 6 Step 1 *2: Exits the panel setting after the execution.
Temp ExtraThk*2 -6 to 0 to 6 Step 1
Temp Transparency*2 -6 to 0 to 6 Step 1
Temp Envelope*2 -6 to 0 to 6 Step 1
Temp SemiThk*2 -6 to 0 to 6 Step 1
Temp Coated*2 -6 to 0 to 6 Step 1
Transfer Mask*2 0 to 1 step 1
Cleaning Wait*2 0, 5, 10, 15 sec Step 5
Cleaning Cycle*2 -5 to 0 to 5 Step 1
Feed Offset -3.5 to 0.0 to 3.5 mm
Scan Offset -3.5 to 0.0 to 3.5 mm
Feed Offset2 -3.5 to 0.0 to 3.5 mm
Scan Offset2 -3.5 to 0.0 to 3.5 mm
Note *1: Displayed only when the Support Mode has been selected by a special operation at
power-on. Items within this menu are not localized. While activating this menu, do
not open/close the covers as that leads to an error. Also, print data should not be sent.
*2: Setup and execution in error status is invalid.
*3: Exits the panel setting after the execution.

USER SETTING ITEMS OTHER THAN IN THE SETTING MENU
The following is a list of user settings not included in the Setup menu.
Initialization by the Initialization menu of the Panel does not clear these items.
Item Setting Value Default Setting Method

32-byte character Short Product EJL,
Printer Name
string Name PrinterName command
32-byte character
MFG in the Device ID (Undefined) EJL
string
32-byte character
MDL in the Device ID (Undefined) EJL
string
32-byte character
DES in the Device ID (Undefined) EJL
string
32-byte character
CID in the Device ID (Undefined) EJL
string

1.16.3 Explanation of Menu and Settings Photocon/Transfer/Fuser

Life cycle of Photoconductor unit (Transfer unit/Fuser unit) is displayed in 7
The following are items specific to this printer.
increments. (Display only, especially for read-only.)
Information Menu E * * * * * * F : 100 % ≥ life of photoconductor unit ≥ 83%

E * * * * * F : 83 % ≥ life of photoconductor unit ≥ 66%
Color Regist Sheet
E * * * * F : 66 % ≥ life of photoconductor unit ≥ 50%
This executes Color Regist Sheet (press the Enter button) and prints the sheet for E * * * F : 50 % ≥ life of photoconductor unit ≥ 33%
adjusting registration of each color (C, M, Y, K). Set the value of this result where
E * * F : 33 % life of photoconductor unit ≥ 16%
each color is the darkest or, where black and each color are in a line to Yellow
E * F : 16 % ≥ life of photoconductor unit ≥ 0%
Regist, Magenta Regist, and Cyan Regist.
Setting value of each Yellow Regist, Magenta Regist, Cyan Regist returns to “0” E F : life of photoconductor unit = 0%
at the next printout after it is restored on controller.
Total Pages
(Refer to Ch5 “Color registration alignment” for details.)
Displays the number of sheets printed up to now (display only).
C, M, Y, K Toner
Color Pages
Indicates remaining amount of C (cyan), M (magenta), Y (yellow), K (black) in 7
increments. Displays the number of sheets printed in color up to now (display only).
(Display only, especially for read-only.) B/W Pages
E * * * * * * F : 100 % ≥ Remaining Toner ≥ 83% Displays the number of sheets printed in monochrome up to now (display only).
E * * * * * F : 83 % ≥ Remaining Toner ≥ 66%
E * * * * F : 66 % ≥ Remaining Toner ≥ 50%
E * * * F : 50 % ≥ Remaining Toner ≥ 33%
E * * F : 33 % Remaining Toner ≥ 16%
E * F : 16 % ≥ Remaining Toner ≥ 0%
E F : Remaining Toner = 0%

Tray Menu Table 1-45. Paper Type Display and Command Specification of Driver
Command
MP Type, LC1 Type, LC2 Type, LC3 Type, LC4 Type
PaperType
PapaerTray EJL EJL
This menu specifies the type of paper loaded in the MP Tray, LC1, 2, 3, 4 display of driver PAPERTHICKNE <GS>n1ptE
cassettes. PAPERFACE
SS
Unspecified – NORMAL – N1: 0 Unspecified
Paper Type
Contents of Setting Engine Control Applicable Tray Plain Auto only NORMAL – N1: 1 Plain
Setting Value
Plain Plain Paper (copy paper etc.) Plain paper MP, LC1, LC2, LC3, LC4 Letterhead Auto only NORMAL – N1: 3 Letterhead
SemiThk EPSON Color Laser Paper Plain paper MP, LC1, LC2, LC3, LC4 Recycled Auto only NORMAL – N1: 6 Recycled
Letterhead Letter form Plain paper MP, LC1, LC2, LC3, LC4 Color Auto only NORMAL – N1: 7 Color
Recycled Recycled paper Plain paper MP, LC1, LC2, LC3, LC4 Transparency MP only TRANSPARENCY – N1: 8 OHP
Color Color paper Plain paper MP, LC1, LC2, LC3, LC4 Labels MP only THICK – N1: 9 Labels
Transparency OHP transparency OHP (half-speed) MP Semi-Thick – HIGHQUALITY – N1: 10 HighQuality
Label paper Thick – THICK – N1: 0 Unspecified
Labels Label paper MP
(half-speed) Extra Thick MP only EXTRATHICK FRONT N1: 0 Unspecified
Extra Thick
MP only EXTRATHICK BACK N1: 0 Unspecified
(Back)
Paper Size Paper Type Paper Source Engine Control Coated – COATED – N1: 0 Unspecified
Envelopes --- MP tray For Envelopes

Follows MP
Normal
HLT, GLT, type setting
MP tray
F4, CTM Follows paper
Other than Normal
type setting
Auto; selects the paper source that
matches the specified paper size
from the paper sources where the Follows paper
paper type specified by the mode type setting
A4, LC1, Normal matches the setting value for each
LC2, LC3, tray as shown in the above table.
LC4
MP, LC1, LC2, LC3, LC4; selects Follows paper
the specified paper source type setting
ExtraThk, Follows paper
MP tray
Transparency type setting

Setup Menu Reset Menu
Paper Source SelecType Init

Selects the paper source when Paper Type = Normal. This function returns the panel setting values to the factory default.
Auto: Feeds paper from the paper source that loads paper of the specified However, the following panel setting values are not initialized.
paper type and paper size.
Setting values of Yellow Regist, Magenta Regist, and Cyan Regist
MP: Feeds paper from the MP Tray.
LC1: Feeds paper from the LC1.
PS3 Menu
LC4: Feeds paper from LC4.
When Page Size is set to envelopes (IB5, DL), HTL, GLT and F4, Paper Source Binary
always selects the MP Tray. Specifies the data format. Applies to received data from internal, AUX, and USB
When Paper Type = Thick, ExtraThk, Transparency, Paper Source is always set to interface.
the MP Tray.
On: Binary data
Paper Type Off: ASCII data
This sets the printing speed and color matching (CM). Note : The settings should be as follows to use Binary data.
Refer to “1.24 Paper Handling Algorithm” (p79).
: Error Sheet = Off
Page Side : Job Management = Off
Front: For printing on the front side of ExtraThk paper.
: Not add Ctrl-D (04h) at the end of a job
Back: For printing on the back side of ExtraThk paper.
Color Regist Menu
Cyan/Magenta/Yellow Regist
This menu is provided to manually adjust the laser scanning position of each color
in relation to the position of Black in 1/4-dot unit of 600 dpi. The adjustment is
made when primarily locating the main unit and when moving it. Additionally the
adjustment is performed if required.
The value can be set from -36 to 36 in 1/unit.
The setting becomes valid after pressing the [ ] button.

Printer Adjust Menu BTR Transparency

Sets Transfer Current to be used when printing with PaperType=Transparency.
This setting menu is displayed and selectable only in the Support mode which is Same as normal
activated by a special operation at power-on. After the powers is turned off and then
back on again, the Printer Adjust menu is removed from the menu. This setting is valid
BTR Envelope
after power-on or a warm boot. If the setting is changed from its default value, the color Sets Transfer Current to be used when printing with envelop size paper.
is no longer guaranteed, but this is used during printing of special paper. Same as normal
Always use the normal mode (not Support mode), and make sure there is no engine-
BTR SemiThk
related service call error. Then, enter the Support mode and perform the task.
Sets Transfer Current to be used when printing with PaperType=SemiThk.
Dev Cleaning This setting applies to both sides of paper that are selectable at “Printer Adjust
When each toner; C/ M/ Y are mixed, removes the debased toner to transfer unit Menu”- “SemiThk”.
from developer and supply fresh toner in developer. Same as normal
The cleaning cycle is performed in the order of C, M, and Y, and it takes about 135
BTR Coated
seconds.
Sets Transfer Current to be used when printing with PaperType=Coated.
Normal Same as normal
Set the paper type to inform for engine when printing with PaperType=Normal.
Temp Normal
0: Type thin paper for domestic 1: Type thick paper for overseas
Sets Fuser Temperature to be used when printing with PaperType=Nomal.
Label Setting value applies for all Normal-L front/back and Normal-H front/back.
Set the paper type to inform for engine when printing with PaperType=Label. Can be set in -6 to 6 by 1 Step. The electricity value changes 1°C by a Step
0: Type thin paper for domestic 1: Type thick paper for overseas Lowest fixation is -6
Highest fixation is 6
BTR Normal
Paper curls when the fixation is too high
Sets Transfer Current when printing with PaperType=Normal.
This setting applies to both sides of paper that are selectable at “Printer Adjust
Temp Label
Menu”- “Normal”. Sets Fuser Temperature to be used when printing with PaperType=Label.
Can be set in -20 to 30 by 1Step. The electricity value changes 5% by a Step. Same as normal
The lightest printing result is -20, and darkest printing result is 30.
Temp Thick
BTR Label Sets Fuser Temperature to be used when printing with PaperType=Thick.
Sets Transfer Current to be used when printing with PaperType=Label. Same as normal
Same as normal
Temp ExtraThk
BTR Thick Sets Fuser Temperature to be used when printing with PaperType=ExtraThk.
Sets Transfer Current to be used when printing with PaperType=Thick. Same as normal
Same as normal
Temp Transparency
BTR ExtraThk Sets Fuser Temperature to be used when printing with PaperType=Transparency.
Sets Transfer Current to be used when printing with PaperType=ExtraThk. Same as normal
Same as normal

Temp Envelope
Setting Value α Cleaning Cycle
Sets Fuser Temperature to be used when printing with envelop size paper. 0 48-sheets
Same as normal
-1 43-sheets
Temp SemiThk -2 38-sheets
Sets Fuser Temperature to be used when printing with PaperType=SemiThk. -3 33-sheets
This setting applies to both sides of paper that are selectable at “Printer Adjust
-4 28-sheets
Menu”- “SemiThk”.
Same as normal -5 24-sheets
Temp Coated
Sets Fuser Temperature to be used when printing with PaperType=Coated.
Same as normal
Transfer Mask
Masks the Transfer Current applied for the leading edge of paper to prevent the
paper from wrapping around the Photoconductor.
0: Do not mask 1: Mask
Cleaning Wait
Sets a time interval in seconds to run a cleaning cycle between pages when
performing a continuous printing. The printer waits for the next page data for the
set time period with its motors ON. If the next page data is not ready for printing
within the time period, the printer runs a cleaning cycle.
During wait time, it consumes life of consumables.
Normally, default (10 seconds) is enough.
Changing the time may be required, with slow host environment and heavy job in
usual.
Saving life of consumables is possible by selecting an appropriate wait time to
reduce total operating time.
Cleaning Cycle
Sets the variable α which determines the time interval of the cleaning cycles.
(5: +50%, ..., 0: 0%, ..., -5=-50%)
Cleaning Cycle = specified value x (10+α) /10
Specified value of cleaning cycle mutates by total print pages of the
photoconductor unit as well as temperature and humidity.
Ex.) When the total printed pages of the photoconductor unit is below 5120 sheets,
at normal temperature and humidity.

Maintenance Menu
This setting menu is displayed and can be selected only when the Maintenance Mode
has been activated by special operation when the power is turned on. To return the
printer to normal mode, turn the printer off and back on in a normal manner. Basically,
this menu is intended to be used by service personnel. If cover A or B remains open
when the Maintenance Mode is entered, engine-related errors (including Calibrating
Printer) do not occur.
Engine Status Sheet
Pressing the [ ] button starts printing the Engine Status Sheet. (See 9.2
Engine Status Sheet for details). If data remains in the mode, paper is output. Be
sure to switch to the Maintenance Mode after confirming that there are no engine
related service call in the normal mode (a mode that is not the Maintenance Mode),
then execute. The sheet is printed with the current setting values of RITech, Toner
Save and Resolution applied, while the factory default settings are used to the
other settings. Even after printing, the User Default environment (setting) does not
change. The LCD display blinks during printing. The Engine Status Sheet is
always printed as Lang = English regardless of the Lang setting of the Setup
Menu.
Print Log Report
Starts printing the print log sheet when the [ ] button is pressed. Other items
are the same as the Engine Status Sheet.
Reset C/M/Y/K Dev Counter
Resets the life counter of the developer unit of each color, and adds one to the
number of the replacement. This operation should be performed by service
personnel when the developer unit of each color is replaced.
Reset TransferCounter
Resets the life counter of the transfer unit, and adds one to the number of the
replacement. This operation is not required when replacing the transfer unit after
“Worn Transfer Unit” (warning) or “Replace Transfer Unit” (error) occurred.
Perform this operation when replacing the transfer unit under the conditions not
mentioned above. (The condition where neither warning nor error is occurred.)
Clear Error Log
Clears the Error Log List that is stored to be printed on the Engine Status Sheet.

1.16.4 Special Operations

LIST OF OPERATING FUNCTIONS
The following is a list of the special operating functions supported by this printer.
Do not make these functions (except Hex dump and support mode value initialization)
available to users.
Table 1-46. List of Operating Functions

Function Operating procedure
Hex Dump Turn the power on pressing the [Start/Stop] button
Support Mode Turn the power on pressing the [ ] button
Turn the power on pressing the [ ], [Cancel Job], and [Start/
Initialization of EEPROM
Stop] buttons
Panel Setting Value
Turn the power on pressing the [Cancel Job] button
Initialization
Forced Clear of the Flash Turn the power on pressing the [ ], [ ], [ ], and
ROM A Module [Cancel Job] buttons
Turn the power on pressing the [ ], [Cancel Job], and [Start/
Program ROM Update
Stop] buttons
Turn the power on pressing the [Start/Stop], [Cancel Job], and
ROM Module Copy
[ ] buttons
Turn the power on pressing the [ ], [ ], [ ], and
Maintenance Mode
[ ] buttons
Turn the power on pressing the [Start/Stop], [Cancel Job],
Engine Program Update
[ ], and [ ] buttons
Turn the power on pressing the [Start/Stop], [ ], [ ], and
RAM Check (all area)
[ ] buttons
CPU reset in a Service Call Press the [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [Cancel Job]
occurrence buttons when a Service Call error occurs
Detailed Information Display Press the [ ], [ ], and [Cancel Job] buttons when a
in a Service Call occurrence Service Call occurs
Ignore EpsonNet ASP in Turn the power on pressing the [ ], [ ], and [Cancel
HDD Job] buttons
Press the [ ] button after resetting the CPU when a
Printing of the Error Sheet
Service Call error occurs

1.17 Printer Status Table 1-47. List of Printer Messages

Error LED
Display Sort Status Code Help
status
1.17.1 List of Printer Messages Install uuuu TnrCart Error On 4235 {
The following is a list of messages displayed by the printer. Install Photoconductor Error On 4235 {
Each message is the one when “Lang = English” is set. Install Fuser Error On 4235 {
Table 1-47. List of Printer Messages Install Transfer Unit Error On 4235 {
Error LED Clean Sensor Error On 4228 {

Display Sort Status Code Help
status Wrong Photoconductor Error On 4237 –
(Display at power-on) Status – – – Replace Toner uuuu Error On 4236 {
Service call On (All LEDs Replace Photoconductor Error On 4236 {
Service Req Cffff 6000 –
error simultaneously)
Replace Transfer Unit Error On 4236 {
Service call On (All LEDs
Service Req Exxx 6001~6999 – Printer Open Error On 4239 –
error*1 simultaneously)
Install LC1 Error On 4007 –
Formatting HDD Error – –
Optional RAM Error Status On –
ROM CHECK Status – –
Manual Feed sss *3 Error Flashing 2 1013 –
RAM CHECK Status – –
Can't Print Duplex Error Flashing 1 3005 {
HDD CHECK Status – –
Paper Out ttt *2 sss *4 Error On 4010 –
Unable Clear Error Status On –
Paper Set ttt *2 sss *4 Error Flashing 1 3003 {
Self Test Status – –
Print Overrun Error Flashing 1 3000 –
Reset All Status All flashing 1004 –
Mem Overflow Error Flashing 1 3001 {
Reset Status – 1004 –
Duplex Mem Overflow Error Flashing 1 3004 {
Cancel All Print Job Status – 1003 –
Invalid Data Error Flashing 1 3007 –
Cancel Print Job Status – 1003 –
Invalid HDD Error On 4202 –
Reset to Save Error – – –
Invalid N/W Module Error On 4240 –
LC3 Error 001 Error On 40001 –
Invalid PS3 Error On 4201 –
Check Transparency Error On 4021 {
Invalid P5C Error On 4256 –
Paper Jam x x x x Error On 4234 {
Invalid AUX I/F Card Error On 4014 –
Face-down Full Error Flashing 2 4090 –
Invalid ROM A Error On 4003 –
Wrong Toner uuuu Error On 4237 –
Write Error ROM A Error On 4006 –
NonGenuineToner uuuu Error Flashing 2 4241 to 4255 {
Write Error ROM P Error – 4006 –
TonerCart Error uuuu Error On 4238 –
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printer Status 60

Table 1-47. List of Printer Messages Table 1-47. List of Printer Messages
Error LED Error LED
Display Sort Status Code Help Display Sort Status Code Help
status status
Writing ROM A nnn/mmm *6 Status – 1005 – (Printing) Status – 1009 –
Writing ROM P nnn/mmm *6 Status – 1005 – (Communication with inactive I/F) Status – 1012 –
Menus Locked Warning – – (Job being executed (printing OK)) Status – 1002 –
(Panel setting display) –
The above list are described in the order of descending priorities (the top item is the
Reserve JobCanceled Warning – 2565 – highest on the list of priorities).
Hard Disk full Warning – 2569 –
Note *1: See “1.17.3 Warning Messages and Troubleshooting” (p63) for details.
Form Data Canceled Warning – 2570 –
*2: Displays relevant values of the paper source in the panel settings except Auto.
PS3 Hard Disk full Warning – 2561 – *3: Displays relevant values of the paper size in the panel settings.
Can't Print Warning – 2072 { *4: Displays relevant values of each paper feed size of the Tray menu in the panel
Collate Disabled Warning – 2013 { settings.
Check Paper Size Warning – 2004 { *5: Bit allocations for warning status of consumables are as follows:
Image Optimum Warning – 2002 {
bit application
Check Paper Type Warning – 2008 {
0 Worn Photoconductor
Need Memory Warning – 2003 {
3 Worn Fuser
Format Error ROM A Warning – 2000 –
4 Worn Transfer Unit
Form Feed Status – 1008 –
6 K Toner Low
(When status sheet is being
1010 – 7 C Toner Low
printed)
Warming Up Status – 1006 – 8 M Toner Low
Calibrating Printer Status – 1014 – 9 Y Toner Low
Offline Status – 1001 { 10 Worn K Dev Unit
Cancel Print Job (by host) Status – 1003 – 11 Worn C Dev Unit
uuuu Toner Low Warning – 2571 { 12 Worn M Dev Unit
Worn Photoconductor Warning – 2571 { 13 Worn Y Dev Unit
Worn Fuser Warning – 2571 { 14 NonGenuine Toner
Worn Transfer Unit Warning – 2571 { *6: nnn = the number of written blocks,
Worn uuuu Dev Unit Warning – 2571 { mmm = total number of blocks
Sleep Status – 1007 –
NonGenuine Toner Warning – 2571 {
Ready Status – 1000 –

1.17.2 Status Messages and Troubleshooting

The following is the item specific to this printer.
Calibrating Printer
Explanation
This message is one of the Ready messages and indicates that the engine
adjustment is in progress.
At power-on
When adjusting Print Quality
Remedy
Wait for approximately ten seconds to three minutes until the printer recovers
automatically. Do not open/close the cover or turn the power off during this time.

1.17.3 Warning Messages and Troubleshooting Worn Fuser

The following are items specific to this printer. Explanation
The fuser unit comes to the end of life. The print quality is not guaranteed from
uuuu Toner Low this time.
Explanation Remedy
The remaining amount of each toner (C, M, Y, or K) is low. The remaining This warning message is canceled by performing any of the followings:
amount is calculated based on the remaining toner sensor of the engine, and
displays the message when the amount is 20 % or less. The uuuu display, which Execute Clear All Warning in the Reset menu.
corresponds to the C, M, Y, and K toner cartridges, indicates the cartridge with Execute Reset in the Reset menu.
low toner.
Replace the Fuser with a new one.
Remedy
This warning message is canceled by performing any of the followings: C A U T IO N Replace the fuser unit immediately.
Execute Clear All Warning in the Reset menu.
Execute Reset in the Reset menu.
C A U T IO N Never replace the toner cartridge until uuuu Toner Out occurs,
otherwise the remaining toner may spill out.
Worn Photoconductor
Explanation
The photoconductor unit comes to the end of life. The print quality is not
guaranteed from this time.
Remedy
Printing can be continued until the “Replace Photoconductor” error appears,
however, the print quality is not guaranteed from this time. This warning message
is canceled by performing any of the followings:
Replace the Photoconductor unit with a new one.

Worn Transfer Unit NonGenuine Toner
Explanation Explanation
The transfer unit comes to the end of life. A non-genuine toner cartridge is installed. Printing can be continued.
The print quality is not guaranteed from this time.
Remedy
C A U T IO N Be aware that performing borderless printing (printing of image This warning message is canceled by performing any of the followings:
data that exceeds the specified paper size) shortens the life of the
Install genuine toner cartridge.
transfer unit.
Reason: The amount of waste toner increases. Execute Clear All Warning in the Reset menu.
Remedy
Note : If the cartridge is not replaced with genuine toner cartridge, same warning appears on
This warning message is canceled by performing any of the followings: the panel when the printer is restarted.
Replace the transfer unit with a new one.
Worn uuuu Dev Unit
Explanation
The developer unit (DEVE ASSY) comes to the end of life. The print quality is not
guaranteed from this time.
Remedy
This warning message is canceled by performing any of the followings:
Replace the developer unit with a new one and execute Reset Dev Counter in
the Maintenance menu.

1.17.4 Error Messages and Troubleshooting Remedy
The following are items specific to this printer. Paper Jam xxxx Remedy
Paper Jam A B Open both cover A and B to remove the jammed paper (Fuser Jam).
Check Transparency Open cover A to remove the jammed paper (Reg Jam). As necessary,
Paper Jam A open cover D and remove the Photoconductor unit to remove the
Explanation
jammed paper.
A paper jam has occurred in registration because media other than transparency Open both cassette C and cover A to remove the jammed paper (Feed
was fed when transparency is specified, or transparency was fed when other than Paper Jam C A
jam).
that is specified.
Paper Jam B Open cover B to remove the jammed paper (Duplex jam).
Remedy Open both cassette C and cover A to remove the jammed paper (Feed
Remove both the media already loaded in the MP tray and the media that is Paper Jam C A B jam). Perform remedy for Fuser jam and Duplex jam if those paper
jammed inside the printer from the MP tray side. Open and close cover A. Load jams are occurred at the same time.
the correct media to start printing again from where the jam occurred.
Install uuuu TnrCart

Paper Jam xxxx
Explanation
Explanation One or more toner cartridges are not installed. The uuuu display, which
A paper jam has occurred. corresponds to the C, M, Y, and K toner cartridges, indicates the cartridge that is
not installed. This error also occurs when the new toner cartridge(s) is installed
Engine Status Paper Jam with the tape attached to it.
Status bit
Fuser Jam Reg Jam Feed Jam Duplex Jam xxxx
Remedy
X (A B) – – – AB 1, 2
Open the top cover to install the specified toner cartridge. Remove the toner
– X (A) – – A 1 cartridge if the tape is attached to it, reinstall the cartridge, and remove the tape.
– – X (A C) – CA 1, 3
– – – X (B) B 4234 2
– X (A) – X (B) AB 1, 2
Face-down Full
X (A B) – X (A C) – CAB 1, 2, 3
– – X (A C) X (B) CAB 1, 2, 3 Explanation
Note • X: Paper jam has occurred. When the face-down tray is detected as full, the printer stops printing. The paper
that was being output when the error occurred is ejected to the tray.
• –: Paper jam not occurred.
• Paper jam can occur at two places at a time as described above. Remedy
• Preferential order of the display Remove papers on the face-down tray and press the [Start/Stop] button to resume
C→A→B printing.
• Status code
A: bit1, B: bit2, C: bti3

Install Photoconductor Clean Sensor
The photoconductor unit is not installed or not set correctly. The sensor window for calibrating the engine is contaminated.
Remedy Remedy
Open cover A and then cover D to install the photoconductor unit. Closing those Open cover A, remove the transfer unit, and clean off the white plastic window
covers will automatically releases the error. attached to the backside. Closing cover A after reinstalling the transfer unit will
automatically release the error. Refer to Chapter 6 “Maintenance-Cleaning” for
details.
Install Fuser
Explanation Wrong Photoconductor

The fuser unit is not installed, not set correctly, or broken down.
If “Install Fuser” and “Service Req E101” occur at a time, only the “Install Fuser”
Explanation
error is displayed on the panel. Improper photoconductor unit is installed.
Remedy Remedy
Turn the power off and let stand at least 30 minutes. Open cover B, install the fuser Open both cover A and cover D to install the appropriate photoconductor unit.
unit correctly, and close cover B. The error should be cleared after power has been Closing cover A and cover D will automatically release the error.
restored to the printer. If the error remains displayed on the panel, replace the fuser
unit as it is malfunctioning or the unit may be the one for another models.
Replace Toner uuuu
Install Transfer Unit Explanation

Printing is stopped as the remaining amount of toner is detected as low based on
Explanation the toner-end sensor of each color of the engine and the dispense time of the toner.
The Transfer unit is not installed. As printing in the Toner End status does not provide proper color reproductivity,
this error is not released by pressing the Start/Stop button. The uuuu display,
Remedy
which corresponds to the C, M, Y, and K toner cartridges, indicates the cartridge
Open cover A and install the transfer unit. Closing cover A will automatically with low toner.
release the error.
Remedy
Replace the toner cartridge(s).

Replace Photoconductor Wrong Toner uuuu (uuuu = C, M, Y, or K)
The photoconductor unit has reached its end of life. The destination for one of the toner cartridges is set incorrectly.
Printing must be stopped in order not to damage the engine.
Remedy
Remedy Reinstall the appropriate toner cartridges.
Open cover A and then cover D to install new photoconductor unit. Closing those
covers will automatically releases the error.
NonGenuine Toner uuuu (uuuu = C, M, Y, or K)
Explanation
Replace Transfer Unit
A non-genuine toner cartridge is installed.
Explanation
Remedy
The transfer unit comes to the end of life.
Reinstalling the genuine toner cartridge or pressing Start/Stop button will release
Remedy the error. If the error is released by the latter operation, the warning "Non Genuine
Open cover A and replace the transfer unit with a new one. Closing cover A will Toner" will remain displayed.
automatically releases the error.
TonerCart Error uuuu (uuuu = C, M, Y, or K)

Printer Open Explanation
Explanation One or more of the toner cartridges (C, M, Y, or K) is malfunctioning.
Either cover A or cover B is open. Remedy
Remedy Reinstall the toner cartridge or replace the toner cartridge with a new one to
release the error. Turn off the printer and then back on again if the error is not
Closing those covers will automatically releases the error.
cleared.
INSTALL LC1, INSTALL LC2, INSTALL LC3 LC3 Error 001

Printing from LC2, LC3, or LC4 cannot be performed because LC1, LC2, or LC3 Several numbers of the optional 550-Sheet Paper Cassette Unit is detected.
is not installed correctly.
Remedy
Remedy
Turn the printer power off, and remove the second optional 550-Sheet Paper
Installing the cassette firmly will release the error. Cassette Unit.

1.17.5 Service Call Error Messages Table 1-48. List of Service Call Errors
Error
This section shows the service call error message of this printer. (For details, refer to Error Code Explanation
Category
Chapter3 “TROUBLESHOOTING”.)
C0017 CPU error (undefined interruption)
C0081 CPU error (TLB modification exception)
SERVICE CALL ERRORS
C0082 CPU error (TLB miss exception [Load/Fetch])
Table 1-48. List of Service Call Errors C0083 CPU error (TLB miss exception [Store])
Error C0084 CPU error (address error exception [Load/Fetch])
Error Code Explanation
Category C0085 CPU error (address error exception [Store])
E100 ROS Failure C0086 CPU error (bus error exception [Fetch])
E101 Fuser Error C0087 CPU error (bus error exception [Load/Store])
E102 NV-RAM Error C0088 CPU error (SYSCALL exception)
E103 CTD Sensor Error C0089 CPU error (Break exception)
E104 Fan Motor Error C0090 CPU error (reserving command exception)
E105 Motor Failure C0091 CPU error (unused coprocessor exception)
E106 Firmware Error C0092 CPU error (FPU exception)
E107 Environment sensor Error C0093 CPU error (TLB exception)
E201 ___Y Development Unit Life Over 2 C0094 CPU error (XTLB exception)
Controller-
E202 __M_ Development Unit Life Over 2 C0095 CPU error (cache exception)
related
E203 __MY Development Unit Life Over 2 C0096 CPU error (Trap exception)
E204 _C__ Development Unit Life Over 2 C0097 CPU error (FPU exception)
Engine-related
E205 _C_Y Development Unit Life Over 2 C0098 CPU error (watch exception)
E206 _CM_ Development Unit Life Over 2 C0128 to C0254 CPU error (undefined trap)
E207 _CMY Development Unit Life Over 2 C0255 CPU error (NMI exception)
E208 K___ Development Unit Life Over 2 C0256 CPU error (divide by 0)
E209 K__Y Development Unit Life Over 2 C0257 CPU error (arithmetic overflow)
E210 K_M_ Development Unit Life Over 2 C0258 CPU error (break occurrence)
E211 K_MY Development Unit Life Over 2 C0800 IPL error (controller defect)
E212 KC__ Development Unit Life Over 2 C0998 Engine communication error (only at power-on)
E213 KC_Y Development Unit Life Over 2 C0999 Engine flash ROM has no program data
E214 KCM_ Development Unit Life Over 2 C1002 Standard RAM error (standard size is undefined, etc.)
E215 KCMY Development Unit Life Over 2 C1010 Verification error
E998 Engine communication error C1020 RAM error (slot 0)
C1021 RAM error (slot 1)

Table 1-48. List of Service Call Errors

Error
Error Code Explanation
Category
C1120 ROM checksum error (bit 0 to 7) (program)
C1200 EEPROM writing error
C1210 EEPROM writing times limit
C1400 Engine initialization error
C1500 CCNV hardware error
Controller-
related C1550 Initialization hardware error for SRAM for compression
Video series hardware error (including PWM IC
C1600
calibration error)
C1610 Video series hardware error (VCNV error)
C1700 Loopback test failure of the Network Board
C1702 Network Board is not installed
C1800 Illegal SPD
C1999 Other hardware errors
C2000 Software error

1.18 Expanding the RAM

When the memory is insufficient, the printer displays the following error messages.
Mem Overflow
Image Optimum
Need Memory
Duplex Mem Overflow
The following methods can be used to clear the errors.
Set the resolution to 300 dpi.
Reduce receive buffer size.
Set unused interfaces to “Not Use”.
C H E C K To ensure a stable operation, add more memory.

P O IN T
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Expanding the RAM 70

1.19 Handling Precautions

Precautions When Turning Off the Power
This printer includes internal, nonvolatile memory (EEPROM), which stores
setting values important to operate the printer normally. If the power is cut off
during writing to the nonvolatile memory, the panel settings return to its default, or
a Service Call error may occur when turning the power back on. In addition, HDD
can be connected to this printer. If the power is cut off during writing to the HDD,
HDD error may occur as the values written to the HDD is not guaranteed.
The printer is executing the writing when it is in the following conditions, so never
turn the power off at those timings.
From the time the power is turned on until the Ready LED lights up steadily
When the Ready LED is flashing
When the printer is printing (while the paper feed motor is operating)
To stop printing, perform either Offline or Cancel job.
When the Data LED is on or flashing
Precautions for High Temperature Parts

Since the fuser unit inside the printer becomes very hot, be sure not to touch it
when opening the cover to remove jammed paper or for any other purposes.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Handling Precautions 71

1.20 Status Sheet Name Remaining Amount Part Numbers

Transfer Unit E******F 3022
An example of the printout of the Status Sheet is shown in the Figure 1-10 (p.75).
Fuser Unit 120(110-120V)/220(220-240V) E******F 3020/3021
The printout example is in the case where English is selected.
z
C H E C K The language in which the Status Sheet is printed changes

P O IN T depending on the selected language.
(The sheet is printed in English in 2-byte linguistic area in Asia.)
Prints printed date only when time set is synchronized.

MMMM: Month
DD: Day
YYYY: Year
HH: Hour
MM: Minutes
Network Menu
The IP, SM, and GW addresses are printed only when GetIPAddress=Panel, but
not when the value is Auto. If the setting value is changed, the IP address is printed
in the next startup. (The IP address in operation is printed on the Network Status
Sheet.) NetWare, AppleTalk, MS Network, Rendezvous, and Link Speed are
printed.
Information
Describes Name (English only, 36-digit), Remaining Amount (10-digit), Warning
(20-digit), and Model Number (30-digit) of consumables that can be replaced by
the user.
"Needed soon" is added when the amount reaches the level where a warning
occurs.
Name Remaining Amount Part Numbers

Toner Cartridge Cyan E******F 0244
Toner Cartridge Magenta E******F 0243
Toner Cartridge Yellow E******F 0242
Toner Cartridge Black E******F 0245
Photoconductor Unit E******F 1109
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Status Sheet 72

When options installed

The Status Sheet shows the descriptions below:
1. RAM DIMM: Memory size is added to Installed Memory and Available Memory.
2. Type-B I/F: AUX is added to Installed Interface.
3. Lower Cassette: Lower Cassette 2/3 is added to Other Options.
4. HDD: Hard Disk xGB is added to Other Options. Displayed up to one
decimal place.
5. P5C: PC5 is added to Installed Emulation.
Adds 5-digit Version separately by spaces in Firmware Revision.
In the order as Installed Emulation.
Time to Sleep
Sleep Mode = prints only by Enable
Sleep Mode = dose not print by Disable.

THE LOWEST DESCRIPTION SECTION OF THE STATUS SHEET
Description Explanation
IAddyme Date of the firmware
"*" appears when DIMM can be written
*
"space" appears when DIMM cannot be written
Color Look Up Table version
Axxxx "@xxxx" appears when the optional ROM CMTD is installed
in expansion slot
Engine controller version which is 10 digits number starts with
MC
(ex: Engine controller Ver.1.23.45, NVM Ver.0.67.89;
MC1234506789)
MC3012030100
MCxxxxxxxxxx
Last five digits : NVM Version

(Ver. 3.0.10.0)
First five digits : MCU Version
(Ver. 3.0.12.0)
USB serial number (Reference: See “ USB interface
36PxxxxxxxxxxYMMDD
specifications” (p38))
Latest USB connection Mode
• H: HS
H
• F: FS
• Space: no connection
Latest USB connection Mode
D • D: connected D4 supported device
• Space: D4 non supported device
Type-B level
3 • 3: Type-B L3
• Space: other than L3
e When "e" = ECP, when "n" = Nibble, when " " = Compatibility

Description Explanation
6-digit number that starts with JC indicates the number of
JCxxxxxx
paper jam occurred before.
12-digit number that starts with IC indicates the number of the
replacement of the toner cartridge; cccmmmyyykkk and 12-
ICcccmmmyyykkk digit number indicates the number of the recovery from the
CCCMMMYYYKKK NonGenuine error.
Those values are separated with a space.
3-digit number for each color (000-255)
COLOR CALIBRATION DESCRIPTION
NOTE: This function is implemented in the service utility.
This indicates G: Increase Gradation, D: Increase Definition, 1200: 1200dpi, 600: 600
dpi, and also means 600 dpi, and calibration data for Increase Gradation depending on
combination, and is displayed only when calibration data are registered in the
EEPROM.
This indicates YYYY: Year, DD: Day, MMMM: Month, HH: Hour, and MM: Minute
of the date and time when the calibration table is created.
Figure 1-10. Status Sheet

1.21 Engine Status Sheet/Print Log Report

C A U T IO N Do not disclose this information to users.
It can be output from the Maintenance Menu. For details, refer to Chapter6
“MAINTENANCE” for the Engine Status Sheet/Print Log Report.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Engine Status Sheet/Print Log Report 76

1.22 Color Registration Sheet

This sheet is for checking the amount of differences between Black and Yellow/
Magenta/Cyan in the laser scanning direction (vertical direction and paper feed
direction). Differential amount of each color with Black is quantitatively measured
according to overlap ratio of the cyclic Black pattern and the cyclic Yellow/Magenta/
Cyan pattern where the cycle is different from that of Black.
Feeding direction
Figure 1-11. Color Registration Sheet
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Color Registration Sheet 77

1.23 Form Overlay List

The following shows the sample of Form Overlay List. The color information (color or
monochrome) of Form that is registered in the last row will be added to all the models
that follows the AcuLaser C4200.
EPSON AL-C4200
Name Comment Date Mode

Form1 A4 Portrait 600dpi Nov 07 Color
Form2 A4 Lanscape 300dpi Nov 31 Mono
Form3 A4 Portrait Test Dec 31 Color
Figure 1-12. Form Overlay List
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Form Overlay List 78

1.24 Paper Handling Algorithm

The relationship between paper type and size is shown below
ENGINE CONTROL, CM
Table 1-49. Engine control, CM

EJL Paper Paper Type Engine Control
Page Size PaperType MP or LC1-4 Type*2 CM
PAPER FACE Source (set by driver) (Video Media TypeType, Gloss*3)
Envelope*1 — — — — — Envelope (06h, H) Plain Paper
Plain
Letterhead Plain Paper L (00h, N)
Refer to P80, “CM 1”
Recycled Plain Paper H (01h, N)
Specified Color
Auto Transparency Transparency (PPM Dpwn) (0Fh, S) Refer to P80, “CM 1”
Normal — Labels Label H (0Ah, S) Refer to P80, “CM 1”
Plain Paper L (00h, N)
Not specified — Refer to P80, “CM 2”
Plain Paper H (01h, N)
Other than Plain Paper L (00h, N)
Other than Auto — — Refer to P80, “CM 2”
Envelope Plain Paper H (01h, N)
Plain Paper L (00h, H)
SemiThk — — — SemiThk Plain Paper L (01h, S) Plain Paper
Plain Paper H (PPM Down) (0Eh, S)
Labels — Label H (0Ah, S) Plain Paper
Thick — —
Other than labels — Heavier Paper-L (04h, H) Plain Paper
FRONT
ExtraThk — — — Heavier Paper-H (05h, S) Plain Paper
BACK
Transparency — — — — Transparency(PPM Down) (0Fh, S) OHP
Note : For details on print speed, refer to “1.2.2 Printer Basic Specifications” (p9).
Note *1: DL, IB5
*2: Type of paper set by the panel for the paper source where paper is actually fed
*3: N=Normal Gloss,
H=High Gloss,
S=Super High Gloss
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Paper Handling Algorithm 79

Table 1-50. CM 1 PAPER SOURCE

CM Media Type MP or LC1-4 Type*1 CM
Table 1-52. Paper Source
Plain
Letterhead Page Size Paper Type Paper Feeder
Recycled Plain paper Envelope*1, CTM — MP Tray
Off
Color ExtraThk
— MP Tray
Labels Transparency
Transparency OHP Note *1: In cases not described in the table, the paper source is determined by Paper Source,
Option 1 — Option 1 paper type specified by driver (host), and algorithm provided by MP or LC1-4 Type.
Option 2 — Option 2 Note : DL, IB5
Note :For details on print speed, refer to “1.2.2 Printer Basic Specifications” (p9).
Note *1: Type of paper set by the panel for the paper source where paper is actually fed
DUPLEX
Table 1-51. CM 2 Table 1-53. Duplex
CM Media Type CM Page Size Paper Type Auto duplex
Off Plain paper Normal

A4, A5, B5, LT, LGL, EXE, GLG Thick Effective
Option 1 Option 1
SemiThk
Option 2 Option 2
Note : Duplex printing is not possible with paper other than the above.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Paper Handling Algorithm 80

CHAPTER
2
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
2.1 Print Process
2.1.1 Print Process Overview

This printer is a “full-color laser printer” that uses the principle of electrophotographic Drum (Y) Drum (M) Drum (C) Drum (K)
recording. This printer uses a tandem-type engine that equips exclusive drums and
developer units for each Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black (abbreviated to Y, M, C, (1) Charging (1) Charging (1) Charging (1) Charging
and K), and prints images in full color by laying images of four colors on papers
through the three intermediate drum transfers (IDT1 x 2, IDT2 x 1).
(2) Exposure (2) Exposure (2) Exposure (2) Exposure
(3) Development (3) Development (3) Development (3) Development

The major steps of the print process are described below.
(1) Charging : The drum surface is charged. (4) Primary transfer (4) Primary transfer
(Drum → IDT1) (Drum → IDT1)
(2) Exposure : Image areas are exposed on the drum by a laser beam.
Intermediate Intermediate
(3) Development : Image areas on the drum are developed with toner. Transfer Drum
(6) Cleaning (IDT1) Transfer Drum (6) Cleaning (IDT1)
(IDT1) (IDT1)
(4) Primary transfer : The toner image on the drum is transferred to the
IDT1 (Intermediate Transfer Drum).
(5) Secondary transfer
(5) Secondary transfer : The toner image on the the IDT1 is transferred to the (IDT1 → IDT2)
IDT2. Intermediate
Transfer Drum (8) Cleaning (IDT2)
(6) Cleaning : The IDT1 is cleaned.
(IDT1)
(7) Third transfer : The 4-color complete toner image on the IDT2 is (7) Third transfer (11)Cleaning
transferred to the paper. (IDT2 → Paper) (Entirely)
(8) Cleaning : The IDT2 is cleaned.

Paper (9) Discharging BTR
(9) Discharging : The electrical charge of the paper is removed.
(10) Fusing : Toner on the paper is fixed with heat and pressure. (10) Fusing
(11) Cleaning : Remnants of toner on the drums and the intermediate engine principle0001FA
drum transfers are removed. Figure 2-1. Print Process Overview
OPERATING PRINCIPLES Print Process 82

2.1.2 Print Process Diagram

The diagram below illustrates the entire print process. Most of the main parts involved with printing process are integrated into the PHD
ASSY and the FRAME ASSY DEVE. The diagram below shows their configuration.
Laser beam
Paper feed
Figure 2-3. PHD ASSY and FRAME ASSY DEVE
Ida_Sec06_014GA
Figure 2-2. Print Process Diagram

2.1.3 Technical Explanation of Print Process

2.1.3.1 Charging
Refresher
At the “Charging” process, RTC (Rubber Tube Charger) applies a uniform negative
potential to the drum which rotates at a fixed speed. This process is performed
RTC
simultaneously for each of the yellow, magenta, cyan and black colors.
-
The RTC is a conductive roller and keeps contact with the drum to move together -
Photosensitive Material
with it. The HVPS supplies discharge voltages to the RTC, and then RTC -
Conductive Material
discharges negative DC voltage.
-
The drum surface is uniformly charged to a negative potential with DC bias +
-
voltage. The Drum surface is made of conductive material coated with a + Drum
photosensitive material that becomes insulating in darkness and becomes - +
HVPS
conductive when it is subjected to light.
The Refresher is a conductive brush and is negatively charged by negative DC
voltages sent from the HVPS. It attracts positively charged toner on the drum,
which is transferred back to the drum from the IDT. The Refresher also works to
eliminate discharge products.
engine principle0004FB
Drum Surface
Drum Surface
Potential
engine principle0006FA
Figure 2-4. Charging Process

2.1.3.2 Exposure charge on the drum flows to the positive side, and the potential on the surface of
the drum is reduced in the result. The section of the drum surface where the
At the “Exposure” process, a laser beam is applied to the negatively charged surface of potential has reduced becomes the electrostatic latent image.
the drum to form an invisible electrostatic latent image onto the drum. This process is
performed simultaneously for each of the yellow, magenta, cyan and black colors.
ROS ASSY
The laser beams for each color emitted from laser diodes in the ROS ASSY are :Negative Charge
directed by the rotating polygon mirror, fixed mirrors and lenses, which are :Positive Charge
attached to the Scanner Motor Assy in the ROS ASSY to scan across each drum
surface from side to side.
Photosensitive Material
: Laser Beam (Y) (Laser beam) Conductive Material

: Laser Beam (M)
: Laser Beam (C)
Drum Surface
: Laser Beam (K) Mirror
Drum
Mirror Mirror Laser Beam
Mirror Drum (Y)

Polygon Mirror
Quad Beam Electrostatic latent
Lens Lens image
Laser Diode
Drum (M)
engine principle0008FA Leg_Sec06_011FA
Drum (C) Conceptual Diagram on the Drum

Mirror
Laser Beam Electrostatic latent
Drum (K) image
Drum Surface
Potential
Photosensitive
Laser Beam
Mirror Material
-V
Mirror Conductive
Material
Mirror Mirror engine principle0007FA 0
Figure 2-5. Path followed by the Laser Beam Leg_Sec06_010FA Leg_Sec06_012FA
Figure 2-6. Exposure Process
The laser beam is irradiated according to the print data (image data) from the
printer controller. The laser beam is output only when a pixel data (minute dot
composing the print data) exists. (On parts to be developed by toner, the laser
diode turns ON, and on parts not to be developed, the laser diode turns OFF.)
The drum surface irradiated by the laser beam becomes a conductor, the negative

2.1.3.3 Development
At the “Development” process, toner is electrically applied to the invisible electrostatic
TCRU ASSY (Toner Cartridge)
latent image on the drum, to form a visible image on it. This process is performed - : Negative Charge
simultaneously for each of the yellow, magenta, cyan and black colors. + : Positive Charge
Agitator
Toner
Toner in the Toner Cartridge is stirred by an Agitator, and is supplied to the Carrier
DISPENSER ASSY. Then the toner is transferred to the tube that connects the Auger
DISPENSER ASSY and the DEVE ASSY by the Auger in the assy., and then Trimmer Rod
DISPENSER ASSY Magnet Roll
reaches to the DEVE ASSY by the Auger in the tube. The Agitator and Augers are Paddle
spiral-shaped stirrers driven by the toner motor at the rear of the Toner Cartridge.
-
The amount of toner transferred to the DEVE ASSY is calculated based on the Auger
Auger - + Drum
number of prints. This is called toner dispense and performed using two types of
- +
control (“PCDC” and “ADC”) in combination. Refer to “2.8.4 Process Control
(p125)” for details on the PCDC and ADC.
+
Toner transferred to the DEVE ASSY and developer (carrier) in the DEVE ASSY - +
is stirred by the Auger, and are supplied to the Magnet Roll located near the drum -
surface. The toner and the carrier are charged by the triboelectricity (toner:
negative, carrier: positive), and they are attracted to each other.
HVPS
As the carrier is a magnetic body, it is attracted to the magnetized Magnet Roll,
and a uniform layer of carrier is formed on the Magnet Roll by passing through the DEVE ASSY
Timmer Rod and the Paddle.
NOTE: The magnet Roll is located inside the DEVE ASSY. Ida_06_016A
Drum Surface
The surface of the Magnet Roll is covered with the conductive sleeve. The DB Drum Surface Potential
-V
(Developing Bias) is supplied to the conductive sleeve from the HVPS. The DB
voltage is a negative DC voltage that AC voltage is superimposed on it. The
Developing
electrostatic latent image on the drum, the area hit by the laser, carries less
Bias
negative charges than the other area on the drum. As the uniform negative charge
on the Magnet Roll is kept at a certain level by the DC voltage, the potential Toner Image
0
difference between the Magnet Roll and the drum surface becomes as follows; the
electrostatic image area is higher than the Magnet Roll, and the other area is lower engine principle0013FA
than the Magnet Roll. The superimposed AC voltage vibrates the carrier on the
Magnet Roll surface making it easier for toner to jump to the drum. Thus, the Figure 2-7. Development Process
negatively charged toner on the Magnet Roll is only attracted to the electrostatic
latent image and forms a toner image on the drum. Once the toner adheres to the
image area on the drum, no more toner is attracted to the area as negative charges
of the area are increasd.

2.1.3.4 Primary Transfer (Drum → IDT1) Drum Surface

At the “Primary transfer” process, the toner image formed on the Drum is transferred to (Yellow Toner Image)
the IDT1 (Intermediate Drum Transfer 1).
This printer equips two IDT1s. The one is for transferring yellow and magenta toner
images, and the other is for transferring cyan and black toner images.
IDI1Surface
IDT1 is a conductive roll and a high positive voltage is supplied to it from the
HVPS. A negatively charged toner image on the drum is attracted and transferred Yellow Toner
Image
to the IDT1 surface that is charged positively. The potential on the Drum surface is
neutralized by the IDT1 at this time. Magenta Toner
Image
Drum Surface
- Negative Charge (Magenta Toner Image)
+ Positive Charge
- Toner
Drum (Y) + +
+
- +
+
- - IDT1
+
+
+
+
+
Drum (M) - + + Drum Surface
(Cyan Toner Image)
-
- -
IDI1Surface
-
Drum (C) + +
+
- +
+
- - IDT1 Cyan Toner
+ Image
+ Drum Surface
+ (Black Toner Image) Black Toner
Image
+
+ HVPS
Drum (K) - + +
-
- -
engine priniple0017FA
Figure 2-8. Primary Transfer (1) Figure 2-9. Primary Transfer (2)

2.1.3.5 Secondary Transfer (IDT1 → IDT2) 2.1.3.6 Cleaning (IDT1)

At the “Secondary transfer” process, the two-colored toner image formed on each of At the “Cleaning (IDT1)” process, the toner remaining on the IDT1 surface is
the two IDT1s is transferred to the IDT2 (Intermediate Drum Transfer 2). temporarily stored in the IDT1 Cleaner after the toner image is transferred to the IDT2.
Complete toner image in full color is then formed on the IDT2.
IDT1 Cleaner is a conductive roll brush and a high positive voltage is supplied to it
The IDT2 is a conductive roll and a high positive voltage is supplied to it from the from the HVPS. The IDT1 Cleaner is in contact with the IDT1 to attract and
HVPS. Though both the IDT1 and the IDT2 are positively charged, the voltage temporarily store remnants of toner on the IDT1 after the secondary transfer is
supplied to the IDT2 is higher than that for the IDT1 to attract/transfer the toner finished. The stored toner is retrieved either at the end of the printing or at the
image on the IDT1 to the IDT2. cleaning cycle.
(Refer to “2.1.3.11 Cleaning (Entirely) (p90)”)
+ Positive Charge
Toner
+
IDT1 + IDI1Surface
+
+ Yellow Toner
IDT1 Cleaner Image
+
+
+ Magenta Toner
+ Image
+ IDI2 Surface
+
+ IDT2
+ Yellow Toner
Image
+
+ Magenta Toner
Image
+
+ + +
+ + + ++ + + Cyan Toner
+ + Image
IDI1Surface
IDT1 Black Toner
Image
HVPS
Cyan Toner
Image
Black Toner
HVPS Image
IDT1 Cleaner
Figure 2-11. Secondary Transfer and Cleaning (2)

Figure 2-10. Secondary Transfer and Cleaning (1)

2.1.3.7 Third Transfer (IDT2 → Paper) :Negative Charge

:Positive Charge
In the “Third transfer” process, the complete toner image formed on the IDT2 is
:Toner
transferred to paper by supplying voltage to the BTR (Bias Transfer Roll).
The BTR is located inside the BTR ASSY. It is a conductive roll and constant
positive current is supplied to it from the HVPS. The toner image on the IDT2 is
transferred to a paper by applying the positive voltage to the backside of the paper
when it passes between the IDT2 and the BTR. The potential of the BTR is set
higher than that of the IDT2 at this time.
2.1.3.8 Cleaning (IDT2)

In the “Cleaning (IDT2)” process, the toner remaining on the IDT2 surface is
temporarily stored in the IDT2 Cleaner after the toner image is transferred to the paper.
The IDT2 Cleaner is a conductive roll brush and a high positive voltage is supplied
to it from the HVPS. The IDT2 Cleaner is in contact with the IDT2 to wipe off and
temporarily store remnants of toner on the IDT2 after the third transfer is finished.
The stored toner is retrieved either at the end of the printing or at the cleaning
cycle. (Refer to “2.1.3.11 Cleaning (Entirely) (p90)”)
2.1.3.9 Discharging
In the “Discharging” process, the charge on the paper is neutralized/removed by
Figure 2-12. Third Transfer, Cleaning and Discharging
applying DC voltage to the backside of the paper with the Detack Saw.
Detack Saw is kept charged at a constant voltage by the Valistor.
If the Detack Saw fails to remove the electrical charge on the paper properly, the
toner transferred on the paper will scatter due to the positive charges applied for
the third transfer and cause print quality troubles.

2.1.3.10 Fusing 2.1.3.11 Cleaning (Entirely)

In the “Fusing” process, toner is fixed on paper with heat and pressure. In the “Cleaning (Entirely)” process, the toners stored in the RTC, Refresher, IDT1
Cleaner and the IDT2 Cleaner are removed after the complete toner image is
As the complete toner image clings to the paper only by the electrostatic force, one
transferred on the paper.
light touch of a finger can remove the image easily. To fix the image firmly onto
the paper, the paper is transferred to the Fusing section immediately after the third Remnants of toner after performing the “Secondary transfer” and the “Third
transfer. The toner is melted by the Heat Roll heated by the Heater Lamp, and then transfer” are temporarily stored in the IDT1 Cleaner and the IDT2 Cleaner. Toner
the toner is fixed on the paper by being pressed between the Heat Roll and the whose polarity is reversed and returned to the Drum is stored in the Refresher.
Belt, which puts pressure against the Heat Roll. Toner slipped through the Refresher sometimes adheres to the RTC. These toner
can be cleaned up when the printing is finished. Method for retrieving toner stored
in the IDT1 Cleaner and the IDT2 Cleaner is different from the one for retrieving
Table 2-1. Heater Lamp Conditions toner stored in the Refresher and the RTC.
Warm up Stand by Printing Continue to the next page.

Main Heater Lamp ON ON (assist) ON (main)
Sub Heater Lamp ON ON (main) ON (assist)
Paper
Fixed Toner
Not Fixed Toner
Figure 2-13. Fusing

1. IDT1 Cleaner and IDT2 Cleaner By turning the charge of the Refresher and the RTC to 0 V, remnants of toner
High voltages equivalent to the bias used for the second and third transfer (polarity: positive) stored in the Refresher and the RTC are transferred
process are applied to the IDT1, IDT2, and the BTR. By turning the charge of electrically to the Drum. The remnants of toner are then transferred to the
the IDT1 Cleaner and the IDT2 Cleaner to 0 V, remnants of toner (polarity: IDT1 and IDT2, and collected directly on the BTR, which carries the highest
negative) stored in the IDT1 Cleaner and the IDT2 Cleaner are transferred positive charges among them, just as the complete toner image is attracted to
electrically to the IDT1 and the IDT2. And the remnants of toner on the IDT1 paper.
and IDT2 are then collected directly on the BTR, which carries the highest
positive charges among them, just as the complete toner image is attracted to RTC Refresher
- Negative Charge
paper. Toner
-
+ Drum -
+ Positive Charge
+ Toner -
+ IDT1 - - - IDT1
Refresher
+ -
RTC
+ -
+ -
+ + IDT2 Cleaner - - - -
+ + Drum -
+ - - -
+ IDT2
IDT2
Refresher -
+
+ RTC -
IDT1 Cleaner
+ - -
+ + Drum -
+ + - - -
+ - -
+ + BTR - - BTR
+ - IDT1 -
IDT1 + Refresher -
+ + -
+ -
RTC -
+
+ -
+ -
Drum - -
+ HVPS
HVPS HVPS HVPS
HVPS HVPS - Urethane
Urethane
blade blade
-
IDT1 Cleaner
Ida_Sec06_022FA
Ida_Sec06_019FA
IDT1 Voltage > IDT2 Voltage > BTR Voltage
Figure 2-14. IDT1 Cleaner and IDT2 Cleaner
Figure 2-15. Refresher and RTC
2. Refresher and RTC
High negative voltages (the polarity is opposite to the bias used for the The remnants of toner transferred to the BTR surface is scraped off by the
transfer process) are applied to the IDT1, IDT2, and the BTR. At this time, the Urethane blade that is in contact with the BTR, and collected in the waste toner
Drum surface is negatively charged by the negative voltage of the IDT1. box inside the BTR ASSY.

2.2 Flow of Print Data

Host (electric signal)
2.2.1 Data Flow
Print data (electric signals) from the Printer Controller follows the flow shown right to
Printer Controller (electric signal)
become a print image.
PWBA (electric signal)
ROS ASSY (Laser Beam)
Electrostatic Latent Image (invisible)
Toner Image on the Drum
Toner Image on the IDT1
Complete Image on the IDT2
Complete Toner Image on Paper
Printed Paper is ejected
Ida_Sec06_026FA
Figure 2-16. Data Flow
OPERATING PRINCIPLES Flow of Print Data 92

2.3 Drive Transmission Path CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
PHD ASSY
2.3.1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN
Drive force of DRIVE ASSY MAIN is transmitted as follows: BTR
BTR ASSY
DRIVE ASSY MAIN
IDT 2
GEAR IDLER IN CLUTCH REGI CLUTCH TURN

GEAR MSI
DRIVE ASSY MAIN
GEAR IDLER FEED ROLL REGI RUBBER ROLL TURN MSI
ROLL ASSY RETARD (MSI) GEAR IDLER IN

GEAR FEED H1 ROLL REGI METAL GEAR P1
CHUTE ASSY REGI GEAR IDLER FEED

/ GEAR FEED 2
PICK UP ASSY
GEAR FEED 2
GEAR FEED H1 GEAR FEED H2 GEAR IDLER TURN
GEAR FEED H2
GEAR FEED 2 GEAR FEED 2 GEAR TURN / GEAR FEED H1
FRONT Ida_06_001B
ROLL ASSY FEED ROLL ASSY FEED
(Nudger Roll) (Feed Roll) ROLL ASSY TURN
DRIVE ASSY MAIN
ROLL ASSY RETARD

(Cassette) PICK UP ASSY CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
CLUTCH REGI
CHUTE ASSY REGI
GEAR P1
GEAR MSI IDT2
CLUTCH TURN
ROLL ASSY FEED IDT1 (2)
GEAR TURN GEAR IDLER TURN

CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
Drum (4)
ROLL ASSY RETARD
(MSI) PHD ASSY PICK UP ASSY
BTR ASSY FRONT

Ida_06_030B
Ida_06_002B
Figure 2-17. Drive Transmission Flow (DRIVE ASSY MAIN) Figure 2-18. Drive Transmission Path (DRIVE ASSY MAIN)
OPERATING PRINCIPLES Drive Transmission Path 93

2.3.2 DRIVE ASSY DEVE

Drive force of the DRIVE ASSY DEVE activates the Developers of each color inside
the FRAME ASSY DEVE. Switching between the monochrome and the full-color
mode is enabled by changing the rotation direction of the Deve Drive Motor in the
DRIVE ASSY DEVE.
Black and White Mode Black and White Mode
DRIVE ASSY DEVE

DEVE DRIVE MOTOR
DRIVE MOTOR
GEAR D2-IN
DRIVE MOTOR GEAR
GEAR D2-IN
GEAR D5 (1 WAY CLUTCH)
GEAR D8
GEAR D7 GEAR DEVE INPUT (K) GEAR D5
GEAR D7
GEAR D8
FRONT
Ida_06_023A
GEAR DEVE INPUT (K) Figure 2-20. Drive Transmission Path (DRIVE ASSY DEVE)
MAG ROLL (K)
DEVE ASSY (K)
Ida_Sec06_029FA
Figure 2-19. Drive Transmission Flow (DRIVE ASSY DEVE)

Full Color Mode

Full Color Mode GEAR D6
GEAR D6
DEVE DRIVE MOTOR
GEAR D4
GEAR D8
GEAR D2-IN GEAR DEVE INPUT (Y)
GEAR D8 DRIVE MOTOR

GEAR D2-OUT
GEAR DEVE INPUT (M) DRIVE MOTOR GEAR
GEAR D8 GEAR D3
GEAR D3 (1 WAT CLUTCH)
GEAR D2-IN
GEAR DEVE INPUT (C)
GEAR D2-OUT
GEAR D5 GEAR D8
GEAR D4 (1 WAT CLUTCH)
(1 WAT CLUTCH)
GEAR DEVE INPUT (K) GEAR D5
GEAR D6 GEAR D6 GEAR D7
GEAR D7
GEAR D8 GEAR D8 GEAR D8 GEAR D8

DRIVE ASSY DEVE
FRONT
GEAR DEVE INPUT (Y) GEAR DEVE INPUT (M) GEAR DEVE INPUT (C) GEAR DEVE INPUT (K)
Ida_06_024A
MAG ROLL (Y) MAG ROLL (M) MAG ROLL (C) MAG ROLL (K)
Figure 2-22. Drive Transmission Path (DRIVE ASSY DEVE)
DEVE ASSY (Y) DEVE ASSY (M) DEVE ASSY (C) DEVE ASSY (K)
Ida_Sec06_028FA
Figure 2-21. Drive Transmission Flow (DRIVE ASSY DEVE)

2.3.3 DISPENSER ASSY (Y, M, C, K)

Agitator
The Toner Motor inside the DISPENSER ASSY drives both the Agitator in the Toner Film
Cartridge (supplies toner from Toner Cartridge to DISPENSER ASSY) and the Auger
in the DISPENSER ASSY (supplies toner to the Developer in the FRAME ASSY
DEVE). There are four DISPENSER ASSYs in total corresponding Y, M, C, and K, Gear
and they operate in the same way.
Gear TCRU
Gear Agitator
Gear Idler Agitator 2
pipe Auger
Gear Idler Agitator 1
Auger Assy
Toner Motor
Gear Auger
Gear Idler 2 Toner Motor Assy
Gear Idler 1
Gear Idler Agitator 1 Gear Idler 1
Ida_06_130A
Figure 2-24. Drive Transmission Path (DISPENSER ASSY)

Gear Idler Agitator 2 Gear Idler 2
Gear Agitator Gear TCRU
Gear Auger Gear
Auger Assy Film Agitator
DISPENSER ASSY Toner Cartridge
Ida_06_021A
Figure 2-23. Drive Transmission Flow (DISPENSER ASSY)

2.3.4 DRIVE ASSY FUSER

The DRIVE ASSY FUSER drives the FUSER ASSY.
FUSER ASSY
Roll Assy Exit
DRIVE ASSY FUSER

Gear Exit
Pinch Roll
Fuser Belt
Heat Roll
Heat Roll
Gear
Gear Exit
Fuser Motor DRIVE ASSY FUSER

Roll Assy Exit
FUSER ASSY FRONT Ida_06_131A

Figure 2-26. Drive Transmission Path (DRIVE ASSY FUSER)

Figure 2-25. Drive Transmission Flow (DRIVE ASSY FUSER)

2.3.5 MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM

The drive force of the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM is transmitted as shown in the flow
MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM
chart below. Printed papers are ejected when the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM rotates GEAR 52
normally, and reverse rotation of it transports the papers for duplex printing.
GEAR EXIT / DUP
MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM
GEAR 41
GEAR 40 / 66H
GEAR 40/66H GEAR 40/66H
GEAR 40 / 66H GEAR 41
GEAR 52 GEAR 41
GEAR EXIT / DUP
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
GEAR EXIT/DUP GEAR 41
FRONT
ROLL EXIT GEAR EXIT/DUP
Ida_06_003B
Figure 2-28. Drive Transmission Path (MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM)

ROLL DUP
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
Ida_06_031A
Figure 2-27. Drive Transmission Flow (MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM)

2.3.6 DRIVE ASSY (550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit)
C A U T IO N On the following pages, the feeder of the paper tray at the bottom
of the printer and the optional 550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit are
referred to as "tray 1" and "tray 2" respectively.
Drive force of DRIVE ASSY is transmitted as follows:
DRIVE ASSY
GEAR 24 GEAR IDLER FEED
GEAR FEED 2
GEAR IDLER 21/29
CLUTCH ELECTRO
MAGNETIC
CLUTCH ELECTRO GEAR IDLER FEED

MAGNETIC GEAR IDLER 21/29
GEAR 24
ROLL ASSY TURN GEAR FEED H2 GEAR FEED H1
DRIVE ASSY
GEAR FEED 2 GEAR FEED 2 FRONT GEAR FEED H2 GEAR FEED H1 GEAR FEED 2
Ida_1T_06_101A
PICK UP ASSY 2T ROLL ASSY FEED ROLL ASSY FEED
(Nudger Roll) (Feed Roll) Figure 2-30. Drive Transmission Path
Ida_1T_06_106A
Figure 2-29. Drive Transmission Flow

2.3.7 DRIVE ASSY 2ND (1,100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit)
C A U T IO N On the following pages, the feeder section of the paper tray at the
bottom of the printer is named "Tray 1", and the two trays
included in the optional 1,100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit are
referred to as "Tray 2" and "Tray 3" from the top.
Drive force of DRIVE ASSY 2ND is transmitted as follows:
DRIVE ASSY 2ND
GEAR 24 GEAR 24 GEAR IDLER FEED
GEAR FEED 2
GEAR IDLER 21/29
CLUTCH ASSY
CLUTCH ASSY GEAR IDLER FEED
GEAR IDLER 21/29 GEAR FEED 2
ROLL ASSY TURN GEAR FEED H2 GEAR FEED H1 GEAR FEED H1

GEAR 24
GEAR FEED 2 GEAR FEED 2 GEAR FEED H2

DRIVE ASSY 2ND
ROLL ASSY FEED ROLL ASSY FEED GEAR 24 (DRIVE ASSY)

PICK UP ASSY 2T (Nudger Roll) (Feed Roll)
CLUTCH ELECTRO
MAGNETIC
GEAR IDLER 21/29
GEAR IDLER FEED

GEAR IDLER 21/29
GEAR FEED 2
CLUTCH ELECTRO GEAR IDLER FEED
MAGNETIC
ROLL ASSY TURN GEAR FEED H2 GEAR FEED H1

FRONT GEAR FEED H2 GEAR FEED H1 GEAR FEED 2
Ida_2T_06_201B
GEAR FEED 2 GEAR FEED 2
Figure 2-32. Drive Transmission Path

ROLL ASSY FEED ROLL ASSY FEED
PICK UP ASSY 3T (Nudger Roll) (Feed Roll)
Ida_2T_06_206A
Figure 2-31. Drive Transmission Flow

2.4 Feeding Paper

ACTUATOR FULL STACK SENSOR FULL STACK
2.4.1 Paper Feed Path (When options are not installed) ROLL EXIT
Papers supplied from the paper tray and the MSI in the main unit are transferred as
shown in the flow chart below. Actuator Exit
Roll Assy Exit

ROLL PINCH EXIT
Paper Tray 1 MSI Exit Sensor
ACTUATOR DUP
Pinch Roll Fuser Belt
PHD ASSY
ROLL ASSY FEED (MSI) and ROLL SENSOR DUP JAM
ROLL ASSY FEED (PICK UP ASSY) ASSY RETARD
ROLL REGI RUBBER Heat Roll
ROLL PINCH DUP
ROLL REGI METAL
ROLL ASSY FEED (PICK UP ASSY) IDT2 ROLL DUP
ROLL ASSY RETARD (Paper Cassette) SENSOR OHP
BTR
ACTUATOR REGI
SENSOR NO PAPER (MSI)
ROLL ASSY TURN and CHUTE SENSOR REGI
ASSY FEEDER
ROLL PINCH TURN ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI
ROLL TURN MSI and ROLL PINCH TURN ROLL TURN MSI
ROLL ASSY FEED (MSI)

ROLL ASSY FEED
ROLL REGI RUBBER in CHUTE ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL
(PICK UP ASSY 1T)
ROLL ASSY RETARD (MSI)
IDT2 in PHD ASSY and BTR in BTR ASSY

CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
HEAT ROLL in FUSER ASSY and FUSER BELT ROLL ASSY TURN
(PICK UP ASSY 1T)
ROLL ASSY RETARD (CST)

ROLL ASSY EXIT in FUSER ASSY and PINCH ROLL Ida_06_132B
Figure 2-34. Paper Feed Path Layout

ROLL EXIT in CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT and ROLL PINCH EXIT
Ejects Paper ROLL EXIT rotates backward to

transport paper to duplex path
ROLL DUP and ROLL PINCH DUP
Ida_06_027B
Figure 2-33. Paper Feed Flow
OPERATING PRINCIPLES Feeding Paper 101

2.4.2 Paper Feed Path (When the 550-sheet Paper

Cassette is installed)
When the OPTION FEEDER (Single Tray) is installed, papers are fed in the following
order.
ROLL EXIT
Paper Tray 2 Paper Tray 1 MSI
ROLL ASSY FEED ROLL ASSY FEED Actuator Exit

ROLL ASSY FEED
(Tray 2) (Tray) (MSI) and ROLL Roll Assy Exit
ASSY RETARD ROLL PINCH EXIT
Exit Sensor
ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray 2) ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray) ACTUATOR DUP
PHD ASSY Pinch Roll Fuser Belt
ROLL ASSY RETARD ROLL ASSY RETARD
(Paper Cassette) (Paper Cassette) SENSOR DUP JAM
ROLL REGI RUBBER
Heat Roll
ROLL REGI METAL ROLL PINCH DUP
ROLL ASSY TURN (Tray 2) and CHUTE
ASSY FEEDER (Tray 2) SENSOR OHP IDT2 ROLL DUP
BTR
ACTUATOR REGI
ROLL ASSY TURN and CHUTE ASSY FEEDER SENSOR NO PAPER (MSI)
SENSOR REGI
ROLL TURN MSI and ROLL PINCH TURN ROLL PINCH TURN ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI
ROLL TURN MSI
ROLL REGI RUBBER in CHUTE ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL ROLL ASSY FEED (MSI)
ROLL ASSY FEED
(PICK UP ASSY 1T)
IDT2 in PHD ASSY and BTR in BTR ASSY
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
HEAT ROLL in FUSER ASSY and FUSER BELT

ROLL ASSY TURN
(PICK UP ASSY 1T)
ROLL ASSY EXIT in FUSER ASSY and PINCH ROLL ROLL ASSY FEED
(PICK UP ASSY 2T)
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER

ROLL EXIT in CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT and ROLL PINCH EXIT
ROLL ASSY TURN
(PICK UP ASSY 2T)
Ejects Paper Transports the paper to the duplex path
by rotating the ROLL EXIT backward.
Ida_1T_06_132B
Figure 2-36. Paper Feed Path Layout

Ida_1T_06_105A
Figure 2-35. Paper Feed Flow

2.4.3 Paper Feed Path (When the 1100-sheet Paper

Cassette is installed)
When the 1100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit is installed, papers are fed in the following
order. ROLL EXIT
Paper Tray 3 Paper Tray 2 Paper Tray 1 MSI

Actuator Exit
Roll Assy Exit

ROLL ASSY FEED ROLL ASSY FEED ROLL ASSY FEED ROLL ASSY FEED ROLL PINCH EXIT
(Tray 3) (Tray 2) (Tray) Exit Sensor
(MSI) and ROLL ACTUATOR DUP
ASSY RETARD PHD ASSY Pinch Roll Fuser Belt
ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray 3) ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray 2) ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray) SENSOR DUP JAM
ROLL ASSY RETARD ROLL ASSY RETARD ROLL ASSY RETARD ROLL REGI RUBBER
(Paper Cassette) (Paper Cassette) (Paper Cassette) Heat Roll
ROLL REGI METAL ROLL PINCH DUP
IDT2 ROLL DUP

ROLL ASSY TURN (Tray 3) SENSOR OHP
and CHUTE BTR
ASSY FEEDER (Tray 3) ACTUATOR REGI
SENSOR NO PAPER (MSI)
SENSOR REGI
ROLL ASSY TURN(Tray 2) and
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER (Tray 2) ROLL PINCH TURN ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI
ROLL TURN MSI

ROLL ASSY TURN and CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
ROLL ASSY FEED
(PICK UP ASSY 1T)
ROLL TURN MSI and ROLL PINCH TURN ROLL ASSY RETARD (MSI)
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER

ROLL REGI RUBBER in CHUTE ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL
ROLL ASSY TURN
IDT2 in PHD ASSY and BTR in BTR ASSY (PICK UP ASSY 1T)
ROLL ASSY FEED
(PICK UP ASSY 3RD)
HEAT ROLL in FUSER ASSY and FUSER BELT CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
ROLL ASSY TURN

ROLL ASSY EXIT in FUSER ASSY and PINCH ROLL ROLL ASSY RETARD (CST)
(PICK UP ASSY 3RD)
ROLL EXIT in CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT and ROLL PINCH EXIT ROLL ASSY FEED
(PICK UP ASSY 4TH)
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER

Ejects Paper Transports the paper to the duplex path
by rotating the ROLL EXIT backward.
ROLL ASSY TURN
(PICK UP ASSY 4TH)

Ida_2T_06_132B
Ida_2T_06_205A
Figure 2-37. Paper Feed Flow Figure 2-38. Paper Feed Path Layout

2.5 Main Structure and Function 2.5.1 Paper Cassette

This section explains and illustrates the main functional components that are involved MAIN FUNCTIONS
with paper transferring.
GUIDE SIDE (R/L)
The explanations are given for each of the components (section) and items listed The GUIDE SIDE (R/L) moves crossways of the paper feed direction, and trues up
below. the left and right edges of sheets of paper.
Paper Cassette GUIDE END
The GUIDE END moves parallel to the paper feed direction, and determines the
Paper Feeder paper size. When the GUIDE END is moved, the ACTUATOR SIZE is activated
Retard & Regi Assy by the ACTUATOR GUIDE END which moves together with the GUIDE END,
and the SWITCH ASSY SIZE (See “2.5.2 Paper Feeder (p105)”) is turned ON or
Chute Assy In OFF to detect the paper size.
Chute Assy Out ROLL ASSY RETARD (Paper Cassette)
BTR Assy & Fuser Assy Paper in the cassette is fed into the printer by being caught between the ROLL
ASSY RETARD (Paper Cassette) and the ROLL ASSY FEED (PICK UP ASSY)
Xerographics (See “2.5.2 Paper Feeder (p105)”).
Toner Cartridge
Frame & Drive PLATE ASSY BTM
GUIDE END
Electrical
GUIDE SIDE L
ACTUATOR
GUIDE END
ACTUATOR SIZE
GUIDE SIDE R
ROLL ASSY RETARD

(Paper Cassette)
Ida_06_004C
Figure 2-39. Paper Cassette
OPERATING PRINCIPLES Main Structure and Function 104

2.5.2 Paper Feeder

MAIN FUNCTIONS ROLL ASSY FEED (Nudger Roll)
SENSOR LOW PAPER
SWITCH ASSY SIZE ROLL ASSY TURN
Detects paper size and the presence of the paper tray. SENSOR NO PAPER
SENSOR HUM
SENSOR NO PAPER
Detects presence of papers in the paper tray according to the change in position of
the Actuator.
(No paper state: Shielding the sensor)
SENSOR LOW PAPER *
The Actuator comes down in accordance with remaining amount of the papers in
the paper tray. When the Actuator comes down to a level where the Actuator
shields the sensor, the sensor detects that remaining amount of the papers is low.
Note*: Installed before shipment (option)
SOLENOID FEED SWITCH ASSY SIZE
Controls the operation of the ROLL ASSY FEED (rotating/halt) by controlling the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
rotation of the GEAR FEED H2. SOLENOID FEED
ROLL ASSY FEED ROLL ASSY FEED (Feed Roll)

When the SOLENOID FEED is activated, the SPRING FEED H moves the GEAR
FEED H1 and the GEAR IDLER FEED into engagement to transmit the drive
ROLL ASSY TURN
force of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to rotate the GEAR FEED H1/H2. The GEAR
FEED H1/H2 drive the GEAR FEED 2, and the GEAR FEED 2 makes the ROLL ROLL ASSY FEED
(Feed Roll)
ASSY FEED rotate to feed a paper in the paper tray into the printer.
A notch on the GEAR FEED H1 moves the GEAR FEED H1 and the GEAR ROLL ASSY FEED
IDLER FEED out of engagement when the GEAR FEED H1 makes one (Nudger Roll)
revolution. This cuts the drive force from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN and stops the CHUTE ASSY
FEEDER
ROLL ASSY FEED. Thus, the papers in the paper tray can be fed one by one.
ROLL ASSY RETARD
ROLL ASSY TURN (Paper Cassette)
This is rotated by the driving of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN by way of the GEAR Ida_06_005B
IDLER TURN and the GEAR TURN. This rotation transports papers fed from the
paper tray to the CHUTE ASSY REGI (Regi Roll) (See “2.5.5 Retard & Regi Figure 2-40. Paper Feeder
Assy (p110)”).
SENSOR HUM
Detects temperature and humidity inside the printer. This sensor calibrates the
charging voltage, supply voltage for various transfer rolls, and developing bias
based on detected temperature and humidity.

2.5.3 Optional Feeder (550-sheet Paper Cassette) ROLL ASSY TURN (Tray 2)
This is rotated by the drive force of the DRIVE ASSY transmitted via the
This section explains and illustrates the main functional components that make up the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC. Transports the paper fed from the paper tray
550-sheet Paper Cassette unit (optional single feeder). toward the Tray 1.
The explanation is divided into two sections shown below according to the locations of
the components.
ROLL ASSY FEED (Nudger Roll)
Optional Single Feeder (1) ROLL ASSY TURN
Optional Single Feeder (2) SENSOR NO PAPER
2.5.3.1 Option Single Feeder (1)
MAIN FUNCTIONS
SWITCH ASSY SIZE (Tray 2)

Detects paper size and presence of papers.
SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray 2)
the Actuator. SWITCH ASSY SIZE
SOLENOID FEED
SOLENOID FEED (Tray 2)
Controls the operation of the ROLL ASSY FEED (rotating/halt) by controlling the
rotation of the GEAR FEED H1 and the GEAR FEED H2. CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC
ROLL ASSY FEED (Feed Roll)
CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC (Tray 2)

Transmits the driving from the DRIVE ASSY to the ROLL ASSY TURN.
ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray 2)
force of the DRIVE ASSY to rotate the GEAR FEED H1/H2. The GEAR FEED
H1/H2 drive the GEAR FEED 2, and the GEAR FEED 2 makes the ROLL ASSY
FEED rotate to feed a paper in the paper tray into the printer. DRIVE ASSY
A notch on the GEAR FEED H1 moves the GEAR FEED H1 and the GEAR
IDLER FEED out of engagement when the GEAR FEED H1 makes one
revolution. This cuts the drive force from the DRIVE ASSY and stops the ROLL
ASSY FEED. Thus, the papers in the paper tray can be fed one by one.
Ida_1T_06_103C
Figure 2-41. Optional Single Feeder (1)

2.5.3.2 Optional Single Feeder (2)
MAIN FUNCTIONS
SENSOR LOW PAPER
SENSOR LOW PAPER (Tray 2)
The Actuator comes down in accordance with remaining amount of the papers in
PWBA OPTFDR 1T
Controls the paper feeding operations to the DRIVE ASSY by communicating
with the PWBA MCU IDTN and analyzing the information from the sensors and
switches.
The main functions are as follows.
Communicates with the PWBA MCU IDTN
Receives information from the sensors and the switches
Controls the DRIVE ASSY, solenoids, and clutches
Controls the paper feeding operations
PWBA OPTFDR 1T
Allocates the low DC voltage output from the main unit among each
component
DRIVE ASSY DRIVE ASSY

Supplies the driving to the ROLL ASSY FEED and the ROLL ASSY TURN of Ida_1T_06_104C
the tray through the gears.
Figure 2-42. Optional Single Feeder (2)

2.5.4 Optional Feeder (1100-sheet Paper Cassette)

ROLL ASSY FEED
This section explains and illustrates the main functional components that make up the (Tray 2/Feed Roll) ROLL ASSY FEED
1100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit (Optional double feeder). (Tray 2/Nudger Roll)
The explanation is divided into two sections shown below according to the locations of ROLL ASSY TURN (Tray 2) CLUTCH ASSY (Tray 2)
the components. SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray 2)
Optional Double Feeder (1)

Optional Double Feeder (2)
2.5.4.1 Optional Double Feeder (1) SWITCH ASSY SIZE (Tray 2)
MAIN FUNCTIONS
SOLENOID FEED (Tray 2)
SWITCH ASSY SIZE (Tray 2/Tray 3)
Detects paper size and presence of papers.
SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray 2/Tray 3)
the Actuator.
SWITCH ASSY SIZE (Tray 3)
SOLENOID FEED (Tray 2/Tray 3) ROLL ASSY TURN (Tray 3)
SENSOR NO PAPER (Tray 3)
Controls the operation of the ROLL ASSY FEED (rotating/halt) by controlling the SOLENOID FEED (Tray 3)
ROLL ASSY FEED
rotation of the GEAR FEED H2. (Tray 3/Feed Roll)
CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC (Tray 3)
CLUTCH ASSY (Tray 2)/CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC (Tray 3) ROLL ASSY FEED
(Tray 3/Nudger Roll)
Transmits the driving from the DRIVE ASSY 2ND to the ROLL ASSY TURN.
ROLL ASSY FEED (Tray 2/Tray 3)
force of the DRIVE ASSY 2ND to rotate the GEAR FEED H1/H2. The GEAR
FEED H1/H2 drive the GEAR FEED 2, and the GEAR FEED 2 makes the ROLL DRIVE ASSY 2ND
ASSY FEED rotate to feed a paper in the paper tray into the printer.
A notch on the GEAR FEED H1 moves the GEAR FEED H1 and the GEAR
IDLER FEED out of engagement when the GEAR FEED H1 makes one
revolution. This cuts the drive force from the DRIVE ASSY and stops the ROLL
ASSY FEED. Thus, the papers in the paper tray can be fed one by one.
ROLL ASSY TURN (Tray 2/Tray 3) Ida_2T_06_203B
This is rotated by the drive force of the DRIVE ASSY 2ND transmitted via the Figure 2-43. Optional Double Feeder (1)
CLUTCH ASSY/CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC. Transports the paper fed
from the paper tray toward the Tray 1.

2.5.4.2 Optional Double Feeder (2)
MAIN FUNCTIONS
SENSOR LOW PAPER (Tray 2/Tray 3)
The Actuator comes down in accordance with remaining amount of the papers in PWBA OPTFDR 2T (Tray 2)
PWBA OPTFDR 2T
Controls the paper feeding operations to the DRIVE ASSY 2ND by
communicating with the PWBA MCU IDTN and analyzing the information from
the sensors and switches.
Communicates with the PWBA MCU IDTN
Controls the DRIVE ASSY 2ND, solenoids, and clutches
Controls the paper feeding operations
Allocates the low DC voltage output from the main unit among each
component
DRIVE ASSY 2ND

Supplies the driving to the ROLL ASSY FEED and the ROLL ASSY TURN in
each of the trays through the gears.
PWBA OPTFDR 2T (Tray 3)
DRIVE ASSY 2ND

Ida_2T_06_204B
Figure 2-44. Optional Double Feeder (2)

2.5.5 Retard & Regi Assy

SENSOR OHP
MAIN FUNCTIONS ROLL REGI METAL SENSOR REGI
CLUTCH TURN ROLL REGI RUBBER

Transmits the driving from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to the ROLL TURN MSI.
ROLL TURN MSI
This is rotated by the drive force of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN transmitted via the
CLUTCH TURN (MSI). Transports the paper fed from the paper tray, manual
tray, or the duplex path to the CHUTE ASSY REGI (Regi Roll).
SENSOR REGI
This sensor detects that the leading edge of the paper has reached the CHUTE
ASSY REGI.
CLUTCH REGI
Transmits the driving from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to the ROLL REGI
RUBBER to transport papers from the paper tray, MSI, and duplex path toward
the PHD ASSY.
SENSOR OHP
Irradiates light on the media and detects the media by perceiving the reflected
light. As transparencies do not reflect light as much as papers do, the SENSOR
OHP cannot perceive the reflected light when the media is transparency. Thus, the
SENSOR OHP determines whether the media that is fed from the MSI is ROLL ASSY
RETARD (MSI) CLUTCH REGI
transparency or paper.
ROLL TURN MSI

CLUTCH TURN
ROLL ASSY FEED (MSI) ROLL PINCH TURN
ROLL TURN MSI
Ida_06_006D
Figure 2-45. Retard & Regi Assy

2.5.6 Front Assy In

MAIN FUNCTIONS
HOLDER ASSY CTD

Reads the density of the toner image formed on the BTR surface in the BTR ASSY LATCH L CHUTE ASSY DUP IN
(See“2.5.8 BTR Assy & Fuser Assy (p114)”) and sends the result to the process
control section. Refer to “2.8.4 Process Control (p125)”. LATCH R
SENSOR TNR FULL

Detects that the waste toner box in the BTR ASSY (See “2.5.8 BTR Assy & Fuser
Assy (p114)”) is full.
DRIVE ASSY FUSER
Supplies the driving to the FUSER ASSY (See “2.5.8 BTR Assy & Fuser Assy
(p114)”).
LATCH R and LATCH L
Pushing up the LATCH R (button A) activates the LATCH L, which is connected
to the LATCH R with the SHAFT LATCH, to open the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN
toward front. CHUTE ASSY DUP IN
MAIN CHASSIS
LATCH L
LATCH R
LATCH R
CHUTE ASSY
DUP IN
Ida_06_133B
DRIVE ASSY FUSER

Figure 2-47. Front Assy In (2)
HOLDER ASSY CTD
SENSOR TNR FULL

Ida_06_007C
Figure 2-46. Front Assy In (1)

2.5.7 Chute Assy Out

SENSOR FULL STACK
MAIN FUNCTIONS
ROLL EXIT
SENSOR FULL STACK
MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM
Detects that the amount of ejected papers on the top cover exceeded a certain level
based on the change in position of the Actuator. (Full stack: Light enters the
sensor)
SENSOR DUP JAM
Detects that the paper has reached/passed the ROLL DUP based on the change in
position of the Actuator. (Paper present: Light enters the sensor)
SENSOR NO PAPER
Detects presence of papers on the MSI according to the change in position of the
Actuator. (No paper state: Shielding the sensor) HOLDER LEVER OUT
SENSOR DUP JAM
SOLENOID FEED MSI
PLATE LATCH
Controls the operation of the ROLL ASSY FEED (MSI) (rotating/halt) by
controlling the rotation of the GEAR MSI. ROLL DUP

When the SOLENOID FEED MSI is activated, the SPRING FEED MSI moves
the GEAR MSI and the GEAR IDLER IN into engagement, and the ROLL ASSY
FEED (MSI) starts to rotate by the transmitted drive force of the DRIVE ASSY
MAIN to feed a paper from the manual paper tray.
A notch on the GEAR MSI moves the GEAR MSI and the GEAR IDLER IN out
of engagement when the GEAR MSI makes one revolution. This cuts the drive GEAR MSI
force from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN and stops the ROLL ASSY FEED (MSI). SENSOR NO PAPER (MSI)
Thus, the papers in the manual paper tray can be fed one by one.
SOLENOID FEED MSI
ROLL DUP
ROLL ASSY FEED (MSI) ROLL PINCH TURN
This is rotated by the driving of the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM, and transports a
one-side printed paper that comes back from the CHUTE ASSY REGI to the
ROLL TURN MSI (See “2.5.5 Retard & Regi Assy (p110)”).
MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM
Transmits the driving to the ROLL EXIT and the ROLL DUP.
ROLL TURN MSI
ROLL EXIT
This is rotated by the driving of the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM, and transfers the ROLL ASSY RETARD (MSI)
Ida_06_008C
paper, which is already fixed, to the top cover. When performing duplex printing,
it reverses the direction of rotation to transfer the fixed one-side printed paper
toward the Regi.
Figure 2-48. Chute Assy Out (1)

PLATE LATCH
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
Pressing the HOLDER LEVER OUT (button B) pushes the PLATE LATCH,
releases the PLATE LATCH from the tab of the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN, and
opens the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT toward front of the printer.
HOLDER LEVER OUT
PLATE LATCH
PLATE LATCH
CHUTE ASSY DUP IN
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
CHUTE ASSY DUP IN
HOLDER LEVER OUT
PLATE LATCH
Ida_06_134B
Figure 2-49. Chute Assy Out (2)

2.5.8 BTR Assy & Fuser Assy

MAIN FUNCTIONS
FAN FRONT
FUSER ASSY
The FUSER ASSY fixes the unsteady toner on the paper by the heat and the FUSER ASSY
pressure, and also transfers the paper before and after the fixing.
The FUSER ASSY mainly consists of the components shown below.
Heat Roll Belt Unit

Heater Lamp (MAIN/SUB) Roll Assy Exit
Thermostat Exit Sensor
Thermistor Fuser EEPROM (option)
Fuser NCS STS
Chute Exit Dup
Exit Sensor
Detects the current position of the fixed paper based on the change in position
of the Actuator.
BTR ASSY Exit Sensor

The BTR ASSY consists of the BTR (Bias Transfer Roll) and the Waste Toner
Collection System.
The BTR is located on the opposite side of the IDT2 included in the PHD ASSY,
and transfers the toner image on the IDT2 to the paper.
FAN FRONT BTR ASSY
Fan to cool the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY.
Ida_06_009C
Figure 2-50. BTR Assy and Fuser Assy (1)
Continue to the next page.

Thermostat Lever Jam

Fuser NCS Lever Jam
STS
Chute Exit Dup
Lever Nip
Heat Roll
Heater Lamp
HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC
Fuser Belt
FRONT
Actuator
Exit Sensor
Lever Jam
Lever Jam
Heat Roll Chute Exit Dup
Fuser Belt
FRONT Ida_06_135A.eps
FRONT Ida_06_138C

2.5.9 Xerographics FRAME ASSY DEVE

The FRAME ASSY DEVE handles developing in the print process.
MAIN FUNCTIONS The FRAME ASSY DEVE consists of the following parts:
ROS ASSY Developer (Y) Developer (C)

ROS ASSY (Raster Output Scanner Assembly) is the exposure unit that outputs Developer (M) Developer (K)
the laser beam to make the electrostatic latent image on the drum surface.
In this manual, items concerning the ROS ASSY are simply called “ROS”.
The ROS ASSY mainly consists of the components shown below.
FRAME ASSY DEVE
Quad Beam Laser Diode Lens
ROS ASSY
Scanner Motor Assy Mirror
SOS PWB Window
PHD ASSY
PHD ASSY
The PHD ASSY handles a sequence of charging and transferring in the print
process.
The PHS ASSY consists of the following parts:
Drum (Y) IDT1 Cleaner (two)

Drum (M) Refresher (Y)
Drum (C) Refresher (M)
Drum (K) Refresher (C)
RTC (Y) Refresher (K)
RTC (M) IDT2
RTC (C) IDT2 Cleaner
RTC (K) Tricle
IDT1 (two)
DEVE ASSY
Ida_06_010B
Figure 2-53. Xerographics

2.5.10 Toner Cartridge

ACTUATOR TCRU ASSY
SENSOR 2
MAIN FUNCTIONS TCRU ASSY
COIL ASSY CRUM READER

This PWB consists of the toner bottle switches and the CRUMs for each color.
DISPENSER
Toner Bottle Switch ASSY
CRUM
Detects whether the Toner Cartridges (Toner Bottles) for each color are Toner Bottle Switch
installed or not.
TCRU ASSY(Y)
CRUM
Stores information specific to the printer. TCRU ASSY(M)
COIL ASSY CRUM READER

SENSOR NO TNR (Y) TCRU ASSY(C)
TCRU ASSY(K)
SENSOR NO TNR (M)
SENSOR NO TNR (C)
SENSOR NO TNR (K) DISPENSER ASSY(K)
(Toner Motor : K)
Detects whether toner for each color is left or not.
DISPENSER ASSY(C)
DISPENSER ASSY (Y) (Toner Motor: Y) (Toner Motor : C)
DISPENSER ASSY (M) (Toner Motor: M) DISPENSER ASSY(M)

(Toner Motor : M)
DISPENSER ASSY (C) (Toner Motor: C)

DISPENSER ASSY(Y)
DISPENSER ASSY (K) (Toner Motor: K) (Toner Motor : Y)
The Toner Motor in the DISPENSER ASSY for each color drives both the
Agitator in the Toner Cartridge and the Auger in the DISPENSER ASSY, and
delivers toner to the Developer in the FRAME ASSY DEVE. The Nozzle of the
DIPENSER ASSY, which is connected to the FRAME ASSY DEVE, moves back
and forth in conjunction with opening and closing of the COVER ASSY TOP
SENSOR NO TNR(Y)
PHD.
SENSOR NO TNR(M)
Toner Cartridge (Y) SENSOR NO TNR(C)

SENSOR NO TNR(K)
Toner Cartridge (M) Ida_06_011C
Figure 2-54. Toner Cartridge (1)

Toner Cartridge (C)
Toner Cartridge (K)
Toner bottles that contain toner for each color.

COVER ASSY TOP PHD

GUIDE FRAME DEVE L
STUD TOP
NOZZLE
FRAME ASSY DEVE PHD ASSY
STUD TOP COVER ASSY TOP PHD
GUIDE FRAME DEVE L
NOZZLE
FRAME ASSY DEVE PHD ASSY Ida_06_137A
Figure 2-55. Toner Cartridge (2)

2.5.11 Frame & Drive

MAIN FUNCTIONS
DRIVE ASSY MAIN

Supplies the driving to the parts shown below and other parts.
PICK UP ASSY
HOLDER ASSY RETARD
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT (MSI section)
CHUTE ASSY REGI
PHD ASSY (IDT2, IDT1, Drum)
BTR ASSY
DRIVE ASSY DEVE

Supplies the driving to the parts shown below and other parts. DRIVE ASSY DEVE
FRAME ASSY DEVE (Develper) DRIVE ASSY MAIN
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT FRAME ASSY DEVE

PHD ASSY
GEAR DEVE INPUT(Y)

IDT 2 Deve Motor
Magnet Roll
BTR ASSY
GEAR DEVE INPUT(M)
Main Motor Magnet Roll
GEAR MSI GEAR DEVE INPUT(C)

Magnet Roll
GEAR DEVE INPUT(K)

Magnet Roll
GEAR IDLER IN
DRIVE ASSY MAIN
PICK UP ASSY
DRIVE ASSY DEVE
FRONT FRONT
Ida_06_012C
Figure 2-56. Frame and Drive

2.5.12 Electrical PWBA EEPROM

Stores information specific to each printer.
MAIN FUNCTIONS HARNESS ASSY AC INLET
Consists of the connector section connected to the LVPS and the inlet section
FAN REAR connected to the power cord, and supplies the AC voltage to the LVPS from the
Prevents overheating inside the printer by exhausting/inhaling the ambient air. power source.
SWITCH
Operates the main switch of the LVPS. PWBA ESS MAIN
(PWB CONTROLLER)
LVPS
There are two types of the LVPS; 100/120 V and 230 V.
HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK
The LVPS not only provides AC voltage to the FUSER ASSY heater from the HVPS
power source, but generates/supplies stable low DC voltage that is required for PWBA EEPROM
parts such as the logic circuit. FAN REAR
The LVPS consists of the power circuit and the control circuit for the FUSER
ASSY heater.
PWBA MCU IDTN
Controls the print operations by communicating with the printer controller and
analyzing the information from the sensors and switches.
Communicates with the printer controller
LVPS
Controls the DRIVE ASSY MAIN, DRIVE ASSY DEVE, DRIVE ASSY
FUSER, MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM, and Toner Motor in the DISPENSER
ASSY.
Allocates the low DC voltage output from the LVPS among each component
Controls the ROS ASSY
HVPS
Supplies the high voltage, which is required for “charging”, “developing”,
“primary transfer”, “secondary transfer”, “third transfer”, and “cleaning” in the
print process, to the BTR ASSY and the parts shown below located inside the HARNESS ASSY AC INLET
FRAME ASSY DEVE, and PHD ASSY.
PWBA MCU IDTN SWITCH
RTC IDT2
Refresher IDT1 Cleaner Ida_06_013D
Developer IDT2 Cleaner Figure 2-57. Electrical

IDT1


Turns off when any one of the front covers (the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD and the COVER ASSY TOP PHD) is opened,
and cuts off the output circuit (24 VDC) from the LVPS.
COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD LATCH TOP IR R COVER ASSY TOP PHD COVER ASSY TOP PHD
COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD LATCH TOP IR R
LVPS LVPS
HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK
Electrical (1) Ida_06_139A

Figure 2-58. Interlock Off Figure 2-59. Interlock On

2.6 Switch and Sensor

ACTUATOR DUP
ACTUATOR FULL STACK
The following diagrams shows the switches and the sensors on/in the Aculaser C4200. SENSOR DUP JAM SENSOR FULL STACK
For the functions of each component, refer to “2.5 Main Structure and Function
(p104)”. FUSER ASSY (Exit Sensor, Actuator)
ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI
SENSOR NO PAPER (MSI) HOLDER ASSY CTD SENSOR TNR FULL
Toner Bottle Switch Toner Bottle Switch

Toner Bottle Switch
Toner Bottle Switch
SENSOR NO TNR (K)
SENSOR NO TNR (C)

SENSOR HUM
SENSOR NO TNR (M)
SENSOR NO TNR (Y)

SENSOR OHP
SWITCH ASSY SIZE

ACTUATOR REGI
SENSOR REGI SENSOR NO PAPER
ACTUATOR NO PAPER
SENSOR LOW PAPER
ACTUATOR LOW PAPER
ida_06_140C
Figure 2-60. Switch and Sensor
OPERATING PRINCIPLES Switch and Sensor 122

2.7 Mode 2.7.2 Operating Modes

The printer has the following six operating modes;
2.7.1 Printing Mode Wait Mode
The printing modes shown in the table below are provided for the printer. Adjusting print image quality
Switching between the modes is controlled by the printer controller. Ready Mode
The printer is ready to print
Printing Printing
Color Resolution Paper Type Printing Mode
Mode Speed
Normal 225 mm/s 600 dpi Plain Printing is in progress
Slow 1 112.5 mm/s 600 dpi Plain, Thick, Envelope Error Mode
Slow 1 112.5 mm/s 1200 dpi Plain, Thick, Envelope The printer has detected an error
B/W Plain, Thick, Extra thick,
Slow 2 75 mm/s 600 dpi Initializing Mode
Label The printer detected that new parts is installed at the moment (e.g. Idling after new
Plain (High gloss), Deve Unit is installed)
Slow 3 75 mm/s 600 dpi
Transparency
Normal 161 mm/s 600 dpi Plain Checking Unit Mode
Slow 1 112.5 mm/s 600 dpi Plain, Thick, Envelope Checking the consumables
Slow 1 112.5 mm/s 1200 dpi Plain, Thick, Envelope
Full color Plain, Thick, Extra thick,
Slow 2 112.5 mm/s 600 dpi
Label
Plain (High gloss),
Slow 3 75 mm/s 600 dpi
Transparency
OPERATING PRINCIPLES Mode 123

2.8 Control 2.8.2 Paper Feeder Selection Control

Unless specified by the printer controller, tray 1 is selected as a default feeder at
2.8.1 Paper Size Control power-on.
The following tabel shows the ON/OFF status of the Paper Size Switch in the SWITCH The feeder section of the paper tray at the bottom of the printer is
C A U T IO N
ASSY SIZE according to the paper size. named “tray 1”, and the three trays of the optional Paper Cassette
Unit are referred to as “tray 2”, “tray 3”, and “tray 4” from the
C A U T IO N The Paper Size Switches are referred to as “SW1”, “SW2”, and top.
“SW3” from the top.
2.8.3 ROS Light Intensity Control

An image data converted to electric signals (translates the data into differences in
Table 2-2. Paper Size Control
voltage) is sent to the laser diode in the ROS ASSY, and the laser diode converts the
Paper Size Switch electric signals to the light signals (controls ON/OFF of the laser beam).
Paper size:
SW1 SW2 SW3 The laser diode monitors and controls the light intensity of the laser beam to create
stable electrostatic latent image without being affected by the fluctuations of the laser
LEGAL14" (SEF) ON ON ON
beam intensity, optical system (such as lenses) and drum sensitivity.
LEGAL13" (SEF) ON ON OFF The ROS of this printer has laser diodes for each yellow, magenta, cyan, and black, and
EXECUTIVE (SEF) ON OFF ON the light intensity for each color is automatically adjusted.
B5 (SEF) ON OFF OFF
A4 (SEF) OFF ON ON
LETTER (SEF) OFF OFF ON
A5 OFF ON OFF
No cassette OFF OFF OFF
OPERATING PRINCIPLES Control 124

2.8.4 Process Control Overview of the control is described below.
In order to perform stabilized printing, it is necessary to adjust the parameters related to 1. Sets the target value for the drum charging voltage and the developer DC voltage
forming images on a timely basis. The control of whole print process including by detecting temperature and humidity with the SENSOR HUM (temperature and
adjustment of the parameters is referred to as “process control”. The main controls are humidity sensor).
as follows:
2. Creates four patches (yellow, magenta, cyan, and black) onto the BTR for bias
Electric potential control control. For the configuration of the patches, see the figure below.
Toner density control
Approx.11mm
The additional controls to cover the above two controls are as follows:
Approx.
Y
High Area Coverage Mode 12mm
Approx.

3mm
Admix Mode
M Approx.
LED light intensity setting by the HOLDER ASSY CTD 57mm
C
ELECTRIC POTENTIAL CONTROL
To acquire stabilized print image density, the drum charging voltage and the developer
K
DC charging voltage should be adjusted depending on the developing performance
which can be changed by various factors. The adjusted drum charging voltage and the
developer DC voltage are reflected in the print process control every time the
adjustments are made. Figure 2-61. Patches for Bias Control
Electric potential control is performed just before the printing when any of the 3. The density of the patches and the none-toner area on the BTR is measured with
following is met. the HOLDER ASSY CTD (density sensor).
At the first print out after the power-on 4. Changes the drum charging voltage and the developer DC voltage individually for
The number of the printed pages after the power-on is exceeded 25 pages each color in accordance with the differences between the density measured in
step 3 and the target value set in step 1.
When performing cleaning cycle during continuous printing

TONER DENSITY CONTROL 3. Toner Dispense Example

The time that the Toner Motor spend for one revolution is predetermined and
To acquire stabilized print images, toner density should be kept constant. To keep the fixed. The toner dispense time described in 1) and 2) is calculated as the number of
toner density constant, the amount of toner to be refilled should be exact the same as revolutions of the Toner Motor. In the following explanations, the number of
the amount used for printing. The mechanism to enable the exact refill is called revolutions of the Toner Motor is called “Dispense Count”.
“PCDC”. However, as the PCDC alone is not enough to adjust the toner density, The Dispense Count calculated in the ADC process is completed during printing
another mechanism to support the PCDC is required. This mechanism is called toner eight pages.
density control by the HOLDER ASSY CTD. These two mechanisms are referred to as For example, if the Dispense Count is judged to be lacking and require 16 times
the toner density control. addition, the required 16 times are divided by eight and the additional revolutions
are made two times per one page printing. At that time, the Dispense Count
calculated in the PCDC process are added.
1. PCDC (Pixel Conut Dispense Control) When the ADC Dispense Count is judged to require 16 times decrease, the 16
Calculates the amount of toner to be used in the developing process by counting times are subtracted from the PCDC Dispense Count during subsequent print jobs
the video signals that are input to the ROS ASSY. The video signal is counted by (eight pages). If the decreasing times exceeds the PCDC Dispense Count,
counting the number of charging and discharging of the capacitor in the CR circuit unfinished decreasing is performed during printing the next eight pages.
which is arranged in parallel with the video signal lines. The amount of consumed
toner is calculated as toner dispense time. Refilling toner as much as the consumed
amount can be made by driving the corresponding Toner Motor(s) in the Total Dispense Count Additional 16 times are divided up evenly between the next 8 pages
DISPENSER ASSY for the calculated period of time (toner dispense time). When adding 16 is
required by ADC
2. ADC (Auto Density Control)
PCDC Dispense Count
Creates four patches (yellow, magenta, cyan, and black) on the BTR under the
given electrical conditions, and measures their density with the HOLDER ASSY When subtrasting 8 is
CTD. The measured density is compared with the reference one, and the toner required by ADC
dispense time is increased/decreased in subsequent print process when the Total Dispense Count
measured density is lower/higher than the reference density. The amount of toner engine principle0044FA
to be refilled is calculated as toner dispense time. This is calculated for each of the Figure 2-62. Toner Dispense
four colors.
The ADC is performed after a print job is finished when any of the following is
met.
The number of the printed pages after the power-on is exceeded 25 pages
When performing cleaning cycle during continuous printing

HIGH AREA COVERAGE MODE The light intensity is determined (light intensity setting) and adjusted (light intensity
adjustment) as described below.
The Toner Dispense control cannot keep up with heavy consumption of toner, such as 1. Light Intensity Setting
printing pages with high print ratio continuously, and leads to lower the toner density. The amount of reflected light can change a lot after replacing the BTR ASSY or
High Area Coverage Mode is provided to resolve the problem. In this mode, if the cleaning the HOLDER ASSY CTD. Therefore, the light intensity setting is
Dispense Count reaches to a certain level during performing continuous printing, performed when the printer is turned on, and when the front cover is opened/
feeding the next paper is temporarily stopped to perform the toner dispense. closed.
In the setting, the output value from the HOLDER ASSY CTD is monitored while
gradually increasing the light intensity of the LED, and the light intensity is
determined just after the output value exceeds the prescribed level. If the output
ADMIX MODE value does not reach the prescribed level with the highest light intensity, the
printer judges that the HOLDER ASSY CTD should be cleaned. When an
Even with the High Area Coverage Mode, there are some cases that cannot prevent the
extremely high output value is detected, the printer judges it as HOLDER ASSY
toner density from lowering. For example, if the printer used in a hot and humid place
CTD failure.
is moved to a cold and dry place, it will make a big difference between the reference
toner density and that measured with the HOLDER ASSY CTD because the reference 2. Light Intensity Adjustment
density level has been set for corresponding with the environment condition. This adjustment is performed just before creating patches for controlling toner
density in the ADC process.
Admix Mode is used in such case to stabilize the toner density. If the measured toner
The LED emits light at currently set intensity to check if the output value from the
density with the HOLDER ASSY CTD is substantially below the reference level, toner
dispense is performed immediately after the measurement. HOLDER ASSY CTD is within the prescribed range. When the detected output
value is below the prescribed level, the LED light intensity is increased at the next
ADC process, and when that is higher, the light intensity is decreased at the next
ADC process.
LED LIGHT INTENSITY CONTROL BY HOLDER ASSY CTD If the output value is below the level 1 lower limit, the printer judges that the
sensor becomes soiled and causes a warning. If the value is lower than the level 2
The HOLDER ASSY CTD is a reflective sensor. It emits light against the target lower limit, the printer judges that the sensor should be cleaned and stops a print
(patches and non-toner area on the BTR) and detects the reflected light from the target job.
with its light-sensitive element. According to the detected amount of light, it outputs
electric signals. To take an accurate measurement, the sensor output value (amount of
reflected light) obtained when emitting light against non-toner area on the BTR should
be adjusted to the prescribed level, as the amount of reflected light depends on whether
the BTR surface and HOLDER ASSY CTD surface are clean or not. To obtain the
prescribed amount of reflected light regardless of the conditions, the light intensity
emitted by the LED is controlled.

2.8.5 Color Registration Control Overview of the control is described below.
This printer uses a tandem-type engine that equips exclusive drums and developer units 1. Measures the output value of the HOLDER ASSY CTD when it is detecting non-
for each Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black. As a full-color print image is generated by toner area on the BTR, and determines the threshold value.
overlaying four images formed on the drums for each color, there is a possibility that 2. Creates color registration control patches on the BTR. The patches are bold lines
color shift may occur. To prevent this, color registration control calculates the amount
with a width of 10 mm and arranged in the order of K, K, C, K, M, K, Y as shown
of the registration shift and adjusts the writing timing of the ROS. Also, the lateral
in the figure below (the first K-black line is created once, and the subsequent six
registration control adjusts the color shift of four colors in the lateral direction.
lines are repeated four times).
Color registration control is performed when executing the process control based on
the change of temperature inside the printer and the number of printed pages. K
K
C
K
M
K
About the perimeter
of BTR Y
Figure 2-63. Color Registration Control Patch
3. Measures the density of the created patches with the HOLDER ASSY CTD.
4. Calculates the registration shift amount by comparing the threshold value
determined in Step 1 and the measured value in Step 3.
5. Changes the ROS writing timing based on the obtained shift amount.

2.8.6 BTR ASSY Control BTR ASSY LIFE DETECTION
BTR ASSY ATTACHMENT DETECTION The BTR ASSY consists of the BTR and the waste toner collection system. The life of
the assy is detected by sensing full state of the Waste Toner Space.
The printer detects whether the BTR ASSY is properly installed or not at power-on or Full state of the waste toner space is detected by the SENSOR TNR FULL.
when opening/closing the front cover. There is no dedicated sensor for detecting it, so
the detection is made by detecting output from the HOLDER ASSY CTD.
The printer judges that the BTR ASSY is installed when the HOLDER ASSY CTD Timing to check if the waste toner space is full
output value is within the prescribed range. If the value is below the prescribed level,
the BTR is turned one-half to let the HOLDER ASSY CTD to output again for the At power-on, or when opening/closing the front cover
different area on the BTR, because the low output might have been caused by toner When ejecting papers
image on the BTR which is remained due to paper jam. If the output value obtained by
the retry is the same or more than the prescribed level, the printer judges that the BTR Outputting BTR Life Warning (Worn Transfer Unit)
ASSY is installed, if not, the printer determines that the assy is not installed. Once the SENSOR TNR FULL detects the full state, the BTR Life Warning
(Worn Transfer Unit) message is displayed.
Outputting BTR Life Error (Replace Transfer Unit)
After the BTR Life Warning (Worn Transfer Unit) occurs, the printer starts to
count the number of printed pages and the toner dispense time, and when the
cumulated value exceeds a certain level, it causes a BTR Life Error (Replace
Transfer Unit).
Releasing BTR Life Warning (Worn Transfer Unit)/BTR Life Error (Replace
Transfer Unit)
If the SENSOR TNR FULL does not detect the full state at power-on or when
opening/closing the front cover, the BTR Life Error (Replace Transfer Unit) and
the BTR Life Warning (Worn Transfer Unit) are canceled.

2.8.7 Toner Control Releasing the No Toner Warning (uuuu Toner Low)/No Toner Error (Replace
Toner uuuu)
The Toner Cartridge Switch in the COIL ASSY CRUM READER detects whether the Toner dispensing is performed for 1.7 seconds when a new Toner Cartridge is
Toner Cartridge is installed or not, and the presence of toner in the Toner Cartridge is installed to detect the toner presence. And then, when the SENSOR NO TNR
detected by the SENSOR NO TNR. Toner Cartridges for each color have own switches detects that the cartridge has toner, the No Toner Warning (uuuu Toner Low) or
and sensors, and they detect the status individually. the No Toner Error (Replace Toner uuuu) is canceled.
However, the one detection by the SENSOR NO TNR cannot change the “no toner
status” condition inside the printer. The condition recovers to normal when the
printer detects “toner presence” signal from the SENSOR NO TNR more than
ABOUT SENSOR NO TNR three times in a row after the toner dispensing.
Toner Cartridges for each color have their own SENSOR NO TNRs. Outputting Toner Tape Remaining Error (Install uuuu TnrCart)
The SENSOR NO TNR, which is located on the DISPENSER ASSY, detects the Toner Toner dispensing is performed for 1.7 seconds when a new Toner Cartridge is
Cartridge presence delivered from the Toner Cartridge into the DISPENSER ASSY by installed to detect the toner presence. When “toner presence” is not detected, the
the Toner Motor. toner dispensing is performed again for 1.7 seconds after 5 seconds interval. If the
Since the SENSOR NO TNR malfunctions if the surface is contaminated by toner or printer fails to detect toner presence after performing toner dispensing three times,
something, it is cleaned up by the film attached near the Auger inside the DISPENSER and if the toner dispensing time is 0, the printer judges that the tape is still attached
ASSY when dispensing toner. This film rotates together with the Auger when to the toner cartridge. (Install uuuu TnrCart).
dispensing toner, and scrapes off the remaining toner on the surface of the SENSTOR The printer also causes the error when the toner sensor detects “no toner status”
NO TNR. Because the film rotates and contacts with the SENSOR NO TNR as during printing with insufficient dispensing time.
mentioned above, it may hinder the sensor’s operation causing a false detection
depending on the position of the film when the Toner Motor stops. However, this false
detection is avoided by the internal control of the engine controller.
TONER PRESENCE CONTROL
Overview of the control is described below.

Execution Timing
At power-on, or when opening/closing the front cover
During printing
Outputting No Toner Warning (uuuu Toner Low)

The printer causes No Toner Warning (uuu Toner Low) when the counter of the
Toner Cartridge reaches a certain level.
Outputting No Toner Error (Replace Toner uuuu)
When the SENSOR NO TNR detected “No Toner” with certainty, No Toner Error
(Replace Toner uuuu) occurs.

2.8.8 Fuser Control SENSOR WARMUP
FUSER TEMPERATURE CONTROL The Fuser NCS (non-contact sensor) located at the center of the Heat Roll cannot
detect temperature correctly if the temperature of the sensor itself is minus 5 degrees C
The Fuser Temperature Control sets up the target temperature at all times, and turns or lower. If the printer detects the condition, it warms up the sensor until the sensor
On/Off the Heater Lamp so that the surface temperature of the Heat Roll becomes the temperature becomes 0 degree C. This is called “sensor warm-up”.
target temperature.
The surface temperature of the Heat Roll is detected by the Fuser NCS (non-contact
temp sensor) located at the center of the Heat Roll and the STS (Soft Touch Sensor).
The NCS detects the temperature every 10 ms. The Heater Lamp is turned off if the
measured temperature is higher than the target, on the other hand, the Heater Lamp is
turned on if the measured temperature is lower than the target.
If the STS comes off from the Heat Roll, correct temperature detection becomes
impossible. It may cause the FUSER ASSY to melt or take fire during warm-up
process because the printer heats up the FUSER ASSY according to the false
temperature which is lower than the actual one. In order to prevent this, the Heater
Lamp is automatically turned off if the temperature of the FUSER ASSY does not
reach a predetermined level within specified period of time.
The target temperature varies depending on conditions such as during standby,

printing, or executing process control. The target temperature also changes according
to the temperature detected by the SENSOR HUM (temperature and humidity sensor),
temperature difference between the center and the edges of the Heat Roll, print mode,
and input power voltage.
COOL-DOWN
When the printing is continued for a certain period of time, temperature distribution on
the Heat Roll surface becomes uneven. Cool-down is performed to equalize the surface
temperature of the Heat Roll by not feeding papers for a while.If the temperature of the
Heat Roll edges is high, the printer stops feeding paper until the temperature falls to the
target level.

2.9 Detection Mechanisms

The following shows a list of detection functions.
Table 2-3. Sensors

Unit Detection Item Availability Detection Method Remarks
MP tray Paper presence detection Available Actuator + Photo-interruptive sensor
Paper size detection Enter the paper size from control panel or
Not available –
printer driver
Remaining paper detection Not available –
Standard Paper Cassette Unit Cassette presence detection Available Switch One sensor detects both cassette presence and
Paper size detection Available paper size.
Paper presence detection Available Actuator + Photo-interruptive sensor One sensor detects both cassette presence and
Remaining paper detection (50±20 paper size.
Available
sheets)
Paper ejection from printer Full detection Available Actuator + Photo-interruptive sensor
Other OHP sensor Available Reflective photosensor
(Reference) Temperature detection Available Environment sensor
(Reference) Humidity detection Available Environment sensor
(Reference) Density detection Available Reflective density sensor
Toner Cartridge New part detection Available CRUM
Presence Detection Available Switch + CRUM
Color detection Different configuration + CRUM
Available
(Misinstallation detection)
Near-end detection Available Software counter
End detection Available Photosensor
Photoconductor Unit New part detection Available CRUM
(PHD) Unit detection Available CRUM
End detection Available Software counter
OPERATING PRINCIPLES Detection Mechanisms 132

Table 2-3. Sensors

Unit Detection Item Availability Detection Method Remarks
Fuser Unit New part detection Available CRUM
Unit detection Available Electrical continuity
Transfer Unit (BTR) New part detection Not available –
Unit detection Available Density sensor
Waste toner full detection Available Photosensor + software counter
Near-end detection Available Waste toner full detection
550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit Unit detection Available Electrical continuity
Cassette presence detection Available Switch One sensor detects both cassette presence and
Paper presence detection Available paper size.
Option Feeder Unit
Remaining paper detection Available Actuator + Photo-interruptive sensor One sensor detects both cassette presence and
1,100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit Unit detection Available Electrical continuity

Cassette presence detection Available Switch One sensor detects both cassette presence and
Paper presence detection Available paper size.
Remaining paper detection Available Actuator + Photo-interruptive sensor One sensor detects both cassette presence and
OPERATING PRINCIPLES Detection Mechanisms 133

2.10 Features of the Controller Table 2-4. List of Controller Outline Specifications
Item Description
MAIN FEATURES ROM Connector 90pin DIMM
specifications
A4 color tandem engine (manufactured by FX ppm: 25 ppm (Color)/35 ppm Device capacity C533PROG, FLASH 16MB
(Monochrome))
Font Built-in PROG
Resolution: 600 dpi/1200 dpi (printing speed reduces by half at 1200 dpi)
Extended ROM slot 1 slot
Clock frequency: 166.7 MHz
Optional ROM PCL5C
PowerPC 750FX 600 MHz equipped SDRAM Specifications DDR333
DDR333 SDRAM standard: 128 MB (Max. 1 GB) Standard SDRAM 200pin SO DIMM 128 MB
Wide panel (with back light) SDRAM slot 2 slot

Max. SDRAM capacity 1 GB
I/F: IEEE1284, USB2.0, Network
PWM Device SP4NX-C (E05C031A)
Program ROM DIMM: 16 MB (standard), ROM DIMM PCL5C (option)
Control panel Specifications Wide panel
Switch x 6
OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS
LED x 3
with back light
The following shows the outline specifications of the controller.
Parallel Item IEEE1284 compliance
Table 2-4. List of Controller Outline Specifications Transceiver Built-in FAIO
Item Description USB Specifications USB2.0 HS
Engine specifications Specifications A4 color tandem TypeB Specifications Installed
Printing speed Color: 25 ppm Optional IDE HDD LPHD5 40 GB
B/W: 35 ppm HDDBoard C82385* SUB
CPU Device PowerPC 750FX-600 Network standard Specifications 100Base-TX/10Base-T
ASIC Memory ASICVideo FMV + PLD
ASIC
I/O ASIC FAIO
Panel PCC
Clock Clock driver HD151TS311
Clock frequency 166.7 MHz
Reset Reset IC M51957BFP
OPERATING PRINCIPLES Features of the Controller 134

DIAGRAM Table 2-5. Main element explanation

IC Name Reference Function/Specification
Overview concerning connections of the clock and the data bus is shown below.
CPU • Device: PoserPC 750FX-600
IC101
• Clock speed: 600MHz
FMV IC102 ASIC for memory control and video control
FAIO IC401 ASIC for I/O control
PLD (Programable Logic Device) IC103 Interface between CPU and FMV
PWM (Pulth Width Modulation) Pulse duration of video signal control IC
IC602 • Controls frequency between FMV and
engine I/F.
EEPROM Stores printer setting information, history,
IC402 and so on.
• Capacity: 256 Kbyte
SSCG Clock generator
(Spread Spectrum Clock Generator) IC501 • Controls emission noise from devices by
fluctuating frequency among them.
PCC IC400 Panel control IC
RESET IC Resets the system by detecting power-on,
IC502
power-off, and intermittent discontinuity.
Table 2-6. Signal explanaiton

Signal Name Function
CPUCLK System clock for CPU
SPD A signal for getting DIMM information
EVCLK Video clock
PDCLK PWM clock
VIDEOX CMYK Video signal
HSYNCX CMYK Hsync signal
PD CMYK Video data
VSYNCX CMYK Vsync signal
CMD Engine command signal
STS Engine status signal
FAIOCLK System clock for FAIO
CPSCLK System clock for PCC
Figure 2-64. Block Diagram of the Circuitry

2.10.1 Power Supply

The power source diagram is shown below.
Figure 2-65. Power Source Diagram

CHAPTER
3
TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1 Procedure for Troubleshooting 3.1.2 Preliminary Check

Before starting troubleshooting, make sure that the following conditions are all met.
For efficient troubleshooting, verify the condition of the trouble carefully using FIP
(Fault Isolation Procedures) with reference to Chapter7 “Connectors” (p.471) and 1. The power supply voltage must be within the specification limits.
Chapter2 “OPERATING PRINCIPLES” (p.81). (Measure the voltage at the wall socket.)
2. The power cord must be free from damage, short circuit or breaking, and should be
connected properly to the power source.
3.1.1 Procedure for Troubleshooting 3. The printer must be grounded properly.
Perform troubleshooting work according to the following flowchart. 4. The printer should not be located in a place where it can be exposed to too high or
low temperature, too high or low humidity, or abrupt temperature change.
Check the installation status

5. The printer should not be located near waterworks, humidifiers, heaters or flames,
in a dusty atmosphere, or in a place where the printer can be exposed to air blasts
from an air conditioner.
6. The printer should not be located in a place where volatile or inflammable gasses
Check the trouble condition Chapter2 “OPERATING PRINCIPLES” (p.81) are produced.
Chapter7 “Connectors” (p.471) 7. The printer should not be located in a place where it can be exposed to direct
sunlight.
Troubleshoot using FIP 8. The printer must be located in a well-ventilated place.
9. The printer must be placed on a solid, stable and flat surface.
Reference 10. The paper used must conform to the specifications. (Standard paper is
Check if the trouble returns recommended.)
to normal
11. There should be no errors in handling of the printer.
12. The Regular Replacement Parts must have been replaced every time their
Finish respective specified number of sheets has been printed.
13. Be sure to make a test print with a new paper after reinstalling the Photoconductor
Figure 3-1. Procedure for Troubleshooting unit and the FRAME ASSY DEVE.
TROUBLESHOOTING Procedure for Troubleshooting 138

3.1.3 Precautions in Performing Troubleshooting Work

1. Be sure to unplug the power cord before starting troubleshooting work unless
instructed to plug it in.
W A R N IN G Never touch any live parts unnecessarily when the power is on.
The power switch/inlet part of the LVPS is alive even when the
power switch is turned OFF. Take care not to touch any live parts.
2. If you perform work with the power turned ON, covers removed, and the interlock
and safety switches turned ON, be sure to disconnect the ROS ASSY connector (P/
J151), except when its connection is required.
W A R N IN G If you perform work with the power turned ON, covers removed,
and the interlock and safety switches turned ON, there is a danger
of the laser beam being emitted from ROS ASSY. Be sure to
disconnect the ROS ASSY connector (P/J151), except when its
connection is required.
3. If you perform work with the power turned ON, the LEFT COVER removed, be
sure to disconnect the HVPS connector (P/J141), except when its connection is
required.
W A R N IN G If you perform work with the power turned ON, the LEFT COVER
removed, be sure to disconnect the HVPS connector (P/J141) as the
HVPS may output high voltage. Be extremely careful not to touch
the HVPS and the parts that output high voltage while connecting
P/J141 connector on the HVPS following the instructions in FIP.
4. When touching any hot surfaces, take care not to burn yourself.
5. Wear a wrist strap to discharge static electricity from your body.

3.1.4 Notes on Using FIP 7. Taking “P/J1-2PIN ´ P/J3-4PIN” as an example, the minus side “P/J3-4PIN” is AG
(Analog Ground), SG (Signal Ground), or RTN (Return). Therefore it is possible
1. The troubleshooting method described here assumes that there is no malfunction to connect to another AG, SG, or RTN pin as the minus side instead of “P/J3-
in the printer controller (PWB CONTROLLER). If you cannot fix a problem even 4PIN”. Before doing so, check that each AG-to-AG, SG-to-SG, or RTN-to-RTN
by following the troubleshooting procedure, replace the printer controller with a has continuity properly. Be careful not to connect to a wrong pin since the level of
normal one and then follow the same procedure. AG, SG and RTN are different from each other.
If you cannot recover the printer from the trouble even with the printer controller
replaced, replace the “Possible parts that caused the error” shown in FIP and 8. When measuring the voltage, perform measurement with the Photoconductor unit,
related parts with new ones one by one, and repeat operation checks. Fuser unit, Transfer unit and paper cassette loaded, FRONT-COVER ASSY
closed, and power ON.
2. Have spares of the MCU PWB, Photoconductor unit, and any other part in
advance as they may be required to identify the cause of the trouble in FIP 9. All voltage values given in the FIP are approximate values. Actual measured
troubleshooting. values should not be completely the same as those given in the FIP.
3. Be sure to unplug the power code before starting troubleshooting work unless 10. Note that FIP does not provide any description on removal of parts which are
instructed to plug it in. Never touch any live parts unnecessarily with the power supposed to be removed to remove the target part, and the procedures.
cord connected. 11. Any parts listed in “Possible parts that caused the error” in the FIP are regarded as
4. Conventions used to represent connectors are as follows: the source of the trouble and signifies that the parts or the assemblies (HIGH
P/J12: Indicates P/J12 connectors are connected. ASSY) containing those parts should be replaced with normal ones one by one,
P12: Indicates the disconnected plug side. and checking should be repeated.
(except when connecting directly on the board) 12. In the FIP, the paper feeder is called “Tray1”, the optional feeder is called “tray2”
J12: Indicates the disconnected jack side. (upper one), “tray3” (lower one).
(except when connecting directly on the board)
13. FIP may contain descriptions that distinguish between certain specifications. Be
5. When, for example, “P/J1-2PIN´ P/J3-4PIN” is indicated in FIP for the voltage sure to follow such instructions properly to remedy the problem.
check, set the plus side of a measuring tool to “2PIN” on “P/J1” and set the minus
side of the tool to “4PIN” on “P/J3”.
6. When, for example, “P/J1 ´ P/J2” is indicated in FIP for the voltage check, check
for all the relating terminals between “P/J1” and “P/J2” with reference to the
Chapter7 “Connectors” (p.471).

3.2 Paper Jam

If the paper jam occurs, the printer stops the operation and displays the error code on the panel.
W A R N IN G When removing the jammed paper, be sure to wait until the Fuser
unit or any other metal part in the printer cools down enough to
work.
Perform paper jam-related troubleshooting work according to the following flowchart.
Ask the operator about the conditions of the trouble.

Was the operator operating the printer correctly? Teach the operator the right way.
N
Y
Ask the operator again to verify the condition at the time of

Is an error code displayed on the panel? jamming, and execute a print job in the same conditions.
N
Y Y N
Is the error code described in Perform the troubleshooting following the instructions in
3.2.3 Check Points for Frequent Paper Jam? 3.2.3 Check Points for Frequent Paper Jam.
Y N
Perform the troubleshooting with reference Perform the troubleshooting with reference to the FIP given
to the Paper Jam FIP. for the error message.
TROUBLESHOOTING Paper Jam 141

3.2.1 Paper Transferring Path and The Main

Components
The diagram below shows the paper transferring path and the main sensors.
: Paper feed direction
FRONT
: Jam detection sensors
: Paper state detection sensors SENSOR FULL STACK
ROLL EXIT
Exit Sensor
FUSER ASSY
SENSOR DUP JAM
DRUM ROLL DUP
Base Engine
BTR
CLUTCH REGI
SENSOR NO PAPER
SENSOR OHP
SENSOR REGI
CLUTCH TURN
SENSOR LOW PAPER

SENSOR NO PAPER ROLL ASSY TURN (PICK UP ASSY)
ROLL ASSY FEED (FEED)
ROLL ASSY FEED (NUDGER)
SENSOR LOW PAPER

1 Tray Feeder*
SENSOR NO PAPER CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC

SENSOR LOW PAPER

SENSOR NO PAPER CLUTCH ASSY
2 Tray Feeder*
SENSOR LOW PAPER

SENSOR NO PAPER CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC
- Note "*"-
1 Tray Feeder: 550-sheet paper cassette Ida_01_021B
2 Tray Feeder: 1100-sheet paper cassette

The diagram below shows the main components that are related to paper transferring
: Paper feed direction
MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM
DRIVE ASSY FUSER

DRIVE ASSY MAIN
Base Engine
SOLENOID FEED MSI
CLUTCH REGI
CLUTCH TURN
CLUTCH
ELECTRO MAGNETIC SOLENOID FEED SWITCH ASSY SIZE
1 Tray Feeder
DRIVE ASSY
CLUTCH ASSY SOLENOID FEED SWITCH ASSY SIZE
DRIVE ASSY 2ND
2 Tray Feeder
CLUTCH
ELECTRO MAGNETIC
Ida_01_041A

3.2.2 Paper Jam Handling (FIP) FIP-J1 Paper Jam in MP Tray / Paper Cassette
Handle the paper jam according to where it occurred.
[Paper Jam in MP Tray]
Close covers after removing the jammed paper. When the jammed paper completely
removed, the printer will cancel the alarm and restart printing automatically. The paper jammed in the MP tray should be removed in the following steps.
If the paper jam occurs frequently, check the cause of the paper jam with reference to 1. Pull out the jammed paper from
3.2.3 Check Points for Frequent Paper Jam, and perform cleaning for each roller if the MP tray to remove the paper.
necessary.
C H E C K Always follow the procedure in this manual when removing the

P O IN T jammed paper. If you try to pull out the jammed paper
forcedly, it will tear and the remaining pieces of paper may
prevent the paper being transmitted normally.
Confirm that the paper has been removed completely. Most Ida_01_022B
paper jam can be resolved by removing the paper completely.

2. Temporarily close the MP tray.
Once the jammed paper has been removed, the printer starts to
print the queue data first. The queue data cannot be printed 3. Push up the button A located on
first depending on where the paper jam occurred. the front side , and open the
front cover . Then, check to see
if any pieces of torn paper remain
W A R N IN G Wait for the parts on which a label indicating CAUTION, HOT inside the printer.
(e.g. Fuser and its surroundings) is attached to cool sufficiently
before touching them. Otherwise, you will burn yourself.
Ida_01_023B
4. Close the front cover.

[Paper Jam in Standard Tray] 4. If the jammed paper cannot be

seen, lower the CHUTE ASSY
The paper jammed in the standard tray should be removed in the following steps.
FEEDER located inside the
1. Pull the paper tray out slowly and opening in which the paper tray
remove it from the printer. has been installed , and pull
out the jammed paper .
Ida_01_027B
5. Push up the button A located on

the front side , and open the
Ida_01_024B
2. Remove the jammed paper or the if any pieces of torn paper remain
wrinkled paper. inside the printer.
Id 01 023B
Ida_01_025A 7. Push the paper tray all the way
3. When pulling out the paper into the printer.
jammed inside the printer, be
careful not to tear it.
Ida_01_026B Ida_01_028B
C A U T IO N Do not push in the tray forcedly. Otherwise, the tray or the inside of
the printer may be damaged.

FIP-J2 Paper Jam inside Printer
1. Push up the button A located on 3. Return the levers located on both

the front side , and open the sides of the Fuser Unit to their
front cover . original positions.
Ida_01_032B
Ida_01_031B 4. Close the front cover.

2. Push down the levers on both
ends of the Fuser Unit, and
remove the jammed paper. If the
paper tears, remove the pieces of
paper that remain inside the
printer.
Ida_01_030B
Ida_01_029A
C A U T IO N Do not touch the fuser section as it is hot. Otherwise, you will burn
yourself.

FIP-J3 Paper Jam in Paper Eject Section 4. Close the front cover.
1. Push up the button B located on

the right side , and open the
upper part of the front cover .
Ida_01_033B
5. Push up the button A located on

front cover .
Ida_01_031B
2. Push up the levers on both ends of

the Fuser Unit, and remove the
jammed paper. If the paper tears,
remove the pieces of paper that
remain inside the printer.
Ida_01_023B
6. If the jammed paper can be seen,

remove it and proceed to Step 7.
Ida_01_032B If the jammed paper cannot be
seen, close the front cover. In this
C A U T IO N Do not touch the fuser section as it is hot. Otherwise, you will case, the following steps are not
burn yourself. required.
Remove the Fuser unit and check if the paper remains in the
printer.
3. Return the levers located on both sides of the Fuser Unit to their original Ida_01_034B
positions.

7. Close the front cover. 10. When pulling out the paper
careful not to tear it.
Ida_01_026B
11. If the jammed paper cannot be

Ida_01_030B
seen, lower the CHUTE ASSY
FEEDER located inside the
C A U T IO N When the paper jam occurs in the fuser section, the next paper may opening in which the paper tray
have been already fed from the paper tray. Make sure to check that has been installed , and pull
no paper is remaining in the printer following Step 8 through 14. out the jammed paper .
8. Pull the paper tray out slowly and

remove it from the printer. If the Ida_01_027B
optional paper cassette unit is 12. Push up the button A located on

installed, remove the lower tray the front side , and open the
first. front cover . Then, check to see
inside the printer.
Ida_01_024B
9. Remove the jammed paper or the

wrinkled paper.
Ida_01_023B
Ida_01_025A

13. Close the front cover. FIP-J4 Paper Jam in the Duplex Assy
1. Push up the button B located on

the right side , and open the
upper part of the front cover .
Ida_01_030B
14. Push the paper tray all the way

into the printer.
Ida_01_031B
2. Remove the jammed paper. If the

paper tears, remove the pieces of
paper that remain inside the
printer.
Ida_01_028B
Ida_01_035A
Ida_01_033B

FIP-J5 Paper Jam in the Option Cassette 4. Push up the button A located on
1. Remove the cassettes beginning
at the bottom one to find the
inside the printer.
jammed paper.
Ida_01_038B
Ida_01_036B
C A U T IO N If paper is jammed just after being fed from the tray, the paper
may be in contact with the bottom of the upper tray. The upper
cassette or the standard tray may not be removed due to the paper
jammed in the cassette located lower than them.
Ida_01_039B
2. Remove the jammed paper or the
wrinkled paper. 6. Push the paper tray all the way
into the printer.
Ida_01_025A
3. When pulling out the paper

careful not to tear it. If the paper Ida_01_040B
tears, pieces of torn paper remain

inside the printer.

3.2.3 Check Points for Frequent Paper Jam

When paper jams occur frequently, check the following:
Table 3-1. Check Points for Frequent Paper Jam
Areas where the paper jam is
LED Message Check point Remedy
occurring
Common to all areas • Both type and size of the paper used should meet the specifications for the printer.
• The paper used should be new, dry and free from any curl or damage.
• The paper should be loaded in the tray properly. It should not be placed separately, and aligned against the side and
end guide properly.
--- ---
• There should be no foreign matters on the paper transferring path.
• The parts comprising the paper transferring path should not have any burrs, scratches, and damages.
• The amount of the paper loaded in the tray should be within the specification.
• The Photoconductor unit should be installed properly.
• The lower part of the Photoconductor The following rollers should be installed properly without dirt or misalignment.
unit • ROLL ASSY FEED
• Option Feeder • ROLL ASSY RETARD (MSI) FIP-J1
Paper Jam A C • ROLL TURN MSI (p144),
(Feed Jam) • ROLL ASSY TURN FIP-J5
• CHUTE ASSY FEEDER (p150)
• ROLL ASSY FEED
• ROLL ASSY RETARD (Paper Cassette)
On the path from the MP tray or the • The Photoconductor unit should be installed properly.
Paper Jam A paper tray to the Photoconductor unit. • The ROLL REGI RUBBER and ROLL REGI METAL should be installed properly without dirt or misalignment. FIP-J2
(Regi Jam) • The SENSOR REGI should be installed properly. (p146)
• The Actuator of the above sensor should be installed properly without dirt or misalignment.
On the path from the Photoconductor • The rollers inside the Transfer unit should be installed properly without dirt or misalignment.
unit to the Fuser unit • The rollers inside the Fuser unit should be installed properly without dirt or misalignment.
Paper Jam A B • The rollers inside the ROLL EXIT and ROLL PINCH ASSY should be installed properly without dirt or FIP-J3
(Fuser Jam) misalignment. (p147)
• The Exit Sensor inside the Fuser unit should be installed properly.
On the path from the Duplex Assy exit • The ROLL DUP and ROLL PINCH DUP should be installed properly without dirt or misalignment.
Paper Jam B to the Photoconductor unit FIP-J4
• The SENSOR REGI and SENSOR DUP should be installed properly.
(Duplex Jam) (p149)

3.3 Level 1 FIP 3.3.2 The flow of Level 1 FIP
3.3.1 Level 1 FIP

Ask the operator about the conditions of the trouble. N
The Level 1 FIP is the first step to diagnose troubles. The Level 1 FIP diagnoses a error Was the operator operating the printer correctly?
code and various types of trouble conditions, and the Level 2 FIP provides instructions
Y
for troubleshooting.
Turn the power switch off N Instruct the operator how

and back on. to operate the printer.
Does the error recur when

making a printout in a N
End of procedure
condition in which the
error occurred?
Y
Refer to 3.4.1 List of Warnings and Errors.

When a LCD massage is
displayed.
Refer to 3.4.3 Engine-related Trouble FIP.
When paper jam is

occurring. Refer to 3.2 Paper Jam.
When a print quality

problem is occurring. Refer to 3.4.5 Print Quality Trouble FIP.
Refer to 3.5.1 Abnormal Noise-related

When abnormal noise is Troubleshooting Entry Chart.
being generated.
Refer to 3.5.2 Abnormal Noise-related FIP.
TROUBLESHOOTING Level 1 FIP 152

3.4 Level 2 FIP

The Level 2 FIP is failure diagnosis procedure that is classified based on error codes or various types of trouble conditions.
The cause of trouble can be determined in short period of time by using the procedures described in the FIP or check points.
3.4.1 List of Warnings and Errors

3.4.1.1 Main Unit
Table 3-2. List of Warnings and Errors (Main Unit)
Operation*
Class LCD Message Description See FIP
Solution
Y Toner Low A remaining amount of yellow toner fell to below about 20 %. The printer continues printing.
FIP-27 (p.183)
Replace the Toner cartridge (Y).
M Toner Low A remaining amount of magenta toner fell to below about 20 %. The printer continues printing.
FIP-28 (p.184)
Replace the Toner cartridge (M).
C Toner Low A remaining amount of cyan toner fell to below about 20 %. The printer continues printing.
FIP-29 (p.185)
Replace the Toner cartridge (C).
K Toner Low A remaining amount of black toner fell to below about 20 %. The printer continues printing.
FIP-30 (p.186)
Replace the Toner cartridge (K).
Worn Photoconductor Photoconductor unit reached the end of its life cycle. The printer continues printing.
FIP-22 (p.180)
Replace the Photoconductor unit.
Warning
Worn Transfer Unit Transfer unit is approaching the end of its life cycle. The printer continues printing.
FIP-31 (p.187)
Replace the Transfer unit.
Worn Fuser Fuser unit reached the end of its life cycle. The printer continues printing.
FIP-32 (p.188)
Replace the Fuser unit.
Worn Y Dev Unit DEVE ASSY (Y) is approaching the end of its life cycle. The printer continues printing.
FIP-24 (p.181)
Replace the DEVE ASSY (Y).
Worn M Dev Unit DEVE ASSY (M) is approaching the end of its life cycle. The printer continues printing.
FIP-24 (p.181)
Replace the DEVE ASSY (M).
Worn C Dev Unit DEVE ASSY (C) is approaching the end of its life cycle. The printer continues printing.
FIP-24 (p.181)
Replace the DEVE ASSY (C).
Worn K Dev Unit DEVE ASSY (K) is approaching the end of its life cycle. The printer continues printing.
FIP-24 (p.181)
Replace the DEVE ASSY (K).


Operation*
Solution
Install Y TnrCart The Toner Bottle Switch detected Toner cartridge (Y) was not installed. The printer cannot print.
FIP-1 (p.163)
Install Toner cartridge (Y).
A toner tape has not been pulled out from Toner cartridge (Y). The printer cannot print.
FIP-45 (p.199)
Pull out the toner tape and install the toner cartridge.
Install M TnrCart The Toner Bottle Switch detected Toner cartridge (M) was not installed. The printer cannot print.
FIP-2 (p.163)
Install Toner cartridge (M).
A toner tape has not been pulled out from Toner cartridge (M). The printer cannot print.
FIP-44 (p.198)
Pull out the toner tape.
Install C TnrCart The Toner Bottle Switch detected Toner cartridge (C) was not installed. The printer cannot print.
FIP-3 (p.164)
Install Toner cartridge (C).
A toner tape has not been pulled out from Toner cartridge (C). The printer cannot print.
FIP-44 (p.198)
Install K TnrCart The Toner Bottle Switch detected Toner cartridge (K) was not installed. The printer cannot print.
FIP-4 (p.164)
Install Toner cartridge (K).
Error
A toner tape has not been pulled out from Toner cartridge (K). The printer cannot print.
FIP-44 (p.198)
Install Photoconductor Photoconductor unit is not installed. The printer cannot print.
FIP-5 (p.165)
Install Photoconductor unit.
Install Transfer Unit Transfer unit is not installed. The printer cannot print.
FIP-6 (p.166)
Install Transfer unit.
Install Fuser The printer detected that Fuser unit was not installed. The printer cannot print.
FIP-7 (p.167)
Install the Fuser unit.
The ID of the Fuser unit differs from the recorded one. The printer cannot print.
FIP-43 (p.197)
Replace the Fuser unit.
Replace Toner Y Toner cartridge (Y) is empty. The printer cannot print.
FIP-35 (p.190)
Replace Toner M Toner cartridge (M) is empty. The printer cannot print.
FIP-36 (p.191)


Operation*
Solution
Replace Toner C Toner cartridge (C) is empty. The printer cannot print.
FIP-37 (p.192)
Replace Toner K Toner cartridge (K) is empty. The printer cannot print.
FIP-38 (p.193)
Replace Photoconductor unit is approaching the end of its life cycle. The printer continues printing.
Photoconductor FIP-39 (p.194)
Replace Transfer Unit The Transfer unit reached the end of its life cycle. The printer cannot print.
FIP-40 (p.195)
Replace the Transfer unit.
Wrong The ID of the Photoconductor unit differs from the recorded one. The printer cannot print.
Photoconductor FIP-8 (p.167)
Wrong Toner Y The ID of the Toner cartridge (Y) differs from the recorded one. The printer cannot print.
FIP-42 (p.196)
Wrong Toner M The ID of the Toner cartridge (M) differs from the recorded one. The printer cannot print.
FIP-42 (p.196)
Error
Wrong Toner C The ID of the Toner cartridge (C) differs from the recorded one. The printer cannot print.
FIP-42 (p.196)
Wrong Toner K The ID of the Toner cartridge (K) differs from the recorded one. The printer cannot print.
FIP-42 (p.196)
TonerCart Error Y Toner cartridge (Y) CRUM communication error occurred. The printer cannot print.
FIP-44 (p.198)
Turn the printer off and back on.
TonerCart Error M Toner cartridge (M) CRUM communication error occurred. The printer cannot print.
FIP-44 (p.198)
TonerCart Error C Toner cartridge (C) CRUM communication error occurred. The printer cannot print.
FIP-44 (p.198)
TonerCart Error K Toner cartridge (K) CRUM communication error occurred. The printer cannot print.
FIP-44 (p.198)
Clean Sensor The signal level of the HOLDER ASSY CTD is out of specified range. The printer cannot print.
FIP-25 (p.181)
Clean the HOLDER ASSY CTD and close the front cover.


Operation*
Solution
Printer Open The front cover is opened. The printer cannot print.
FIP-26 (p.182)
Close the front cover.
Paper Out ttt sss The paper cassette has run out of paper. The printer continues printing feeding papers from another paper
cassette. FIP-32 (p.188)
Load “sss”-sized paper in the “ttt” cassette.
Install LC1 The standard paper cassette is not installed, or not installed properly. The printer continues printing feeding papers from another paper
cassette. FIP-33 (p.189)
Insert the paper cassette properly.
Face-down Full A full state of the Paper Eject Tray was detected. The printer cannot print.
FIP-34 (p.189)
Take out the printed papers on the Paper Eject Tray.
LC3 error 001 The printer detected that two optional 550-sheet paper cassettes are The printer cannot print.
installed. Remove one of the cassette units following the option installation FIP-46 (p.199)
specification.
Check Transparency • Plain paper is detected while transparency is selected as media. The printer cannot print.
Error
• Transparency is detected while plain paper is selected as media. Remove the jammed paper and turn the printer off and back on. FIP-9 (p.168)
• Transparency is detected at power-on, or when the interlock is closed.
Paper Jam A C The SENSOR REGI could not detect paper within the specified time. The printer does not feed the next paper after ejecting the current paper.
Open the cassette or Cover A to remove the jammed paper, then close FIP-10 (p.169)
the front cover.
Paper Jam A The SENSOR REGI could not detect paper within the specified time, or the The printer cannot print.
sensor detected paper presence when the printer was turned on or when the Open Cover A, or opening cover D and removing the Photoconductor
interlock was closed. FIP-11 (p.171)
Unit may be required to remove the jammed paper. Then close the front
cover.
Paper Jam A B The Exit Sensor in the Fuser could not detect paper within the specified The printer cannot print.
time, or the sensor detected paper presence when the printer was turned on Open Cover A and Cover B to remove the jammed paper, then close the FIP-12 (p.172)
or when the interlock was closed. front cover.
Paper Jam B The SENSOR DUP JAM could not detect paper within the specified time, or The printer cannot print.
the sensor detected paper presence when the printer was turned on or when Open Cover B to remove the jammed paper, then close the front cover. FIP-13 (p.173)
the interlock was closed.
Note *: Describes the printer action when the warning or error occurs.

3.4.1.2 Options
Table 3-3. List of Errors (550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit)

Operation*
Solution
Paper Jam A C The SENSOR REGI could not detect paper within the specified time. The printer does not feed the next paper after ejecting the current paper. FIP-O1 (p200)
Open the cassette or Cover A to remove the jammed paper, then open
and close the front cover.
Paper Out ttt sss The optional 550-sheet paper cassette has run out of set-sized (sss) paper. The printer continues printing feeding papers from another paper FIP-O2 (p202)
Error
cassette.
Load the “sss”-sized paper in the cassette.
Install LC1 The optional 550-sheet paper cassette is not installed, or not installed The printer continues printing feeding papers from another paper FIP-O3 (p202)
properly. cassette.
Insert the paper cassette correctly.
Table 3-4. List of Errors (1100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit)

Operation*
Solution
Paper Jam A C The SENSOR REGI could not detect paper within the specified time. The printer does not feed the next paper after ejecting the current paper. FIP-O5 (p204)
Open the cassette or Cover A to remove the jammed paper, then open
and close the front cover.
Paper Out LC3, LC4, The optional 1100-sheet paper cassette has run out of set-sized (sss) paper. The printer continues printing feeding papers from another paper FIP-O6 (p207)
Error
(LC2) sss cassette.

Load the “sss”-sized paper in the cassette.
Install LC1 The optional 1100-sheet paper cassette is not installed, or not installed The printer continues printing feeding papers from another paper FIP-O7 (p207)
(LC2, LC3) properly. cassette.
Insert the paper cassette correctly.

3.4.2 List of Service Request

1
Table 3-5. List of Service Request

Operation*
Class Code Description See FIP
Solution
100 • Laser power has weakened. The printer cannot print. FIP-14 (p.174)
• SOS signal cannot be detected. Go to FIP.
101 • The printer detected that the Temp Sensor is broken. The printer cannot print. FIP-15 (p.174)
• Abnormal high temperature was detected (approx. 250 degrees C or more). Go to FIP.
• Abnormal low temperature was detected during printing (approx. 100 degrees
or lower).
• Abnormal temperature difference was detected between the center and the end
of the Fuser Roll.
• The printer detected that the circuit for the Fuser Roll center sensor is in failure.
• The printer detected that the Fuser Roll center sensor is abnormal.
• Abnormal warm-up time was detected. (Ready waiting time exceeded 60
seconds.)
• Abnormal low temperature was detected (approx. 180 seconds or more).
Engine Related (E)
• Abnormal Temp sensor warm-up time was detected (approx. 30 minutes or

more at 0 degree C or less).
102 NV-RAM error The printer cannot print. FIP-16 (p.175)
Go to FIP.
103 The HOLDER ASSY CTD power has weakened. The printer cannot print. FIP-17 (p.175)
Go to FIP.
104 Fan Motor failure. The printer cannot print. FIP-18 (p.176)
Go to FIP.
105 Motor failure (Main Drive Motor/Deve Motor/Fuser Motor) The printer cannot print. FIP-19 (p.177)
Go to FIP.
106 Firmware error The printer cannot print. FIP-20 (p.178)
Go to FIP.
107 • Temperature of 100 degrees or more, or 20 degrees or less was detected. The printer cannot print. FIP-21 (p.179)
• Humidity of 100 % or more was detected. Go to FIP.
201 DEVE ASSY (Y) reached its end of life. The printer cannot print. FIP-41 (p.195)
Go to FIP.


Operation*
Solution
202 DEVE ASSY (M) reached its end of life. The printer cannot print.
Go to FIP.
203 DEVE ASSY (M) and (Y) reached its end of life. The printer cannot print.
Go to FIP.
204 DEVE ASSY (C) reached its end of life. The printer cannot print.
Go to FIP.
205 DEVE ASSY (C) and (Y) reached its end of life. The printer cannot print.
Go to FIP.
206 DEVE ASSY (C) and (M) reached its end of life. The printer cannot print.
Go to FIP.
207 DEVE ASSY (C), (M) and (Y) reached its end of life. The printer cannot print.
Go to FIP.
Engine Related (E)
208 DEVE ASSY (K) reached its end of life. The printer cannot print.
Go to FIP.
FIP-41 (p.195)
209 DEVE ASSY (K) reached its end of life. The printer cannot print.
Go to FIP.
210 DEVE ASSY (K) and (Y) reached its end of life. The printer cannot print.
Go to FIP.
211 DEVE ASSY (K), (M) and (Y) reached its end of life. The printer cannot print.
Go to FIP.
212 DEVE ASSY (K) and (C) reached its end of life. The printer cannot print.
Go to FIP.
213 DEVE ASSY (K), (C) and (Y) reached its end of life. The printer cannot print.
Go to FIP.
214 DEVE ASSY (K), (C) and (M) reached its end of life. The printer cannot print.
Go to FIP.
215 DEVE ASSY (K), (C), (M) and (Y) reached its end of life. The printer cannot print.
Go to FIP.


Operation*
Solution
CPU error (undefined interruption) The printer cannot print.
0017
Go to FIP.
CPU error (TLB modification exception) The printer cannot print.
0081
Go to FIP.
CPU error (TLB miss exception [Load/Fetch]) The printer cannot print.
0082
Go to FIP.
CPU error (TLB miss exception [Store]) The printer cannot print.
0083
Go to FIP.
CPU error (address error exception [Load/Fetch]) The printer cannot print.
0084
Go to FIP.
CPU error (address error exception [Store]) The printer cannot print.
Controller Related (C)
0085
Go to FIP.
“3.4.4
CPU error (bus error exception [Fetch]) The printer cannot print. Controller-
0086
Go to FIP. related Trouble
FIP (p209)”
CPU error (bus error exception [Load/Store]) The printer cannot print.
0087
Go to FIP.
CPU error (SYSCALL exception) The printer cannot print.
0088
Go to FIP.
CPU error (Break exception) The printer cannot print.
0089
Go to FIP.
CPU error (reserving command exception) The printer cannot print.
0090
Go to FIP.
CPU error (unused coprocessor exception) The printer cannot print.
0091
Go to FIP.
CPU error (FPU exception) The printer cannot print.
0092
Go to FIP.


Operation*
Solution
CPU error (TLB exception) The printer cannot print.
0093
Go to FIP.
CPU error (XTLB exception) The printer cannot print.
0094
Go to FIP.
CPU error (cache exception) The printer cannot print.
0095
Go to FIP.
CPU error (Trap exception) The printer cannot print.
0096
Go to FIP.
CPU error (FPU exception) The printer cannot print.
0097
Go to FIP.
CPU error (watch exception) The printer cannot print.
0098
Go to FIP.
“3.4.4
CPU error (undefined trap) The printer cannot print. Controller-
0128-0254
FIP (p209)”
CPU error (NMI exception) The printer cannot print.
0255
Go to FIP.
CPU error (divide by 0) The printer cannot print.
0256
Go to FIP.
CPU error (arithmetic overflow) The printer cannot print.
0257
Go to FIP.
CPU error (break occurrence) The printer cannot print.
0258
Go to FIP.
IPL error (controller defect) The printer cannot print.
0800
Go to FIP.
Engine communication error (only when power-on) The printer cannot print.
0998
Go to FIP.


Operation*
Solution
Engine flash ROM has no program data The printer cannot print.
999
Go to FIP.
Standard RAM error (not installed, etc.) The printer cannot print.
1000
Go to FIP.
Standard RAM error (standard stack is undefined, etc.) The printer cannot print.
1001
Go to FIP.
Standard RAM error (standard size is undefined, etc.) The printer cannot print.
1002
Go to FIP.
RAM error (slot 0) The printer cannot print.
1020
Go to FIP.
“3.4.4
RAM error (slot 1) The printer cannot print. Controller-
1021
FIP (p209)”
Engine initialization error The printer cannot print.
1400
Go to FIP.
Loopback test failure of network board The printer cannot print.
1700
Go to FIP.
Network board uninstalled The printer cannot print.
1702
Go to FIP.
Other hardware errors The printer cannot print.
1999
Go to FIP.
CPU error (undefined interruption) The printer cannot print.
0017
Go to FIP.

3.4.3 Engine-related Trouble FIP FIP-2 Install M TnrCart
3.4.3.1 Main Unit Step Check Yes No

Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2].
FIP-1 Install Y Tnrcart 1 Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? part(s) correctly.
• Toner cartridge (M)
Step Check Yes No
• COIL ASSY CRUM READER
1 Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? part(s) correctly.
• ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 (M)
• HARNESS ASSY TNR
• Toner cartridge (Y)
Continuity Check of the Toner Bottle Switch Go to Step [3]. Replace the COIL
• COLL ASSY CRUM READER 2 (M) ASSY CRUM
• ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 (Y) 1. Disconnect P/J342 connector of COIL READER. (p340)
• HARNESS ASSY TNR ASSY CRUM READER.
Continuity Check of the Toner Bottle Go to Step [3]. Replace the COIL 2. While pressing the Toner Bottle
2 Switch(Y) ASSY CRUM Switch(M), check the P342-
1. Disconnect P/J342 connector of COIL READER. (p340) 5PIN<=>P342-3PIN for continuity.
ASSY CRUM READER. Is there normal continuity between them?
2. While pressing the Toner Bottle Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Replace the Replace the
Switch(Y), check the P342- 3 TNR PWBA MCU HARNESS
5PIN<=>P342-4PIN for continuity. 1. Disconnect P/J342 connector on the COIL IDTN. (p351) ASSY TNR.
Is there normal continuity between them? ASSY CRUM READER, and P/J51
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Replace the Replace the connector of PWBA MCU IDTN.
3 TNR PWBA MCU HARNESS 2. Check the continuity of J51<=>J342.
1. Disconnect P/J342 connector on the COIL IDTN. (p351) ASSY TNR. Is there normal continuity between them?
ASSY CRUM READER, and P/J51
connector of PWBA MCU IDTN.
C H E C K Error-Related Harness(es)
2. Check the continuity of J51<=>J342.
P O IN T HARNESS ASSY TNR (J51-J342)
Is there normal continuity between them?
P O IN T HARNESS ASSY TNR (J51-J342)

FIP-3 Install C TnrCart FIP-4 Install K TnrCart
Step Check Yes No Step Check Yes No

Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2].
1 Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? part(s) correctly. 1 Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? part(s) correctly.
• Toner cartridge (C) • Toner cartridge (K)
• COIL ASSY CRUM READER • COIL ASSY CRUM READER
• ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 (C) • ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 (K)
• HARNESS ASSY TNR • HARNESS ASSY TNR
Continuity Check of the Toner Bottle Go to Step [3]. Replace the COIL Continuity Check of the Toner Bottle Go to Step [3]. Replace the COIL
2 Switch(C) ASSY CRUM 2 Switch(K) ASSY CRUM
1. Disconnect P/J342 connector of COIL READER. (p340) 1. Disconnect P/J342 connector of the COIL READER. (p340)
ASSY CRUM READER. ASSY CRUM READER.
2. While pressing the Toner Bottle Switch 2. While pressing the Toner Bottle Switch
(C), check the P342-5PIN<=>P342-2PIN (K), check the P342-5PIN<=>P342-1PIN
for continuity. for continuity.
Is there normal continuity between them? Is there normal continuity between them?
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Replace the Replace the Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Replace the Replace the
3 TNR PWBA MCU HARNESS 3 TNR PWBA MCU HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J342 connector on the COIL IDTN. (p351) ASSY TNR. 1. Disconnect P/J342 connector on the COIL IDTN. (p351) ASSY TNR.
ASSY CRUM READER, and P/J51 ASSY CRUM READER, and P/J51
connector of PWBA MCU IDTN. connector of PWBA MCU IDTN.
2. Check the continuity of J51<=>J342. 2. Check the continuity of J51<=>J342.
C H E C K Error-Related Harness(es) C H E C K Error-Related Harness(es)

P O IN T HARNESS ASSY TNR (J51-J342) P O IN T HARNESS ASSY TNR (J51-J342)

FIP-5 Install Photoconductor
Step Check Yes No

• Photoconductor unit
• PWBA CRUM in the Photoconductor unit
Connection Check of the PWBA CRUM Go to Step [3]. Reconnect the
2 Is the PWBA CRUM connector connected to HARNESS
the harness connector correctly? ASSY PHD2.
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. Replace the
3 PHD2 HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J710 connector on the ASSY PHD2.
FRAME ASSY DEVE and P/J484
connector of the HARNESS ASSY FAN/
PHD/MOT.
4 FAN/PHD/MOT HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J484 connector of the ASSY FAN/
HARNESS ASSY PHD2, and P/J48 PHD/MOT.
connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN.
2. Check the continuity of P484<=>J48.
Check of the Photoconductor unit Replace the End of procedure
5 Replace the Photoconductor unit with a new PWBA MCU
one. IDTN. (p351)
Does the error still occur after the
replacement?
P O IN T HARNESS ASSY PHD2 (J710-J484)
HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT (P484-J48)

FIP-6 Install Transfer Unit

P O IN T HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC (J136-J36)
Step Check Yes No
• Transfer unit
• HOLDER ASSY CTD
Cleaning of the Transfer unit Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
2 Check the BTR surface for dirt, and clean it.
Does the error still occur?
Cleaning of the HOLDER ASSY CTD Go to Step [4]. End of procedure
3 Clean the detection part of the HOLDER ASSY
CTD with a soft cloth.
Does the error still occur?
Connection Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [5]. Reinstall the
4 FSR/ADC part(s) correctly.
Is the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC is securely
connected to the HOLDER ASSY CTD?
5 FSR/ADC HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J136 connector on the ASSY FSR/ADC.
HOLDER ASSY CTD, and P/J36
Check of the HOLDER ASSY CTD Go to Step [7]. End of procedure
6 Replace the HOLDER ASSY CTD with a new
one. (p291)
replacement?
Check of the Transfer unit Replace the End of procedure
7 Replace the Transfer unit with a new one. PWBA MCU
(p290) IDTN. (p351)
replacement?

FIP-7 Install Fuser FIP-8 Wrong Photoconductor

Initial Check Reinstall the part Go to Step [2]. Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2].
1 Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? correctly.
Fuser unit • Photoconductor unit
Check of the Fuser unit Go to Step [3]. Replace the Fuser • PWBA CRUM in the Photoconductor unit
2 1. Remove the Fuser unit. (p289) unit. (p289) Connection Check of the PWBA CRUM Go to Step [3]. Reconnect the
2. Measure the resistance value of P361-
2 Is the PWBA CRUM connector connected to HARNESS
B5<=>P361-B4. the harness connector correctly? ASSY PHD2.
Is the measured value 400KΩ or less? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. Replace the
Check of the Fuser unit Go to Step [4]. Replace the Fuser
3 PHD2 HARNESS
3 1. Remove the Fuser unit. (p289) unit. (p289) 1. Disconnect P/J710 connector on the ASSY PHD2.
2. Measure the resistance value of P361- FRAME ASSY DEVE and P/J484
B2<=>P361-B3. connector of the HARNESS ASSY FAN/
PHD/MOT.
Is the measured value 7000KΩ or less?
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Replace the Replace the
4 FSR/ADC PWBA MCU HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J361 connector of the
HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC, and P/J36
IDTN. (p351) ASSY FSR/ADC.
connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 1. Disconnect P/J484 connector of the ASSY FAN/
HARNESS ASSY PHD2, and P/J48 PHD/MOT.
Check of the Photoconductor unit Replace the End of procedure
P O IN T HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC (J361-J36) 5 Replace the Photoconductor unit with a new PWBA MCU
one. IDTN. (p351)
replacement?

FIP-9 Check Transparency
Step Check Yes No

• SENSOR OHP
• CHUTE REGI IN
2 OHP HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J201 connector of the ASSY OHP.
SENSOR OHP, and P/J20 connector on
the PWBA MCU IDTN.
Replacing Check of the SENSOR OHP Replace the End of procedure
3 Replace the SENSOR OHP with a new one. PWBA MCU
(p281) IDTN. (p351)
replacement?
P O IN T HARNESS ASSY OHP (J20-J201)

FIP-10 Paper Jam A C Step Check Yes No

Operation Check of the Main Drive Motor Go to Step [9]. Go to Step [6].
5 Does the Main Drive Motor rotate when making
C A U T IO N If multi-feed error occurs, refer to the Multi-Feed in the FIP (p227).
a test print?
1. Disconnect P/J481 connector on the ASSY FAN/
DRIVE ASSY MAIN, and P/J48 PHD/MOT.
Step Check Yes No connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN.
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. 2. Check the continuity of J481<=>J48.
1 Check for the following items. Is there anything part(s) correctly Is there normal continuity between them?
wrong among them? or replace the Check of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN Go to Step [8]. End of procedure
• Installation state of the paper cassette. defective part. 7 Replace the DRIVE ASSY MAIN with a new
• Condition of the papers in the cassette. one. (p344)
• Wear or damage of the roller or gear in the Does the error still occur after the
feeder. replacement?
• Paper dust or foreign material on the paper Check the Interlock Switch Go to FIP-DC Reinstall the
path. 8 Is the Interlock Switch pressed down normally? part(s) correctly.
• Installation state of the SENSOR REGI.
• Installation state of the DRIVE ASSY 9 FRONTCLH HARNESS
MAIN. ASSY
Connection Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. Reinstall the FRONTCLH.
2 REGI SNS part(s) correctly.
CLUTCH TURN, and P/J19 connector on
the PWBA MCU IDTN.
Is the HARNESS ASSY REGI SNS connected 2. Check the continuity of J191<=>J19.
to the SENSOR REGI connector correctly? Is there normal continuity between them?
3 REGI SNS HARNESS 10 Check the CLUTCH TURN Go to Step [11] if End of procedure
the jam occurs in
Replace the CLUTCH TURN with a new one.
1. Disconnect P/J181 connector of the ASSY REGI Tray.
(p287)
SENSOR REGI, and P/J18 connector on SNS.
Does the error still occur after the Go to Step [14] if
the PWBA MCU IDTN. the jam occurs in
replacement?
2. Check the continuity of J181<=>J18. MSI.
Is there normal continuity between them? Operation Check of the SOLENOID FEED Replace the paper Go to Step [12].
Check the SENSOR REGI Go to Step [5]. End of procedure
11 if there is no
4 Replace the SENSOR REGI with a new one.
Does the Feed Gear in the Feeder rotate when
making a test print? missing part or
(p279) any other
abnormality.
replacement?


Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [13]. Replace the Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [17]. Replace the
12 FDR HARNESS 16 FRONT/DUP HARNESS
1. 1. Disconnect P/J474 connector of the ASSY FDR. 1. Disconnect P/J132 connector of the ASSY FRONT/
SOLENOID FEED, and P/J47 connector SOLENOID FEED MSI, and P/J13 DUP.
on the PWBA MCU IDTN. connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN.
2. Check the continuity of J47<=>J474. 2. Check the continuity of J13<=>P132.
Check of the SOLENOID FEED Check if the End of procedure Check of the SOLENOID FEED MSI Check if the End of procedure
13 Replace the SOLENOID FEED with a new one. spring or stopper 17 Replace the SOLENOID FEED MSI with a new spring or stopper
(p273) is securely one. (p296) is securely
Does the error still occur after the attached on the Does the error still occur after the attached on the
replacement? SOLENOID replacement? SOLENOID
FEED. FEED MSI.
Replace the Replace the
PWBA MCU PWBA MCU
IDTN if the error IDTN if the error
still occurs. still occurs.
(p351) (p351)
Operation Check of the SOLENOID FEED Replace the paper Go to Step [16].
14 MSI if there is no
Does the Feed Gear in the MSI rotate when missing part or
any other P O IN T HARNESS ASSY REGISNS (J181-J18)
making a test print?
abnormality. HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT (P481-J48)
Check of the SOLENOID FEED MSI Check if the Go to Step [16]. HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH (P191-J19)
15 Close the Interlock Switch before checking. spring or stopper HARNESS ASSY FDR (J47-J474)
Does the SOLENOID FEED MSI function is securely HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP (J13-P132)
normally? attached on the
SOLENOID
FEED MSI.
Replace the
PWBA MCU
IDTN if the error
still occurs.
(p351)

FIP-11 Paper Jam A Step Check Yes No

Check of the CHUTE ASSY REGI Check the Replace the
Step Check Yes No
7 Does the Roll rotate smoothly when turning it CHUTE ASSY CHUTE ASSY
with your hand? REGI if its gear is REGI. (p283)
engaged
correctly.
• ACTUATOR REGI Replace the
• CHUTE ASSY REGI PWBA MCU
Connection Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. Reinstall the IDTN if the error
2 REGI SNS part(s) correctly. still occurs.
Is the HARNESS ASSY REGI SNS connected (p351)
to the SENSOR REGI connector correctly?
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. Replace the Error-Related Harness(es)
3 REGI SNS HARNESS
C H E C K
P O IN T HARNESS ASSY REGISNS (J181-J18)
1. Disconnect P/J181 connector of the ASSY REGI
HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH (P191-J19)
the PWBA MCU IDTN.
(p279)
replacement?
5 FRONTCLH HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J192 connector of the ASSY
CLUTCH REGI, and P/J19 connector on FRONTCLH.
the PWBA MCU IDTN.
Check of the CLUTCH REGI Go to Step [7]. End of procedure
6 Replace the CLUTCH REGI with a new one.
(p286)
replacement?

FIP-12 Paper Jam A B Step Check Yes No

Check of the Fuser Motor Replace the End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
7 Replace the DRIVE ASSY FUSER with a new PWBA MCU
one. (p294) IDTN. (p351)
1 Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? part(s) correctly. Does the error still occur after the
replacement?
• Actuator in the Exit Sensor
• Fuser unit
• Cover C H E C K Error-Related Harness(es)
• CHUTE DUP IN P O IN T HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC (J361-J36)
• Transfer unit HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR (J52-J521)
Check of the Fuser unit connector Go to Step [3]. Replace the
2 Disconnect the Fuser unit. Are the connector defective part.
pins bent or broken?
3 FSR/ADC HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J361 connector of the ASSY FSR/ADC.
HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC, and P/J36
Check of the Fuser unit Go to Step [5]. End of procedure
4 Replace the Fuser unit with a new one. (p289)
replacement?
Operation Check of the Fuser Motor Check if the gears Go to Step [6].
5 Does the Fuser Motor rotate when making a test are properly
print? engaged.
6 TNRFULL/FSR HARNESS
DRIVE ASSY FUSER, and P/J52 TNRFULL/FSR.

FIP-13 Paper Jam B Step Check Yes No

Does the Exit Roll rotate smoothly when Check if the Check if there is
Step Check Yes No
7 turning it with your hand? papers are bent or any foreign
warped. material on the
1 Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? part(s) correctly. Replace the gears.
PWBA MCU
• MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM IDTN if the error
• ACTUATOR DUP still occurs.
• CHUTE DUP OUT (p351)
2 FRONT/DUP HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J133 connector of the ASSY FRONT/
DUP. P O IN T HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP (J133-J13, J13-P501)
SENSOR DUP JAM, and P/J13 connector
on the PWBA MCU IDTN.
Check of the SENSOR DUP JAM Go to Step [4]. End of procedure
3 Replace the SENSOR DUP JAM with a new
one. (p305)
replacement?
Operation Check of the Dup Motor Go to Step [7]. Go to Step [5].
4 While making a test print, is the paper reversed
properly by the motor operation?
5 FRONT/DUP HARNESS
MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM, and P/J13 DUP.
2. Check the continuity of J13<=>P501.
Check of the Dup Motor Replace the End of procedure
6 Replace the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM with a PWBA MCU
new one. (p308) IDTN. (p351)
replacement?

FIP-14 Service Req E100 (ROS Failure) FIP-15 Service Req E101 (Fuser Failure)

Connection Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [2]. End of procedure Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2].
1 ROS 1 Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? part(s) correctly.
Disconnect and reconnect the HARNESS Fuser unit
ASSY ROS connector. W A R N IN G
Do not turn the printer On and Off
Does the error recur even when the power is with the Fuser unit removed.
turned off and back on again? Otherwise you may get an electric
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. Replace the shock.
2 ROS HARNESS Check of the Fuser unit connector Go to Step [3]. Replace the
1. Disconnect P/J151 connector of the ROS ASSY ROS. 2 Disconnect the Fuser unit. Are the connector defective part.
ASSY, and P/J15 connector on the PWBA pins bent or broken?
MCU IDTN.
Check of the Fuser unit Go to Step [4]. End of procedure
2. Check the continuity of J15<=>J151. 3 Replace the Fuser unit with a new one. (p289)
Check of the ROS ASSY Replace the End of procedure
3 Replace the ROS ASSY. (p320) PWBA MCU
replacement?
Check of the LVPS Replace the End of procedure
Does the error still occur after the IDTN. (p351) 4 Replace the LVPS with a new one. (p347) PWBA MCU
replacement? IDTN. (p351)
replacement?
P O IN T HARNESS ASSY ROS (J15-J151)

FIP-16 Service Req E102 (NV RAM Error) FIP-17 Service Req E103 (CTD Sensor Error)

Does the error recur even when the power is Go to Step [2]. End of procedure Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2].
1 turned off and back on again? 1 Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? part(s) correctly.
Remove the part below, and reinstall it securely. Replace the End of procedure HOLDER ASSY CTD
2 • PWBA MCU IDTN PWBA MCU Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. Replace the
Does the error recur even when the power is IDTN. (p351) 2 FSR/ADC HARNESS
turned off and back on again? 1. Disconnect P/J136 connector on the ASSY FSR/ADC.
HOLDER ASSY CTD, and P/J36
Check of the HOLDER ASSY CTD Replace the End of procedure
3 Replace the HOLDER ASSY CTD with a new PWBA MCU
one. (p291) IDTN. (p351)
replacement?

FIP-18 Service Req E104 (Fan Motor Failure)

P O IN T HARNESS ASSY LV RPG (J164-J311)
Step Check Yes No
HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT (J48-P482)
• FAN FRONT
• FAN REAR
Finding a failure FAN Go to Step [3]. Go to Step [6].
2 Is it the FAN REAR that does not rotate when
Check of the FAN REAR Go to Step [4]. End of procedure
3 Replace the FAN REAR with a new one. (p247)
replacement?
Check of the LVPS Go to Step [5]. End of procedure
4 Replace the LVPS with a new one. (p347)
replacement?
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Replace the Replace the
5 LV RPG PWBA MCU HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J164 connector on the IDTN. (p351) ASSY LV RPG.
LVPS, and P/J311 connector on the
PWBA MCU IDTN.
1. Disconnect P/J482 connector of the FAN ASSY FAN/
FRONT, and P/J48 connector on the PHD/MOT.
PWBA MCU IDTN.
2. Check the continuity of J48<=>P482.
Check of the FAN FRONT Replace the End of procedure
7 Replace the FAN FRONT with a new one. PWBA MCU
(p319) IDTN. (p351)
replacement?

FIP-19 Service Req E105 (Motor Failure) Step Check Yes No

Step Check Yes No
Initial Check Replace the Go to Step [2]
1 Check for the following items. Is there anything defective part(s). when some DRIVE ASSY FUSER, and P/J52 TNRFULL/FSR.
troubles are found connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN.
wrong among them?
in the DRIVE 2. Check the continuity of J521<=>J52.
• Installation state of the DRIVE ASSY
MAIN, and wear or damage of the gears. ASSY MAIN. Is there normal continuity between them?
Go to Step [6] Check of the Fuser Motor Go to Step [9]. End of procedure
• Installation state of the DRIVE ASSY
FUSER, and wear or damage of the gears. when some 8 Replace the DRIVE ASSY FUSER with a new
troubles are found
• Installation state of the DRIVE ASSY one. (p294)
in the DRIVE
DEVE, and wear or damage of the gears. Does the error still occur after the
ASSY FUSER.
• Wear or damage of the rollers or gears in the replacement?
Go to Step [10]
unit. Check of the Interlock Switch Go to FIP-DC Reinstall the
• Foreign material in the unit.
when some
troubles are found
9 Is the Interlock Switch pressed down normally? part(s) correctly.
in the DRIVE Check of the Deve Motor Go to Step [11]. Reinstall the
ASSY DEVE. 10 Does the rotor rotate smoothly when turning it part(s) correctly.
Check of the Main Drive Motor Go to Step [3]. Reinstall the
2 Does the rotor rotate smoothly when turning it part(s) correctly.
with your hand?
with your hand? 11 FAN/PHD/MOT HARNESS
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. Replace the ASSY FAN/
DRIVE ASSY DEVE, and P/J48 PHD/MOT.
1. Disconnect P/J481 connector of the ASSY FAN/ connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN.
DRIVE ASSY MAIN, and P/J48 PHD/MOT. 2. Check the continuity of J491<=>J48.
connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. Is there normal continuity between them?
Check of the Deve Motor Go to Step [13]. End of procedure
Is there normal continuity between them? 12 Replace the DRIVE ASSY DEVE with a new
Check the Main Drive Motor Go to Step [5]. End of procedure
4 Replace the DRIVE ASSY MAIN with a new
one. (p342)
one. (p344) replacement?
Does the error still occur after the Check of the Interlock Switch Go to FIP-DC Reinstall the
replacement? 13 Is the Interlock Switch pressed down normally? part(s) correctly.
Check of the Interlock Switch Go to FIP-DC Reinstall the
5 Is the Interlock Switch pressed down normally? part(s) correctly.
Check of the Fuser Motor Go to Step [7]. Reinstall the
6 Does the rotor rotate smoothly when turning it part(s) correctly. P O IN T HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT (J481-J48, J491-J48)
with your hand? HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR (J521-J52)

FIP-20 Service Req E106 (Firmware Error) Step Check Yes No

Check of the PWBA EEPROM Replace the End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
8 Replace the PWBA EEPROM. (p350) PWBA MCU
Does the error still occur after the IDTN. (p351)
1 Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? part(s) correctly. replacement?
• PWBA MCU IDTN
• HVPS Error-Related Harness(es)
C H E C K
• PWBA EEPROM P O IN T HARNESS ASSY HVPS (J16-J141)
Check of the HVPS Go to Step [3]. End of procedure HARNESS ASSY EEPROM (J191-J144)
2 Does the error recur even after reinstalling the
HVPS?
Check of the PWBA EEPROM Go to Step [4]. End of procedure
PWBA EEPROM?
4 HVPS HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J16 connector on the PWBA ASSY HVPS.
MCU IDTN, and P/J141 connector on the
HVPS.
5 EEPROM HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J191 connector on the ASSY EEPROM.
PWBA MCU IDTN, and P/J144 connector
on the PWBA EEPROM.
Check of the PWBA MCU IDTN Go to Step [7]. End of procedure
PWBA MCU IDTN?
Check of the HVPS Go to Step [8]. End of procedure
7 Replace the HVPS. (p356)
replacement?

FIP-21 Service Req E107 (Environment Sensor Error)
Step Check Yes No

1 Is the part below installed incorrectly? part(s) correctly.
• SENSOR HUM
2 TMP HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J231 connector of the ASSY TMP.
SENSOR HUM, and P/J24 connector on
the PWBA MCU IDTN.
Check of the SENSOR HUM. Replace the End of procedure
3 Replace the SENSOR HUM with a new one. PWBA MCU
(p355) IDTN. (p351)
replacement?
P O IN T HARNESS ASSY TMP (J231-J24)

FIP-22 Worn Photoconductor FIP-23 Worn Fuser

1 Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? part(s) correctly. 1 Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? part(s).
• Photoconductor unit • Fuser unit
• PWBA CRUM in the Photoconductor unit • J361 connector of the HARNESS ASSY
Connection Check of the PWBA CRUM Go to Step [3]. Reinstall the FSR/ADC
2 HARNESS Replacing Check of the Fuser unit Replace the End of procedure
Connection check of the PWBA CRUM
Is the PWBA CRUM connector connected to ASSY PHD2. 2 Replace the Fuser unit. (p289) PWBA MCU
the harness connector correctly? Does the error still occur after the IDTN. (p351)
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. Replace the replacement?
3 PHD2 HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J710 connector of the ASSY PHD2. Error-Related Harness(es)
C H E C K
CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC. P O IN T HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC (J361-J36)
HARNESS ASSY PHD2 and the
HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT.
1. Disconnect P/J48 connector of the PWBA ASSY FAN/
MCU IDTN. PHD/MOT.
Photoconductor unit Replace the End of procedure
one. IDTN. (p351)
replacement?

FIP-24 Worn C/M/Y/K Dev Unit FIP-25 Clean Sensor

• FRAME ASSY DEVE • Transfer unit
• DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K) • HOLDER ASSY CTD
Replacing Check of the DEVE ASSY (Y/M/ Replace the End of procedure Cleaning of the HOLDER ASSY CTD Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
2 C/K) PWBA MCU 2 Clean the detection part of the HOLDER ASSY
Replace the DEVE ASSY that caused the error. IDTN. (p351) CTD with a soft cloth.
(p325) Does the error still occur?
Does the error still occur after the Connection Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [4]. Reconnect the
replacement? 3 FSR/ADC harness correctly.
1. Remove the Transfer unit. (p290)
2. Check P/J136 connector of the HOLDER
ASSY CTD for its connection state.
Is the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC is securely
connected to the HOLDER ASSY CTD?
4 FSR/ADC HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J136 connector of the ASSY FSR/ADC.
HOLDER ASSY CTD.
2. Disconnect P/J36 connector of the PWBA
MCU IDTN.
HOLDER ASSY CTD Replace the End of procedure
5 Replace the HOLDER ASSY CTD. (p291) PWBA MCU
replacement?

FIP-26 Printer Open
Step Check Yes No

• Front Cover
• HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK
HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
2 Replace the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK.
(p349)
replacement?
Continuity check of HARNESS ASSY LV Go to Step [4]. Replace the
3 1. Disconnect P/J165 connector of the LVPS. HARNESS
2. Disconnect P/J61 connector of the PWBA ASSY LV.
MCU IDTN.
LVPS Replace the End of procedure
4 Replace the LVPS. (p345) PWBA MCU
replacement?
P O IN T HARNESS ASSY LV (J165-J61)

FIP-27 Y Toner Low Step Check Yes No

DISPENSER ASSY (Y) Replace the End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
7 Replace the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). (p329) PWBA MCU
• SENSOR NO TNR
• Toner cartridge (Y) Error-Related Harness(es)
C H E C K
• Toner Motor (Y) P O IN T HARNESS ASSY TNR (J701-J51, J511-J51)
Check of the Toner cartridge(Y) Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
2 Replace the Toner cartridge (Y).
replacement?
3 TNR HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J701 connector of the ASSY TNR.
SENSOR NO TNR.
MCU IDTN.
SENSOR NO TNR Go to Step [6]. End of procedure
4 Replace the SENSOR NO TNR. (p337)
replacement?
Check of the Toner Motor (Y) Replace the Go to Step [6].
5 Does the Toner Motor (Y) function PWBA MCU
normally? IDTN. (p351)
6 TNR HARNESS
DISPENSER ASSY (Y).
MCU IDTN.

FIP-28 M Toner Low Step Check Yes No

DISPENSER ASSY (M) Replace the End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
7 Replace the DISPENSER ASSY (M). (p331) PWBA MCU
• SENSOR NO TNR
• Toner cartridge (M) Error-Related Harness(es)
C H E C K
• Toner Motor (M) P O IN T HARNESS ASSY TNR (J702-J51, J512-J51)
Check of the Toner cartridge(M) Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
2 Replace the Toner cartridge (M).
replacement?
3 TNR HARNESS
SENSOR NO TNR.
MCU IDTN.
replacement?
Check of the Toner Motor (M) Replace the Go to Step [6].
5 Does the Toner Motor (M) function PWBA MCU
6 TNR HARNESS
DISPENSER ASSY (M).
MCU IDTN.

FIP-29 C Toner Low Step Check Yes No

DISPENSER ASSY (C) Replace the End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
7 Replace the DISPENSER ASSY (C). (p333) PWBA MCU
• SENSOR NO TNR
• Toner cartridge (C) Error-Related Harness(es)
C H E C K
• Toner Motor (C) P O IN T HARNESS ASSY TNR (J703-J51, J513-J51)
Check of the Toner cartridge(C) Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
2 Replace the Toner cartridge (C).
replacement?
3 TNR HARNESS
SENSOR NO TNR.
MCU IDTN.
replacement?
Check of the Toner Motor (C) Replace the Go to Step [6].
5 Does the Toner Motor (C) function PWBA MCU
6 TNR HARNESS
DISPENSER ASSY (C).
MCU IDTN.

FIP-30 K Toner Low Step Check Yes No

DISPENSER ASSY (K) Replace the End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
7 Replace the DISPENSER ASSY (K). (p335) PWBA MCU
• SENSOR NO TNR
• Toner cartridge(K) Error-Related Harness(es)
C H E C K
• Toner Motor (K) P O IN T HARNESS ASSY TNR (J704-J51, J514-J51)
Check of the Toner cartridge(K) Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
2 Replace the Toner cartridge (K).
replacement?
3 TNR HARNESS
SENSOR NO TNR.
MCU IDTN.
replacement?
Check of the Toner Motor (K) Replace the Go to Step [6].
5 Does the Toner Motor (K) function PWBA MCU
6 TNR HARNESS
DISPENSER ASSY (K).
MCU IDTN.

FIP-31 Worn Transfer Unit
Step Check Yes No

• Transfer unit
• SENSOR TNR FULL
SENSOR TNR FULL. TNRFULL/FSR.
MCU IDTN.
SENSOR TNR FULL Go to Step [4]. End of procedure
3 Replace the SENSOR TNR FULL.
replacement?
Transfer unit Replace the End of procedure
(p290) IDTN. (p351)
replacement?
P O IN T HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR (J142-J52)

FIP-32 Paper Out ttt sss

P O IN T HARNESS ASSY FDR (J472-J47)
Step Check Yes No
HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP (J135-J13)
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2] if
1 Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? part(s) correctly. the error occurs in
• SENSOR NO PAPER Tray.
• SENSOR NO PAPER Go to Step [5] if
the error occurs in
• ACTUATOR NO PAPER
MSI.
• ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI
Does the error recur even after loading papers in Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
2 the tray?
3 FDR HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J472 connector of the ASSY FDR.
SENSOR NO PAPER.
MCU IDTN.
SENSOR NO PAPER Replace the End of procedure
4 Replace the SENSOR NO PAPER. (p271) PWBA MCU
replacement?
Does the error recur even after loading papers in Go to Step [6]. End of procedure
5 the MSI?
6 FRONT/DUP HARNESS
SENSOR NO PAPER. DUP.
MCU IDTN.
SENSOR NO PAPER Replace the End of procedure
7 Replace the SENSOR NO PAPER. (p299) PWBA MCU
replacement?

FIP-33 Install LC1 FIP-34 Face-down Full

1 Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? part(s)
• SW ITCH ASSY SIZE correctly. • SENSOR FULL STACK
• ACTUATOR SIZE • ACTUATOR FULL STACK
• 550-Sheet Cassette Assy Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. Replace the
2 FRONT/DUP HARNESS
2 FDR HARNESS 1. Disconnect P/J134 connector of the ASSY FRONT/
1. Disconnect P/J471 connector of the ASSY FDR. SENSOR FULL STACK. DUP.
SWITCH ASSY SIZE. 2. Disconnect P/J13 connector of the PWBA
2. Disconnect P/J47 connector of the PWBA MCU IDTN.
MCU IDTN. 3. Check the continuity of J134<=>J13.
3. Check the continuity of J471<=>J47. Is there normal continuity between them?
Is there normal continuity between them? SENSOR FULL STACK Replace the End of procedure
SWITCH ASSY SIZE Replace the End of procedure
3 Replace the SENSOR FULL STACK. (p304) PWBA MCU
3 Replace the SWITCH ASSY SIZE. (p266) PWBA MCU Does the error still occur after the IDTN. (p351)
Does the error still occur after the IDTN. (p351) replacement?
replacement?
C H E C K Error-Related Harness(es) P O IN T HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP (J134-J13)
P O IN T HARNESS ASSY FDR (J471-J47)

FIP-35 Replace Toner Y Step Check Yes No

DISPENSER ASSY (Y) Replace the End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
7 Replace the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). (p329) PWBA MCU
• SENSOR NO TNR
• Toner cartridge (Y) Error-Related Harness(es)
C H E C K
• Toner Motor (Y) P O IN T HARNESS ASSY TNR (J701-J51, J511-J51)
Check of the Toner cartridge (Y) Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
2 Replace the Toner cartridge (Y).
replacement?
3 TNR HARNESS
SENSOR NO TNR.
MCU IDTN.
replacement?
Check of the Toner Motor (Y) Replace the Go to Step [6].
5 Does the Toner Motor (Y) function PWBA MCU
6 TNR HARNESS
DISPENSER ASSY (Y).
MCU IDTN.
3. Check the continuity of J511<=<J51.

FIP-36 Replace Toner M Step Check Yes No

DISPENSER ASSY (M) Replace the End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
7 Replace the DISPENSER ASSY (M). (p331) PWBA MCU
• SENSOR NO TNR
• Toner cartridge (M) Error-Related Harness(es)
C H E C K
• Toner Motor (M) P O IN T HARNESS ASSY TNR (J702-J51, J512-J51)
Check of the Toner cartridge (M) Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
2 Replace the Toner cartridge (M).
replacement?
3 TNR HARNESS
SENSOR NO TNR.
MCU IDTN.
replacement?
Check of the Toner Motor (M) Replace the Go to Step [6].
5 Does the Toner Motor (M) function PWBA MCU
6 TNR HARNESS
DISPENSER ASSY (M).
MCU IDTN.

FIP-37 Replace Toner C Step Check Yes No

DISPENSER ASSY (C) Replace the End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
7 Replace the DISPENSER ASSY (C). (p333) PWBA MCU
• SENSOR NO TNR
• Toner cartridge (C) Error-Related Harness(es)
C H E C K
• Toner Motor (C) P O IN T HARNESS ASSY TNR (J703-J51, J513-J51)
Check of the Toner cartridge(C) Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
2 Replace the Toner cartridge (C).
replacement?
3 TNR HARNESS
SENSOR NO TNR.
MCU IDTN.
replacement?
Check of the Toner Motor (C) Replace the Go to Step [6].
5 Does the Toner Motor (C) function PWBA MCU
6 TNR HARNESS
DISPENSER ASSY (C).
MCU IDTN.

FIP-38 Replace Toner K Step Check Yes No

DISPENSER ASSY (K) Replace the End of procedure
Step Check Yes No
7 Replace the DISPENSER ASSY (K). (p335) PWBA MCU
• SENSOR NO TNR
• Toner cartridge (K) Error-Related Harness(es)
C H E C K
• Toner Motor (K) P O IN T HARNESS ASSY TNR (J704-J51, J514-J51)
Check of the Toner cartridge (K) Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
2 Replace the Toner cartridge (K).
replacement?
3 TNR HARNESS
SENSOR NO TNR.
MCU IDTN.
replacement?
Check of the Toner Motor (K) Replace the Go to Step [6].
5 Does the Toner Motor (K) function PWBA MCU
6 TNR HARNESS
DISPENSER ASSY (K).
MCU IDTN.

FIP-39 Replace Photoconductor

Step Check Yes No
• PWBA CRUM in the Photoconductor unit
Connection Check of the Go to Step [3]. Replace the
2 CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC CONN_ASSY_C
1. Check the connection state between the RUM_MC.
PWBA CRUM and the (p324)
CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC.
2. Check the connection state between the
PWBA CRUM and the
CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC.
Is the CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC connected
correctly?
3 PHD2 HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J710 connector of the ASSY PHD2.
CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC.
HARNESS ASSY PHD2 and the
HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT.
1. Disconnect P/J48 connector of the PWBA ASSY FAN/
MCU IDTN. PHD/MOT.
Photoconductor unit Replace the End of procedure
one. IDTN. (p351)
replacement?

FIP-40 Replace Transfer Unit FIP-41 Service Req E201, E202, E203, E204, E205, E206, E207, E208, E209, E210,
E211, E212, E213, E214, E215 (DEVE ASSY Life Over)
Step Check Yes No
Step Check Yes No
1 Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2].
Are the parts listed below installed incorrectly? part(s) correctly.
• Transfer unit
• SENSOR TNR FULL • FRAME ASSY DEVE
• DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K)
2 Replacing Check of the DEVE ASSY (Y/M/ Replace the End of procedure
TNRFULL/FSR
HARNESS
ASSY
2 C/K) PWBA MCU
SENSOR TNR FULL. TNRFULL/FSR. Replace the DEVE ASSY that caused the error. IDTN. (p351)
2. Disconnect P/J52 connector of the PWBA (p325)
MCU IDTN. Does the error still occur after the
3. Check the continuity of J142<=>J52. replacement?
J142<=Is there normal continuity between
them?
SENSOR TNR FULL Go to Step [4]. End of procedure
3 Replace the SENSOR TNR FULL.
replacement?
Transfer unit Replace the End of procedure
(p290) IDTN. (p351)
replacement?
P O IN T HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR (J142-J52)

FIP-42 Wrong Toner Y/M/C/K

P O IN T HARNESS ASSY FRID (J3411-J34)
Step Check Yes No
HARNESS ASSY FRID2 (J341-J3411)
• Toner cartridge (Y/M/C/K)
Connection Check of the COIL ASSY Go to Step [3]. Reconnect the
2 CRUM READER connectors
Is P/J341 connector of the COIL ASSY CRUM correctly.
READER connected to the harness connector
correctly?
3 RFID2 HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J341 connector of the COIL ASSY PHD2.
ASSY CRUM READER. (p340)
HARNESS ASSY RFID2 and the
HARNESS ASSY RFID.
4 RFID HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J3411 connector of the ASSY FRID.
HARNESS ASSY RFID and the
HARNESS ASSY RFID2.
MCU IDTN.
Toner cartridge(Y/M/C/K) Replace the End of procedure
5 Replace the Toner cartridge (Y/M/C/K) with PWBA MCU
new ones. IDTN. (p351)
replacement?

FIP-43 Install Fuser
Step Check Yes No

• Fuser unit
• P/J361 connector of the HARNESS ASSY
FSR/ADC
2 FSR/ADC HARNESS
1. Remove the Fuser unit. (p289) ASSY FSR/ADC.
HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC.
MCU IDTN.
Fuser unit Replace the End of procedure
3 Replace the Fuser unit. (p289) PWBA MCU
replacement?

FIP-44 Toner Cart Error Y/M/C/K

P O IN T HARNESS ASSY FRID (J3411-J34)
Step Check Yes No
HARNESS ASSY FRID2 (J341-J3411)
• Toner cartridge (Y/M/C/K)
• Toner cartridge (Y/M/C/K) (each of them
installed in their correct position?)
Connection Check of the COIL ASSY Go to Step [3]. Reinstall the
2 CRUM READER part(s) correctly.
Is P/J341 connector of the COIL ASSY CRUM
READER connected to the harness connector
correctly?
3 RFID2 HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J341 connector of the COIL ASSY FRID2.
ASSY CRUM READER. (p340)
HARNESS ASSY RFID2 and the
HARNESS ASSY RFID.
4 RFID HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J3411 connector of the ASSY FRID.
HARNESS ASSY RFID and the
HARNESS ASSY RFID2.
MCU IDTN.
Toner cartridge(Y/M/C/K) Replace the End of procedure
5 Replace the Toner cartridge (Y/M/C/K) with PWBA MCU
new ones. IDTN. (p351)
replacement?

FIP-45 Install Y/M/C/K Tnr Cart FIP-46 LC3 Error 001

Initial Check Pull out the toner Go to Step [2]. Initial Check Remove the one Go to Step [2].
1 tape(s). 1 550-sheet Paper
Are there any toner tapes that have not been Are the two 550-sheet Paper Cassettes installed Cassette.
pulled out from the Toner cartridges? in the printer?
Toner cartridge (Y/M/C/K) End of procedure Go to the PWBA OPTFDR 1T Replace the End of procedure
2 Reinstall the Toner cartridge (Y/M/C/K). following FIP. 2 Replace the PWBA OPTFDR 1T. (p365) PWBA MCU
Does the error still occur after the Y: FIP-35 Does the error still occur after the IDTN. (p351)
reinstalling? M: FIP-36 replacement?
C: FIP-37
K: FIP-38

3.4.3.2 Options Step Check Yes No

FIP-O1 Paper Jam A C (550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit) 5 Does the Main Drive Motor rotate when
C A U T IO N If multi-feed error occurs, refer to FIP-O4 Multi-Feed (p203). 6 FAN/PHD/MOT HARNESS
Step Check Yes No Is there normal continuity between them?
1 Are there anything wrong with the following part(s) correctly 7 Check of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN
Replace the DRIVE ASSY MAIN with a new
Go to Step [8]. End of procedure
items? or replace the one. (p344)

• Installation state of the paper cassette. defective part(s).
• Condition of the papers in the cassette. replacement?
• Wear or damage of the roller or gear in the Check the Interlock Switch Go to FIP-DC Reinstall the
feeder. 8 Is the Interlock Switch pressed down normally? part(s) correctly.
• Paper dust or foreign material on the paper Check of the CLUTCH TURN Go to Step [12]. Go to Step [10].
path. 9 Close the Interlock Switch before checking.
Does the CLUTCH TURN function
• Installation state of the DRIVE ASSY normally?
MAIN.
2 Connection Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. Reconnect the 10 FRONTCLH HARNESS
REGI SNS harness correctly. ASSY
Is the HARNESS ASSY REGI SNS connected CLUTCH TURN, and P/J19 connector on FRONTCLH.
to the SENSOR REGI connector correctly? the PWBA MCU IDTN.
3 REGI SNS HARNESS
Check of the CLUTCH TURN Go to Step [12]. End of procedure
SENSOR REGI, and P/J18 connector on SNS. 11 Replace the CLUTCH TURN with a new one.
the PWBA MCU IDTN.
(p287)
replacement?
4 Replace the SENSOR REGI with a new one. 12 Operation Check of the Option Feed Motor Go to Step [17]. Go to Step [13].
Does the Option Feed Motor rotate when
(p279)
replacement?


Check of the PWBA OPTFDR 1T. Go to Step [14]. End of procedure Check of the CLUTCH ELECTRO Go to Step [20]. End of procedure
13 Replace the PWBA OPTFDR 1T with a new
19 MAGNETIC
one. (p365) Replace the CLUTCH ELECTRO
Does the error still occur after the MAGNETIC with a new one. (p377)
replacement? Does the error still occur after the
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [15]. Replace the replacement?
14 OPFREC HARNESS Operation Check of the SOLENOID FEED Replace the paper Go to Step [21].
1. Disconnect P/J83 connector on the ASSY OPFREC. 20 Does the Feed Gear in the Feeder rotate when if there is no
PWBA OPTFDR, and P/J171 connector make a test print? missing part or
on the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG. any other
2. Check the continuity of J83<=>J171. abnormality.
Is there normal continuity between them? 21 OPFDR HARNESS
15 OPFPLG HARNESS 1. Disconnect P/J824 connector of the ASSY OPFDR.
ASSY OPFPLG. SOLENOID FEED, and P/J85 connector
on the PWBA OPTFDR IT.
HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG, and P/J17
connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. 2. Check the continuity of P824<=>J85.
2. Check the continuity of P171<=>J17. Is there normal continuity between them?
Check of the SOLENOID FEED Check if the End of procedure
Is there normal continuity between them? 22 Replace the SOLENOID FEED with a new one. spring or stopper
Operation Check of the Option Feed Motor Go to Step [17]. End of procedure
16 Replace the DRIVE ASSY with a new one.
(p273) is securely
Does the error still occur after the attached on the
(p382) SOLENOID
replacement?
Does the error still occur after the FEED.
replacement? Replace the
Operation Check of the CLUTCH Go to Step [20]. Go to Step [18]. PWBA MCU
17 ELECTRO MAGNETIC IDTN if the error
Does the Turn Roll in the Feeder rotate when still occurs.
making a test print? (p351)
18 OPFDR HARNESS C H E C K Error-Related Harness(es)
1. Disconnect P/J825 connector of the ASSY OPFDR. P O IN T HARNESS ASSY REGISNS (J181-J18)
CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC, and HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT (P481-J48)
P/J85 connector on the PWBA OPTFDR HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH (P191-J19)
IT.
HARNESS ASSY OPFREC (J83-J171)
HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG (J17-P171)
HARNESS ASSY OPFDR (P825-J85ÅAP824-J85)

FIP-O2 Paper Out ttt sss (550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit) FIP-O3 FIP-O3 Install LC1 (550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit)

• SENSOR NO PAPER • SW ITCH ASSY SIZE
• ACTUATOR NO PAPER • ACTUATOR SIZE
Does the error recur even after loading papers in Go to Step [3]. End of procedure • 550-Sheet Paper Cassette
2 the tray? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. Replace the
2 SIZE HARNESS
3 OPFDR HARNESS 1. Disconnect P/J821 connector of the ASSY SIZE.
1. Disconnect P/J822 connector of the ASSY OPFDR. SWITCH ASSY SIZE.
SENSOR NO PAPER. 2. Disconnect the connector P/J80 of the
2. Disconnect the connector P/J85 of the PWBA OPTFDR 1T.
PWBA OPTFDR 1T. 3. Check the continuity of J821<=>J80.
Is there normal continuity between them? SWITCH ASSY SIZE • Replace the End of procedure
SENSOR NO PAPER • Replace the End of procedure
3 Replace the SWITCH ASSY SIZE. PWBA MCU
4 Replace the SENSOR NO PAPER. (p271) PWBA MCU (p266) IDTN. (p351)
Does the error still occur after the IDTN. (p351) Does the error still occur after the • Replace the
replacement? • Replace the replacement? PWBA
PWBA OPTFDR 1T.
OPTFDR 1T. (p365)
(p365)
P O IN T HARNESS ASSY OPFDR (J822-J85)

FIP-O4 Multi-Feed (550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit)
Step Check Yes No

1 Are there anything wrong with the following guide or replace
items? the paper.
• Installation state of the paper guide.
• Condition of the papers in the cassette.
• Paper quality
Check of the MSI Go to Step [3]. Go to Step [5].
2 Does the multi-feed occurs at the MSI?
Check of the Loaded Paper Go to Step [4]. End of procedure
3 Make a test print with a new paper. (Ask the user to
Does the multi-feed still occur after replacing store the papers in
the paper? a place where the
humidity level is
low)
Check of the ROS ASSY RETARD Replace the End of procedure
4 Replace the ROLL ASSY RETARD with a new ROLL ASSY
one. (p282) FEED.(p276)
Does the multi-feed still occur after replacing
the paper?
humidity level is
low)
Check of the Cassette Replace the Replace the
6 Make a test print after reinstalling the cassette. ROLL ASSY ROLL ASSY
Does the multi-feed still occur after FEED of the RETARD of the
reinstalling the cassette? defective Feeder. defective cassette.
(p276), (p302) (p276), (p387)

FIP-O5 Paper Jam A C (1100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit) Step Check Yes No
5 Does the Main Drive Motor rotate when
C A U T IO N If multi-feed error occurs, refer to FIP-8 Multi-Feed.
Step Check Yes No connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN.
Initial Check Reinstall the Go to Step [2]. 2. Check the continuity of J481<=>J48.
1 Are there anything wrong with the following part(s) correctly. Is there normal continuity between them?
items? Check of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. Go to Step [8]. End of procedure
• Installation state of the paper cassette.
7 Replace the DRIVE ASSY MAIN with a new
• Condition of the papers in the cassette. one. (p344)
• Wear or damage of the roller or gear in the Does the error still occur after the
feeder. replacement?
• Paper dust or foreign material on the paper Check of the Interlock Switch Go to FIP-DC Reinstall the
path. 8 Is the Interlock Switch pressed down normally? part(s) correctly.
• Installation state of the DRIVE ASSY 9 FRONTCLH HARNESS
MAIN. ASSY
Connection Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. Reinstall the FRONTCLH.
2 REGI SNS part(s) correctly.
CLUTCH TURN, and P/J19 connector on
the PWBA MCU IDTN.
Is the HARNESS ASSY REGI SNS connected 2. Check the continuity of P191<=>J19.
to the SENSOR REGI connector correctly? Is there normal continuity between them?
3 REGI SNS HARNESS 10 Check of the CLUTCH TURN. Go to Step [11]. End of procedure
Replace the CLUTCH TURN with a new one.
(p287)
the PWBA MCU IDTN.
replacement?
Operation Check of the Option Feed Motor • Go to Step [2] Go to Step [12].
Is there normal continuity between them? 11 Does the Option Feed Motor rotate when if the jam
Check of the SENSOR REGI Go to Step [5]. End of procedure
making a test print? occurs in Tray
2.
(p279) Go to Step
Does the error still occur after the [22] if the jam
replacement? error occurs in
Tray 3.


Check of the PWBA OPTFDR 2T Go to Step [13]. End of procedure Check of the CLUTCH ASSY Go to Step [19]. End of procedure
12 Replace the PWBA OPTFDR 2T with a new
18 Replace the CLUTCH ASSY with a new one.
one. (p403) (p338)
Does the error still occur after the Does the error still occur after the
replacement? replacement?
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [14]. Replace the Operation Check of the SOLENOID FEED Replace the paper Go to Step [20].
13 OPFREC HARNESS 19 Does the Feed Gear in the Feeder rotate when if there is no
1. Disconnect P/J83 connector on the ASSY making a test print? missing part or
PWBA OPTFDR 2T, and P/J172/171 OPFREC2. any other
connectors of the HARNESS ASSY abnormality.
OPFPLG. Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [21]. Replace the
2. Check the continuity of J83<=>J172. 20 OPFDR2 HARNESS
Is there normal continuity between them? 1. Disconnect P/J824 connector of the ASSY OPFDR2.
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [15]. Replace the SOLENOID FEED, and P/J85 connector
14 OPFPLG HARNESS on the PWBA OPTFDR 2T.
1. Disconnect P/J172/171 connectors of the ASSY OPFPLG. 2. Check the continuity of P824<=>J85.
HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG, and P/J17 Is there normal continuity between them?
connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN. Check of the SOLENOID FEED Check if the End of procedure
2. Check the continuity of P171<=>J17. 21 Replace the SOLENOID FEED with a new one. spring or stopper
Is there normal continuity between them? (p273) is securely
Check of the Option Feed Motor • Go to Step [2] End of procedure
15 Replace the DRIVE ASSY 2ND with a new if the jam replacement? SOLENOID
FEED.
one. (p404) occurs in Tray
Replace the
Does the error still occur after the 2.
PWBA MCU
replacement? Go to Step
IDTN if the error
[22] if the jam
still occurs.
error occurs in
(p351)
Tray 3.
Operation Check of the CLUTCH Go to Step [25]. Go to Step [23].
16 Operation Check of the CLUTCH ASSY Go to Step [19]. Go to Step [17]. 22 ELECTRO MAGNETIC
Does the Turn Roll in the Feeder rotate when Does the Turn Roll in the Feeder rotate when
make a test print? make a test print?
17 OPFDR2 HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J825 connector of the ASSY OPFDR2.
CLUTCH ASSY, and P/J85 connector on
the PWBA OPTFDR 2T.

Step Check Yes No

23 OPFDR2 HARNESS
P O IN T HARNESS ASSY REGISNS (J181-J18)
ASSY OPFDR2. HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT (P481-J48)
CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC, and HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH (P191-J19)
P/J85 connector on the PWBA OPTFDR HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 (J83-J172)
2T. HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG (J17-P171)
2. Check the continuity of P825<=>J85. HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2 (P825-J85, P824-J85)
Check of the CLUTCH ELECTRO Go to Step [25]. End of procedure
24 MAGNETIC
Replace the CLUTCH ELECTRO
MAGNETIC with a new one. (p422)
replacement?
Operation Check of the SOLENOID FEED Replace the paper Go to Step [26].
25 Does the Feed Gear in the Feeder rotate when if there is no
making a test print? missing part or
any other
abnormality.
26 OPFDR2 HARNESS
1. Disconnect P/J824 connector of the ASSY OPFDR2.
SOLENOID FEED, and P/J85 connector
on the PWBA OPTFDR 2T.
Check of the SOLENOID FEED Check if the End of procedure
27 Replace the SOLENOID FEED with a new one. spring or stopper
(p273) is securely
replacement? SOLENOID
FEED.
Replace the
PWBA MCU
IDTN if the error
still occurs.
(p351)

FIP-O6 Paper Out LC3, LC4, (LC2) (1100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit) FIP-O7 Install L1 (L2, L3) (1100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit)

• SENSOR NO PAPER • SW ITCH ASSY SIZE
• ACTUATOR NO PAPER • ACTUATOR SIZE
Does the error recur even after loading papers in Go to Step [3]. End of procedure • 1100-Sheet Paper Cassette
2 the tray? Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [3]. Replace the
2 SIZE2 HARNESS
3 OPFDR2 HARNESS 1. Disconnect P/J821 connector of the ASSY SIZE2.
1. Disconnect P/J822 connector of the ASSY OPFDR2. SWITCH ASSY SIZE.
SENSOR NO PAPER. 2. Disconnect the connector P/J80 of the
2. Disconnect the connector P/J85 of the PWBA OPTFDR 2T.
PWBA OPTFDR 2T. 3. Check the continuity of J821<=>J80.
Is there normal continuity between them? SWITCH ASSY SIZE • Replace the End of procedure
SENSOR NO PAPER • Replace the End of procedure
3 Replace the SWITCH ASSY SIZE. (p266) PWBA MCU
4 Replace the SENSOR NO PAPER. (p271) PWBA MCU Does the error still occur after the IDTN. (p351)
Does the error still occur after the IDTN. (p351) replacement? • Replace the
replacement? • Replace the PWBA
PWBA OPTFDR 2T.
OPTFDR 2T. (p403)
(p403)
P O IN T HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2 (J822-J85)
P O IN T HARNESS ASSY SIZE2 (J821-J80)

FIP-O8 Multi-Feed (1100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit)
Step Check Yes No

1 Is there anything wrong with the following guide correctly,
items? or replace the
• Installation state of the paper guide. paper.
• Paper quality
humidity level is
low)
one. (p282) FEED. (p415)
the paper?
humidity level is
low)
reinstalling the cassette? defective Feeder. defective cassette.
(p276), (p415), (p276), (p431)
(p428)

3.4.4 Controller-related Trouble FIP

When a controller related error occurs, make sure to check the initial check items listed
below first. If the error still occurs after that, replace the part given on an error basis in
the Failed Parts List on the next page to perform troubleshooting.
Initial Check
Check that the printer is grounded properly.
Check that the connectors are connected to the controller board securely
and correctly.
Check that the DIMM is connected to the controller board securely and
correctly.
Power the printer off and on several times.
Check that the printer is not in electrically noisy environments.
C A U T IO N When powering the printer off and on again, do not turn it on

immediately after turning it off. Make sure to wait at least for a few
seconds before the power-on.

Failed Parts List
Engine Controller Board

Engine Controller Board
Opt. ROM DIMM
Opt. RAM DIMM

Std. RAM DIMM
Controller Board
Program DIMM
Video I/F Cable

Network Board
Opt. ROM DIMM
Opt. RAM DIMM

Std. RAM DIMM
Controller Board
Program DIMM
Video I/F Cable

Network Board
Error
Description
Error Code
Description
Code C1001 Standard RAM error (standard stack is undefined, @
C0017 CPU error (undefined interruption) @ etc.)
C0081 CPU error (TLB modification exception) @ C1002 Standard RAM error (standard size is undefined, @
C0082 CPU error (TLB miss exception [Load/Fetch]) @ etc.)
C0083 CPU error (TLB miss exception [Store]) @ C1020 RAM error (slot 0) @
C0084 CPU error (address error exception [Load/Fetch]) @ C1021 RAM error (slot 1) @
C0085 CPU error (address error exception [Store]) @ C1022 RAM error (slot 2) @
C0086 CPU error (bus error exception [Fetch]) @ C1100 ROM checksum error (bit 0 to 15) (font) @
C0087 CPU error (bus error exception [Load/Store]) @ C1101 ROM checksum error (bit 16 to 31) (font) @
C0088 CPU error (SYSCALL exception) @ C1120 ROM checksum error (bit 0 to 7) (program) @
C0089 CPU error (Break exception) @ C1121 ROM checksum error (bit 8 to 15) (program) @
C0090 CPU error (reserving command exception) @ C1122 ROM checksum error (bit 16 to 23) (program) @
C0091 CPU error (unused coprocessor exception) @ C1123 ROM checksum error (bit 24 to 31) (program) @
C0092 CPU error (FPU exception) @ C1180 Optional ROM module A checksum error @
C0093 CPU error (TLB exception) @ C1181 Optional ROM module B checksum error @
C0094 CPU error (XTLB exception) @ C1185 ROM module unsupported @
C0095 CPU error (cache exception) @ C1200 EEPROM writing error @
C0096 CPU error (Trap exception) @ C1210 EEPROM writing times limit @
C0097 CPU error (FPU exception) @ C1400 Engine initialization error @
C0098 CPU error (watch exception) @ C1700 Loopback test failure of network board @
C0128- CPU error (undefined trap) @ C1702 Network board uninstalled @
C0254 C1999 Other hardware errors @
C0255 CPU error (NMI exception) @ C2000 Software error @
C0256 CPU error (divide by 0) @
C0257 CPU error (arithmetic overflow) @
C0258 CPU error (break occurrence) @
C0800 IPL error (controller defect) @ @
C0998 Engine communication error (only when power-on) @ @ @
C999 Engine flash ROM has no program data @
C1000 Standard RAM error (not installed, etc.) @

3.4.5 Print Quality Trouble FIP To reliably judge and understand the trouble to perform the correct remedy efficiently
when a print quality-related trouble occurs, make a test print, and use the FIPs
Workflow described in the following pages.
When the trouble still occurs even after performing the troubleshooting according to
Start
the FIP, check again using the FIP, and then replace the parts indicated as “Possible
parts” one by one checking if the printer returns to normal.
Make sure that all ASSYs are properly grounded. Always refer to Chapter 7
Make a test print
“APPENDIX” when checking connection state and electric continuity.
Is there any FIP that No

applies to the symptom? The printing quality-related FIPs are provided as follows for the typical symptoms.
Yes
FIP-P1 "Printed Image is Light and Faint"
Perform the troubleshooting provided in the FIP. Replace the Photoconductor Unit and the
Fuser Assy in that order.
FIP-P2 "Completely Blank Pages are Printed"
FIP-P3 "Completely Black Pages are Printed"
No Does the printer return No Does the printer return FIP-P4 "Vertical White or Faint Bands"
to normal? to normal?
FIP-P5 "Horizontal White or Faint Bands"
Yes Yes
FIP-P6 "Black or Colored Small Smudges"
End End
FIP-P7 "Color Fogged"
FIP-P8 "Skew Print"
Leg_Sec001_001FA
FIP-P9 "Printed Paper is Wrinkled"
C A U T IO N The printing-quality troubleshooting described here is based on a FIP-P10 "Fusing Trouble"
condition that the printer controller has no problems. However,
making a test print with only the engine side, allows you to find out FIP-P11 "Vertical Streaks"
roughly which side (controller side or engine side) is causing the FIP-P12 "Residual Images"
trouble, except for cases that cannot be checked by the test print.
Test print with the engine alone is normal → FIP-P13 "Areas of Images are Missing"
Printer controller trouble FIP-P14 "Horizontal Streaks"
Test print on engine alone is abnormal →
Printer engine trouble
If the probable cause is “printer controller trouble,” replace the
controller with a normal one and check if the printer returns to
normal.
If the trouble recurs after replacing with the normal parts, check
on the host side, and use the printer quality FIPs to perform
efficient troubleshooting.

3.4.5.1 Precautions for Print Quality Troubleshooting 3.4.5.2 Basics for Print Quality Recovery
Troubleshooting for print quality troubles should be carried out according to the Recovering the print quality basically requires cleaning of the internal parts. The
corresponding FIP. In addition to that, make sure to check the environment condition, HOLDER ASSY CTD, parts for paper transferring, Fuser unit, and Transfer unit
daily used paper type, the remaining amount of the consumable’s life and the should be cleaned. Considerable dust and dirt on the internal parts, especially when
replacement interval of the parts that require periodic replacement when the trouble they are formed in a short time, are heavily caused by the environment conditions. The
occurs constantly or abnormal printouts are made. trouble may occur again unless the environment conditions are improved.
Environment Condition
Should satisfy the conditions described in 3.1.2 Preliminary Check.
The table below shows the rollers that have possibilities of causing print quality
Daily Used Paper Type
troubles and the intervals of their traces which appear on printouts.
Should meet the specification. (Standard paper is recommended.)
Consumables and Periodic Replacement Parts Part Part Name Interval of Traces
1. The consumables should have sufficient life spans. Magnet Roll DEVE ASSY 44 mm
2. The Periodic Replacement Parts must have been replaced every time their Drum Photoconductor unit 75 mm
respective specified number of sheets has been printed. BTR Photoconductor unit 65 mm
Host Computer Check RTC Photoconductor unit 32 mm
Check if the trouble is caused by application failure. IDT 1 Photoconductor unit 132 mm
1. Send the same print job to the printer from another computer. IDT 2 Photoconductor unit 132 mm
2. Send a print job to the printer using another application. IDT 1 Cleaner Photoconductor unit 34 mm
3. Send a print job stored in another file to the printer. IDT 2 Cleaner Photoconductor unit 56 mm
4. Uninstall and reinstall the printer driver.
Refresher Photoconductor unit 55 mm
5. Uninstall and reinstall the application.
6. Check the system environment. Heat Roll Fuser unit 82 mm
Belt Fuser unit 95 mm
For Safety
Do not touch the surface of the parts listed below directly with your hands.
1. Transfer unit
2. Drum (Photoconductor unit)
3. Heat Roll (Fuser unit)

3.4.5.3 Print Quality FIP Step Check Yes No

Laser Beam Path Remove the dirt, Go to Step [5].
FIP-P1 Printed Image is Light and Faint 4 1. Check the laser beam path from the ROSS dust or foreign
ASSY to the drum in the Photoconductor material.
Symptom / Possible Parts unit.
Symptom
2. Check if the laser exit window on the ROS
Vertical white bands or faint colored bands appear on the ASSY is clean.
printed image. Is there any dirt, dust, or foreign material on
the path?
Possible Parts ROS ASSY End of procedure Go to Step [6].
HVPS
5 Replace the ROS ASSY. (p320)
DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K) Does the printing density get back to
DISPENSER ASSY (Y/M/C/K) normal?
Fuser unit Transfer unit End of procedure Go to Step [7].
6 Replace the Transfer unit.(p290)
Does the printing density get back to
normal?
PWBA MCU IDTN End of procedure Replace the
Step Check Yes No
7 Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351) possible parts one
Does the printing density get back to by one.
Initial Check Get them back to Go to Step [2].
1 Check the Possible Parts for the following: normal. normal?
specification, installation state, damage,
deformation, dirt or foreign material. Is there
something wrong with any one of the parts?
HOLDER ASSY CTD End of procedure Go to Step [3].
2 Replace the HOLDER ASSY CTD. (p291)
normal?
Photoconductor unit End of procedure Go to Step [4].
3 Replace the Photoconductor unit.
normal?

FIP-P2 Completely Blank Pages are Printed Step Check Yes No

Transfer unit End of procedure Go to Step [6].
Symptom / Possible Parts
5 Replace the Transfer unit. (p290)
Symptom
Are images printed normally?
Nothing is printed on the paper. PWBA MCU IDTN End of procedure Replace the
6 Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN.(p351) possible parts one
Possible Parts Are images printed normally? by one.
HVPS
DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K)
DISPENSER ASSY (Y/M/C/K)
Fuser unit
Step Check Yes No

1 Check the Possible Parts for the following: normal.
2 1. Check the laser beam path from the ROSS dust or foreign
unit.
ASSY is clean.
Is there any dirt, dust, or foreign material on
the path?
ROS ASSY End of procedure Go to Step [4].

FIP-P3 Completely Black Pages are Printed

Symptom
All over the printed paper is black.
Possible Parts
HVPS
DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K)
Fuser unit
Transfer unit
Step Check Yes No

Check if it is exposing failure Go to Step [4]. Go to Step [3].
2 Cover half of the window of ROS ASSY and
execute a test print.
Is the print, half white and half black?
Are images printed normally? by one.

FIP-P4 Vertical White or Faint Bands Step Check Yes No

DEVE ASSY (C/M/Y/K) End of procedure Go to Step [6].
5 Replace the DEVE ASSY. (p325)
Symptom
Does the printing quality get back to normal?
Vertical white bands or faint colored bands appear on the PWBA MCU IDTN End of procedure Replace the
printed image. 6 Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351) possible parts one
Does the printing quality get back to normal? by one.
Possible Parts
HVPS
Fuser unit
Transfer unit
Step Check Yes No

unit.
ASSY is clean.
the path?

FIP-P5 Horizontal White or Faint Bands Step Check Yes No

Symptom
Horizontal white bands or faint colored bands appear on PWBA MCU IDTN End of procedure Replace the
the printed image. 7 Replace the PWBA MCU IDTN. (p351) possible parts one
Possible Parts
HVPS
Fuser unit
Step Check Yes No

Check the bands. Refer to 3.4.5.2 Go to Step [3].
2 Do they appear at regular intervals? and replace the
corresponding
part.
HSG ASSY BIAS End of procedure Go to Step [6].
5 Replace the HSG ASSY BIAS. (p321)

FIP-P6 Black or Colored Small Smudges

Symptom
Solid black circles appear on the printed image.
Possible Parts
PWBA MCU IDTN
ROS ASSY
Step Check Yes No

Fuser unit End of procedure Go to Step [4].
3 Replace the Fuser unit. (p289)
DEVE ASSY(C/M/Y/K) End of procedure Replace the
4 Replace the DEVE ASSY. (p325) possible parts one

FIP-P7 Color Fogged Step Check Yes No

Symptom
unit.
Printed images are fogged and toner smudges appear on
the margins. 2. Check if the laser exit window on the ROS
ASSY is clean.
Possible Parts
the path?
HVPS
DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K) 5 Replace the ROS ASSY. (p320)
Fuser unit
normal?
normal?
Step Check Yes No
1 Initial Check Get them back to Go to Step [2].
normal.
Check the Possible Parts for the following: by one.
specification, installation state, damage, Does the printing density get back to
deformation, dirt or foreign material. Is there normal?
HOLDER ASSY CTD End of procedure Go to Step [3].
2 Replace the HOLDER ASSY CTD. (p291)
normal?
normal?

FIP-P8 Skew Print Step Check Yes No

Installation state of the Transfer unit Go to Step [7]. Reinstall the assy
6 Is the Transfer unit installed correctly? correctly.
Photoconductor unit End of procedure Replace the
Symptom
Printed image is skewed.
7 Replace the Photoconductor unit. possible parts one
Are images printed normally? by one.
Possible Parts
ROS ASSY
PICK UP ASSY
CHUTE ASSY REGI
Step Check Yes No

Installation state of the paper cassette and Go to Step [3]. Install/load the
2 papers cassette or papers
Are the cassette and papers installed/loaded correctly.
correctly? (ask the client to
do so)
Paper Transferring Path Clean the part or Go to Step [4].
3 Is there any flashes, foreign material or dirt on replace it.
the path?
Paper Feed Roll Go to Step [5]. Clean the roller or
4 Does the roller feed papers normally? replace it.
Paper Transferring Roll Clean the roller or Go to Step [6].
5 Is there any abnormality with the rollers, such as replace it.
foreign material, dirt, deformation, or operation
failure?

FIP-P9 Printed Paper is Wrinkled Step Check Yes No

Paper Transferring Roll Clean the roller or Replace the
6 Is there any abnormality with the rollers, such as replace it. possible parts one
foreign material, dirt, deformation, or operation by one.
Symptom
failure?
Printed out papers are wrinkled.
Possible Parts
Transfer unit
Photoconductor unit
PICK UP ASSY
CHUTE ASSY REGI
Step Check Yes No

Check if the paper is damp Go to Step [3]. Replace the
2 Does the printer recover from the trouble when papers.
using a new paper that is took out from the (Ask the user to
newly opened package? store the papers in
a place where the
humidity level is
low)
Fuser unit End of procedure Go to Step [4].
3 Replace the Fuser unit. (p289)
Check if paper is skewed. Go to FIP-P8 Go to Step [5].
4 Is paper transferred diagonally? "Skew Print"
Paper Transferring Path Clean the roller or Go to Step [4].
5 Is there any flashes, foreign material or dirt on replace it.
the path?

FIP-P10 Fusing Trouble FIP-P11 Vertical Streaks
Symptom / Possible Parts Symptom / Possible Parts

Symptom Symptom
If you touch or rub the printed images, the toner can be Vertical black or colored lines appear on the printed
easily removed. image.
Possible Parts Possible Parts

PWBA MCU IDTN DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K)
LVPS DISPENSER ASSY (Y/M/C/K)
Transfer unit
Step Check Yes No

Initial Check Get them back to Go to Step [2]. Step Check Yes No
1 Check the Possible Parts for the following: normal. Initial Check Get them back to Go to Step [2].
specification, installation state, damage, 1 Check the Possible Parts for the following: normal.
deformation, dirt or foreign material. Is there specification, installation state, damage,
something wrong with any one of the parts? deformation, dirt or foreign material. Is there
Paper Thickness Go to Step [3]. Replace the something wrong with any one of the parts?
2 Does the printer recover from the trouble when papers. Check the lines Refer to 3.4.5.2 Go to Step [3].
using a thin paper? 2 Do they appear at regular intervals? and replace the
Fuser unit End of procedure Replace the corresponding
3 Replace the Fuser unit. (p289) possible parts one part.
by one. Photoconductor unit End of procedure Go to Step [4].
Are images printed normally? 3 Replace the Photoconductor unit.
Fuser unit End of procedure Replace the
4 Replace the Fuser unit. (p289) possible parts one
by one.

FIP-P12 Residual Images FIP-P13 Areas of Images are Missing
Symptom / Possible Parts Symptom / Possible Parts

Symptom Symptom
An image of the previous page or part of the currently Some areas of the printed image are missing or
printing page laps over like a ghost. extremely faint. The symptom appears within a narrow
range.
Possible Parts
PWBA MCU IDTN Possible Parts
ROS ASSY
DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K)
PWBA MCU IDTN
Step Check Yes No

Step Check Yes No
specification, installation state, damage, 1 Check the Possible Parts for the following: normal.
Print a high density image (picture or photo) Go to Step [3]. End of procedure
2 and then print a normal density image. (Replace the
Do areas of the high density images appear Photoconductor 2 Replace the Photoconductor unit.
on the normal density image? unit if the trouble
occurs again) Does the printing quality get back to normal?
Transfer unit End of procedure Replace the
3 Photoconductor unit
End of procedure Replace the
possible parts one
3 Replace the Transfer unit. (p290) possible parts one
by one. Does the printing quality get back to normal? by one.

FIP-P14 Horizontal Streaks

Symptom
Horizontal black or colored lines appear on the printed
image.
Possible Parts
DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K)
Fuser unit
Transfer unit
Step Check Yes No

Check the lines Refer to 3.4.5.2 Go to Step [3].
2 Do they appear at regular intervals? and replace the
corresponding
part.
ROS ASSY End of procedure Replace the
4 Replace the ROS ASSY. (p320) possible parts one

3.4.6 Other FIP

The following FIPs are provided for power supply-related troubles.
FIP-AC
Step Check Yes No

Initial Check Connect or Go to Step [2].
1 Is there anything wrong with the following replace the power
items? code, or change
• The power cord is disconnected, or broken. the power source.
• Power supply voltage failure (the power
source for the printer is wrong or not
normal).
Continuity Check of the AC SW Replace the Replace the
2 1. Disconnect the power code and wait for a LVPS. (p347) HARNESS
minute. ASSY AC
2. Check if the HARNESS ASSY AC INLET. (p348)
INLET has normal continuity.
Is there normal continuity between the
INLET and J160?

FIP-DC Step Check Yes No

Check of 24V of the HARNESS ASSY End of procedure Check if the
Step Check Yes No
7 1. Turn the AC SW off and connect J163 to HARNESS
the LVPS. ASSY 24V is
Initial Check Repair broken or Go to Step [2].
1 Is there anything wrong with the following shorted part or 2. After connecting it, turn the AC SW on. damaged or
shorted.
items? change the power The voltage of P/J163-1PIN<=>P/J163-2PIN
• FUSE in the LVPS (broken?) source. is +24VDC?
• Power supply voltage failure (the power
source for the printer is wrong or not
normal).
Check of the LVPS Go to Step [3]. Replace the
2 Disconnect J163, J165, and J164 connector on LVPS. (p347)
the LVPS and turn the AC SW on.
Close the Interlock Switch before checking.
The voltage of P163-1PIN<=>P163-2PIN is
+24VDC?
3 The voltage of P165-2PIN<=>P165-3PIN is LVPS. (p347)
+5VDC?
4 The voltage of P165-4PIN<=>P165-3PIN is LVPS. (p347)
+3.3VDC?
Continuity Check of the HARNESS ASSY Go to Step [6]. Check if the
5 LV RPG HARNESS
1. Turn the AC SW off and connect J164 to ASSY LV RPG
the LVPS. has normal
2. After connecting it, turn the AC SW on. continuity.
The voltage of P164-1PIN<=>P164-4PIN is
+3.3VDC?
Continuity Check of HARNESS ASSY LV Go to Step [7]. Check if the
6 1. Turn the AC SW off and connect J165 to HARNESS
the LVPS. ASSY LV is
2. After connecting it, turn the AC SW on. damaged or
shorted.
The voltage of P/J165-2PIN<=>P/J165-3PIN
is +5VDC?

FIP-MULTI-FEED Step Check Yes No

Step Check Yes No
one. (p255) FEED. (p276)
1 Is there anything wrong with the following guide correctly or Does the multi-feed still occur after replacing
items? replace the the paper?
• Installation state of the paper guide. papers.
Paper quality
Check of Paper Go to Step [4]. End of procedure
humidity level is
low)
Check of the ROLL ASSY RETARD Replace the End of procedure
one. (p282) FEED. (p302)
the paper?
Check of Paper When an option End of procedure
5 Make a test print with a new paper. cassette is (Ask the user to
Does the multi-feed still occur after replacing installed store the papers in
the paper? Go to Step [6]. a place where the
When an option humidity level is
cassette is Not low)
installed
Go to Step [7].
reinstalling the cassette? defective Feeder. defective Feeder.
(p276), (p302), (p255), (p387),
(p415), (p428) (p431)

3.5 Abnormal Noise-related Trouble
3.5.1 Abnormal Noise-related Troubleshooting Entry Chart

The check items surrounded by are for main unit only.
Do you hear abnormal noise during Check the operation table at power-on, and check for foreign material or damage. (Refer to FIP-N1 (p229), FIP-N5
initialization after power-on? Y (p231), FIP-N7 (p232)).
N
Do you hear abnormal noise Check the operation table in the Standby mode, and check for foreign material and damage. (Refer to FIP-N2 (p229)).
in the Standby mode? Y
N
Do you hear abnormal noise Check the operation table during printing (one-side), and check for foreign material and damage.
during printing (one-side)? Y (Refer to FIP-N3 (p230), FIP-N6 (p231), FIP-N8 (p232)).
N
Do you hear abnormal noise

during duplex printing? Check the operation table during duplex printing, and check for foreign material and damage. (Refer to FIP-N4 (p231))
Y
TROUBLESHOOTING Abnormal Noise-related Trouble 228

3.5.2 Abnormal Noise-related FIP FIP-N2 At Standby
3.5.2.1 Main Unit Possible parts that caused the error

FAN REAR
FIP-N1 At Power On
FAN FRONT
LVPS
Possible parts that caused the error
Step Check Yes No
DRIVE ASSY FUSER
Is abnormal noise being generated by FAN Clean or replace Go to Step [2].
Fuser unit 1 REAR? the FAN REAR.
MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM
Is abnormal noise being generated by FAN Clean or replace Go to Step [3].
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT 2 FRONT? the FAN FRONT.
DRIVE ASSY DEVE
Is abnormal noise being generated by the Replace the
DRIVE ASSY MAIN 3 LVPS? LVPS. (p345)
---
PICK UP ASSY
Step Check Yes No
Is abnormal noise being generated by DRIVE Replace the Go to Step [2].
1 ASSY FUSER? DRIVE ASSY
FUSER.
Is abnormal noise being generated by Fuser unit Clean or replace Go to Step [3].
2 that is driven by DRIVE ASSY FUSER? the Fuser unit.
(p289)
Is abnormal noise being generated by MOTOR Replace the Go to Step [4].
3 ASSY DUP 17PM? MOTOR ASSY
DUP 17PM.
Is abnormal noise being generated by the Clean or replace Go to Step [5].
4 CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT that is driven by the the CHUTE
MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM? ASSY DUP
OUT.
Is abnormal noise being generated by DRIVE Replace the Go to Step [6].
5 ASSY DEVE? DRIVE ASSY
DEVE.
Is abnormal noise being generated by the Replace the Go to Step [7].
6 DRIVE ASSY MAIN? DRIVE ASSY
MAIN.
Is abnormal noise being generated by PICK UP Clean or replace
7 ASSY that is driven by DRIVE ASSY MAIN? the PICK UP ---
ASSY.

FIP-N3 At Printing (One Side) Step Check Yes No

Does the abnormal noise sound when the printer Clean or replace Go to Step [6].
5 starts printing operation and starts to feed the DRIVE ASSY
DRIVE ASSY FUSER paper? DEVE and the
Fuser unit
DEVE ASSY.
Does the abnormal noise sound while the printer Clean or replace Go to Step [7].
MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM
ROLL EXIT
6 is transferring paper? the PICK UP
ASSY.
DISPENSER ASSY HI
Does the abnormal noise sound about one Clean or replace Go to Step [8].
DRIVE ASSY DEVE 7 second after the printer starts transferring the CHUTE
DEVE ASSY
paper? ASSY REGI.
DRIVE ASSY MAIN (p283)
PICK UP ASSY
Does the abnormal noise sound several times Clean or replace Go to Step [9].
CHUTE ASSY REGI 8 while performing a continuous printing? the DISPENSER
HOLDER ASSY RETARD TONER HI
Transfer unit ASSY.
Photoconductor unit Is the abnormal noise high-pitched sound? Replace the ROS
ROS ASSY
9 ASSY. (p320)
---
Step Check Yes No

Is abnormal noise being generated by the Paper Clean or replace Go to Step [2].
1 Feeder? the PICK UP
ASSY.
Is abnormal noise being generated by the MSI? Clean or replace Go to Step [3].
2 the HOLDER
ASSY RETARD.
Does the abnormal noise sound immediately Clean or replace Go to Step [4].
3 after starting printing operation? the DRIVE ASSY
Clean or replace
the Fuser unit.
(p289)
Does the abnormal noise keep sounding from Clean or replace Go to Step [5].
4 when starting printing until the job is finished? the DRIVE ASSY
MAIN, Transfer
unit, ROLL
EXIT, and the
Photoconductor
unit.

FIP-N4 At Duplex Printing 3.5.2.2 550-sheet Paper Cassette Unit
FIP-N5 At Power On
MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM
ROLL DUP Possible parts that caused the error
PICK UP ASSY
ROLL EXIT

Is abnormal noise being generated by the Paper Clean or replace
1 Does the abnormal noise sound while the printer Clean or replace
is reversing the paper? the MOTOR
Go to Step [2]. 1 Feeder? the PICK UP ---
ASSY DUP ASSY.
17PM and the
ROLL EXIT.
Does the abnormal noise sound while the printer Clean or replace
2 is transferring paper? the ROLL DUP.
--- FIP-N6 When Printing

PICK UP ASSY
Step Check Yes No

Is abnormal noise being generated by the Paper Clean or replace
1 Feeder? the PICK UP ---
ASSY.

3.5.2.3 1100-sheet Paper Cassette Unit
FIP-N7 At Power On

PICK UP ASSY 3RD
PICK UP ASSY 4TH
Step Check Yes No

Is abnormal noise being generated by the upper Clean or replace Go to Step [2].
1 Paper Feeder? the PICK UP
ASSY.
Is abnormal noise being generated by the lower Clean or replace
ASSY.
FIP-N8 When Printing

PICK UP ASSY 3RD
PICK UP ASSY 4TH
Step Check Yes No

Is abnormal noise being generated by the upper Clean or replace Go to Step [2].
ASSY.
Is abnormal noise being generated by the lower Clean or replace
ASSY.

3.6 Test Print

OVERVIEW
To check the engine operation, it is possible to print engine controller built-in sample at
the continuous printing speed without being routed through the main controller.
If the problem does not occur on the engine controller built-in sample, the cause of the
problem may be with the main controller. P31
PRINTING PROCEDURE OF TEST PRINT PATTERN
1. Remove the PWBA ESS MAIN. (p358)

2. Load papers on either MP tray or standard lower paper cassette and turn the power
on.
W A R N IN G Never touch the energized or driving part when performing the Ida_Sec02_100GA
following procedure.
Figure 3-2. Printing Test Print Pattern
3. Short the two pins of the P31 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN with a
screwdriver or a similar tool.
4. The printer starts printing (duplex continuous printing) after it shifts to ready
mode.
5. To stop printing, pull back the screwdriver to disconnect the connection of the two
pins.
C H E C K Papers should be loaded on the MP tray or standard lower

P O IN T paper cassette.
If you disconnect the two connectors during cleaning cycle, or if
the printer enters cleaning cycle while disconnecting the
connectors, blank sheet will be printed.
If the printer is in error condition, printing will not be started.
For details on ready mode, refer to “2.7.2 Operating Modes
(p123)”.
TROUBLESHOOTING Test Print 233

TEST PRINT PATTERN
Test print pattern is a checked pattern that shifts its color every horizontal 128 dots x
vertical 140 dots in the order corresponding to black (K), cyan (C), magenta (M), and
yellow (Y).
engine diag0002FC
Figure 3-3. Test Print Pattern
TROUBLESHOOTING Test Print 234

CHAPTER
4
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
4.1 Overview 4.1.1 Precautions

The precautions below (WARNING and CAUTION), must always be followed during
This section describes procedures for disassembling the main components and specific
disassembly and assembly.
parts of the product.
Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be reassembled by

reversing the disassembly procedure. W A R N IN G Disconnect the power cable before disassembling or assembling
the printer. If you need to work on the printer with power
Procedures which, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury are described applied, strictly follow the instructions in this manual.
under the heading “WARNING”. Always wear gloves for disassembly and reassembly to avoid
injury from sharp metal edges.
“CAUTION” signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to
To protect sensitive microprocessors and circuitry, use static
equipment.
discharge equipment, such as anti-static wrist straps, when
Important tips for procedures are described under the heading “CHECK POINT”. accessing internal components.
Never replace the fuse on the Power Supply Board in any
If the assembly procedure is different from the reversed disassembly procedure, the circumstances.
correct procedure is described under the heading “REASSEMBLY”. Be aware that letting the laser beam get into your eyes directly
could result in loss of vision.
Any adjustments required after reassembly of components or parts are described under
Never open any cover on which a Warning Label for Laser
the heading “ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED”.
Beam is attached.
When you have to remove any units or parts that are not described in this chapter, refer Use extreme caution to avoid injury of yourself and anyone
to the exploded diagrams in the appendix. around you with a clear understanding of hazardous nature of
the laser beam.
The Fuser unit and other high-temperature parts remain at
hazardous temperature for a certain period of time even after
stop of operation and turning off of the power. To prevent
suffering a burn, be sure to wait after turning off the power
until the temperature of the parts cools down to a safe level, and
then start working on the printer.
To avoid dust explosion or ignition, never bring any
consumables close to flame or throw them into fire.
When developer or oil stuck to your skin or clothes, wipe it off
with a dry cloth carefully and wash it off with water
immediately.
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY Overview 236

W A R N IN G Be careful not to let the developer or toner get into your eyes or W A R N IN G Use only recommended tools for disassembling, assembling or
mouth, and not to inhale it. adjusting the printer.
The same caution should be taken for people around you. Apply lubricants and adhesives as specified.
(Spread a sheet of paper inside and around the printer to Make the specified adjustments when you disassemble the
prevent soiling.) printer. (Refer to Chapter 5 for details.)
As there are many types of different screws, pay attention not
to attach them at the wrong positions. If a screw for plastic is
mistakenly used for a screw for metal plates, its threads will be
broken. Be extremely careful of the difference between the
screws for plastic and those for metal plates.
Do not pick up the spilt toner with a vacuum cleaner for home
use. To do so may cause the sucked toner particles to catch fire
by sparks of the electric contacts. If the toner has spilt on the
floor, etc., clean it with a broom or wipe it with a cloth
moistened with neural detergent. If it is necessary to clean a lot
of spilt toner with a cleaner, use a cleaner exclusively designed
for toner.
Leg_Sec001_014EA

4.1.2 Before starting work Turn the printer OFF, and disconnect the power cord before starting work.
If necessary, remove the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN, the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
This chapter describes the procedures for removing and attaching the main parts of the
and the PHD ASSY before disassembling the printer.
printer by breaking them down into 11 main components.
Before performing work around FUSER ASSY, allow the FUSER ASSY and its
Category
Disassembly/Reassembly surrounding area to sufficiently cool down.
Reference Page (Section No.)
Extra caution is required during work as exerting unnecessary force may damage
COVER p.242 (4.2)
parts or cause them to malfunction.
PAPER CASSETTE p.255 (4.3)
Wear a wrist strap to discharge static electricity from the human body, whenever
PAPER FEEDER p.261 (4.4)
possible.
RETARD & REGI ASSY p.278 (4.5)
Once the COVER ASSY TOP, PHD ASSY, TCRU ASSY, PAPER CASSETTE
CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT p.289 (4.6)
are removed, place them out of the way so as not to cause an obstruction for your
XEROGRAPHICS p.320 (4.7) work. (Depending on the parts you are working on, it is not lways necessary to
DEVELOPMENT p.322 (4.8) remove those parts.)
DRIVE p.342 (4.9)
ELECTRICAL p.345 (4.10)
ONE TRAY OPTION FEEDER p.362 (4.11)
TWO TRAY OPTION FEEDER p.393 (4.12)
C A U T IO N When performing work on parts controlled as spare parts

which the disassembling procedures are not given in this
manual, fully observe how they are attached before starting
work.
For details about option parts, refer to the document supplied
with the parts.
In principle, options must already have been removed before
starting work, however, if there is no need to remove them, it is
allowed to service with them attached.

4.1.3 Screws
Many types of screws are used on this printer. Do not mistakenly attach them at the wrong positions. Pay special attention when handling screws for plastic and screws for metal
plates. If you mix up these screws, screw holes will be damaged. Screw threads also will be damaged, which may cause further trouble.
C A U T IO N The letter “TAP” on the board or plate indicates the position to be

screwed with a tapping screw for plastic.
Table 4-1. List of Screws

No. Type Application Shape How to Recognize Screw Type Cautions Parts
1 Screw for Plastic • Silver colored This is a self-tapping screw. It threads the
plastic • Screw threads are rougher than metal screw hole, so take care not to screw it
diagonally.
Rough plate TYPE
Silver tapping Part, Plastic • Screw tip is fine.
etc.
2 Screw for Plastic • Black colored This is a self-tapping screw. It threads the
plastic • Screw threads are rougher than metal screw hole, so take care not to screw it
diagonally.
Rough plate TYPE
Black tapping Part, Plastic • Screw tip is fine.
etc.
3 Screw for Plastic • Silver colored

metal plate • Uniform screw diameter
Silver Part, Plastic

etc.
4 Screw for Metal • Gold colored

metal plate plate • Uniform screw diameter
Gold Part,
etc.
Plastic
5 Screw for Metal • Silver colored • Parts where each

metal plate plate • With external toothed washer grounding wire is
• Uniform screw diameter fixed.
Silver with external toothed Part, Plastic
etc.
washer

4.1.4 Tools
Use only specified tools to avoid damaging the printer. All are commercially available,
and should be made ready beforehand.
Name Code
Phillips screwdriver No.1 B743800100
Phillips screwdriver No.2 B743800500
Flat-blade screwdriver B743000100
Long-nose pliers B740400100
Tweezers ---
E-Ring holder ---

4.1.5 Conventions used in descriptions of procedures Black arrows in illustrations indicate that the part should be moved in the indicated
direction.
Expressions relating to directions in procedures are defined as follows: When black arrows are given a consecutive number, this indicates that they should
FRONT : Near-side direction facing the front side of the printer be moved in the indicated order.
REAR : Far-side direction facing the front side of the printer For details on positions of connectors (P/J), refer to Chapter 7 APPENDIX.
LEFT : Left direction facing the front side of the printer “Latch A Release” and “Latch B Release” that are described in the disassembly
procedures indicate to release the latches shown in the figures below.
RIGHT : Right direction facing the front side of the printer
Latch A 2
Ida_03_125C
Latch B 2
Ida_03_097A
Figure 4-1. Definition of Printer Orientation
Remove screws shown in the figures with a Phillips screwdriver unless otherwise 1
specified.
Ida_03_126C
Figure 4-2. Releasing Latches

4.2 COVERS 5. Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.

6. Attach the COVER ASSY TOP. (p.254)
4.2.1 COVER TOP MAIN
5)
C H E C K [CAUTION] in the figure indicates a "CAUTION" note or

P O IN T precaution for reinstalling.
COVER TOP MAIN
4)
REMOVAL
4)
1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP. (p.254)
2. Release latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
3. Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. COVER ASSY TOP PHD
6)
4. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secure the COVER TOP
MAIN.
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
5. Release the two tabs that secure the rear of the COVER TOP MAIN.
6. With the COVER ASSY TOP PHD slightly opened, pull out the COVER TOP STUD TOP
MAIN toward rear of the printer to remove it.
REINSTALLATION
Before reinstalling the COVER TOP MAIN, make sure that the [CAUTION]
C A U T IO N
right STUD TOP is pressed down completely.
1. With the COVER ASSY TOP PHD slightly opened, insert the COVER TOP
MAIN from rear of the printer.
2. Lock the two tabs on the rear of the COVER TOP MAIN.
Ida_03_001B
3. Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD and attach the COVER TOP MAIN with the 2
screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm). Figure 4-3. Removing the COVER TOP MAIN
4. Close the COVER ASSY TOP PHD.
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY COVERS 242

4.2.2 CONSOLE PANEL

2)-1
REMOVAL
1. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244) 2)-1

2. Release the three tabs that secure the CONSOLE PANEL to the COVER ASSY
FRONT HEAD, and remove the CONSOLE PANEL.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the two bosses on the CONSOLE PANEL into the holes on the COVER
ASSY FRONT HEAD, and secure the CONSOLE PANEL by locking the three
tabs.
2. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244)
COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD

2)-2
CONSOLE PANEL
Ida_03_104B
Figure 4-4. Removing the CONSOLE PANEL

4.2.3 COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD

3) 2) 3)
C H E C K Numbers in the square bracket [ ] in the figure indicate the steps of

P O IN T reinstallation procedure.
REMOVAL

2. Remove the 2 screws (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secure the COVER ASSY
FRONT HEAD.
3. Release the four tabs that secure the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD to the
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care not to move

COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD too far from the CHUTE ASSY
DUP OUT as they are connected with a cable.
4. Move the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD slightly away from the CHUTE ASSY
DUP OUT.
5. Disconnect P/J220 connector from the CONSOLE PANEL. 5)
6. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD from the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
REINSTALLATION
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
1. Connect P/J220 connector to the CONSOLE PANEL.
2. Insert the four bosses on the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD into the holes on the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and secure the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD with [2)] Ida_03_003B
the four tabs.
Figure 4-5. Removing the COVER FRONT HEAD
3. Secure the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD with the 2 screws (silver, tapping,
10mm).
4. Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.

4.2.4 COVER ASSY TOP PHD

REMOVAL
4)-2
1. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
2. Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253)
3. Pull out the two STUD TOPs that secure the COVER ASSY TOP PHD to the
main unit.
4. While releasing the bosses on both the GUIDE FRAME DEVE L and the GUIDE
FRAME DEVE R from the grooves on both ends of the COVER ASSY TOP COVER ASSY TOP PHD
PHD, remove the COVER ASSY TOP PHD.
STUD TOP
REINSTALLATION 3)
1. Insert the bosses on both the GUIDE FRAME DEVE L and the GUIDE FRAME
DEVE R into the grooves on both ends of the COVER ASSY TOP PHD.
2. Match the two holes on the COVER ASSY TOP PHD with the holes on the main
unit, and insert the two STUD TOPs to secure the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. 3)
3. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253)

4. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
STUD TOP
COVER ASSY TOP PHD
GUIDE FRAME
DEVE R
4)-1
Ida_03_004A
Figure 4-6. Removing the COVER ASSY TOP PHD

4.2.5 COVER REAR ASSY [CAUTION]
REMOVAL

2. Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) 5)
4. Disconnect P/J166 connector from the LVPS.
5. Release the two clamps and remove the harness.
6. Lift the COVER REAR ASSY a little to remove it toward rear of the printer.
COVER REAR ASSY

REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the COVER REAR ASSY to the main unit and secure the COVER REAR
ASSY with the seven tabs.
2. Route the harness through the two clamps. J166
C A U T IO N Lead the harness of the FAN REAR through the harness guide and
the clamp. Make sure to route the harness as shown.
LVPS
6)
3. Connect P/J166 connector to the LVPS.

Ida_03_005B
4. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Figure 4-7. Removing the COVER REAR ASSY
5. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248)

4.2.6 FAN REAR
C H E C K [CAUTION] in the figure indicates a "CAUTION" for reinstalling.

COVER REAR
P O IN T
REMOVAL

2. Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248)
4. Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246)
5. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 35 mm) that secure the FAN REAR. 5)
6. Remove the FAN REAR.
LABEL
[CAUTION]
REINSTALLATION
FAN REAR 5)
C A U T IO N Pay attention to the attachment orientation of the FAN.
6)
(Attach the FAN with its label facing toward the inside of the
printer.) J166 Ida_03_006A
Figure 4-8. Removing the FAN REAR

1. Secure the FAN REAR with the 2 screws (silver, tapping, 35mm) with its label
facing toward the inside of the printer.
2. Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246)

4.2.7 COVER SIDE R ASSY

2)
REMOVAL

2. Remove the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm) that secures the COVER SIDE R
ASSY.
4)
3. Release the tab that secures the COVER SIDE R ASSY.
4. Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the tab on the bottom of the COVER SIDE R ASSY into the groove on the
main unit.
2. Secure the tab of the COVER SIDE R ASSY to the main unit.
COVER SIDE R
3. Secure the COVER SIDE R ASSY with the screw (silver, with flange, 8 mm).
3)
[1)]
Ida_03_007A
Figure 4-9. Removing the COVER SIDE R ASSY

4.2.8 COVER FRONT R
C H E C K [CAUTION] in the figure indicates a note for reinstalling.

P O IN T
REMOVAL 2)
1. Release latch A and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN.

2. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secures the COVER FRONT R.
3)
3. Release the two tabs that secure the COVER FRONT R.
4. Release latch B, fully open the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT and half-open the
CHUTE ASSY DUP IN.
5. Remove the COVER FRONT R while pulling it toward you.
REINSTALLATION 5)
COVER FRONT R

2. Release latch A and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN. [NOET]
3. Insert the two bosses on the COVER FRONT R into the holes on the CHUTE
ASSY DUP IN with lifting the latch A, and secure the COVER FRONT R with the
two tabs.
4. Secure the COVER FRONT R with the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm).
5. Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN.
LATCH R
COVER FRONT R
Ida_03_008B
Figure 4-10. Removing COVER FRONT R

4.2.9 TRAY ASSY MSI BASE

REMOVAL TRAY ASSY MSI BASE
6)
1. Remove the COVER FRONT L ASSY. (p.252) HOLDER TRAY R
2. Open the COVER ASSY MSI.
3. Pull out the right and left bosses of the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE while pressing
the elongate holes on both sides of the COVER ASSY MSI outward. HOLDER TRAY L
5. Rotate the HOLDER TRAY L at the left base of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
clockwise and remove the HOLDER TRAY L.
6. Release the left boss and pull out the right boss of the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE, 3)
and remove the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE together with the HOLDER TRAY R.
3)
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the HOLDER TRAY R to the right boss of the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE,
and attach them to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. 5)-1
2. Attach the HOLDER TRAY L to the left base of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT,
and secure the left boss of the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE with the HOLDER TRAY 5)-2
L.
4)
3. Secure the HOLDER TRAY L by turning it counterclockwise.
5. Put the right and left bosses of the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE into the elongate
holes on both sides of the COVER ASSY MSI. Ida_03_009A
6. Attach the COVER FRONT L ASSY. (p.252) Figure 4-11. Removing TRAY ASSY MSI BASE

4.2.10 COVER ASSY MSI

REMOVAL

2. Pull out the right and left bosses of the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE while pressing
the elongate holes on both sides of the COVER ASSY MSI outward.
3. Slide the COVER ASSY MSI rightward to pull out its two bosses and remove the
COVER ASSY MSI. TRAY ASSY
MSI BASE
REINSTALLATION
1. Slide the COVER ASSY MSI leftward to insert its two bosses into the holes on the
bottom of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
2. Put the right and left bosses of the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE into the elongate
holes on both sides of the COVER ASSY MSI.
2) 3)
3. Close the COVER ASSY MSI.
2)
COVER ASSY MSI

Ida_03_010B
Figure 4-12. Removing COVER ASSY MSI

4.2.11 COVER FRONT L ASSY

REMOVAL

2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244)
3. Release the three tabs that secure the COVER FRONT L ASSY and remove the
COVER FRONT L ASSY.
C H E C K When releasing the three tabs, release the lowest tab first, and the
P O IN T middle one, then the upper one to make the work easier.
3)-1
REINSTALLATION COVER ASSY MSI

2. Insert the two bosses on the COVER FRONT L ASSY into the holes on the
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and secure the COVER FRONT L ASSY with the
three tabs. 3)-2
4. Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. COVER FRONT L ASSY Ida_03_011A
Figure 4-13. Removing the COVER FRONT L ASSY

4.2.12 COVER SIDE L ASSY

2)
REMOVAL

4)
2. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secures the COVER SIDE L
ASSY.
3. Release the tab that secures the COVER SIDE L ASSY.
4. Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the tab on the bottom of the COVER SIDE L ASSY into the groove on the
[1)]
main unit.
2. Secure the tab of the COVER SIDE L ASSY to the main unit.
3. Secure the COVER SIDE L ASSY with the screw (silver, tapping, 10mm). COVER SIDE L ASSY
3)
Ida_03_012A
Figure 4-14. Removing the COVER SIDE L ASSY

4.2.13 COVER ASSY TOP, COVER TOP STOPPER

COVER TOP STOPPER
REMOVAL
COVER ASSY TOP
1. Remove the COVER ASSY TOP upward.
2. While bending the COVER TOP STOPPER, pull out its two bosses one by one to
remove the COVER ASSY STOPPER from the COVER ASSY TOP.
REINSTALLATION
1. While bending the COVER TOP STOPPER, put its two bosses into the COVER
ASSY TOP one by one to attach the COVER ASSY STOPPER to the COVER
ASSY TOP.
2. Attach the COVER ASSY TOP.
Ida_03_123B
Figure 4-15. Removing the COVER ASSY TOP and COVER TOP STOPPER

4.3 PAPER CASSETTE
4.3.1 ROLL ASSY RETARD 4)
REMOVAL CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION
1. Draw out the CASSETTE from the main unit.

2. Remove the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (p.256)
3. Release the tab that secures the SHAFT ASSY RETARD to the HOLDER SHAFT ASSY RETARD
RETARD, and remove the SHAFT ASSY RETARD together with the ROLL
ASSY RETARD and the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION.
4. Pull out the ROLL ASSY RETARD and the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION from
the SHAFT ASSY RETARD.
ROLL ASSY RETARD
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N When installing the SHAFT ASSY RETARD, pay attention to its 3)-1
orientation. 3)-2
1. Insert the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION into the SHAFT ASSY RETARD.
2. Insert the SHAFT ASSY RETARD into the ROLL ASSY RETARD with the
cross-shaped dent side of the ROLL ASSY RETARD facing the shaft, and engage
the ROLL ASSY RETARD with the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION.
3. Attach the SHAFT ASSY RETARD, on which the ROLL ASSY RETARD and
the CLUTCH ASSY FRICION are attached, to the HOLDER RETARD and
secure them with the tab.
4. Attach the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (p.256) HOLDER RETARD Ida_03_013A
5. Install the CASSETTE to the main unit. Figure 4-16. Removing the ROLL ASSY RETARD.
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY PAPER CASSETTE 255

4.3.2 HOLDER ASSY RETARD

3)-3
REMOVAL

HOLDER ASSY RETARD
2. Press the two (right and left) tabs of the CHUTE TURN CST inward to release 3)-2
them, and open the CHUTE TURN CST.
3. Release the tab that secures the HOLDER ASSY RETARD to the CASSETTE,
CHUTE TURN CST
rotate the HOLDER ASSY RETARD upward, and remove the HOLDER ASSY
RETARD toward left.
2)-1 3)-1
REINSTALLATION 2)-2
1. Match the two holes on the HOLDER ASSY RETARD with the bosses on the
CASSETTE, attach HOLDER ASSY RETARD, and secure them with the tab.
2. Close the CHUTE TURN CST. 2)-1
3. Install the CASSETTE to the main unit.
CASSETTE
Ida_03_015B
Figure 4-17. Removing the HLDER ASSY RETARD

4.3.3 KIT GUIDE SIDE L, KIT GUIDE SIDE R
C H E C K Numbers in the square bracket [ ] in the figure indicate the steps of PLATE ASSY BTM
P O IN T reinstallation procedure. 5)
4)
2
1
REMOVAL
HOOK PLATE
ASSY BTM
2. Hold down the PLATE ASSY BTM, release the tabs on both the STOPPER LINK
PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R located on right-and-left bottom of the
CASSETTE, and lift the PLATE ASSY BTM.
3. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the STOPPER BLOCK to
the HOUSING CST. STOPPER BLOCK
4. Release the PLATE ASSY BTM from the tab on the right side of the HOUSIGN 3)
CST. 1
2
5. Raise the PLATE ASSY BTM as indicated with black arrow in Figure 4-18.
PLATE ASSY BTM Ida_03_11
Figure 4-18. Removing the KIT GUIDE SIDE L and KIT GUIDE SIDE R

6. Release the tab of the GEAR MANUAL to remove the GEAR MANUAL.
7. Slide the KIT GUIDE SIDE L inward as far as it will go to remove upward.
8. Slide the KIT GUIDE SIDE R inward as far as it will go to remove upward. KIT GUIDE SIDE R
KIT GUIDE SIDE R

C A U T IO N When removing the KIT GUIDE SIDE R, be careful not to lose the
GUIDE STOPPER and the SPRING STOPPER GUIDE SIDE as
GEAR MANUAL
they may come off.
6) KIT GUIDE SIDE L
8) HOOK
HOOK 7)
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the KIT GUIDE SIDE R to the HOUSING CST, and slide it outward as far
as it will go.
2. Attach the KIT GUIDE SIDE L to the HOUSING CST, tune the scale of the [2)]
LEVER GUIDE SIDE to "8.5", and slide it outward as far as it will go. LEVER GUIDE KIT GUIDE
SIDE SIDE L
C A U T IO N Attaching the LEVER GUIDE SIDE without tuning its scale to
"8.5" may cause pattern misalignment or paper jam because
papers are not loaded properly in this state.
3. Attach the GEAR MANUAL.

4. Match the SPRING N/F with the tab on the backside of the PLATE ASSY BTM,
and install them by securing with the tabs on the right side of the PLATE ASSY
BTM. HOOKs
5. Attach the STOPPER BLOCK with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm).
Ida_03_117A
6. Lower the PLATE ASSY BTM, and secure the PLATE ASSY BTM with the
Figure 4-19. Removing the KIT GUIDE SIDE L, KIT GUIDE SIDE R (2)
locks on both the STOPPER LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R.

4.3.4 KIT GUIDE END

3
REMOVAL
6)
KIT GUIDE END
2 HOOK
ACTUATOR GUIDE END
CASSETTE, and lift the PLATE ASSY BTM. 1
the HOUSING CST.
4. Release the PLATE ASSY BTM from the tab on the right side of the HOUSING
CST.
6. Release the notch of the ACTUATOR GUIDE END from the HOUSING CST,
rotate the ACTUATOR GUIDE END 90 degrees centering around the shaft of the
KIT GUIDE END, and remove the ACTUATOR GUIDE END.
Ida_03_118B
PLATE ASSY BTM
Figure 4-21. Removing the KIT GUIDE END (2)
5)
4)
2
1
HOOK PLATE
ASSY BTM
STOPPER BLOCK
3)
1
2
PLATE ASSY BTM Ida_03_116B

7. Slide the KIT GUIDE END forward to release its tab from the HOUSING CST,
KIT GUIDE END
and remove the KIT GUIDE END upward.
C A U T IO N When removing the KIT GUIDE END, be careful not to lose the
LATCH GUIDE END and the SPRING LATCH GUIDE END as
they may come off from the back side. 7)
2
1
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the KIT GUIDE END to the HOUSING CST, and slide it toward rear
overleaping the tab.
HOOK
2. Insert the ACTUATOR GUIDE END to the shaft of the KIT GUIDE END, and
slide it forward with its notch set in the HOUSING CST.
3. Match the SPRING N/F with the tab on the backside of the PLATE ASSY BTM, Ida_03_119B
and install them by securing with the tabs on the right side of the PLATE ASSY
BTM. Figure 4-22. Removing the KIT GUIDE END (3)
locks on both the STOPPER LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R.

4.4 PAPER FEEDER
4.4.1 CHUTE ASSY FEEDER

REMOVAL
2)
2. Press down the concave portions on the right-and-left side of the CHUTE ASSY 2)
FEEDER with your fingers, and rotate the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER downward.
3. Lift up the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER, slide it forward overleaping the rib, insert its
shaft to the hole on the left, and remove the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER by releasing
its right edge first.
3)-1
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the bosses on the right-and-left edges of the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER to the
FEEDER (left-side edge should be inserted first), and push the CHUTE ASSY
FEEDER deeply into the FEEDER overleaping the rib.
2. Rotate the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER toward you and lock it.
3)-3
3)-2
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER 3)-1
Ida_03_016A
Figure 4-23. Removing the COVER ASSY FEEDER
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY PAPER FEEDER 261

4.4.2 COVER CST

REMOVAL
1. Pull in the upper side of the COVER CST toward you, and remove the COVER
CST from the upper attaching part of the FEEDER ASSY.
2. Remove the COVER CST from the lower attaching part of the FEEDER ASSY.
REINSTALLATION
1. Hitch the COVER CST to the lower attaching part of the FEEDER ASSY.
2. Push the upper side of the COVER CST into the upper attaching part of the
FEEDER ASSY to install the COVER CST.
COVER CST
Ida_03_017A
Figure 4-24. Removing the COVER CST

4.4.3 FEEDER ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY)

15) 15)
REMOVAL
15) 16)
1. Draw out the CASSETTE from the main unit. 15)
15)
15)
4. Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) 16)
15)
5. Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) 15)
6. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283)

18)
7. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN. (p.280)
8. Remove the HVPS. (p.356)
9. Remove the BRACKET TEMP. (Refer to p355) SUPPORT LINK
10. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secures the SUPPORT LINK, and
10)
remove the SUPPORT LINK.
11. Disconnect all the connectors on the LVPS. PWBA MCU IDTN
J17 17)
12. Disconnect P/J17 connector connected to the PWBA MCU IDTN of the main unit J47
from the FEEDER ASSY.
13. Disconnect P/J47 connector connected to the PWBA MCU IDTN of the main unit
FRAME FEEDER F
from the FEEDER ASSY.
15)
FEEDER ASSY 12)

13) Ida_03_018C
Figure 4-25. Removing the FEEDER ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY) (1)

C A U T IO N When performing the following work, be careful not to overlook the

screw (silver, 6 mm) beneath the CHUTE ASSY REGI.
14. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secure the GUIDE
HARNESS F and release the GUIDE HARNESS F.
15. Remove the five screws (silver, 6mm) and four screws (silver, tapping, 10mm)
that secure the FEEDER ASSY to the main unit.
16. Remove the three SCREW M3X110s that secure the FEEDER ASSY to the main
unit. 14)
GUIDE HARNESS F
17. Release the two harnesses of P/J17 and P/J47 connectors from the bottom plate slit
on the lower main unit toward the FEEDER. 14)
18. Remove the FRAME FEEDER F from both the main unit and the FEEDER ASSY
by releasing four tabs.
C A U T IO N The upper main unit should be lifted up by two persons.

When removing the upper main unit from the FEEDER ASSY,
pay attention not to drop or damage the upper main unit.
Ida_03_199A
19. Lift up the upper main unit and separate it from the FEEDER ASSY. Figure 4-26. Removing the FEEDER ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY) (2)

REINSTALLATION 15. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253)

16. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY.
C A U T IO N The upper main unit should be lifted up by two persons. 17. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
When installing the upper main unit onto the FEEDER ASSY,
make sure that the harness of the FEEDER ASSY is not 18. Install the CASSETTE to the main unit.
pinched.
[CAUTION]
1. Lift the upper main unit onto the FEEDER ASSY paying attention to the position
of the bosses on the front of the upper main unit.
2. Secure the FRAME FEEDER F both to the main unit and the FEEDER ASSY
HARNESS ASSY 24V LVPS
with four tabs.
3. Secure the upper main unit with the three SCREW M3X110s. P/J161
4. Secure the upper main unit with the five screws (silver, 6 mm) and the four screws
P/J163
(silver, tapping, 10 mm). HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC
5. Secure the GUIDE HARNESS F to the printer body with the two screws (silver, P/J164
tapping, 10mm).
P/J165
C A U T IO N When connecting the connectors in the following steps, route the

harnesses as shown in the figure.
P/J162
6. Connect P/J47 connector of the FEEDER ASSY to the PWBA MCU IDTN of the P/J22
PWBA MCU IDTN P/J60
main unit. HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE 2
P/J47 P/J17
7. Connect P/J17 connector of the FEEDER ASSY to the PWBA MCU IDTN of the HARNESS ASSY FDR HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG
main unit.
8. Connect all the connectors on the LVPS.
Ida_03_150B
9. Attach the SUPPORT LINK with the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm).
Figure 4-27. Installing the FEEDER ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY)
10. Attach the BRACKET TEMP. (Refer to p355)
11. Attach the HVPS. (p.356)
12. Attach the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN.
13. Attach the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283)

4.4.4 SWITCH ASSY SIZE

REMOVAL 2)
1. Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263)

SWITCH ASSY SIZE
2. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secures the SWITCH ASSY SIZE
from the FEEDER R.
3. Disconnect P/J471 connector connected to the SWITCH ASSY SIZE, and release J471
the tab of the SWITCH ASSY SIZE to remove the SWITCH ASSY SIZE. 3)
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect P/J471 connector to the SWITCH ASSY SIZE.

2. Hitch the tab on the SWITCH ASSY SIZE, match the two bosses with the holes of
the FEEDER R, and secure them with the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm).
3. Install the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263)
FEEDER R
Ida_03_019A
Figure 4-28. Removing the SWITCH ASSY SIZE

4.4.5 SWITCH Operate the SWITCH to make sure that the SHAFT LINK S/W is
C A U T IO N
installed correctly and the SWITCH operates smoothly.
P O IN T
4. Attach the FEEDER ASSY. (p.263)
REMOVAL
2)

HOLDER SWITCH
3)
2. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secures the HOLDER SWITCH.
C A U T IO N When removing the HOLDER SWITCH, be careful not to drop the 4)

SWITCH and the SHAFT LINK SWITCH. SHAFT LINK S/W
SWITCH
5)
3. Remove the HOLDER SWITCH.
4. Remove the SHAFT LINK S/W.
5. Remove the SWITCH.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the SHAFT LINK S/W into the hole of the SWITCH.
C A U T IO N When installing the SWITCH, pay attention to its direction.

[CAUTION]
Power
Off On
2. Attach the SWITCH to the shaft of the HOLDER SWITCH.

3. Insert the SHAFT LINK S/W into the hole of the switch that is on the LVPS, and FEEDER R
secure the HOLDER SWITCH to the FEEDER ASSY with a screw (silver, Ida_03_020B
tapping, 10 mm).
Figure 4-29. Removing the SWITCH

4.4.6 HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG

REMOVAL

2. Release the harness of the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG from the harness guide of
the FEEDER R. 2)
3. Release the two tabs that secure the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG to the FEEDER
R.
4. Pull out the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG downward from the FEEDER R.
J17
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG from the bottom of the FEEDER R.
2. Attach the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG by locking the two tabs of the HARNESS
ASSY OPFPLG.
3. Route the harness of the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG through the harness guide of 3) FEEDER R
the FEEDER R.
3)
HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG
P171
4)
Ida_03_021A
Figure 4-30. Removing the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG.

4.4.7 PICK UP ASSY

REMOVAL J473

2. Remove the CHUTE UPPER. (p.275)
3. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secure the PICK UP ASSY to 3)
the FEEDER ASSY.
4. Disconnect P/J472 connector of the SENSOR NO PAPER and P/J474 connector
of the SOLENOID FEED. PICK UP ASSY 3) SENSOR LOW PAPER
5. Lift up the PICK UP ASSY from the FEEDER ASSY, disconnect P/J473 connector J473
J472
of the SENSOR LOW PAPER, and remove the PICK UP ASSY. (Refer to p272) 4)
SENSOR NO PAPER
REINSTALLATION J474
SENSOR LOW 4)
1. Connect P/J473 connector of the SENSOR LOW PAPER, match the two bosses on PAPER
the right-and-left edges of the FEEDER ASSY with the holes of the PICK UP
ASSY, and place the PICK UP ASSY onto the FEEDER ASSY. (Refer to p272) SOLENOID
FEED
2. Install the PICK UP ASSY to the FEEDER ASSY with the two screws (silver,
tapping, 10mm).
3. Connect P/J472 connector of the SENSOR NO PAPER and P/J474 connector of
the SOLENOID FEED.
4. Attach the CHUTE UPPER. (p.275)
FEEDER ASSY
Ida_03_022A
Figure 4-31. Removing the PICK UP ASSY

4.4.8 ROLL ASSY TURN, BEARING SLEEVE, 4. Attach the GEAR TURN to the shaft on the right side of the ROLL ASSY TURN.
PLASTIC 5. Attach the GEAR IDLER IN to the shaft on the right side of the FEEDER ASSY.
6. Rotate the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER toward you and lock it. (Refer to p261)
REMOVAL
2. Press down the concave portions on the right-and-left side of the CHUTE ASSY ROLL ASSY TURN
(Refer to p261) 8)
PICK UP ASSY
3. Release the tab that secures the GEAR IDLER IN to the shaft on the right side of
the PICK UP ASSY, and pull out the GEAR IDLER IN. BEARING SLEEVE,
PLASTIC
4. Release the tab that secures the GEAR TURN to the shaft of the ROLL ASSY
7)
TURN, and pull out the GEAR TURN. 5)
5. Remove the two E-rings on the right-and-left side of the ROLL ASSY TURN that GEAR
secure ROLL ASSY TURN to the PICK UP ASSY. IDLER IN
6. Remove the right BEARING EARTH securing the ROLL ASSY TURN to the 3)
PICK UP ASSY. 6)
5) 4)
7. Remove the left BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC securing the ROLL ASSY BEARING
TURN to the PICK UP ASSY. CHUTE ASSY FEEDER EARTH
GEAR TURN
8. Temporarily slide the ROLL ASSY TURN toward right, release the left-side edge
of the ROLL ASSY TURN from the bearing of the PICK UP ASSY, and remove
the ROLL ASSY TURN toward upper left.
REINSTALLATION
Ida_03_023A
1. Insert the right-side edge of the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right bearing of the Figure 4-32. Removing the ROLL ASSY TURN and the BEARING SLEEVE,
PICK UP ASSY, slide the ROLL ASSY TURN toward left, and insert the left-side PLASTIC
edge of the ROLL ASSY TURN to the left bearing of the PICK UP ASSY.
2. Attach the BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC to the left side of the ROLL ASSY
TURN, and secure them with E-ring.
3. Attach the BEARING EARTH to the right side of the ROLL ASSY TURN, and
secure them with E-ring.

4.4.9 SENSOR NO PAPER

REMOVAL
4)
3. Remove the PICK UP ASSY. (p.269)
4. Release the three tabs that secure the SENSOR NO PAPER to the PICK UP
ASSY. ACTUATOR NO PAPER
5. Remove the SENSOR NO PAPER from the PICK UP ASSY paying attention not SENSOR NO PAPER
to hit the ACTUATOR NO PAPER.
5)
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the SENSOR NO PAPER to the PICK UP ASSY by locking the three tabs
with attention not to hit the ACTUATOR NO PAPER.
2. Install the PICK UP ASSY. (p.269)
3. Install the CHUTE UPPER. (p.275)
PICK UP ASSY
Ida_03_024A
Figure 4-33. Removing the SENSOR NO PAPAER

4.4.10 SENSOR LOW PAPER

REMOVAL 3)

3. Release the three tabs that secure the SENSOR LOW PAPER to the PICK UP
ASSY.
4. Disconnect P/J473 connector connected to the SENSOR LOW PAPER, and PICK UP ASSY
remove the SENSOR LOW PAPER.
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect P/J473 connector to the SENSOR LOW PAPER.

2. Attach the SENSOR LOW PAER to the PICK UP ASSY by locking the three tabs.
4)-1
J473
4)-2
SENSOR LOW PAPER
Ida_03_025B
Figure 4-34. Removing the SENSOR LOW PAPER

4.4.11 SOLENOID FEED

REMOVAL

4. Remove the screw (silver, 6 mm) that secures SOLENOID FEED to the PICK UP
ASSY, and remove the SOLENOID FEED.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the hole positions of the SOLENOID FEED with the two bosses on the
PICK UP ASSY, and attach the SOLENOID FEED with the screw (silver, 6mm). SOLENOID FEED

PICK UP ASSY
J474
4)
Ida_03_026A
Figure 4-35. Removing the SOLENOID FEED

4.4.12 ACTUATOR LOW PAPER

REMOVAL
3)-1
2. Reverse the CHUTE UPPER.
3. Release the tab on the CHUTE UPPER that secures ACTUATOR LOW PAPER,
and remove the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER by releasing one edge of the
ACTUATOR LOW PAPER.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert one edge of the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER into the hole of the CHUTE
UPPER, lock the other edge with the tab, and install the ACTUATOR LOW
PAPER.
CHUTE UPPER
3)-2
ACUATOR LOW PAPER

Ida_03_027A
Figure 4-36. Removing the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER

4.4.13 CHUTE UPPER (REFERENCE ONLY)

REMOVAL [CAUTION]

2. Remove the COVER CST. (p.262)
3. Release the two tabs that secure the CHUTE UPPER to the PICK UP ASSY,
FRAME ASSY DRIVE
temporarily slide the CHUTE UPPER rearward to remove the four hooks, and
remove the CHUTE UPPER downward. HOOKs HOOKs
Looking from the rear with both the CASSETTE and the COVER 3)-1
C A U T IO N PICK UP ASSY
CST removed, the two hooks should be located on upper surface of
the PICK UP ASSY. The upper main unit is removed in the
illustration to make it easier to understand. 3)-1
CHUTE UPPER
REINSTALLATION
C H E C K The following work can be performed easily by removing the

P O IN T CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. (Refer to p261) HOOKs
1. Hitch the four hooks on the CHUTE UPPER to the holes of the PICK UP ASSY,
and install the CHUTE UPPER by locking the two hooks.
2. Attach the COVER CST. (p.262)
3)-2
CHUTE UPPER
Ida_03_028A
Figure 4-37. Removing the CHUTE UPPER (REFERENCE ONLY)

4.4.14 ROLL ASSY FEED

REMOVAL
DITCH PIN
2. Release the tab that secures the ROLL ASSY FEED to the SHAFT FEED, and pull
out the ROLL ASSY FEED to remove it.
3. Release the tab that secures the ROLL ASSY FEED to the SHAFT ASSY
NUDGER, and pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED to remove it. ROLL ASSY FEED
ROLL ASSY FEED 2)
3)
REINSTALLATION
1. With the cross-shaped notch of the ROLL ASSY FEED matched with the pin of
the SHAFT ASSY NUDGER, insert the ROLL ASSY FEED into the SHAFT
ASSY NUDGER, and secure it with lock.
the SHAFT ASSY FEED, insert the ROLL ASSY FEED into the SHAFT ASSY
FEED, and secure it with lock.
SHAFT ASSY NUDGER

SHAFT ASSY FEED
Ida_03_029A
Figure 4-38. Removing the ROLL ASSY FEED

4.4.15 ACTUATOR NO PAPER

REMOVAL
5) 6)
4. Reverse the PICK UP ASSY.
5. Release the tab that secures the ACUTUATOR NO PAPER to the PICK UP
ASSY.
ACTUATOR NO PAPER ACTUATOR NO PAPER
6. Draw forth the ACTUATOR NO PAPER slightly, and move the thin part of the
shaft from the attaching hole to the oblong square hole.
7. As moving the tab side of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER in the direction of an
arrow, remove the ACTUATOR NO PAPER from the oblong square hole of the
PICK UP ASSY.
PICK UP ASSY
REINSTALLATION
7)-2
1. Insert the ACTUATOR NO PAPER into the oblong square hole of the PICK UP
ASSY.
2. Move the thin part of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER from the oblong square hole
of the PICK UP ASSY to the attaching hole of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER in
order to set up the ACTUATOR NO PAPER.
3. Insert the boss on the ACTUATOR NO PAPER into the hole of the PICK UP 7)-1 ACTUATOR NO PAPER
Ida_03_030A
ASSY, and secure them with locks.
Figure 4-39. Removing the ACTUATOR NO PAPER

4.5 RETARD & REGI ASSY
4.5.1 ACTUATOR REGI

REMOVAL

3. Rotate the ACUATOR REGI in the direction of an arrow, lift up the shaft edge on SPRING SENSOR REGI
the spring-side, draw out the other edge from the attaching hole, and remove the
ACTUATOR REGI. ACTUATOR REGI
4. Remove the SPRING SENSOR REGI.
3)
4)
CHUTE ASSY REGI IN

REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N When installing the SPRING SENSOR REGI, beware of its

mounting direction.
Hitch the SPRING SENSOR REGI firmly.
1. Attach the SPRING SENSOR REGI to the ACTUATOR REGI.

2. Hitch one end of the SPRING SENSOR REGI to the ACTUATOR REGI, and the
other end to the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN. Ida_03_031C
3. Install the ACTUATOR REGI to the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN. Figure 4-40. Removing the ACTUATOR REGI
4. Install the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN. (p.280)
5. Install the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283)
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY RETARD & REGI ASSY 278

4.5.2 SENSOR REGI

SENSOR REGI
4)-2
REMOVAL

CHUTE ASSY REGI IN
3. Remove the ACTUATOR REGI. (p.278)
4. Release the three tabs that secure the SENSOR REGI to the CHUTE ASSY REGI
IN, and remove the SENSOR REGI.
REINSTALLATION
4)-1
1. Attach the SENSOR REGI to the CHUTE ASSY REGI by locking the three tabs.
2. Install the ACTUATOR REGI. (p.278)
4. Install the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283) Ida_03_032B
Figure 4-41. Removing the SENSOR REGI

4.5.3 CHUTE ASSY REGI IN

3)
REMOVAL
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care not to move the
CHUTE ASSY REGI IN too far from the main unit as they are SENSOR REGI
connected with a connector.
CHUTE ASSY REGI IN
2. Lift up the rear of the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN slightly, draw out rearward, and
remove the CHUTE ASST REGI IN.
3. Disconnect P/J181 connector of the SENSOR REGI that is connected to the
CHUTE ASSY REGI IN.
2)
4. Disconnect P/J200 relay connector of the HARNESS ASSY OHP and the
HARNESS ASSY OHP MCU.
REINSTALLATION
HARNESS ASSY SENSOR OHP
1. Connect P/J200 relay connector of the HARNESS ASSY OHP and the HARNESS
ASSY OHP MCU.
2. Connect P/J181 connector to the SENSOR REGI on the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN.
3. Insert the three tabs on the front of the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN into the three
holes of the main unit frame, and tuck the two projections on the rear of the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN J181
CHUTE ASSY into the attaching holes.
P/J200
HARNESS ASSY OHP MCU
Ida_03_034B
Figure 4-42. Removing the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN

4.5.4 SENSOR OHP

3)
REMOVAL

3. Remove the one screw (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secures the SENSOR OHP to
SENSOR REGI
the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN with the HOLDER OHP.
4. Disconnect P/J201 connector that is connected to the SENSOR OHP and then CHUTE ASSY REGI IN
remove the SENSOR OHP from the HOLDER OHP.
REINSTALLATION
2)
1. Connect P/J201 connector to the SENSOR OHP and install the SENSOR OHP to
the HOLDER OHP.
C A U T IO N Make sure to match the attaching hole of the SENSOR OHP with
the projection of the HOLDER OHP.
HARNESS ASSY SENSOR OHP
2. Secure the HOLDER OHP with the SENSOR OHP to the CHUTE ASSY REGI
IN with the one screw.
4. Install the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283) CHUTE ASSY REGI IN J181
P/J200
HARNESS ASSY OHP MCU
Ida_03_034B
Figure 4-43. Removing the CHUTE ASSY REGI IN

4.5.5 ROLL ASSY RETARD

REMOVAL

2. Remove the BTR ASSY. (p.290)
C A U T IO N Before performing the following work, cover the whole of the 3)-2
DEVE ASSY with papers or similar sheets to prevent toner from
adhering to your clothes. HOLDER ASSY
RETARD
3)-1
3. Rotate the HOLDER ASSY RETARD upward, lift up its left edge, and remove the
HOLDER ASSY RETARD.
4. Release the tab that secures the SHAFT RETARD to the HOLDER ASSY
SHAFT RETARD 4)
RETARD, and remove the SHAFT RETARD together with the ROLL ASSY
RETARD.
5. Pull out and remove both the ROLL ASSY RETARD and the CLUTCH ASSY
FRICTION from the SHAFT RETARD.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION into the SHAFT RETARD.

HOLDER
2. Insert the ROLL ASSY FRICTION into the SHAFT RETARD and engage them RETARD
with the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION. HOLDER
RETARD
3. Install the SHAFT RETARD on the HOLDER ASSY RETARD by locking the 5)
tab.
4. Insert the HOLDER ASSY RETARD to the main unit (the right edge should be
inserted first), and install the HOLDER ASSY RETARD by rotating it toward
you.
Make sure to remove the papers that cover the DEVE ASSY. SHAFT RETARD
C A U T IO N
CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION
ROLL ASSY RETARD Ida_03_036A
Figure 4-44. Removing the ROLL ASSY RETARD
5. Install the BTR ASSY. (p.290)

4.5.6 CHUTE ASSY REGI Make sure to remove the papers that cover the DEVE ASSY.
C A U T IO N

4), [1)]
REMOVAL

J191 J192
C A U T IO N Before performing the following work, cover the whole of the
DEVE ASSY with papers or similar sheets to prevent toner from
adhering to your clothes.
CHUTE ASSY REGI CHUTE ASSY REGI

2. Disconnect P/J191 and P/J192 connectors on the harness that is connected to the
CHUTE ASSY REGI, and remove the harness from the harness guide.
3)
3. Remove the four screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secure the CHUTE ASSY
3)
REGI to the main unit.
4. Lift up the CLUTCH gear on the right side of the CHUTE ASSY REGI for about 5
mm, and release the gear engagement. J192
5. Move the CHUTE ASSY REGI toward left, and remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI J191
CHUTE ASSY REGI
by lifting upward. 2)
3)
REINSTALLATION 5)
1. Insert the CLUTCH gear on the right side of the CHUTE ASSY REGI into the
hole of the main unit, and engage the gears.
2. Insert the two bosses on the main unit into the holes of the CHUTE ASSY REGI.
3. Secure the CHUTE ASSY REGI with the four screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm).
4. Connect P/J191 and P/J192 connectors that connects the CHUTE ASSY REGI to
the main unit, and put the harness within the harness guide.
Ida_03_037B
Figure 4-45. Removing the CHUTE ASSY REGI

4.5.7 ROLL REGI METAL 5. Hitch the PLATE REGI to the right-and-left shaft of the ROLL REGI METAL.
P O IN T
GEAR REGI
METAL
ROLL REGI METAL
REMOVAL
[CAUTION]
2. Remove the two PLATE REGIs on the right-and-left side of the ROLL REGI
METAL. ROLL REGI METAL
GEAR REGI
3. Remove the E-ring that secures the right shaft of the ROLL REGI METAL to the METAL
CHUTE REGI, and remove the BEARING METAL R.
4. Remove the E-ring that secures GEAR REGI METAL to the ROLL REGI 4)-2
METAL, and remove the GEAR REGI METAL. 6) 4)-1
CHUTE REGI
5)
5. Remove the BEARING METAL L that secures left shaft of the ROLL REGI
BEARING
METAL to the CHUTE REGI. METAL L
6. Temporarily slide the ROLL REGI METAL toward left, and remove the ROLL 3)-2
REGI METAL upward from the CHUTE REGI.
3)-1
REINSTALLATION 2) PLATE REGI
BEARING METAL R
1. Attach the ROLL REGI METAL to the CHUTE REGI.
2. Insert the BEARING METAL L into the left shaft of the ROLL REGI METAL.
3. Insert the GEAR REGI METAL into the left shaft of the ROLL REGI METAL,
and attach the E-ring.
C A U T IO N When installing the GEAR REGI METAL in the following

procedures, pay attention to the direction to insert the GEAR REGI
METAL. Ida_03_038C
Figure 4-46. Removing the ROLL REGI METAL

4. Insert the BEARING METAL R into the right shaft of the ROLL REGI METAL,

4.5.8 ROLL REGI RUBBER

REMOVAL GEAR REGI ROLL REGI
RUBBER RUBBER
2. Remove the two PLATE REGI on the right-and-left side of the ROLL REGI
METAL. [CAUTION]
3. Remove the CLUTCH REGI. (p.286)

4. Remove the BEARING that secures the right shaft of the REGI RUBBER to the
ROLL REGI RUBBER
CHUTE REGI.
GEAR REGI
RUBBER
5. Remove the E-ring that secures GEAR REGI RUBBER to the ROLL REGI PLATE REGI
RUBBER, and remove the GEAR REGI RUBBER. 5)-1
7)
6. Remove the BEARING EARTH that secures the left shaft of the ROLL REGI
RUBBER to the CHUTE REGI. 5)-2
6)
7. Temporarily slide the ROLL REGI RUBBER toward right, and remove the ROLL BEARING EARTH PLATE REGI
REGI RUBBER upward from the CHUTE REGI.
BEARING
REINSTALLATION
4)
1. Attach the ROLL REGI RUBBER to the CHUTE REGI.
CHUTE REGI
2. Insert the BEARING EARTH into the left shaft of the ROLL REGI RUBBER.
When installing the GEAR REGI RUBBER in the following Ida_03_039C

C A U T IO N
procedures, pay attention to the direction to insert the GEAR REGI
RUBBER. Figure 4-47. Removing the ROLL REGI RUBBER
3. Insert the GEAR REGI RUBBER into the left shaft of the ROLL REGI RUBBER,
4. Insert the BEARING into the right shaft of the ROLL REGI RUBBER.
5. Attach the CLUTCH REGI. (p.286)
6. Hitch the PLATE REGI to the right-and-left shaft of the ROLL REGI METAL.

4.5.9 CLUTCH REGI

CLUTCH REGI
REMOVAL

2. Remove the E-ring that secures the CLUTCH REGI to the ROLL REGI
RUBBER. CHUTE REGI
3. Pull out and remove the CLUTCH REGI from the ROLL REGI RUBBER.
REINSTALLATION ROLL REGI RUBBER
1. Insert the CLUTCH REGI into the shaft of the ROLL REGI RUBBER. CLUTCH REGI
2. Fit the CLUTCH fixing part of the CHUTE REGI between the two projections on
the CLUTCH TURN. 3)
3. Attach the E-ring to the ROLL REGI RUBBER.
C A U T IO N Route the harness as shown in the figure. 2)

[2)]
J192
Ida_03_040B
Figure 4-48. Removing the CLUTCH REGI

4.5.10 CLUTCH TURN
C H E C K Numbers in the square bracket [ ] in the figure indicate the

P O IN T steps of reinstallation procedure.
[CAUTION] in the figure indicates a "CAUTION" for
reinstalling.
REMOVAL
CHUTE REGI
2. Remove the E-ring that secures GEAR P1 to the ROLL TURN MSI, and remove
CLUTCH TURN
the GEAR P1.
3. Pull out and remove the CLUTCH TURN from the ROLL TURN MSI.
J191
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the CLUTCH TURN into the shaft of the ROLL TURN MSI. ROLL TURN MSI
2. Fit the CLUTCH fixing part of the CHUTE REGI between the two projections on
3)
the CLUTCH TURN. GEAR P1
2)-2
C A U T IO N When installing the GEAR P1 in the following procedures, pay
attention to the direction to insert the GEAR P1.
[2)] 2)-1
CLUTCH TURN
3. Insert the GEAR P1 into the shaft of the ROLL TURN MSI, and attach the E-ring.
C A U T IO N Route the harness as shown in the figure. GEAR P1

ROLL TURN MSI
[CAUTION]
Ida_03_041C
Figure 4-49. Removing the CLUTCH TURN

4.5.11 ROLL TURN MSI

REMOVAL CHUTE REGI
1. Remove the CHUTE ASSY REGI. (p.283) BEARING EARTH
2. Remove the CLUTCH TURN. (p.287)

3. Remove the BEARING that secures the right shaft of the ROLL TURN MSI to the
4)-1
CHUTE REGI. 4)-2
4. Remove the E-ring that secures the left shaft of the ROLL TURN MSI to the
CHUTE REGI, and remove the BEARING EARTH.
5. Temporarily slide the ROLL TURN MSI toward right, and remove the ROLL 3)
TURN MSI downward from the CHUTE REGI.
5) BEARING
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the ROLL TURN MSI to the CHUTE REGI. ROLL TURN MSI
2. Insert the BEARING EARTH into the left shaft of the ROLL TURN MSI, and
attach the E-ring. Ida_03_042B
3. Insert the BEARING into the right shaft of the ROLL TURN MSI. Figure 4-50. Removing the ROLL TURN MSI
4. Attach the CLUTCH TURN. (p.287)

4.6 CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT

FUSER ASSY
2)-2
4.6.1 FUSER ASSY
REMOVAL
LEVER-FUSER
As the Fuser unit remains at hazardous temperature for a certain 2)-1
C A U T IO N
period of time after turning the power off, be careful not to burn
yourself when performing the following work.
1. Release latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. 2)-1
LEVER-FUSER
2. Release the LEVER-FUSER, hold the right-and-left handles on the FUSER
ASSY, and remove the FUSER ASSY.
REINSTALLATION
1. Hold the right-and-left handles on the FUSER ASSY, match both the boss on the
bottom of the FUSER ASSY and the connector with the hole of the CHUTE
ASSY DUP IN, and install the FUSER ASSY.
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
2. Hold down the LEVER-FUSER and secure the FUSER ASSY.
CHUTE ASSY DUP IN
Ida_03_043B
Figure 4-51. Removing the FUSER ASSY
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY CHUTE ASSY IN & OUT 289

4.6.2 BTR ASSY

2)-1
REMOVAL
C A U T IO N As the Fuser unit remains at hazardous temperature for a certain 2)-1

period of time after turning the power off, be careful not to burn
yourself when performing the following work.

2. Hold the tabs on the right-and-left of the BTR ASSY with your fingers that secure
the BTR ASSY to the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN, and rotate the BTR ASSY 2)-1
rearward.
3. Remove the BTR ASSY from the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN.
BTR ASSY
CHUTE ASSY DUP IN

REINSTALLATION
1. Match the projection on the lower right-and-left side of the BTR ASSY with the
groove, and put the BTR ASSY on the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN.
2. Hold the tabs on the right-and-left side of the BTR ASSY with your fingers, rotate
and secure the BTR ASSY by locking the tab.
C A U T IO N Depending on the printer status upon replacement, it is required to

reset the life counter after replacing the BTR ASSY.
When the error or the warning that indicates the end of life
("Worn Transfer Unit" or "Replace Transfer Unit") has
occurred: No need to reset the life counter.
When the error or the warning that indicates the end of life
("Worn Transfer Unit" or "Replace Transfer Unit") has NOT
occurred: Execute “Reset TransferCounter” in the
Maintenance Menu to reset the life counter
(Refer to Ch. 6 “Maintenance”). Ida_03_044B
Figure 4-52. Removing the BTR ASSY

4.6.3 HOLDER ASSY CTD

REMOVAL
1. Release latch A and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN. HOLDER ASSY CTD
3. Hold the two tabs that secure the HOLDER ASSY CTD to the CHUTE ASSY
DUP IN with your fingers, unlock the lock, and remove the HOLDER ASSY
CTD. 4)
4. Disconnect P/J136 connector connected to the HOLDER ASSY CTD, and remove 5)
the HOLDER ASSY CTD.
5. Remove the SPRING CTD from the HOLDER ASSY CTD. J136 SPRING CTD
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the SPRING CTD to the HOLDER ASSY CTD.

2. Connect P/J136 connector to the HOLDER ASSY CTD.
3. While holding the two tabs on the HOLDER ASSY CTD, insert the HOLDER 3)-1
ASSY CTD into the hole on the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN, and secure them by
locking the tab.
3)-1
5. Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN. 3)-2
HOLDER ASSY CTD

Ida_03_045A
Figure 4-53. Removing the HOLDER ASSY CTD

4.6.4 SENSOR TNR FULL

REMOVAL 6)
4. Temporarily close the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN.
6. Remove the STRAP from the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT by releasing the tab.
C A U T IO N When removing the LINK FRONT in the following procedure, STRAP

make sure not to turn over the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT violently
CHUTE ASSY
in order to avoid damaging the part.
DUP OUT
Ida_03_054A
7. While supporting the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT with your hands, release the
LINK FRONT from the boss on the left frame of the main unit.
7)
SPRING LINK LINK FRONT
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT Ida_03_101A
Figure 4-54. Removing the SENSOR TNR FULL (1)

8. Draw forth the CASSETTE halfway from the main unit, spread some papers or
similar sheets over the CASSETTE, and place the fully-opened CHUTE ASSY CHUTE ASSY CHUTE ASSY DUP IN
DUP OUT on the CASSETTE. DUP OUT
9. Release the three tabs that secure the SENSOR TNR FULL to the CHUTE ASSY
DUP IN, and remove the SENSOR TNR FULL.
11. Disconnect P/J142 connector connected to the SENSOR TNR FULL, and remove
the SENSOR TNR FULL.
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect P/J142 connector to the SENSOR TNR FULL.

2. Push the tab on the SENSOR TNR FULL into the hole of the CHUTE ASSY DUP
8)
IN,and attach the SENSOR TNR FULL by securing with the tab.
3. Install the BTR ASSY. (p.290) 9)
CASSETTE
4. Close the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN. Ida_03_046A
5. Attach the LINK FRONT to the boss on the left frame of the main unit.
6. Attach the STARP to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
9. Push in the CASSETTE.
11)
SENSOR TNR FULL

J142
Ida_03_047A
Figure 4-55. Removing the SENSOR TNR FULL (2)

4.6.5 DRIVE ASSY FUSER

LINK FRONT
SPRING LINK
6)
REMOVAL

2. Remove the COVER FRONT R. (p.249)
4)
4. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping , 10 mm) that secure the GUIDE
GUIDE HARNESS F
HARNESS F to release the GUIDE HARNESS F.
5. Remove the SPRING LINK on the right side of the main unit. 4)
6. Release the hole at the center of the LINK FRONT, which is located on the right
side of the main unit, from the boss.
Ida_03_110B
Figure 4-56. Removing the DRIVE ASSY FUSER (1)

7. Remove the screw (silver, with external toothed washer, 5 mm) securing the
ground wire on the bottom plate of the main unit, and remove the ground wire.
8. Remove the three screws (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secure the DRIVE ASSY
FUSER to the CHUTE ASSY DUP.
9. Disconnect P/J521 connector from the DRIVE ASSY FUSER.
10. Disconnect the ground wire connected to the DRIVE ASSY FUSER from the
harness guide, and remove the DRIVE ASSY FUSER.
CHUTE ASSY DUP IN
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect PJ/521 connector to the DRIVE ASSY FUSER. [3)]

2. Secure the DRIVE ASSY FUSER to the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN with the three
screws (silver, tapping, 10mm).
3. Lead the ground wire connected to the DRIVE ASSY FUSER into the harness
guide.
4. Insert the boss on the right side of the main unit into the INK FRONT hole.
5. Attach the SPRING LINK to the LINK FRONT on the right side of the main unit. 10)
6. Secure the GUIDE HARNESS F to the main unit with the two screws (silver,
tapping, 10mm).
7. Secure the ground wire on the bottom plate of the main unit with the screw (silver, 8)
with external toothed washer, 5 mm). 9)
8) J521
9. Attach the COVER FRONT R. (p.249) 8)
7) Ida_03_049B
Figure 4-57. Removing the DRIVE ASSY FUSER (2)

4.6.6 SOLENOID FEED MSI

REMOVAL
5)
C A U T IO N When removing the LINK FRONT in the following procedure,

in order to avoid damaging the part. STRAP
CHUTE ASSY
DUP OUT
6. While supporting the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT with your hands, release the Ida_03_054A_1
LINK FRONT from the boss on the left frame of the main unit.
6)
LINK FRONT
SPRING LINK
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT

Ida_03_101A_1
Figure 4-58. Removing the SOLENOID FEED MSI (1)

similar sheets over the CASSETTE, and place the fully-opened CHUTE ASSY
DUP OUT on the CASSETTE. CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT SOLENOID GUIDE HARNESS F
FEED MSI
8. Remove the harness connected to the SOLENOID FEED MSI from the GUIDE
HARNESS F on the right side of the main unit, and disconnect P/J132 connector.
C A U T IO N Be careful not to damage other harnesses when cutting the cable tie
in the following step.
9. Cut off the cable tie that bundles the harnesses on the right side of the main unit. J132
8)
7)
CASSETTE
9)
Ida_03_050A

10. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8mm) that secures both the SOLENOID FEED
MSI and the WIRE ASSY DUP EARTH to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
11. Remove the SOLENOID FEED MSI.
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the two bosses on the right side of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT with the
positioning holes on the SOLENOID FEED MSI, and secure them together with
the WIRE ASSY DUP EARTH with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm).
SOLENOID FEED MSI
2. Lead the harness into the GUIDE HARNESS F, and connect P/J132 connector.
3. Bundle the harnesses on the right side of the main unit and strap them with the 10)
cable tie.
11) WIRE ASSY
4. Attach the LINK FRONT to the boss on the left frame of the main unit.
DUP EARTH
8. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) J132
9. Attach the COVER FRONT R. (p.249)
10. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) Ida_03_051A

4.6.7 SENSOR NO PAPER 9. Attach the COVER FRONT L ASSY. (p.252)

REMOVAL
11. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD.
1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (p.289) 12. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
2. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) 13. Attach the FUSER ASSY. (p.289)
4. Remove the COVER FRONT R. (p.249) 12)
5. Remove the COVER FRONT L ASSY. (p.252)

SENSOR NO PAPER
J135
8. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE. (p.250) 13)
9. Remove the COVER ASSY MSI. (p.251)

10. Remove the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. (p.315)
11. Remove the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI. (p.300)
12. Rlease the tab that secures the SENSOR NO PAPER to the CHUTE ASSY DUP
OUT, and remove the SENSOR NO PAPER together with the harness.
13. Disconnect P/J135 connector connected to the SENSOR NO PAPER, and remove
the SENSOR NO PAPER.
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect P/J135 connector to the SENSOR NO PAPER.

2. Attach the SENSOR NO PAPER to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
3. Attach the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI. (p.300)
4. Attach the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. (p.315)
5. Attach the COVER ASSY MSI. (p.251) Ida_03_052A
Figure 4-61. Removing the SENSOR NO PAPER
6. Attach the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE. (p.250)

4.6.8 ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI
C H E C K [CAUTION] in the figure indicates a "CAUTION" for reinstalling. [CAUTION]

P O IN T
REMOVAL
1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (p.289) ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI

2. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN ASSY. (p.242) SPRING NO PAPER MSI
12)-2
12)-1 13)
8. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE. (p.250)
11. Release the four tabs that secure the CHUTE FEED UP to the CHUTE ASSY
DUP OUT, and remove the CHUTE FEED UP.
11)-1
12. Release one end of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI from the notch of the
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, pull out the other end of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER
MSI from the attaching hole, and remove the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI 11)-1 11)-1
together with the SPRING NO PAPER MSI.
13. Remove the SPRING NO PAPER MSI from the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI. 11)-1
CHUTE FEED UP
11)-2
Ida_03_053A
Figure 4-62. Removing the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI

REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, install the SPRING firmly

with attention to its mounting direction.
1. Attach the SPRING NO PAPER MSI to the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI.

2. Insert one end of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI into the hole on the side of
the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, insert the other end to the notch, and install the
ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI.
3. Hitch one end of the SPRING NO PAPER MSI to the ACTUATOR NO PAPER
MSI and the other end to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
4. Attach the the CHUTE FEED UP to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and secure the
CHUTE FEED UP with the four tabs.
5. Attach the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. (p.315)
6. Attach the COVER ASSY MSI. (p.251)
10. Attach the COVER FRONT L ASSY. (p.252)
13. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN ASSY. (p.242)
14. Attach the FUSER ASSY. (p.289)


REMOVAL
4)
C A U T IO N When removing the LINK FRONT in the following procedure,

in order to avoid damaging the part.
STRAP
CHUTE ASSY
5. While supporting the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT with your hands, release the DUP OUT
LINK FRONT from the boss on the left frame of the main unit. Ida_03_054A_2
5)
LINK FRONT
SPRING LINK
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT

Ida_03_101A_2
Figure 4-63. Removing the ROLL ASSY FEED (1)

similar sheets over the CASSETTE, and place the fully-opened CHUTE ASSY
DUP OUT on the CASSETTE.
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
7. Release the tab that secures the CORE ROLL RETARD to the SHAFT MSI, and
slide the CORE ROLL RETARD to the left.
8. While holding down the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM, slide the ROLL ASSY FEED
toward left, and remove the ROLL ASSY FEED when the pin on the SHAFT MSI
appears.
REINSTALLATION
1. Install the ROLLER ASSY FEED so that the pin on the SHAFT MSI fits the
groove on the ROLL ASSY FEED.
6)
2. Slide the CORE ROLL RETARD and secure it by locking the tab.
3. Attach the LINK FRONT to the boss on the left frame of the main unit. CASSETTE Ida_03_146A

PLATE ASSY BOTTOM ROLL ASSY FEED
8)-1
8. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) 8)-2
8)-3
CORE ROLL RETARD

SHAFT MSI
7)
Ida_03_102A
Figure 4-64. Removing the ROLL ASSY FEED (2)

4.6.10 SENSOR FULL STACK

REMOVAL
3)
2. Remove the ACTUATOR FULL STACK.
3. Release the three tabs that secure the SENSOR FULL STACK to the CHUTE
ASSY DUP OUT.
4. Disconnect P/J134 connector connected to the SENSOR FULL STACK, and
remove the SENSOR FULL STACK. SENSOR FULL STACK
J134
4) CHUTE ASSY
REINSTALLATION DUP OUT
1. Connect P/J134 connector to the SENSOR FULL STACK.
2. Match the three tabs on the SENSOR FULL STACK with the holes on the
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and secure them with lock.
3. Attach the ACTUATOR FULL STACK. (p.307)
Ida_03_055A
Figure 4-65. Removing the SENSOR FULL STACK

4.6.11 SENSOR DUP JAM

REMOVAL

HOLDER SENSOR DUP
J133 4)
3. Release the three tabs that secure the HOLDER SENSOR DUP to the CHUTE
ASSY DUP OUT.
4. Disconnect P/J133 connector connected to the SENSOR DUP JAM.
5. Release the three tabs that secure the SENSOR DUP JAM to the HOLDER
SENSOR DUP, and remove the SENSOR DUP JAM.
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
5)-2
SENSOR DUP
JAM
COVER ASSY MSI
5)-1
3)
Ida_03_057A
Figure 4-67. Removing the SENSOR DUP JAM (2)

Ida_03_056B
Figure 4-66. Removing the SENSOR DUP JAM (1)

REINSTALLATION
1. Match the three tabs on the SENSOR DUP JAM with the holes on the HOLDER
SENSOR DUP, and install the SENSOR DUP JAM.
2. Connect P/J133 connector to the SENSOR DUP JAM.
3. Match the three tabs on the HOLDER SENSOR DUP with the holes on the
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and install the HOLDER SENSOR DUP.
5. Close the COVER ASSY MSI.

4.6.12 ACTUATOR FULL STACK

REMOVAL
1. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244) ACTUATOR FULL STACK
2)-2
2. With the center of the ACTUATOR FULL STACK bowed a little, release the
right-side shaft from the attaching hole, and remove the ACTUATOR FULL
STACK. 2)-3
2)-1
REINSTALLATION
1. Match the left-side shaft with the attaching hole with the center of the
ACTUATOR FULL STACK bowed a little, and install the ACTUATOR FULL
STACK.
Ida_03_058A
Figure 4-68. Removing the ACTUATOR FULL STACK

4.6.13 MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM 6. Install the GEAR EXIT/DUP to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and secure them
with a lock.
REMOVAL 7. Attch the COVER GEAR DUP OUT to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT with the
two screws (silver, tapping, with flange, 8mm).
2. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, with flange, 8mm) that secure the
COVER GEAR DUP OUT to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and remove the
COVER GEAR DUP OUT.
3)-1
3. Release the tab on the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT GEAR attached to the CHUTE 8)-2
ASSY DUP OUT, and remove the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
4. Remove the GEAR 52 attached to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
5. Release the tab on the GEAR 41 attached to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and
remove the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. GEAR EXIT/DUP
3)-2
6. Remove the two gears 40/66H that are engaged with the gear of the MOTOR
ASSY DUP 17PM. MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM
4)
7. Disconnect P/J501 connector connected to the harness of the MOTOR ASSY DUP GEAR 52
17PM. GEAR 40/66H
8. Remove the two screws (silver, 6mm) that secure the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM 2)-2 8)-1
to the MOTOR ASSY DUP OUT, and remove the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM. 6)
2)-1 7)
J501
2)-1
REINSTALLATION 5)-2 GEAR 41
1. Install the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT with the 5)-1
COVER GEAR
two screws (silver,6mm).
DUP OUT
2. Connect P/J501 connector on the harness of the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM.
3. Attach the two gears 40/66H to the gears on both sides of the MOTOR ASSY Ida_03_059B
DUP 17PM.
Figure 4-69. Removing the MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM
4. Install the GEAR 41 to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and secure them with a
lock.
5. Attach the GEAR 52 to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.

4.6.14 ACTUATOR DUP
C H E C K [CAUTION] in the figure indicates a "CAUTION" for reinstalling. 2)

P O IN T
REMOVAL
1. Remove the SENSOR DUP JAM. (p.305)

2. Press down the shaft of the ACTUATOR DUP with a small screw driver or a
similar tool from the two holes of the HOLDER SENSOR DUP, and remove the
ACTUATOR DUP. HOLDER SENSOR DUP
3. Remove the SPRING SENSOR DUP from the ACTUATOR DUP.
ACTUATOR DUP
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N When installing the SPRING, beware of its mounting direction.

Hitch the SPRING firmly.
3)
1. Attach the SPRING SENSOR DUP to the ACTUATOR DUP. SPRING SENSOR DUP
2. Hitch one end of the SPRING SENSOR DUP to the ACTUATOR DUP, and the [CAUTION]
other end to the HOLDER SENSOR DUP.
3. Attach the ACTUATOR DUP to the grooves of the HOLDER SENSOR.
4. Attach the SENSOR DUP JAM. (p.305)
Ida_03_060A
Figure 4-70. Removing the ACTUATOR DUP

4.6.15 ROLL DUP

REMOVAL
1. Release latch B and open the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
2. Release the tab on the GEAR EXIT/DUP attached on the shaft of the ROLL DUP 7)
from the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and remove the GEAR EXIT/DUP.
3. Remove the E-ring that secures the BEARING to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT,
and slide the BEARING to the right. BEARING
4. Remove the KL clip that secures right-side shaft of the ROLL DUP to the CHUTE EARTH
ASSY DUP OUT. ROLL DUP
4) 5)
5. Pull out the BEARING EARTH that secures right-side shaft of the ROLL DUP to BEARING
the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. KL CLIP
6. Temporarily slide the ROLL DUP toward left, release its right edge from the right
bearing of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, pull out the ROLL DUP toward upper GEAR
6)
right, and remove the ROLL DUP together with the BEARING. EXIT/DUP
7. Remove the BEARING from the ROLL DUP. 2)-2
2)-1
REINSTALLATION 3)-1
3)-2
1. Attach the BEARING to the D-cut shaped shaft of the ROLL DUP.
2. Insert the D-cut shaped shaft of the ROLL DUP into the left bearing of the BEARING
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, insert the right shaft of the ROLL DUP into the right
bearing of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and install the ROLL DUP together with Ida_03_061A
the BEARING. Figure 4-71. Removing the ROLL DUP
3. Insert the BEARING EARTH into the right shaft of the ROLL DUP.
4. Secure the right shaft of the ROLL DUP with KL clip.
5. Insert the BEARING to the left shaft of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and secure
them with E-ring.
6. Install the GEAR EXIT/DUP to the left shaft of the ROLL DUP, and secure them
with a lock.

4.6.16 ROLL EXIT

REMOVAL CHUTE ASSY
DUP OUT
ROLL EXIT
BEARING
2. Release the tab on the GEAR EXIT/DUP attached on the shaft of the ROLL EXIT EARTH 6)-2 BEARING
from the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and remove the GEAR EXIT/DUP. 5)
3) 6)-1
3. Remove the KL-ring that secures right-side shaft of the ROLL EXIT to the
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. 4) GEAR
4. Pull out the BEARING EARTH that secures right-side shaft of the ROLL EXIT to EXIT/DUP
KL CLIP
the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
5. Temporarily slide the ROLL EXIT toward right, release its left edge from the left 2)-2
bearing of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, pull out the ROLL EXIT toward upper
left, and remove the ROLL EXIT together with the BEARING.
6. Remove the BEARING and the E-ring from the ROLL EXIT.
2)-1
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach both E-ring and the BEARING to the D-cut shaped shaft of the ROLL
EXIT.
2. Insert the D-cut shaped shaft of the ROLL EXIT into the left shaft of the CHUTE
ASSY DUP OUT, insert the right shaft of the ROLL EXIT into the right bearing of
Ida_03_062A
the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, and install the ROLL EXIT together with the
BEARING. Figure 4-72. Removing the ROLL EXIT
3. Insert the BEARING EARTH into the right shaft of the ROLL EXIT.
4. Secure the right shaft of the ROLL EXIT with KL ring.
5. Install the GEAR EXIT/DUP to the left shaft of the ROLL EXIT, and secure them
with a lock.

4.6.17 CHUTE ASSY DUP IN

REMOVAL
1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (p.289)

HARNESS ASSY
2. Remove the BTR ASSY. (p.290) FSR/ADC GUIDE HARNESS R

4. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD. (p.244) 14)
13)
6. Remove the COVER FRONT L ASSY. (p.252) 15)
16) J36
7. Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) CLAMP GUIDE
J162 HARNESS
9. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE. (p.250) PWBA MCU IDTN
12) J52
12. Remove the screw (silver, with external toothed washer, 5 mm) securing the WIRE ASSY FSR EARTH
ground wire to the right side of the bottom plate, and remove the ground wire.
13. Disconnect P/J162 connector that is connected to the LVPS from the CHUTE
ASSY DUP IN.
14. Remove the CLAMP GUDIE HARNESS from the GUIDE HARNESS R on the
right side of the main unit.
15. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC from the GUIDE HARNESS R on the
Ida_03_109A
Figure 4-73. Removing the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN (1)
16. Disconnect P/J36 and P/J52 connectors that are connected to the PWBA MCU
IDTN from the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN.

17. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC from the harness guide located between
right side of the main unit and the bottom plate. COVER ASSY TOP PHD
18. Remove the SPRING LINK on the right side of the main unit. CHUTE ASSY DUP IN
19. Release the hole at the center of the LINK FRONT, which is located on the right 21)
C A U T IO N When removing the SHAFT PIVOT in the following procedure, be

careful not to drop or damage the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN.
20. While supporting the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN with your hands, pull out both the
SHAFT PIVOT R and the SHAFT PIVOT L.
21. Release the latch of the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN, and remove the CHUTE ASSY
DUP IN. 20)
SHAFT PIVOT L
LINK FRONT
20)
19)
J162 SHAFT PIVOT R
Ida_03_111B
18) SPRING LINK
17) HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC

Ida_03_120B

REINSTALLATION
1. While supporting the CHUTE ASSY DUP IN with your hands, insert both the
SHAFT PIVOT R and the SHAFT PIVOT L until half of the shafts are tucked.
2. Insert the boss on the right side of the main unit into the INK FRONT hole.
3. Attach the SPRING LINK to the LINK FRONT on the right side of the main unit.
4. Lead the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC to the harness guide located between right
side of the main unit and the bottom plate.
5. Connect PJ/36 and P/J52 connectors to the PWBA MCU IDTN.
6. Lead the HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC to the GUIDE HARNESS R on the right
side of the main unit.
7. Attach the CLAMP GUIDE HARNESS to the GUIDE HARNESS R on the right
8. Connect P/J162 connector to the LVPS.
9. Secure the ground wire to the right side of the bottom plate with the screw (silver,
with external toothed washer, 5 mm).
10. Install the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. (p.315)
20. Install the FUSER ASSY. (p.289)

4.6.18 CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT

J22
P O IN T HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE SE
GUIDE HARNESS F 11)
PWBA MCU IDTN

REMOVAL
10)
1. Remove the FUSER ASSY. (p.289) J13
HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP
WIRE ASSY DUP EARTH
8. Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI BASE. (p.250)
9. Remove the COVER ASSY MSI. (p.251) [CAUTION] HARNESS ASSY FAN/MOT/DUP
10. Remove the screw (silver, with external toothed washer, 5 mm) securing the
ground wire to the right side of the bottom plate, and remove the ground wire.
HARNESS ASSY 24V LVPS
11. Disconnect P/J13 and P/J22 connectors, which are connected to the PWBA MCU
IDTN, from the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
PWBA MCU IDTN P/J60 P/J

HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE SE
HARNESS ASSY FDR HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG
Ida_03_105D
Figure 4-76. Removing the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT (1)

12. Remove the two CLAMP GUIDE HARNESSes from the GUIDE HARNESS R
on the right side of the main unit.
13. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 10mm) that secure the GUIDE CLAMP GUIDE
HARNESS R to the main unit. HARNESS
13)
14. Release the tab on the front side of the GUIDE HARNESS R from the hole of the
DRIVE ASSY DEVE, and release the GUIDE HARNESS R. 12)
15. Disconnect P/J491 connector on the DRIVE ASSY DEVE, P/J481 connector on GUIDE HARNESS R
the DRIVE ASSY MAIN, the relay connector P/J484 to the HARNESS ASSY 12)
PHD2, and P/J48 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN.
13)
When disconnecting P/J481 and P/J491 connectors, be careful not CLAMP GUIDE
C A U T IO N HARNESS
to lose the CORE RING 19.
14)
16. Remove the HARNESS ASSY FAN/ PHD/ MOT , HARNESS ASSY FRONT/ Ida_03_121B
DUP , and HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE SE , which are connected to the CHUTE 15)
ASSY DUP OUT, from each harness guide. J484
17. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secure the GUIDE
J484
HARNESS F on the right side of the main unit, and remove the GUIDE
HARNESS F.
DRIVE ASSY DEVE
DRIVE ASSY MAIN
GUIDE HARNESS R
15)
J491
HARNESS ASSY
15) FAN/PHD/MOT
J481
GUIDE HARNESS F
PWBA MCU IDTN
15) J48
16)
17)
Ida_03_122C
Figure 4-77. Removing the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT (2)

18. Remove the SPRING LINK on the left side of the main unit.
19. Release the hole at the center of the LINK FRONT, which is located on the left
20)
20. Remove the two E-rings that secure both the SHAFT PIVOT R and the SHAFT
21)
PIVOT L from the bottom of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
C A U T IO N When pulling out the SHAFT PIVOT and removing the STRAP in 21)
the following procedure, be careful not to drop or damage the
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. SHAFT
PIVOT L
21)
21. While supporting the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT with your hands, draw forth both
the SHAFT PIVOT R and the SHAFT PIVOT L halfway. SHAFT PIVOT R
22. Release the latch of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT, release the tab that secures the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
STRAP, and remove the STRAP.
23. Remove the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. Ida_03_107B
23)
22)
18)
19)
LINK FRONT
SPRING LINK
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT

STRAP
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT Ida_03_101A_3
Ida_03_108B
Figure 4-78. Removing the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT (3) Figure 4-79. Removing the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT (4)

REINSTALLATION 11. Secure the GUIDE HARNESS R to the main unit with the two screws (silver,
tapping, 10 mm).
1. While supporting the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT with your hands, insert both the 12. Attach the two CLAMP GUIDE HARNESS to the GUIDE HARNESS R.
SHAFT PIVOT R and the SHAFT PIVOT L.
13. Secure the ground wire to the right side of the bottom plate with the screw (silver,
2. Attach the STARP to the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT. with external toothed washer, 5 mm).
3. Attach the two E-rings to both the SHAFT PIVOT R and the SHAFT PIVOT L on 14. Connect P/J13 and P/J22 connectors to the PWBA MCU IDTN.
the bottom of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
4. Insert the boss on the left side of the main unit into the LINK FRONT hole.
5. Attach the SPRING LINK to the LINK FRONT on the left side of the main unit.
6. Secure the GUIDE HARNESS F on the right side of the main unit with the two
screws (silver, tapping, 10mm). 18. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248)
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, route the harnesses as shown 20. Attach the COVER FRONT R. (p.249)
in the Figure 4-76.
7. Route the harness through the GUIDE HARNESS F on the right side of the main 23. Install the FUSER ASSY. (p.289)
unit.
8. Route the HARNESS ASSY FAN/ PHD/ MOT, HARNESS ASSY FRONT/ DUP,
and HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE SE, which are connected to the CHUTE ASSY
DUP OUT, through each harness guide.
9. Connect P/J491 connector on the DRIVE ASSY DEVE, P/J481 connector on the
DRIVE ASSY MAIN, the relay connector P/J484 to the HARNESS ASSY PHD2,
and P/J48 connector on the PWBA MCU IDTN.
C A U T IO N Make sure that P/J481 and P/J491 connectors are led through the
CORE RING 19.
10. Install the GUIDE HARNESS R by inserting the tab on the front side of the
GUIDE HARNESS R into the hole of the DRIVE ASSY DEVE.

4.6.19 FAN FRONT
C H E C K [CAUTION] in the figure indicates a "CAUTION" for reinstalling. 3) 3)

P O IN T
FAN FRONT
REMOVAL LABEL 4)
[CAUTION]
2) J482
2. Disconnect P/J482 connector of the harness that is connected to the FAN FRONT,
and release the harness from the harness guide.
3. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 20 mm) that secure the FAN FRONT to
the FAN attaching part of the CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT.
4. Lift up the FAN FRONT, pull out the harness from the hole on the front of the
FAN attaching part.
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N When installing the FAN, beware of its mounting direction. Attach

the FAN with its label facing downward.
Ida_03_113A
Figure 4-80. Removing the FAN FRONT

1. Put the harness of the FAN FRONT through the hole on the front of the FAN
attaching part.
2. Attach the FAN FRONT with its label side facing downward with the two screws
(silver, tapping, 20 mm).
3. Route the harness of the FAN FRONT through the harness guide, and connect P/
J482 connector.

4.7 XEROGRAPHICS 5. Attach the DISPENSER ASSY-4. (p.326)

4.7.1 ROS ASSY 7. Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) 10. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
6. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY-4. (p.326)
7. Disconnect P/J151 connector connected from the main unit to the ROS ASSY.
C A U T IO N When removing the ROS ASSY in the following procedure, be

careful not to drop or damage the ROS ASSY.
ROS ASSY
8. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, large, 10 mm) on the right-and-left of the 10)
ROS ASSY that secure the ROSS ASSY to the main unit. 9)
9. While supporting the ROS ASSY with your hands, remove the screw (silver,
tapping, large, 10 mm) on the upper side.
10. Draw out and remove the ROS ASSY rearward. 8)
J151
7)
8)
REINSTALLATION
Ida_03_063B
1. Match the hole on the right-and-left side of the ROSS ASSY with the bosses on Figure 4-81. Removing the ROSS ASSY
the main unit, and insert the ROS ASSY into the main unit.
2. Secure the ROS ASSY with the screw (silver, tapping, large, 10 mm).
3. Secure the ROSS ASSY with the two screws (silver, tapping, large, 10 mm).
4. Connect P/J151 connector to the ROS ASSY.
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY XEROGRAPHICS 320

4.7.2 HSG ASSY BIAS

P O IN T reinstallation procedure. HOUSING-BASE, CRUM
6)-1
REMOVAL

6), [2)]
6. Disconnect the two wires from the harness guides of the HOUSING-BASE,
CRUM and the HSG ASSY BIAS.
7. Remove the four screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secure the HSG ASSY BIAS
to the main unit.
8. Remove the HSG ASSY BIAS from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the HSG ASSY BIAS to the main unit with the four screws (silver, tapping,
10 mm).
7)
2. Route the two wires through the harness guides of the HOUSING-BASE, CRUM
and the HSG ASSY BIAS. 7)
3. Attach the HVPS. (p.356) 7)
5. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) 7)

HSG ASSY BIAS
Ida_03_064A
Figure 4-82. Removing the HSG ASSY BIAS
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY XEROGRAPHICS 321

4.8 DEVELOPMENT Pay attention to prevent the GEAR ASSY DUCT from touching the
C A U T IO N
COVER ASSY TOP PHD.
4.8.1 FRAME ASSY DEVE
REMOVAL
P/J484
1. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN ASSY. (p.242) FRAME ASSY DEVE
6)
2. Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) [CAUTION]
GEAR ASSY DUCT
C A U T IO N When removing the FRAME ASSY DEVE, cover the whole of
8)
the DEVE ASSY with papers or similar sheets to prevent toner
9)
from adhering to your clothes.
When removing the FRAME ASSY DEVE, extra caution
should be given as toner may fly in all directions.
Once the FRAME ASSY DEVE is removed, make sure to place
the part in the horizontal position with its handle facing
upward.
6. Disconnect P/J484 connector on the harness connected to the CRUM of the

FRAME ASSY DEVE.
7. Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD.
8. Remove the four toner nozzles, which are connected to the FRAME ASSY DEVE,
from the DISPENSER ASSY (Y), (M), (C), and (K) by releasing the locks.
C A U T IO N Make sure that the shutters of the toner nozzles are closed. Close
them if they are open.
Ida_03_065A
Figure 4-83. Removing the FRAME ASSY DEVE
9. Holding its handle, remove the FRAME ASSY DEVE upward.
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY DEVELOPMENT 322

REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care to prevent the

harness from being sandwiched between the main unit and the
FRAME ASSY DEVE.
1. Hold the handle of the FRAME ASSY DEVE, and install the FRAME ASSY
DEVE slowly matching its groove with the slide projections on both the GUIDE
FRAME DEVE R and the GUIDE FRAME DEVE L.
C A U T IO N When installing the four (Y), (M), (C), and (K) toner nozzles, be
sure to attach each toner nozzle to the corresponding DEVE ASSY.
2. Attach the four toner nozzles to the FRAME ASSY DEVE and secure them with
locks.
4. Connect P/J484 connector on the harness connected to the CRUM of the FRAME
ASSY DEVE.
C A U T IO N Make sure to remove the papers that cover the DEVE ASSY.

9. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN ASSY. (p.242)

4.8.2 CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC
REMOVAL

3. Open the tab that secures the CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC on the upper left of the CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC
FRAME ASSY DEVE, and remove the CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC diagonally 4)
rearward.
4. Disconnect P/J710 connector connected to the CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC, and
remove the CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC.
REINSTALLATION
J710
1. Connect P/J710 connector to the CRUM, and set the harness in the groove.
2. Insert the CRUM to the upper-left section of the FRAME ASSY DEVE in the 3)
opposite direction of an arrow, secure them with the tab, and install the
CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC. 3)
Ida_03_067A
Figure 4-84. Removing the CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC

4.8.3 DEVE ASSY (Y), (M), (C), (K) 2. Attach the FRAME ASSY DEVE. (p.322)
C A U T IO N Removal procedure described below is common to each of the
DEVE ASSY (Y), (M), (C), and (K).
REMOVAL 7. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN ASSY. (p.242)
1. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN ASSY. (p.242)

7)-1
6. Remove HOUSING ASSY DEVE. (p.322)
C A U T IO N When removing the DEVE ASSY, extra caution should be given as

toner may fly in all directions.
(M)
(C)
7. Release both the STOPPER DEVE R and the STOPPER DEVE L on the right- (K)
and-left side of the FRAME ASSY DEVE, and pull out the DEVE ASSY toward
you. 7)-2
DEVE ASSY (Y) Ida_03_068B

REINSTALLATION Figure 4-85. Removing the DEVE ASSY (Y), (M), (C), (K)
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, pay attention to the

attachment direction of each DEVE ASSY.
1. Insert the DEVE ASSY into the FRAME ASSY DEVE, and install the DEVE
ASSY by locking them up with the STOPPER DEVE R and the STOPPER DEVE
L.

4.8.4 DISPENSER ASSY-4 (REFERENCE ONLY) 13) J342

REMOVAL
9)
W A R N IN G Do not vacuum off spilled toner using a usual vacuum cleaner.

There is a possibility of taking fire.
HOUSING-BASE,
CRUM
C A U T IO N Before removing the DISPENSER ASSY-4, vacuum remaining
toner on the DISPENSER ASSY-4 with a cleaner exclusively
designed for toner.
When vacuuming remaining toner on the DISPENSER ASSY-
4, be sure to attach a ground wire to the tip of the cleaner in
order to discharge static electricity.
When vacuuming the residual toner on the DISPENSER ASSY-
4, take care to prevent any toner from adhering to the sensors
on the DISPENSER ASSY-4. 6) P/J3411
P511
4. Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) 8) P512
P513
P514
6. Disconnect P/J3411 relay connector connected to the HARNESS ASSY RFID2
from behind the main unit.
7. Release the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK from the harness guide of the
DISPENSER ASSY-4.
7)
8. Disconnect P/J511-514 connectors on the motors of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y),
(M), (C), and (K), and remove the harness from the harness guide.
9. Remove the two red wires from the harness guide of the HOUSING-BASE, DISPENSER
CRUM on the left side of the main unit. HARNESS ASSY ASSY-4
INTERLOCK
Ida_03_069B
Figure 4-86. Removing the DISPENSER ASSY-4 (1) (REFERENCE ONLY)


DISPENSER ASSY-4 12)
11. Remove the four toner nozzles, which are connected to the FRAME ASSY DEVE,
from the DISPENSER ASSY (Y), (M), (C), and (K) by releasing the locks.
C A U T IO N Make sure that the shutters of the toner nozzles are closed. Close 12)
12)
12. Remove the two screws (silver, 6 mm) and two screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm)
that secure the DISPENSER ASSY-4 to the main unit. 12)
13. Disconnect P/J342 connector from the COIL ASSY CRUM READER, and release
the harness from the harness guide of the HOUSING-BASE, CRUM. (Refer to
Figure 4-86)
14. Space the DISPENSER ASSY-4 from the main unit, disconnect P/J701-704
connectors from the four SENSOR NO TNR, and remove the HARNESS ASSY
TNR from the two harness guide of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y).
15. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY-4 from the main unit.
11)
[CAUTION]
Ida_03_070A
Figure 4-87. Removing the DISPENSER ASSY-4 (2) (REFERENCE ONLY) (2)

REINSTALLATION
1. Place the DISPENSER ASSY-4 on the main unit.

2. Space the DISPENSER ASSY-4 from the main unit, route the HARNESS ASSY
TNR for the CRUM READER through the two harness guides on the
DISPENSER ASSY (Y), and connect P/J701-704 connectors of the four SENSOR
NO TNR.
3. Place the harness for the COIL ASSY CRUM READER through the harness guide
of the HOUSING-BASE, CRUM, and connect P/J342 connector.
4. Match the boss on the front side of the DISPENSER ASSY-4 with the main unit,
and secure them with four screws (silver, 6 mm x 2 and silver, tapping, 10 mm x 2).
C A U T IO N When installing the four (Y), (M), (C), and (K) toner nozzles, be
sure to attach each toner nozzle to the corresponding DEVE ASSY.
5. Attach the four toner nozzles to each DISPENSER ASSY (Y), (M), (C), and (K).
7. Route the two red wires through the harness guide of the HOUSING-BASE,
CRUM on the left side of the main unit.
8. Connect P/J511-514 connectors on the motors of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y),
(M), (C), and (K), and place the harness within the harness guide.
9. Place the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK within the harness guide of the
DISPENSER ASSY-4.
10. Connect P/J3411 relay connector connected to the HARNESS ASSY RFID2
behind the main unit.

4.8.5 DISPENSER ASSY (Y) 10. Temporarily slide the DISPENSER ASSY (Y) to the right, and slightly lift it
upward.
C H E C K Numbers in the square bracket [ ] in the figure indicate the steps of 11. Release the harness from the tab on the underpart of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y),
P O IN T reinstallation procedure. and remove the DISPENSER ASSY (Y).
12. Disconnect P/J701 connector from the SENSOR NO TNR of the DISPENSER
ASSY (Y).
REMOVAL

2. Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) J511
8)
5. Remove the HVPS. (p.356) 12)
6. Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. 10)
DISPENSER ASSY (Y) J701
7. Remove the toner nozzle, which is connected to the FRAME ASSY DEVE, from BOSS
the DISPENSER ASSY (Y) by releasing the lock.
11) [3)]
8. Disconnect P/J511 connector of the motor on the right side of the DISPENSER 9)
ASSY (Y), and remove the harness from the clamp just above the motor. 9)
9. Remove the screw (silver, 6 mm) on the right and the screw (silver, tapping, 10 J701 J511
mm) on the left side of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y) that secure the DISPENSER
ASSY (Y).
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care not to move the
DISPENSER ASSY (Y) too far from the DISPENSER ASSY-4 as
they are connected with a harness. Ida_03_071A
Figure 4-88. Removing the DISPENSER ASSY (Y)

REINSTALLATION
1. Connect P/J701 connector to the SENSOR NO TNR of the DISPENSER ASSY

(Y).
2. Route the harness through the tab on the underpart of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y).
3. Insert the tab on the lower left of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y) into the groove of
the COVER HOLDER CRUM, and slide the DISPENSER ASSY (Y) toward left.
4. Insert the screw (silver, 6 mm) on the right and the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm)
on the left side of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y) and secure the DISPENSER ASSY
(Y).
5. Connect P/J511 connector on the motor of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y), and route
the harness through the clamp just above the motor.
6. Attach the toner nozzle of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y).

4.8.6 DISPENSER ASSY (M) 11. Temporarily slide the DISPENSER ASSY (M) to the right, and slightly lift it
upward.
C H E C K Numbers in the square bracket [ ] in the figure indicate the steps of 12. Disconnect P/J702 connector from the SENSOR NO TNR of the DISPENSER
P O IN T reinstallation procedure. ASSY (M).
13. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY (M).
REMOVAL

8)
12)
DISPENSER ASSY (M)
6. Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. J702
BOSS
7. Remove the toner nozzle, which is connected to the FRAME ASSY DEVE, from
the DISPENSER ASSY (M) by releasing the tab.
[2)]
10)
ASSY (M), and remove the harness from the clamp just above the motor. J702 J512
9. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). (p.329)
10. Remove the screw (silver, 6 mm) on the right and the screw (silver, tapping, 10
mm) on the left side of the DISPENSER ASSY (M) that secure the DISPENSER
ASSY (M).
When performing the following work, take care not to move Ida_03_072A
C A U T IO N
DISPENSER ASSY (M) too far from the DISPENSER ASSY-4 as Figure 4-89. Removing the DISPENSER ASSY (M)
they are connected with a harness.

REINSTALLATION

(M).
2. Insert the tab on the lower left of the DISPENSER ASSY (M) into the groove of
the COVER HOLDER CRUM, and slide the DISPENSER ASSY (M) toward left.
3. Secure the DISPENSER ASSY (M) with the screw (silver, 6 mm) on the right and
the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) on the left side of the DISPENSER ASSY (M)
that secure the DISPENSER ASSY (Y).
4. Connect P/J512 connector on the motor of the DISPENSER ASSY (M), and route
5. Attach the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). (p.329)
6. Attach the toner nozzle of the DISPENSER ASSY (M).

4.8.7 DISPENSER ASSY (C) 12. Temporarily slide the DISPENSER ASSY (C) to the right, and slightly lift it
upward.
C H E C K Numbers in the square bracket [ ] in the figure indicate the steps of 13. Disconnect P/J703 connector from the SENSOR NO TNR of the DISPENSER
P O IN T reinstallation procedure. ASSY (C).
14. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY (C).
REMOVAL

8)
13)
6. Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. DISPENSER ASSY (C)
J703
the DISPENSER ASSY (C) by releasing the tab.
[2)]
ASSY (C), and remove the harness from the clamp just above the motor. 11)
J703 J513
9. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). (p.329)
10. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY (M). (p.331)
mm) on the left side of the DISPENSER ASSY (C) that secure the DISPENSER
ASSY (C).
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care not to move

DISPENSER ASSY (C) too far from the DISPENSER ASSY-4 as Ida_03_073A
they are connected with a harness.
Figure 4-90. Removing the DISPENSER ASSY (C)

REINSTALLATION

(C).
2. Insert the tab on the lower left of the DISPENSER ASSY (C) into the groove of
the COVER HOLDER CRUM, and slide the DISPENSER ASSY (C) toward left.
3. Secure the DISPENSER ASSY (C) with the screw (silver, 6 mm) on the right and
the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) on the left side of the DISPENSER ASSY (C)
that secure the DISPENSER ASSY (C).
4. Connect P/J513 connector on the motor of the DISPENSER ASSY (C), and route
5. Attach the DISPENSER ASSY (M). (p.331)
7. Attach the toner nozzle of the DISPENSER ASSY (C).

4.8.8 DISPENSER ASSY (K) When performing the following work, take care not to move
C A U T IO N
DISPENSER ASSY (K) too far from the DISPENSER ASSY-4 as
C H E C K Numbers in the square bracket [ ] in the figure indicate the steps of they are connected with a harness.
13. Temporarily slide the DISPENSER ASSY (K) to the right, and slightly lift it
upward.
REMOVAL 14. Disconnect P/J704 connector from the SENSOR NO TNR of the DISPENSER
ASSY (K).
15. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY (K).
J514
6. Open the COVER ASSY TOP PHD. 8)
DISPENSER ASSY (K)
14)
the DISPENSER ASSY (K) by releasing the tab. J704
[2)]
8. Disconnect P/J514 connector of the motor on the right side of the DISPENSER 12) 12)
ASSY (K), and remove the harness from the clamp just above the motor.
9. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY (Y). (p.329) J704 J514
10. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY (M). (p.331)

11. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY (C). (p.333)
mm) on the left side of the DISPENSER ASSY (K) that secure the DISPENSER
ASSY (K).
Ida_03_074A
Figure 4-91. Removing the DISPENSER ASSY (K)

REINSTALLATION

(K).
2. Insert the tab on the lower left of the DISPENSER ASSY (K) into the groove of
the COVER HOLDER CRUM, and slide the DISPENSER ASSY (K) toward left.
3. Secure the DISPENSER ASSY (K) with the screw (silver, 6 mm) on the right and
the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) on the left side of the DISPENSER ASSY (K)
that secure the DISPENSER ASSY (K).
4. Connect P/J514 connector on the motor of the DISPENSER ASSY (K), and route
5. Attach the DISPENSER ASSY (C). (p.333)
6. Attach the DISPENSER ASSY (M). (p.331)
8. Attach the toner nozzle of the DISPENSER ASSY (K).

4.8.9 SENSOR NO TNR (Y), (M), (C) 5. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253)
SENSOR NO TNR (Y), (M), and (C).
REMOVAL

C A U T IO N There is no need to remove the toner nozzles or each harness when

performing the following work. The SENSOR NO TNR can easily
be removed by lifting up the DISPENSER ASSY, however, the
DISPENSER ASSY should not be moved too far as the harness is 7) 6)
connected to the DISPENSER ASSY.
J701,J702,J703
5. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY. (p329 or p331 or p333)
6. Disconnect P/J701, P/J702, or P/J703 connector from the SENSOR NO TNR. P701,P702,P703
8)
7. Release the four tabs that secure the SENSOR NO TNR to the DISPENSER SENSOR NO TNR
ASSY.
8. Remove the SENSOR NO TNR from the DISPENSER ASSY. Ida_03_075A
Figure 4-92. Removing the SENSOR NO TNR (Y), (M), (C)
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the SENSOR NO TNR to the DISPENSER ASSY, and secure the
SENSOR NO TNR with the four tabs.
2. Connect P/J701, P/J702, or P/J703 connector to the SENSOR NO TNR.
3. Install the DISPENSER ASSY.(p329 or p331 or p333)

4.8.10 SENSOR NO TNR (K)

REMOVAL

5. Disconnect P/J704 connector from the SENSOR NO TNR of the DISPENSER
ASSY (K).
6. Release the four tabs that secure the SENSOR NO TNR to the DISPENSER
ASSY (K).
7. Remove the SENSOR NO TNR from the DISPENSER ASSY (K). 6) 5)
J704
REINSTALLATION P704
7)
1. Attach the SENSOR NO TNR to the DISPENSER ASSY (K), and secure the SENSOR NO TNR
SENSOR NO TNR with the four tabs.
2. Connect P/J704 connector to the SENSOR NO TNR.
Ida_03_076A
5. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) Figure 4-93. Removing the SENSOR NO TNR (K)

4.8.11 ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 5. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253)

ACTUATOR SENSOR 2.
7) BRACKET SENSOR 2
REMOVAL
1. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) ACTUATOR

2. Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) SENSOR 2
3. Remove the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) 6)

C A U T IO N There is no need to remove the toner nozzles or each harness when

performing the following work. The ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 can
easily be removed by lifting up the DISPENSER ASSY, however,
the DISPENSER ASSY should not be moved too far as the harness
is connected to the DISPENSER ASSY.
5. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY. (p329 or p331 or p333 or p335)

6. Release the two tabs that secure the BRACKET SENSOR 2 to the DISPENSR
ASSY using a mini screwdriver, and remove the BRACKET SENSOR 2.
7. Rotate the ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 two times and remove the ACTUATOR
SENSOR 2 from the BRACKET SENSOR 2.
REINSTALLATION
Ida_03_077A
1. Insert the ACTUATOR SENSOR 2 into the BRACKET SENSOR 2 in the Figure 4-94. Removing the ACTUATOR SENSOR 2
opposite direction of an arrow.
2. Attach the BRACKET SENSOR 2 to the DISPENSER ASSY.
3. Attach the DISPENSER ASSY.(p329 or p331 or p333 or p335)

4.8.12 BOX ASSY CRUM READER

REMOVAL 6) J342

5. Disconnect P/J3411 relay connector connected to the HARNESS ASSY RFID2
from behind the main unit.
6. Disconnect P/J342 connector from the COIL ASSY CRUM READER, and release
the harness from the harness guide of the HOUSING-BASE, CRUM.
7. Remove the two red wires from the harness guide of the HOUSING-BASE,
CRUM on the left side of the main unit.
8. Remove the two screws (silver, 6 mm) and two screws (silver, tapping, 10mm)
that secure the DISPENSER ASSY-4 to the main unit, and release the J342
DISPENSER ASSY-4.
9. Remove the four screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secure the DISPENSER HOOK
ASSY (Y), (M), (C), and (K) to the BOX ASSY CRUM READER. 9)
10. Releasing the tabs on the bottom of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y), (M), (C), and 9) 8)
(K), slide the BOX ASSY CRUM READER toward left to remove it. 9)
9)
8)
P3411 J3411 BOX ASSY CRUM READER
Ida_03_078A
Figure 4-95. Removing BOX ASSY CRUM READER

REINSTALLATION
1. Fit in the tabs at the bottom of the DISPENSER ASSY (Y), (M), (C), and (K),
slide them toward right to match the bosses with the holes, and install the BOX
ASSY CRUM READER.
2. Secure the DISPENSER ASSY (Y), (M), (C), and (K) to the BOX ASSY CRUM
READER with the four screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm)
3. Secure the DISPENSER ASSY-4 to the main unit with the two screws (silver, 6
mm) and two screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm).
4. Secure the two red wires to the harness guide of the HOUSING-BASE, CRUM on
the left side of the main unit.
5. Connect P/J342 connector to the COIL ASSY CRUM READER, and route the
harness through the harness guide of the HOUSING-BASE, DRUM.
6. Connect P/J3411 relay connector connected to the HARNESS ASSY RFID2
behind the main unit.

4.9 DRIVE HARNESS ASSY

DISPENSER ASSY-4
INTERLOCK
4.9.1 DRIVE ASSY DEVE

4)
C A U T IO N [CAUTION] in the figure indicates a "CAUTION" for reinstalling.

5)
6) GUIDE HARNESS R
J161
7)
3) CLAMP GUIDE
HARNESS
REMOVAL 3)
3)
CLAMP GUIDE
1. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) HARNESS
3)
3. Remove the four CLAMP GUIDE HARNESSes from the GUIDE HARNESS R to
7)
remove the harness.
8)-2
8)-1
4. Release the clamps on the DRIVE ASSY-4 and release the HARNESS ASSY
INTERLOCK.
5. Disconnect P/J161 connector from the LVPS.
6. Take off the clamps on the DRIVE ASSY DEVE and release the HARNESS
ASSY INTERLOCK.
[CAUTION]
7. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secure the GUIDE
HARNESS R to the main unit.
HARNESS ASSY LVPS
8. Release the tab on the front side of the GUIDE HARNESS R from the hole of the INTERLOCK
DRIVE ASSY DEVE, and remove the GUIDE HARNESS R. P/J161
GUIDE HARNESS R
Ida_03_079C
Figure 4-96. Removing the DRIVE ASSY DEVE (1)
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY DRIVE 342

9. Disconnect P/J491 connector from the DRIVE ASSY DEVE. 7. Install the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK to the clamp on the DISPENSER
10. Remove the three screws (silver, tapping, large, 10 mm) that secure the DRIVE ASSY-4.
ASSY DEVE to the main unit. 8. Route the harness through the GUIDE HARNESS R, and attach the four pieces of
CLAMP GUIDE HARNESS.
11. Remove the DRIVE ASSY DEVE from the main unit.
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N If the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK comes off when removing

the DRIVE ASSY DEVE, refer to p349 to install the HARNESS
ASSY INTERLOCK.
1. Secure the DRIVE ASSY DEVE to the main unit with the three screws (silver,
tapping, large, 10 mm).
DRIVE ASSY DEVE
2. Connect P/J491 connector to the DRIVE ASSY DEVE.
C A U T IO N Make sure that the HARNESS ASSY FAN /PHD/MOT is led

through the CORE RING 19.
10)
3. Install the GUIDE HARNESS R by inserting the tab on the front side of the 10)
4. Secure the GUIDE HARNESS R to the main unit with the two screws (silver, 10)
tapping, 10 mm). J491
9)
C A U T IO N Make sure that the gear of the DRIVE ASSY DEVE are
engaged with the one of the main unit. HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT
When performing the following work, route the harnesses as

shown in the figure. Ida_03_080C
5. Install the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK to the clamp on the DRIVE ASSY Figure 4-97. Removing the DRIVE ASSY DEVE (2)
DEVE.
6. Connect P/J161 connector on the LVPS.

4.9.2 DRIVE ASSY MAIN

REMOVAL

3. Disconnect P/J481 connector from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN.
4. Remove the four screws (silver, tapping, large, 10 mm) that secure the DRIVE DRIVE ASSY MAIN
ASSY MAIN to the main unit.
5. Remove the DRIVE ASSY MAIN from the main unit.
4)
4)
REINSTALLATION 3) J481
1. Secure the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to the main unit with the four screws (silver,
4)
tapping, large, 10 mm).
4) HARNESS ASSY
FAN/PHD/MOT
C A U T IO N Make sure that the gear of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN are engaged
with the one of the main unit. Ida_03_081C
Figure 4-98. Removing the DRIVE ASSY MAIN
2. Connect P/J481 connector to the DRIVE ASSY MAIN.
C A U T IO N Make sure that the HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT is led

through the CORE RING 19.


4.10 ELECTRICAL
7)
4.10.1 LVPS ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY) LVPS ASSY
161
C H E C K [CAUTION] in the figure indicates a "CAUTION" for reinstalling. 8) 163

P O IN T
165
8) 164
162
REMOVAL
11)
SUPPORT
4. Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) LINK
9)
7. Disconnect P/J161, 162, 163, 164, and 165 connectors on the LVPS.
8. Remove the three screws (silver, 6 mm) that secure the LVPS ASSY to the main SHAFT LINK S/W
unit and one screw at the bottom. 10)
9. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secures the SUPPORT LINK, and
remove the SUPPORT LINK. 8)
10. Separate the SHAFT LINK S/W from the switch on the LVPS.
8)
11. While releasing the SHAFT LINK S/W from the notch of the LVPS ASSY, lift up Ida_03_083C_1
the LVPS to remove it. Figure 4-99. Removing the LVPS ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY) (1)
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY ELECTRICAL 345

REINSTALLATION [CAUTION]
1. Lead the SHAFT LINK S/W into the notch of the LVPS ASSY, match the two
bosses on the bottom of the main unit with the holes of the LVPS ASSY, and
insert the LVPS ASSY. HARNESS ASSY LVPS
INTERLOCK
2. Insert the SHAFT LINK S/W to the switch on the LVPS. P/J161
3. Attach the SUPPORT LINK with the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm). P/J163
4. Secure the LVPS ASSY to the main unit with the three screws (silver, 6 mm) and
one screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) at the bottom.
P/J164
Operate the SWITCH in order to confirm that all the switches P/J165
C A U T IO N
work normally and the SHAFT LINK S/W is installed
correctly.
When connecting the connectors in the following steps, route
the harnesses as shown in the figure. P/J162
5. Connect P/J161, 162, 163, 164, and 165 connectors on the LVPS.
6. Attach the DISPENSER ASSY-4. (p.326)
Ida_03_083C_2
Figure 4-100. Removing the LVPS ASSY (REFERENCE ONLY) (2)

4.10.2 LVPS
REMOVAL BOX ASSY LVPS

2. Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) LVPS
4. Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) 9) 9)
7. Remove the LVPS ASSY. (p.345)
8. Disconnect P/J160 connector of the HARNESS ASSY AC INLET.
9. Remove the six screws (silver, 6 mm) that secure the LVPS to the BOX ASSY 9)
LVPS.
J160
REINSTALLATION 9)
9)
1. Secure the LVPS to the BOX ASSY LVPS with the six screws (silver, 10 mm). 8)
HARNESS ASSY
2. Connect P/J160 connector of the HARNESS ASSY AC INLET.
AC INLET
3. Install the LVPS ASSY. (p.345) J160
9)
4. Attach the DISPENSER ASSY-4. (p.326) Ida_03_084A
5. Attach the HVPS. (p.356) Figure 4-101. Removing the LVPS

4.10.3 HARNESS ASSY AC INLET 9. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248)
REMOVAL

BOX ASSY LVPS
7. Remove the LVPS ASSY. (p.345)
9)
8. Remove the LVPS. (p.347)
9. Remove the screw (silver, with external toothed washer, 6 mm) that secures the
ground wire to the BOX ASSY LVPS.
10. Release the two tabs of the HARNESS ASSY AC INLET using a mini
screwdriver or a similar tool, and then remove the HARNESS ASSY AC INLET
from the attachment hole on the BOX ASSY LVPS.
10)
HARNESS ASSY
REINSTALLATION
AC INLET
1. Insert the HARNESS ASSY AC INLET to the attaching hole of the BOS ASSY
LVPS.
2. Secure the ground lead to the BOX ASSY LVPS with the screw (silver, with
Ida_03_085A
external toothed washer, 6 mm).
Figure 4-102. Removing the HARNESS ASSY AC INLET
3. Attach the LVPS. (p.347)
4. Install the LVPS ASSY. (p.345)
5. Attach the DISPENSER ASSY-4. (p.326)

4.10.4 HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK

P O IN T
REMOVAL
HARNESS ASSY
1. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) INTERLOCK

3. Remove the DRIVE ASSY DEVE. (p.342)
4. Remove the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK connected to the main unit.
J161
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK to the main unit.
C A U T IO N Route the harness as shown in the figure.
2. Attach the DRIVE ASSY DEVE. (p.342) [CAUTION]

HARNESS ASSY TNR
4. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) HARNESS ASSY
INTERLOCK
LVPS
P/J161
Ida_03_089C
Figure 4-103. Removing the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK.

4.10.5 PWBA EEPROM 5. Attach the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248)

C A U T IO N When the printer is turned on after replacing either the PWBA
MCU IDTN ot the PWBA EEPROM, the information that
specific to each printer unit is automatically stored on a
memory of replaced circuit board. Due to this reason, the board
becomes unique to specific printer unit, and the board is no
longer usable on another printer unit. Do not reuse the board
that previously installed on another printer unit.
Do not replace both PWBA EEPROM and PWBA MCU IDTN PWBA EEPROM
at a time.
5)
REMOVAL
3) J144
1. Remove the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) 6)
3. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secure the GUIDE GUIDE HARNESS R
HARNESS R.
4. Release the tab on the front side of the GUIDE HARNESS R from the hole of the 3)
4)-2
DRIVE ASSY DEVE, and release the GUIDE HARNESS R.
5. Disconnect P/J144 connector connected to the SENSOR PWBA EEPROM.
6. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 10 mm) that secures the PWBA EEPROM to
the main unit.
7. Remove the PWBA EEPROM from the main unit.
4)-1
REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the PWBA EEPROM to the main unit with the screw (silver, tapping, Ida_03_090C
10mm).
Figure 4-104. Removing the PWBA EEPROM
2. Connect P/J144 connector to the PWBA EEPROM.
3. Install the GUIDE HARNESS R by inserting the tab on the front side of the
4. Secure the GUIDE HARNESS R with the two screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm).

4.10.6 PWBA MCU IDTN
C A U T IO N When the printer is turned on after replacing either the PWBA

MCU IDTN ot the PWBA EEPROM, the information that
specific to each printer unit is automatically stored on a
memory of replaced circuit board. Due to this reason, the board
becomes unique to specific printer unit, and the board is no
longer usable on another printer unit. Do not reuse the board
that previously installed on another printer unit. P/J3411 P/J141
When replacing the PWBA MCU IDTN, verify that the version 7)
of firmware and NVM on new PWBA MCU IDTN matches the
P/J151
version of previous PWBA MCU. If not, be sure to make them
matches each other by either upgrading or downgrading the 7)
firmware and NVM. Make sure to replace the PWBA MCU 7)
IDTN only after matching the firmware and NVM version.
Do not replace both PWBA EEPROM and PWBA MCU IDT at
a time.

P O IN T
REMOVAL Ida_03_112B
Figure 4-105. Removing the PWBA MCU IDTN (1)

1. Turn the printer OFF, and unplug the power cord from the outlet.
6. Remove the ESS BOX. (p.356)
7. Disconnect P/J151, P/J141, and P/J3411 connectors from the rear of the main unit.

8. Release the two tabs on the COVER ELEC to remove the COVER ELEC.
C A U T IO N Pay attention not to let the disconnected connector drawn into the 8)
inside of the printer.
9. Disconnect P/J18, P/J19, and P/J24 connectors inside the COVER ELEC.
10. Disconnect P/J20 connector inside the COVER ELEC.0
11. Remove the screw (silver, 4 mm) that secures the BRACKET ASSY MCU to the
inside of the COVER ELEC of the main unit.
COVER ELEC
11)
J19
J24 9)
9) J18
10)
9)
J20
Ida_03_091B

12. Remove the screw (silver, 4 mm) that secures the BRACKET ASSY MCU to the
13), 14) (P31)
13. Draw forth the BRACKET ASSY MCU from the right side of the main unit (P311)
(P34) (P15) (P61)
slightly, and disconnect all the connectors that can be seen on the PWBA MCU
(P14) (P51)
IDTN. (P16) (P36)
(P24) (P22)
C A U T IO N Pay attention not to let the disconnected connector drawn into the N.C.
inside of the printer. (P20) (P17)
(P18) N.C. (P60)
(P19)
(P13) (P47)
(P191) (P52)
(P48)
14. Draw forth the BRACKET ASSY MCU furthermore, and disconnect all the
connectors on the PWBA MCU IDTN.
12)
15)
BRACKET ASSY MCU
[CAUTION]
HARNESS ASSY 24V
P/J22
PWBA P/J60 HARNESS ASSY
MCU IDTN OPEPANE 2
P/J47 P/J17
HARNESS ASSY HARNESS ASSY
FDR OPFPLG
Ida_03_092C

15. Remove the BRACKET ASSY MCU from the main unit. 13. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242)
16. Remove the seven screws (silver, 6 mm) that secure the PWBA MCU IDTN to the 14. Plug the power cord into the outlet and turn the printer on.
BRACKET ASSY MCU, and remove the PWBA MCU IDTN.
PWBA MCU IDTN 16)
16) 16)
16) 16)
16) 16)
REINSTALLATION
1. Attach the PWBA MCU IDTN to the BRACKET ASSY MCU with the seven
screws (silver, 6 mm).
2. Connect the connector that is coming out of the interior of the printer to the PWBA
MCU IDTN.
C A U T IO N When installing the PWBA MCU IDTN, pay attention to the

routing of the harness.
Be sure to secure the CORE TC-14-10-8 to the P/J34 connector
with the cable tie.
BRACKET ASSY MCU Ida_03_094B
3. Insert the BRACKET ASSY MCU to the right side of the main unit, and connect
all the connectors. [CAUTION]
CORE TC-14-10-8
4. Connect P/J18, P/J19, and P/J24 connectors inside the COVER ELEC of the main
unit to the PWBA MCU IDTN.
J34
5. Connect P/J20 connector inside the COVER ELEC of the main unit to the PWBA
MCU IDTN.
6. Secure the BRACKET ASSY MCU to the main unit with the two screws (silver, 4
mm).
7. Install the COVER ELEC by locking the two tabs.
8. Connect the three connectors (P/J151, P/J141, and P/J3411) to the rear surface of
the main unit.
9. Attach the ESS BOX. (p.356)
Ida_03_152B
11. Attach the COVER SIDE L ASSY. (p.253) Figure 4-108. Removing the PWBA MCU IDTN (4)

4.10.7 SENSOR HUM

REMOVAL

BRACKET TEMP
3. Hold the tab on the BRCKET TEMP attached to the left side of the main unit, and 3)
push it down to release the boss.
4. Pull up the BRACKET TEMP.
5. Release the four tabs that secure the SENSOR HUM to the BRACKET TEMP,
J231
and remove the SENSOR HUM.
6)
6. Disconnect P/J231 connector connected to the SENSOR HUM, and remove the
SENSOR HUM. 5)
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect P/J231 connector to the SENSOR HUM.

SENSOR HUM
2. Secure the SENSOR HUM to the BRACKET TEMP with four tabs.
3. Insert the BRACKET TEMP to the notch of the bottom plate attached to the left
Ida_03_095A
4. Hold the tab on the BRACKET TEMP, push it down to insert the two bosses into
Figure 4-109. Removing the SENSOR HUM
the holes, and lock them up.

4.10.8 HVPS
REMOVAL

WIRE ASSY BTR
2. Remove the COVER SIDE R ASSY. (p.248) WIRE ASSY REGI
5)
4. Remove the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) 5) J141
BOSS
5. Disconnect P/J141 connector, WIRE ASSY BTR, and WIRE ASSY REGI on the 6)
HVPS. 5)
6. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 10 mm) and three screws (silver, 6 mm)
that secure the HVPS to the left side of the main unit. 6) HOOK
7. Remove the HVPS from the left side of the main unit by releasing the two tabs.
6)
REINSTALLATION 6)
1. Place the HVPS on the tab behind the left side of the main unit, and match the two
bosses with the holes of the HVPS. BOSS
2. Install the HVPS to the left side of the main unit with the two screws (silver, HVPS 6)
tapping, 10 mm) and three screws (silver, 6 mm).
Ida_03_096A
3. Connect P/J141 connector, WIRE ASSY BTR, and WIRE ASSY REGI to the Figure 4-110. Removing the HVPS
HVPS.
4. Attach the COVER REAR ASSY. (p.246) 4.10.9 ESS BOX (REFERENCE ONLY)
REMOVAL
7. Attach the COVER TOP MAIN. (p.242) 1. Remove the three SCREW ESSes that secure the ESS BOX.
2. Remove the ESS BOX toward you.

REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N Insert the ESS BOX as far as it will go so the connectors of

the PWBA ESS MAIN and the PWBA MCU IDTN are securely
connected.
1. Insert the ESS BOX to the backside of the printer.

2. Secure the ESS BOX with three SCREW ESSes.
2)
1)
1)
1)
Ida_03_082A
Figure 4-111. Removing the ESS BOX

4.10.10 PWBA ESS MAIN
C A U T IO N [CAUTION] in the figure indicates the caution to note for [CAUTION] HOOK
reinstallation.
SPRING EARTH
TYPE B
REMOVAL
5)
1. Remove the PWBA ESS ROM. (p.360)
2. Remove the PWBA NIC C533. (p.361)
3. Remove the two screws (silver, 6 mm) that secure the PANEL TYPE B to the GUIDE TYPE B 4)-2
PLATE REAR SE, and remove the PANEL TYPE B.
4)-2
4. Release the two tabs on the front of the GUIDE TYPE B, then release the two tabs
on its rear to remove the GUIDE TYPE B.
3)
4)-1
4)-1
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, make sure not to distort the 3)
SPRING EARTH TYPE B.
5. Remove the SPRING EARTH TYPE B. PANEL TYPE B
Ida_03_155A
Figure 4-112. Removing the PWBA ESS MAIN (1)

6. Remove the following screws that secure the PLATE REAR SE. PLATE REAR SE
1. Six screws (silver, 6 mm) 6)-1

6)-1
2. Three screws (silver, 6 mm, small) 6)-1
6)-1 6)-2
7. Release the tabs of the PANEL ESS L and the PANEL ESS R, and remove the 6)-2
PANEL ESS R SPACER HDD
PLATE REAR SE. 8)-1 6)-1
9)
6)-1
8. Move the PANEL ESS L and the PANEL ESS R outward, pull the guide pin out of
the PWBA ESS MAIN, and remove the PANEL ESS L and the PANEL ESS R. 9) PWB ESS MAIN
9)
9)
9. Remove the nine screws (silver, 6 mm) and the three SPACER HDDs that secure
9) 6)-1
9) 9)
the PWBA ESS MAIN to the SHIELD PCB SE, and remove the PWBA ESS
MAIN. 9) 9)
9) 8)-1
8)-2
REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the PWBA ESS MAIN to the SHIELD PCB SE with nine screws (silver, 6 SPACER HDD
mm) and three SPACER HDDs. 8)-2 PANEL ESS L
2. Insert the guide pins of the PANEL ESS L and the PANEL ESS R into the hole of SPACER HDD
the PWBA ESS MAIN to install the PANEL ESS L and the PANEL ESS R.
3. Secure the PANEL ESS L/PANEL ESS R to the PLATE REAR SE with tabs.
4. Secure the PLATE REAR SE with six screws (silver, 6 mm) and three screws
SHIELD PCB SE
(silver, 6 mm, small) Ida_03_156A
Figure 4-113. Removing the PWBA ESS MAIN (2)

5. Install the SPRING EARTH TYPE B.
C A U T IO N Be careful not to distort the SPRING EARTH TYPE B when

handling the part.
Secure the tabs of the SPRING EARTH TYPE B firmly.
6. Hitch the tabs on the rear of the GUIDE TYPE B to the PLATE REAR SE, secure
the two front tabs to the PWBA ESS MAIN, and install the GUIDE TYPE B.
7. Secure the PANEL TYPE B to the PLATE REAR SE with two screws (silver, 6
mm).
8. Install the PWBA NIC C533. (p.361)
9. Install the PWBA ESS ROM. (p.360)

4.10.11 PWBA ESS ROM

REMOVAL
1. Remove the ESS BOX. (p.356)

2. Release the latch and remove the PWBA ESS ROM. PWBA ESS
ROM
REINSTALLATION
2)-2
1. Insert the PWBA ESS ROM to the slot on the PWBA ESS MAIN, and secure the
latch.
C A U T IO N Insert the PWBA ESS ROM as far as it will go, and secure the latch.
2)-1
2. Install the ESS BOX. (p.356)
Ida_03_154A
Figure 4-114. Removing the PWBA ESS ROM

4.10.12 PWBA NIC C533

REMOVAL PWBA NIC C533
1. Remove the ESS BOX. (p.356) 2)-1
2. Remove the following screws that secure the PWBA NIC C533, and remove the
PWBA NIC C533.
1. 1 screw (silver, 6 mm) 3)
2. 2 screws (silver, 6 mm, small) BRACKET 2)-2

3. Remove the screw (silver, 6 mm) that secure the BRACKET ETHER BOARD to ETHER BOARD
2)-2
the PWBA NIC C533, and remove the BRACKET ETHER BOARD.
REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the BRACKET ETHER BOARD to the PWBA NIC C533 with a screw
(silver, 6 mm).
2. Secure the PWBA NIC C533 with two screws (silver, 6 mm, small) and one screw
(silver, 6 mm).
C A U T IO N Make sure to connect the connectors of the PWBA NIC C533 and
the PWBA ESS MAIN firmly.
3. Install the ESS BOX. (p.356) Ida_03_153A

Figure 4-115. Removing the PWBA NIC C533

4.11 ONE TRAY OPTION FEEDER
4.11.1 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY

2)
REMOVAL 2)

2. Remove the four SCREW JOINT from the bottom plate of the main unit.
C A U T IO N The main unit should be lifted up by two persons.
SCREW JOINT
3. Lift up the main unit and separate the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY from the 2)
1 TRAY
main unit. 2) OPTION FEEDER ASSY
3)
REINSTALLATION
Ida_1T_03_202C
1. Mount the main unit onto the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY.
2. Attach the four pieces of SCREW JOINT to the bottom plate of the FEEDER Figure 4-116. Removing the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY
section of the main unit.
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY ONE TRAY OPTION FEEDER 362

4.11.2 HARNESS ASSY OPFREC

6) J171
[CAUTION] in the figure indicates a "CAUTION" for reinstalling. PLATE ASSY
C H E C K
P O IN T PWBA ASSY
3)
REMOVAL
5)
HOOK
1. Remove the 1 TRAY FEEDER ASSY. (p.362)
4)-1 J83
2. Remove the COVER RIGHT. (p.366)
3)
3. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the PLATE ASSY and the
screw (silver, 6 mm) that secures the PWBA ASSY.
4)-2
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care not to remove the HARNESS ASSY
PWBA ASSY too far from the 1 TRAY FEEDER ASSY as they are OPFREC
connected by a connector.
HOUSING RIGHT
4. Release the hook of the HOUSING RIGHT, and remove the PLATE ASSY and NOTCH
the PWBA ASSY.
5. Disconnect P/J83 connector from the PWBA ASSY.
6. Release the two tabs that secure the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC from behind the [CAUTION]
PWBA OPTFDR 1T
PLATE ASSY, and remove the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC.
HARNESS ASSY OPFREC
Ida_1T_03_203C
Figure 4-117. Removing the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC.

REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC to the PLATE ASSY with the two tabs.

2. Connect P/J83 connector to the PWBA ASSY.

3. Match the PWBA ASSY with the two notches of the HOUSING RIGHT of the
HOUSING RIGHT, and install the PLATE ASSY by securing with a hook.
4. Secure the upper surface of the PLATE ASSY with the screw (silver, tapping, 8
mm).
5. Secure the side surface of the PWBA ASSY with the screw (silver, 6 mm).
6. Attach the COVER RIGHT. (p.366)
7. Install the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.362)

4.11.3 PWBA OPTFDR 1T

P O IN T
REMOVAL

2. Disconnect all the connectors connected to the PWBA OPTFDR 1T. PWBA OPTFDR 1T
3. Remove the two screws (silver, 6 mm) that secure the PWBA OPTFDR 1T.
4. Release the PWBA OPTFDR 1T from the two notches of the HOUSING RIGHT,
and remove the PWBA OPTFDR 1T. 3)
3)
REINSTALLATION
4)
1. Match the PWBA OPTFDR 1T with the two notches of the HOUSING RIGHT,
and secure them with the two screws (silver, 6 mm). NOTCH
C A U T IO N When connecting the connectors in the following steps, route [CAUTION] P81
PWBA OPTFDR 1T 2)
the harnesses as shown in the figure.
P86 connector on the PWBA OPTFDR 1T is reserved. P84
P83
2. Connect all the connectors except for P86 connector to the PWBA OPTFDR 1T.
P80
3. Attach the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) P85
P86 P82
Not Connects
Ida_1T_03_204B
Figure 4-118. Removing the PWBA OPTFDR 1T

4.11.4 COVER RIGHT

REMOVAL

2. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) that secure the HOUSING RIGHT
COVER RIGH.
3. Release the two hooks on the rear side of the COVER RIGHT, and remove the
2)
COVER RIGHT.
REINSTALLATION
3)
1. Hitch the two hooks on the rear side of the COVER RIGHT to the HOUSING
RIGHT.
2. Secure the COVER RIGHT with the two screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8
HOOK
mm).
3)
3. Install the CASSETTE.
2)
COVER RIGHT
HOOK
Ida_1T_03_205B
Figure 4-119. Removing the COVER RIGHT

4.11.5 HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2

PLATE ASSY
PWBA ASSY
P O IN T
3)
REMOVAL 5)
HOOK
1. Remove the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.362) J84
2. Remove the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) 4)-1 3)

3. Remove both the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the PLATE ASSY and
the screw (silver, 6mm) that secures the PWBA ASSY.
4)-2
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care not to remove the
PWBA ASSY too far from the 1 TRAY FEEDER ASSY as they are
connected by a connector.
NOTCH
4. Release the hook of the HOUSING RIGHT, and remove the PLATE ASSY and
the PWBA ASSY.
HARNESS ASSY
5. Disconnect P/J84 connector from the PWBA ASSY. OPFPLG2
6. Release the two tabs that secure the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2 to the 6)
HOUSING RIGHT, and remove the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2.
[CAUTION] PWBA OPTFDR 1T
HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2

Ida_1T_03_206C
Figure 4-120. Removing the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2

REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2 to the HOUSING RIGHT with the tabs.

2. Connect P/J84 connector to the PWBA ASSY.

3. Match the PWBA ASSY with the two notches of the HOUSING RIGHT, and
install the PLATE ASSY by securing with a hook.
mm).


REMOVAL
1. Draw out the CASSETTE.

2. Press down the concave portions on the right-and-left side of the CHUTE ASSY
FEEDER with your fingers, and rotate the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER downward. 2)
2)
C A U T IO N The main unit is removed in the illustration to make it easier to
understand.
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
3)-1
REINSTALLATION
FEEDER deeply into the FEEDER overleaping the rib. 3)-3
2. Rotate the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER toward you and lock it up.
3)-2
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER

3)-1
Ida_1T_03_016B
Figure 4-121. Removing the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER

4.11.7 COVER LEFT

REMOVAL

2. Remove the two screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8 mm) that secure the
COVER LEFT. HOUSING LEFT
3. Release the two hooks on the rear side of the COVER LEFT, and remove the
COVER LEFT.
2)
REINSTALLATION 3)
1. Hitch the two hooks on the rear side of the COVER LEFT to the HOUSING
LEFT.
3)
2. Secure the COVER LEFT with the two screws (silver, with flange, tapping, 8
mm). HOOK
2)
COVER LEFT
HOOK Ida_1T_03_207B
Figure 4-122. Removing the COVER LEFT

4.11.8 SWITCH ASSY SIZE 5)

SWITCH ASSY SIZE
J821
6)
REMOVAL
PLATE ASSY
1. Remove the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.362)
3. Remove both the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the PLATE ASSY and
the screw (silver, 6mm) that secures the PWBA ASSY.
4)
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care not to remove the
connected with a connector. 3)
4. Release the hook on the HOUSING RIGHT, and remove both the PLATE ASSY
and the PWBA ASSY.
5. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the SWITCH ASSY SIZE
to the HOUSING RIGHT, and release the SWITCH ASSY SIZE. 4) HOUSING RIGHT
6. Disconnect P/J821 connector from the SWITCH ASSY SIZE, and remove the
SWITCH ASSY SIZE.
HOOK
BOSS [2)]
Ida_1T_03_208B
Figure 4-123. Removing the SWITCH ASSY SIZE

REINSTALLATION

2. Insert the hook on the SWITCH ASSY SIZE to the notch of the HOUSING
RIGHT, match the two bosses with the holes of the HOUSING RIGHT, and
secure them with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm).
3. Match the PWBA ASSY with the two notches of the HOUSING RIGHT, and
install the PLATE ASSY by securing with a hook.
mm).

4.11.9 PICK UP ASSY
C H E C K Numbers in the square bracket [ ] in the figure indicate the 6)

P O IN T steps of reinstallation procedure. 6)
[CAUTION] in the figure indicates a "CAUTION" for
reinstalling.
6) 6)
6)
REMOVAL 6)
FRAME ASSY TOP (FRONT)
3. Remove the COVER LEFT. (p.370)
4. Remove the DRIVE ASSY. (p.382)
6. Remove the two long screws (silver, 110 mm) and five screws (silver, 6 mm) that
secure the FRAME ASSY TOP (FRONT), and remove the FRAME ASSY TOP
(FRONT).
6)
5)
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER

Ida_1T_03_209B
Figure 4-124. Removing the PICK UP ASSY (1)

7. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the PLATE ASSY.
10)
C A U T IO N When performing the following work, take care not to remove the PICK UP ASSY
connected by a connector. 10)
J81 9)
8. Release the hook of the HOUSING RIGHT, and remove the PLATE ASSY and 10) J85
the PWBA ASSY. 10)
9. Disconnect P/J81 and P/J85 connectors connected to the PWBA ASSY, and
remove the harness connected to the PICK UP ASSY from both the harness guide
7)
and the clamp. PLATE ASSY
10. Remove the four screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secure the PICK UP ASSY to
the FEEDER, and remove the PICK UP ASSY.
8)
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER HOUSING RIGHT
[CAUTION] PWBA OPTFDR 1T HOOKs
CLUMP HOOKs [2)]
HARNESS ASSY OPFDR

Ida_1T_03_210C
HARNESS ASSY LOWP
Figure 4-125. Removing the PICK UP ASSY (2)

REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the PICK UP ASSY to the FEEDER with the four screws (silver, tapping, 8
mm).

2. Route the harness connected to the PICK UP ASSY through both the harness
guide and the clamp, and connect P/J81 and P/J85 connectors to the PWBA
ASSY.
3. Match the PWBA ASSY with the two notches of the HOUSING RIGHT of the
HOUSING RIGHT, and install the PLATE ASSY by securing with a hook.
mm).
5. Secure the FRAME ASSY TOP (FRONT) with the two long screws (silver,
tapping, 110 mm) and five screws (silver, 6 mm).
7. Install the DRIVE ASSY. (p.382)
8. Attach the COVER LEFT. (p.370)

4.11.10 ROLL ASSY TURN

REMOVAL ROLL ASSY TURN
BEARING SLEEVE,
1. Remove the 1 TRAY FEEDER ASSY. (p.362) PLASTIC FRAME PICKUP

3. Remove the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. (p.369)
6)-1
4. Remove the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC. (p.377)
6)-2
5. Remove the E-ring that secures the BEARING EARTH to the ROLL ASSY KL CLIP
TURN, and remove the BEARING EARTH. 7)
6. Remove the KL CLIP that secures the BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC to the
ROLL ASSY TURN, and remove the BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC. 5)-2
7. Slide the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right, and remove it upward.
5)-1
REINSTALLATION BEARING EARTH
1. Insert the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right-and-left holes of the FRAME PICKUP.
Ida_1T_03_211B
2. Insert the BEARING SLLEVE, PLASTIC to the left side of the ROLL ASSY
TURN, and attach KL CLIP. Figure 4-126. Removing the ROLL ASSY TURN
3. Insert the BEARING EARTH into the right side of the ROLL ASSY TURN, and
attach the E-ring.
4. Attach the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC. (p.377)
5. Install the CHUTE ASSY FEEDR. (p.369)

4.11.11 CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC
C H E C K Numbers in the square bracket [ ] in the figure indicate the steps of 3)

ROLL ASSY TURN CLAMP
REMOVAL
1. Remove the 1 TRAY FEEDER ASSY. (p.362) P/J825

3. Disconnect P/J825 connector on the harness that is connected to the CLUTCH J825
ELECTRO MAGNETIC, and release the harness from the clamp.
4. Release the tab of the STOPPER CLUTCH, and remove the STOPPER CLUTCH.
5. Pull out the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC from the ROLL ASSY TURN.
SHAFT 5)
[2)]
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC to the ROLL ASSY TURN. 4)
2. Insert the STOPPER CLUTCH to the shaft of the FRAME PICKUP, and install CLUTCH ELECTRO
the STOPPER CLUTCH by matching its boss with the groove of the CLUTCH MAGNETIC
ELECTRO MAGNETIC. STOPPER CLUTCH
3. Route the harness connected to the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC through
the clamp, and connect P/J825 connector on the harness.
Ida_1T_03_212B
5. Install the 1 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.362) Figure 4-127. Removing the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC


REMOVAL ACTUATOR NO PAPER

6. Disconnect P/J822 connector from the SENSOR NO PAPER.
7)-1 7)-2
7. Put up the ACTUATOR NO PAPER, release the three tabs on the SENSOR NO
PAPER, and remove the SENSOR NO PAPER.
REINSTALLATION
J822
1. Put up the ACTUATOR NO PAPER and install the SENSOR NO PAPER.
2. Connect P/J822 connector to the SENSOR NO PAPER. 6)
3. Install the PICK UP ASSY. (p.373) SENSOR NO PAPER
4. Install the DRIVE ASSY. (p.382)
6. Attach the COVER RIGHT. (p.366) Ida_1T_03_213A


4.11.13 SENSOR LOW PAPER

REMOVAL 6)
6)
6) 6)
3. Remove the COVER LEFT. (p.370) 6)
6)
FRAME ASSY TOP (FRONT)
6. Remove the two long screws (silver, 110 mm) and five screws (silver, 6 mm) that
secure the FRAME ASSY TOP (FRONT), and remove the FRAME ASSY TOP
(FRONT).
6)
5)
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER

Ida_1T_03_209B
Figure 4-129. Removing the SENSOR LOW PAPER (1)

7. Rlease the three tabs on the SENSOR LOW PAPER, and remove the SENSOR
LOW PAPER.
8. Disconnect P/J823 connector from the SENSOR LOW PAPER. 7)
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect P/J823 connector to the SENSOR LOW PAPER.

2. Attach the SENSOR LOW PAPER to the FRAME PICKUP.
3. Secure the FRAME ASSY TOP (FRONT) with the two long screws (silver, 110 FRAME PICKUP
mm) and five screws (silver, 6 mm).
J823 8)
SENSOR LOW PAPER
Ida_1T_03_214A
Figure 4-130. Removing the SENSOR LOW PAPER (2)

C H E C K [CAUTION] in the figure indicates a "CAUTION"ote or

FRAME PICKUP
P O IN T precaution for reinstalling.
HARNES GUIDEs
REMOVAL

2. Release the harness that is connected to the SOLENOID FEED from the harness 2)-1
guide, and disconnect P/J824 connector of the harness. 2)-2
3. Remove the screw (silver, 6 mm) that secures the SOLENOID FEED to the
FRAME PICKUP, and remove the SOLENOID FEED.
P/J824
REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the SOLENOID FEED to the FRAME PICKUP with the screw (silver, 6 3)
mm).
When connecting the connectors in the following steps, route the SOLENOID FEED
C A U T IO N
[CAUTION]
PWBA OPTFDR 1T
2. Connect P/J824 connector of the harness that is connected to the SOLENOID

FEED, and place the harness within the harness guide.
SOLENOID FEED HARNESS ASSY OPFDR Ida_1T_03_215B

4.11.15 DRIVE ASSY

P O IN T
REMOVAL

2)
2. Disconnect P/J82 connector on the PWBA OPTFDR 1T that is connected to the
DRIVE ASSY.
3. Release the harness that is connected to the DRIVE ASSY from the harness J82
guides. 3)
4. Remove the three screws (silver, 6 mm) that secures the DRIVE ASSY to the HOOKs
FRAME PICKUP, and remove the DRIVE ASSY.
REINSTALLATION 4)
FRAME PICKUP
4)
1. Secure the DRIVE ASSY to the FRAME PICKUP with the three screws (silver, 6
DRIVE ASSY 4)
mm).
2. Route the harness that is connected to the DRIVE ASSY through the harness
[CAUTION]
guides. PWBA OPTFDR 1T

3. Connect P/J82 connector on the PWBA OPTFDR 1T.

DRIVE ASSY
Ida_1T_03_216C
Figure 4-132. Removing the DRIVE ASSY


REMOVAL
3)-1
ACTUATOR LOW PAPER.
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert one end of the ACTUATOR LOW PAPER to the hole of the CHUTE
UPPER, secure the other end with a tab, and attach the ACTUATOR LOW
PAPER.
CHUTE UPPER
3)-2
ACTUATOR LOW PAPER
Ida_1T_03_027A


[CAUTION]
REMOVAL
C A U T IO N Looking from the rear with the COVER CST removed, the two HOOKs
hooks of the CHUTE UPPER should be located on upper surface of FRAME PICKUP
the PICK UP ASSY. The FRAME ASSY TOP (FRONT) is HOOKs HOOKs
removed in the illustration to make it easier to understand.
2. Release the two hooks that secure the CHUTE UPPER to the PICK UP ASSY, 2)-1 HOOKs
temporarily slide the CHUTE UPPER rearward to remove the four hooks, and
2)-1
remove the CHUTE UPPER downward.
REINSTALLATION CHUTE UPPER
C H E C K The CHUTE UPPER can be attached easily by removing the

P O IN T CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. (Refer to p369) HOOKs
1. Hitch the four hooks on the CHUTE UPPER to the holes of the PICK UP ASSY,
PICK UP ASSY
and install the CHUTE UPPER by locking the two hooks.
2)-2
CHUTE UPPER
Ida_1T_03_217C


REMOVAL
DITCH PIN
2. Release the tab that secures the ROLL ASSY FEED to the SHAFT ASSY FEED,
and pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED to remove it.
3. Release the tab that secures the ROLL ASSY FEED to the SHAFT ASSY
NUDGER, and pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED to remove it. 2) ROLL ASSY FEED
REINSTALLATION
ROLL ASSY FEED 3)
the SHAFT ASSY NUDGER, insert the ROLL ASSY FEED into the SHAFT
ASSY NUDGER, and secure them with the tab.
FEED, and secure them with the tab.
SHAFT ASSY NUDGER
SHAFT ASSY FEED

Ida_1T_03_218A


REMOVAL 7) 8)
6. Reverse the PICK UP ASSY.
7. Release the tab that secures the ACTUATOR NO PAPER to the PICK UP ASSY. ACTUATOR NO PAPER ACTUATOR NO PAPER
9. As moving the tab side of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER in the direction of the
PICK UP ASSY.
PICK UP ASSY
REINSTALLATION
ASSY.
2. Move the thin part of the shaft of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER from the oblong 9)-2
square hole of the PICK UP ASSY to the attaching hole of the ACTUATOR NO
PAPER in order to set up the ACTUATOR NO PAPER.
3. Insert the boss on the ACTUATOR NO PAPER into the hole of the PICK UP
ACTUATOR NO PAPER
ASSY, and secure them with the tab.
9)-1 Ida_1T_03_030A
5. Install the DRIVE ASSY. (p.382) Figure 4-136. Removing the ACTUATOR NO PAPER


REMOVAL
4)
1. Draw out the CASSETTE. CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION
2. Remove the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (p.388)

3. Release the tab that secures the SHAFT ASSY RETARD to the HOLDER
SHAFT ASSY RETARD
ASSY RETARD and the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION.
ROLL ASSY RETARD
REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N When installing the SHAFT ASSY RETARD, pay attention to its

orientation.
3)-1
3)-2
secure it with the tab.
4. Attach the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (p.388)
5. Install the CASSETTE. HOLDER RETARD Ida_1T_03_013A


3)-3
REMOVAL
HOLDER ASSY RETARD
1. Draw out the CASSETTE. 3)-2
2. Press the two (right and left) tabs of the CHUTE TURN CST inward to release
them, and open the CHUTE TURN CST. CHUTE TURN CST
3. Release the tab that secures the HOLDER ASSY RETARD to the CASSETTE,
rotate the RETARD ASSY upward, and remove the RETARD ASSY toward left. 2)-1 3)-1
REINSTALLATION 2)-2
CASSETTE, attach HOLDER ASSY RETARD, and secure it with the tab.
2. Close the CHUTE TURN CST. 2)-1
CASSETTE
Ida_1T_03_015B
Figure 4-138. Removing the HOLDER ASSY RETARD

C H E C K Numbers in the square bracket [ ] in the figure indicate the steps of PLATE ASSY BTM
4)
2
1
REMOVAL
HOOK
1. Draw out the CASSETTE. PLATE ASSY BTM
the HOUSING CST.
4. Release the PLATE ASSY BTM from the hook on the right side of the HOUSING
CST.
5. Raise the PLATE ASSY BTM as indicated with black arrow in Figure 4-132. STOPPER BLOCK
3)
1
2
PLATE ASSY BTM
Ida_1T_03_221B
Figure 4-139. Removing the KIT GUIDE SIDE L and KIT GUIDE SIDE R (1)

6. Release the tab of the GEAR MANUAL to remove the GEAR MANUAL.
7. Slide the KIT GUIDE SIDE L inward as far as it will go to remove upward.
KIT GUIDE SIDE R
8. Slide the KIT GUIDE SIDE R inward as far as it will go to remove upward.
KIT GUIDE SIDE R
C A U T IO N When removing the KIT GUIDE SIDE R, be careful not to lose the
GEAR MANUAL
GUIDE STOPPER and the SPRING STOPPER GUIDE SIDE as
they may come off. 6) KIT GUIDE SIDE L
HOOK
8)
7)
REINSTALLATION HOOK
as it will go.
[2)]
2. Attach the KIT GUIDE SIDE L to the HOUSING CST, tune the scale of the
LEVER GUIDE SIDE
LEVER GUIDE SIDE to "8.5", and slide it outward as far as it will go.
KIT GUIDE SIDE L


4. Match the SPRING N/Fs with the tabs on the backside of the PLATE ASSY BTM,
and install them by securing with the hook on the right side of the PLATE ASSY
BTM. HOOKs
Ida_1T_03_222A
6. Lower the PLATE ASSY BTM, and secure the PLATE ASSY BTM with the tabs
on both the STOPPER LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R.

4.11.23 KIT GUIDE END

REMOVAL
PLATE ASSY BTM
5)
4)
2. Hold down the PLATE ASSY BTM, release the tabs on both the STOPPER LINK 2
PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R located on right-and-left bottom of the 1
3. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the STOPPER BLOCK to HOOK
the HOUSING CST. PLATE ASSY BTM
4. Release the PLATE ASSY BTM from the tab on the right side of the HOUSING
CST.
STOPPER BLOCK
3)
1
2
PLATE ASSY BTM
Ida_1T_03_221B

6. Release the ACTUATOR GUIDE END from the hook of the HOUSING CST,
3
KIT GUIDE END, and remove the ACTUATOR GUIDE END toward you.
7. Slide the KIT GUIDE END forward, release its tab from the HOUSING CST, and KIT GUIDE END 6)
remove the KIT GUIDE END. 2 HOOK
ACTUATOR GUIDE END
1
they may come off from the rear side.
REINSTALLATION
overleaping the tab.
slide it forward with its notch set in the HOUSIGN CST. Ida_1T_03_223B
3. Match the SPRING N/Fs with the tabs on the backside of the PLATE ASSY BTM, KIT GUIDE END
and install them by securing with the hook on the right side of the PLATE ASSY
BTM.
7)
5. Lower the PLATE ASSY BTM, and secure the PLATE ASSY BTM with the tabs
on both the STOPPER LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R.
2
6. Install the CASSETTE to the main unit. 1
HOOK
Ida_1T_03_224B

4.12 TWO TRAY OPTION FEEDER
4.12.1 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY

2)
REMOVAL 2)

2. Remove the four pieces of SCREW JOINT from the bottom plate of the main unit.

SCREW JOINT
2)
3. Lift up the main unit and separate the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY from the 2)
2 TRAY
main unit. OPTION FEEDER ASSY
3)
REINSTALLATION
1. Mount the main unit onto the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY.
2. Attach the four pieces of SCREW JOINT to the bottom plate of the FEEDER
section of the main unit.
3. Install the CASSETTE to the main unit. Ida_2T_03_302D
Figure 4-143. Removing the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY TWO TRAY OPTION FEEDER 393

4.12.2 COVER ASSY LEFT

REMOVAL
1. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT.

2. Remove the five screws (silver, with flange, 8mm) that secure the COVER ASSY
COVER ASSY
LEFT to the frame. LEFT
2)
3. Release the three hooks on the rear side of the COVER ASSY LEFT, and remove
3)
the COVER ASSY LEFT. HOOK
REINSTALLATION
3)
1. Hitch the three hooks on the rear side of the COVER ASSY LEFT to the hole of 2)
the frame. 2)
3)
2. Secure the COVER ASSY LEFT with the five screws (silver, with flange, 8 mm).
2)
3. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT.
2)
HOOK
Ida_2T_03_303C
Figure 4-144. Removing the COVER ASSY LEFT

4.12.3 COVER ASSY RIGHT

REMOVAL

2. Remove the five screws (silver, with flange, 8mm) that secure the COVER ASSY
COVER ASSY
RIGHT to the frame.
RIGHT
3. Release the three hooks on the rear side of the COVER ASSY RIGHT, and 2)
remove the COVER ASSY RIGHT. 3)
HOOK
REINSTALLATION
1. Hitch the three hooks on the rear side of the COVER ASSY RIGHT to the hole of 3)
the frame. 2) 2)
2. Secure the COVER ASSY RIGHT with the five screws (silver, with flange, 8
mm). 3)
3. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT. 2)
HOOK
2)
Ida_2T_03_304B
Figure 4-145. Removing the COVER ASSY RIGHT

4.12.4 COVER ASSY FRONT

REMOVAL
2)
2. Release the two tabs that secure the COVER ASSY FRONT to the frame, and
remove the COVER ASSY FRONT.
REINSTALLATION
COVER
1. Insert the two projections on the COVER ASSY FRONT to the hole of the frame, ASSY
FRONT
and secure the COVER ASSY FRONT with the two tabs.
2)
Ida_2T_03_305C
Figure 4-146. Removing the COVER ASSY FRONT

4.12.5 COVER CST

REMOVAL
1. Pull in the upper side of the COVER CST toward you, and remove the COVER
CST from the upper attaching parts of both the FEEDER ASSY LEFT and the
FEEDER ASSY RIGHT.
2. Remove the COVER CST from the lower attaching parts of both the FEEDER
ASSY LEFT and the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT.
REINSTALLATION
1. Hitch the COVER CST to the lower attaching parts of both the FEEDER ASSY
LEFT and the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT.
2. Push the upper side of the COVER CST into the upper attaching parts of both the
FEEDER ASSY LEFT and the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT to install the COVER
CST.
COVER CST
Ida_2T_03_334B
Figure 4-147. Removing the COVER CST

4.12.6 FEEDER ASSY LEFT

REMOVAL

2. Remove the COVER ASSY LEFT.
3. Remove the COVER CST.
5)
4. Remove the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER.
5. Remove the six screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secure the FEEDER ASSY 5)
LEFT to the frame. 5)
5) 5)
6. Pull out the FEEDER ASSY LEFT toward you to remove it.
5)
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the FEEDER ASSY LEFT into the frame.

6)
2. Secure the FEEDER ASSY LEFT with the six screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm).
3. Install the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. FEEDER ASSY
LEFT
4. Attach the COVER CST.
5. Attach the COVER ASSY LEFT.
Ida_2T_03_306C
Figure 4-148. Removing the FEEDER ASSY LEFT

4.12.7 FEEDER ASSY RIGHT 7. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT.

REMOVAL

2. Remove the COVER ASSY RIGHT.
C A U T IO N Removal procedure 5 described below is only required when

removing the upper FEEDER ASSY RIGHT. 7)
7) 7) 7)
5. Remove the DRIVE ASSY 2ND. 7)

6. Disconnect P/J821 connector from the SWITCH ASSY SIZE.
7. Remove the six screws (silver, tapping, 8mm) that secure the FEEDER ASSY 7)
RIGHT to the frame. 8)-1
8. Tilt the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT, pull out the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT toward
ahead of the frame, and remove the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT. 6)
REINSTALLATION 8)-2 J821

FEEDER ASSY RIGHT
1. Insert the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT into the frame.

2. Secure the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT with the six screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm).
SWITCH ASSY SIZE
C A U T IO N Reinstallation procedure 4 described below is only required when

installing the upper FEEDER ASSY RIGHT. Ida_2T_03_307C
Figure 4-149. Removing the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT
4. Install the DRIVE ASSY 2ND.

5. Install the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER.

4.12.8 SWITCH ASSY SIZE 7. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT.
REMOVAL

7)
C A U T IO N Removal procedure 5 described below is only required when

removing the upper FEEDER ASSY SIZE.
5. Remove the DRIVE ASSY 2ND.

6. Remove the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT.
7. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8mm) that secures the SWITCH ASSY SIZE
to the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT, and remove the SWITCH ASSY SIZE. FEEDER ASSY RIGHT SWITCH ASSY SIZE
REINSTALLATION Ida_2T_03_308A
1. Match the two bosses on the SWITCH ASSY SIZE with the holes of the FEEDER Figure 4-150. Removing the SWITCH ASSY SIZE
ASSY RIGHT, and secure them with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm).
2. Install the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT.
C A U T IO N Reinstallation procedure 3 described below is only required when

installing the upper FEEDER ASSY SIZE.

6. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT.


REMOVAL

2)
2)
C A U T IO N The main unit and the COVER ASSY FRONT is removed in the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
illustration to make it easier to understand.
3)-1
REINSTALLATION
3)-3
FEEDER deeply into the FEEDER overleaping the rib.
3)-2
2. Rotate the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER toward you and lock it up.
3. Install the CASSETTE. 3)-1
CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
Ida_2T_03_309B
Figure 4-151. Removing the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER

4.12.10 HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2

REMOVAL HARNESS ASSY
OPFREC2
1. Remove the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. 6)

4. Disconnect P/J83 connector from the upper PWBA OPTFDR 2T.
5. Release the harness of the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 from the clamp. J83
6. Release the two tabs that secure the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2, and remove the
HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2. 4)
5) PWBA
OPTFDR 2T
REINSTALLATION
5)
1. Attach the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 to the frame.
2. Route the harness of the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 through the clamp.
3. Connect P/J83 connector to the upper PWBA OPTFDR 2T.
Ida_2T_03_310A
Figure 4-152. Removing the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2

4.12.11 PWBA OPTFDR 2T

REMOVAL
1. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. 3) P81

P84
2. Remove COVER ASSY RIGHT. P83
3. Disconnect all the connectors from the PWBA OPTFDR 2T. P80
PWB OPTFDR 2T
4. Remove the three screws (silver, 6 mm) that secure the PWBA OPTFDR 2T to the
P85
frame, and remove the PWBA OPTFDR 2T. P82
P86 Not Connects
4) 3) P84 Not Connects
P81
REINSTALLATION 4) P83
4)
P80
1. Secure the PWBA OPTFDR 2T to the frame with the three screws (silver, 6mm).
2. Connect all the connectors except for P86 connector to the upper PWBA OPTFDR P85
2T. In a similar way, connect all the connectors except for P82, P84, and P86 4) P82 Not Connects
connectors to the lower PWBA OPTFDR 2T. P86 Not Connects
4)
4) Ida_2T_03_311B
PWB OPTFDR 2T
Figure 4-153. Removing the PWBA OPTFDR 2T

4.12.12 DRIVE ASSY 2ND

REMOVAL
1. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. J82
2. Remove the COVER ASSY RIGHT. PWBA OPTFDR 2T
3. Disconnect P/J82 connector on the upper PWBA OPTFDR 2T.

4. Disconnect the harness that is connected to the DRIVE ASSY 2ND from the 4)
clamp.
3)
5. Remove the three screws (silver, 6 mm) that secure the DRIVE ASSY 2ND to the 5)
frame, and remove the DRIVE ASSY 2ND.
5) 5)
REINSTALLATION
DRIVE ASSY 2ND
1. Secure the DRIVE ASSY 2ND with the three screws (silver, 6mm).
2. Route the harness that is connected to the DRIVE ASSY 2ND through each clamp.
3. Connect P/J82 connector to the upper PWBA OPTFDR 2T.
Ida_2T_03_312B
Figure 4-154. Removing the DRIVE ASSY 2ND

4.12.13 PICK UP ASSY 3RD

REMOVAL CLUTCH ASSY SENSOR NO PAPER
P/J822 CLAMP
12) P/J81
1. Remove the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY.
4. Remove the COVER ASSY LEFT. CLAMP
13) 14)
PWBA
6. Remove the upper CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. P/J825 OPTFDR 2T
7. Remove the upper CHUTE UPPER. SOLENOID FEED
9. Remove the upper FEEDER ASSY RIGHT.
10. Remove the upper FEEDER ASSY LEFT.
11. Disconnect P/J81 connector on the upper PWBA OPTFDR 2T, and remove the
harness that is connected to the connector from the clamp.
12. Disconnect P/J822 connector of the SENSOR NO PAPER on the PICK UP ASSY
3RD. CLAMP P/J824
13. Disconnect P/J825 connector on the harness connected to the CLUTCH ASSY on
the PICK UP ASSY 3RD, and remove the harness from the clamp. Ida_2T_03_313C
14. Disconnect P/J824 connector on the harness connected to the SOLENOID FEED Figure 4-155. Removing the PICK UP ASSY 3RD (1)
on the PICK UP ASSY 3RD, and remove the harness from the clamp.

15. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secure the GUIDE PAPER to
the PICK UP ASSY 3RD, and remove the GUIDE PAPER.
16)-1
C A U T IO N When removing the PICK UP ASSY 3RD in the following
procedure, extra caution is required not to damage the ROLL
ASSY TURN and the ROLL ASSY FEED by hitting the frame.
16. Remove the three screws (silver, 6 mm) that secure the PICK UP ASSY 3RD to PICK UP ASSY
the frame, and draw out the PICK UP ASSY 3RD to the right. 3RD
15)-1 16)-2
15)-1 16)-1
16)-1
Ida_2T_03_314C
Figure 4-157. Removing the PICK UP ASSY 3RD (3)
15)-2 GUIDE PAPER
Ida_2T_03_332B
Figure 4-156. Removing the PICK UP ASSY 3RD (2)

REINSTALLATION 13. Attach the COVER ASSY LEFT.

C A U T IO N When inserting the PICK UP ASSY 3RD in the following 15. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT.
procedure, extra caution is required not to damage the ROLL
16. Attach the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.393)
ASSY TURN and the ROLL ASSY FEED by hitting the frame.
1. Insert the PICK UP ASSY 3RD from the right side of the frame, match the two
projections with the hole of the frame, and secure them with three screws (silver, 6
mm).
2. Support the GUIDE PAPER with your hands matching its boss to the hole of the
PICK UP ASSY 3RD, and secure them with two screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm).
3. Connect P/J824 connector on the harness that is connected to the SOLENOID
FEED, and route the harness through the clamp.
4. Connect P/J825 connector on the harness that is connected to the CLUTCH ASSY,
and route the harness through the clamp.
C A U T IO N Following step 6 is only required when the optional SENSOR OHP

is installed.
6. Connect P/J81 connector on the harness that is connected from the SENSOR LOW
PAPER to the upper PWBA OPTFDR 2T, and route the harness through the
clamp.
7. Install the upper FEEDER ASSY LEFT.
8. Install the upper FEEDER ASSY RIGHT.
10. Attach the upper CHUTE UPPER. (p.414)
11. Install the upper CHUTE ASSY FEEDER.
12. Attach the upper COVER CST.

4.12.14 ROLL ASSY TURN 7. Install the upper FEEDER ASSY RIGHT.
REMOVAL 9. Attach the upper CHUTE UPPER. (p.414)
5. Remove the upper COVER CST.
6. Remove the upper CHUTE ASSY FEEDER.
7. Remove the upper CHUTE UPPER.
9. Remove the upper FEEDER ASSY RIGHT. ROLL ASSY TURN
11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY 3RD.
12. Remove the CLUTCH ASSY.
13. Remove the E-ring that secures the BEARING EARTH to the ROLL ASSY 15)
14)-2
TURN, and remove the BEARING EARTH.
14. Remove the E-ring that secures the BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC to the ROLL 14)-1
ASSY TURN, and remove the BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC. BEARING EARTH
15. Slide the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right, and remove it upward. BEARING SLEEVE,
PLASTIC
13)-1
REINSTALLATION 13)-2
PICK UP ASSY 3RD
1. Insert the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right-and-left holes of the FRAME ASSY
PICKUP 3RD. Ida_2T_03_315A
2. Insert the BEARING SLLEVE, PLASTIC to the left side of the ROLL ASSY Figure 4-158. Removing the ROLL ASSY TURN
TURN, and attach the E-ring.
3. Insert the BEARING EARTH into the right side of the ROLL ASSY TURN, and
attach the E-ring.
4. Attach the CLUTCH ASSY.
5. Install the PICK UP ASSY 3RD.

4.12.15 CLUTCH ASSY 7. Attach the upper CHUTE UPPER. (p.414)

Numbers in the square bracket [ ] in the figure indicate the steps of 9. Attach the upper COVER CST.
C A U T IO N
reinstallation procedure. 10. Attach the COVER ASSY LEFT.
REMOVAL

3. Remove the COVER ASSY RIGHT. FRAME ASSY PICK UP 3RD
7. Remove the upper CHUTE UPPER. CLUTCH ASSY
9. Remove the upper FEEDER ASSY RIGHT. 13)
ROLL ASSY
12. Release the tab of the STOPPER CLUTCH, and remove the STOPPER CLUTCH. [2)]
TURN
13. Pull out the CLUTCH ASSY from the ROLL ASSY TURN.
SHAFT 12)
REINSTALLATION
STOPPER CLUTCH
1. Insert the CLUTCH ASSY to the ROLL ASSY TURN.
Ida_2T_03_316A
2. Insert the STOPPER CLUTCH to the shaft of the FRAME ASSY PICK UP 3RD,
and install the STOPPER CLUTCH by matching its boss with the groove of the Figure 4-159. Removing the CLUTCH ASSY
CLUTCH ASSY.


REMOVAL SENSOR NO PAPER
J822
1. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. 3)
ACTUATOR NO PAPER
2. Remove COVER ASSY RIGHT.
4)-2
REINSTALLATION
1. Put up the ACTUATOR NO PAPER and install the SENSOR NO PAPER. 4)-1
Ida_2T_03_317A

4.12.17 SENSOR LOW PAPER 11. Attach the COVER ASSY RIGHT.
REMOVAL 13. Install the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. (p.393)

5. Remove the upper COVER CST. 12)
FRAME ASSY PICK UP 3RD
12. Release the three tabs on the SENSOR LOW PAPER, and remove the SENSOR
LOW PAPER.
13. Disconnect P/J823 connector from the SENSOR LOW PAPER.
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect P/J823 connector of the HARNESS ASSY LOWP2 to the SENSOR

LOW PAPER. HARNESS ASSY LOWP2
2. Attach the SENSOR LOW PAPER to the FRAME ASSY PICK UP 3RD. 13)
J823
4. Install the upper FEEDER ASSY LEFT. SENSOR LOW PAPER
5. Install the upper FEEDER ASSY RIGHT. Ida_2T_03_318A

Figure 4-161. Removing the SENSOR LOW PAPER


REMOVAL

3. Disconnect P/J824 connector on the harness that is connected to the SOLENOID
FEED, and release the harness from the clamp.
4. Remove the screw (silver, 6mm) that secures the SOLENOID FEED to the
3)-1
FRAME ASSY PICK UP 3RD, and remove the SOLENOID FEED.
3)-2
J824
REINSTALLATION
1. Secure the SOLENOID FEED to the FRAME ASSY PICK UP 3RD with the 4)
screw (silver, 6mm).
FRAME ASSY
2. Route the harness that is connected from the SOLENOID FEED through the
PICK UP 3RD
clamp, and connect P/J824 connector.
SOLENOID FEED
Ida_2T_03_319A


REMOVAL

3)-1
ACTUATOR LOW PAPER.
REINSTALLATION
PAPER.
2. Attach the CHUTE UPPER.
CHUTE UPPER
3)-2
ACTUATOR LOW PAPER
Ida_2T_03_027A


CAUTION
REMOVAL
C A U T IO N Looking from the rear with the COVER CST removed, the two
HOOKs
hooks of the CHUTE UPPER should be located on upper surface of FRAME ASSY PICK UP 3RD
the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. The FRAME ASSY TOP (TOP PANEL) HOOKs HOOKs
is removed in the illustration to make it easier to understand.
2. Release the two hooks that secure the CHUTE UPPER to the PICK UP ASSY PICK UP ASSY 3RD
3RD, temporarily slide the CHUTE UPPER rearward to remove the four hooks, HOOKs
and remove the CHUTE UPPER downward.
CHUTE UPPER
REINSTALLATION

HOOKs
P O IN T CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. (Refer to p401)
1. Hitch the four hooks on the CHUTE UPPER to the holes of the PICK UP ASSY
3RD, and install the CHUTE UPPER by locking the two hooks.
CHUTE UPPER
Ida_2T_03_320B


REMOVAL
DITCH PIN
2. Release the tab that secure the ROLL ASSY FEED to the SHAFT ASSY FEED,
3. Release the tab that secure the ROLL ASSY FEED to the SHAFT ASSY
NUDGER, and pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED to remove it. ROLL ASSY FEED
2)
REINSTALLATION
1. With the cross-shaped notch of the ROLL ASSY FEED matched with the pin of ROLL ASSY 3)
the SHAFT ASSY NUDGER, insert the ROLL ASSY FEED into the SHAFT FEED
FEED, and secure them with tab.
SHAFT ASSY NUDGER SHAFT ASSY

FEED
Ida_2T_03_321A


REMOVAL 12) 13)
6. Remove the upper CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. ACTUATOR NO PAPER ACTUATOR NO PAPER
12. Release the tab that secures the ACTUATOR NO PAPER to the PICK UP ASSY
3RD.
shaft from the attaching hole to the oblong square hole. PICK UP ASSY
3RD
14. As moving the tab side of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER in the direction of the
PICK UP ASSY 3RD. 14)-2
ACTUATOR NO PAPER
14)-1
Ida_2T_03_322A

REINSTALLATION
ASSY 3RD.
of the PICK UP ASSY 3RD to the attaching hole of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER
in order to set up the ACTUATOR NO PAPER.
ASSY 3RD, and secure them with the tab.

4.12.23 PICK UP ASSY 4TH

13)
REMOVAL 13)
1. Remove the 2 TRAY OPTION FEEDER ASSY. 13)
2. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. 13)

13)
3. Remove the COVER ASSY RIGHT. 13)
13) 13) 13)
FRAME ASSY
5. Remove the COVER CST. TOP
7. Remove the CHUTE UPPER. (p414, p427)
HARNESS ASSY
10. Remove the FEEDER ASSY LEFT. OPFREC2
J83
12. Disconnect P/J83 connector from the upper PWBA OPTFDR 2T, and release the
harness of the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 from the clamp.
12)-2
13. Remove the nine screws (silver, 8 mm) that secure the FRAME ASSY TOP, and FRAME
remove the FRAME ASSY TOP together with the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2.
14)-1
14)-1 P83
14. Remove the two screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secure the GUIDE PAPER to 12)-1
the PICK UP ASSY 4TH, and remove the GUIDE PAPER.
GUIDE PAPER
14)-2
Ida_2T_03_333C
Figure 4-167. Removing the PICK UP ASSY 4TH (1)

Following step 15 is only required when the optional SENSOR SENSOR NO PAPER
C A U T IO N
OHP is installed. P/J822
16) CLAMP
CLUTCH ELECTRO
MAGNETIC P/J81
15. Disconnect P/J81 connector on the lower PWBA OPTFDR 2T, and release the 15)
harness that is connected to the connector from the clamp.
CLAMP
16. Disconnect P/J822 connector of the SENSOR NO PAPER on the PICK UP ASSY 17) 18)
4TH. PWBA
P/J825 OPTFDR 2T
17. Disconnect P/J825 connector on the harness connected to the ELECTRO
SOLENOID FEED
MAGNETIC on the PICK UP ASSY 4TH, and release the harness connected to
the connector from the clamp.
CLAMP P/J824
18. Disconnect P/J824 connector on the harness connected to the SOLENOID FEED
on the PICK UP ASSY 4TH, and release the harness connected to the connector
from the clamp.
Ida_2T_03_323B
19. Remove the three screws (silver, 6mm) that secure the PICK UP ASSY 4TH to the
frame, and draw out the PICK UP ASSY 4TH to the right.
FRAME
19)-1
PICK UP ASSY
4TH
19)-2
19)-1
19)-1
Ida_2T_03_324B
Figure 4-168. Removing the PICK UP ASSY 4TH (2)

REINSTALLATION 11. Install the FEEDER ASSY LEFT.

1. Insert the PICK UP ASSY 4TH from the right side of the frame, match the two
projections with the holes of the frame, and secure them with three screws (silver, 13. Attach the CHUTE UPPER. (p414, p427)
6 mm). 14. Install the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. (p.401)
2. Connect P/J824 connector on the harness that is connected to the SOLENOID 15. Attach the COVER CST.
FEED, and route the harness through the clamp.
3. Connect P/J825 connector on the harness that is connected to the CLUTCH
ELECTRO MAGNETIC, and route the harness through the clamp.
C A U T IO N Following step 5 is only required when the optional SENSOR OHP

is installed.
5. Connect P/J81 connector on the harness that is connected from the SENSOR LOW
PAPER to the lower PWBA OPRFDR 2T, and route the harness through the
clamp.
6. Install the GUIDE PAPER matching its boss to the hole of the PICK UP ASSY
4TH, and secure them with two screws (silver, tapping, 8 mm).
C A U T IO N When installing the FRAME ASSY TOP (TOP PANEL), make

sure not to pinch the harness of the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2.
7. Let the harness of the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 into the hole of the frame,
install the FRAME ASSY TOP with its hole matching with the boss of the frame,
and secure them with nine screws (silver, 8 mm).
8. Connect P/J83 connector on the upper PWBA OPTFDR 2T, and route the harness
of the HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 through the clamp.

4.12.24 ROLL ASSY TURN 6. Install the PICK UP ASSY 3RD.

7. Install the FEEDER ASSY LEFT.
REMOVAL 8. Install the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT.
10. Attach the CHUTE UPPER. (p414, p427)
10. Remove the FEEDER ASSY LEFT.
11. Remove the PICK UP ASSY 3RD. ROLL ASSY TURN
12. Remove the PICK UP ASSY 4TH.
13. Remove the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC. (p.422)
14. Remove the E-ring that secures the BEARING EARTH to the ROLL ASSY
TURN, and remove the BEARING EARTH. 15)-2 16)
15. Remove the E-ring that secures the BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC to the ROLL
15)-1
ASSY TURN, and remove the BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC.
16. Slide the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right, and remove it upward.
BEARING SLEEVE,
PLASTIC BEARING EARTH
14)-1
REINSTALLATION
PICK UP ASSY 4TH 14)-2
1. Insert the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right-and-left holes of the PICK UP ASSY
4TH.
2. Insert the BEARING SLEEVE, PLASTIC to the left side of the ROLL ASSY Ida_2T_03_335A
TURN, and attach the E-ring.
3. Insert the BEARING EARTH into the right side of the ROLL ASSY TURN, and Figure 4-169. Removing the ROLL ASSY TURN
attach the E-ring.
4. Attach the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC. (p.422)
5. Install the PICK UP ASSY 4TH.

4.12.25 CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC
C H E C K Numbers in the square bracket [ ] in the figure indicate the steps of SHAFT
ROLL ASSY TURN
REMOVAL
1. Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. CLUTCH ELECTRO

5)
MAGNETIC
2. Remove the COVER ASSY RIGHT. [2)]
3. Disconnect P/J825 connector on the harness that is connected to the CLUTCH
ELECTRO MAGNETIC, and release the harness connected to the connector from 4)
the clamp. 3)-2
4. Release the tab of the STOPPER CLUTCH, and remove the STOPPER CLUTCH.
5. Pull out the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC from the ROLL ASSY TURN.
J825
STOPPER
3)-1 CLUTCH
REINSTALLATION
1. Insert the CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC to the ROLL ASSY TURN.

2. Insert the STOPPER CLUTCH to the shaft of the FRAME ASSY 4TH, and install
the STOPPER CLUTCH matching the groove of the CLUTCH ELECTRO Ida_2T_03_325B
MAGNETIC with the projection on the CLUTCH STOPPER.
Figure 4-170. Removing the CHUTE ELECTRO NAGNETIC
3. Connect P/J825 connector on the harness that is connected to the CLUTCH
ELECTRO MAGNETIC, and route the harness through the clamp.


REMOVAL ACTUATOR NO PAPER

4)-1 4)-2
REINSTALLATION
1. Put up the ACTUATOR NO PAPER and install the SENSOR NO PAPER.

3)
SENSOR NO PAPER J822
Ida_2T_03_326A

4.12.27 SENSOR LOW PAPER 11. Attach the COVER ASSY LEFT.
REMOVAL 13. Attach the COVER ASSY FRONT.
5. Remove the COVER CST. 13)
FRAME ASSY 4TH
13. Release the three tabs on the SENSOR LOW PAPER, and remove the SENSOR
LOW PAPER.
14. Disconnect P/J823 connector from the SENSOR LOW PAPER.
REINSTALLATION
1. Connect P/J823 connector to the SENSOR LOW PAPER. HARNESS ASSY LOWP2
2. Attach the SENSOR LOW PAPER to the FRAME ASSY 4TH. J823 14)
3. Install the PICK UP ASSY 4TH. SENSOR LOW PAPER
6. Install the FEEDER ASSY RIGHT. Ida_2T_03_336A
7. Install the DRIVE ASSY 2ND. Figure 4-172. Removing the SENSOR LOW PAPER


REMOVAL FRAME ASSY 4TH

3. Disconnect P/J824 connector of the harness that is connected to the SOLENOID
FEED, and release the harness from the clamp.
4. Remove the screw (silver, 6mm) that secures the SOLENOID FEED to the
FRAME ASSY 4TH, and remove the SOLENOID FEED.
REINSTALLATION 3)-2
1. Secure the SOLENOID FEED to the FRAME ASSY 4TH with the screw (silver,
6mm).
2. Route the harness that is connected from the SOLENOID FEED through the 4) 3)-1
clamp, and connect P/J824 connector.
SOLENOID FEED
J824
Ida_2T_03_327B


REMOVAL
1. Remove the lower CHUTE UPPER. (p.427)

3)-1
ACTUATOR LOW PAPER.
REINSTALLATION
PAPER.
CHUTE UPPER
3)-2
ACTUATOR LOW PAPER
Ida_2T_03_337A


REMOVAL [CAUTION]
C A U T IO N Looking from the rear with the COVER CST removed, the two
hooks of the CHUTE UPPER should be located on upper surface of FRAME ASSY 4TH
HOOKs
the PICK UP ASSY 4TH. The intermediate plate of the frame is HOOKs HOOKs
2)-1
removed in the illustration to make it easier to understand. PICK UP ASSY 4TH
HOOKs
2. Release the two hooks that secure the CHUTE UPPER to the PICK UP ASSY 2)-1
4TH, temporarily slide the CHUTE UPPER rearward to remove the four hooks,
and remove the CHUTE UPPER downward.
CHUTE UPPER
REINSTALLATION
HOOKs

P O IN T CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. (Refer to p401)
1. Hitch the four hooks on the CHUTE UPPER to the holes of the PICK UP ASSY 2)-2
4TH, and install the CHUTE UPPER by locking the two hooks.
CHUTE UPPER
Ida_2T_03_328B


REMOVAL
DITCH PIN
2. Release the tab that secure the ROLL ASSY FEED to the SHAFT ASSY FEED,
3. Release the tab that secure the ROLL ASSY FEED to the SHAFT ASSY
ROLL ASSY FEED
NUDGER, and pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED to remove it.
2)
REINSTALLATION
3)
1. With the cross-shaped notch of the ROLL ASSY FEED matched with the pin of ROLL ASSY
the SHAFT ASSY NUDGER, insert the ROLL ASSY FEED into the SHAFT FEED
FEED, and secure them with the tab.
SHAFT ASSY SHAFT ASSY

NUDGER FEED
Ida_2T_03_329B


REMOVAL 13) 14)
6. Remove the CHUTE ASSY FEEDER. ACTUATOR ACTUATOR
NO PAPER NO PAPER
13. Release the tab that secures the ACTUATOR NO PAPER to the PICK UP ASSY
4TH.
PICK UP ASSY
4TH
15. As moving the tab side of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER toward you, remove the 15)-2
ACTUATOR NO PAPER from the oblong square hole of the PICK UP ASSY
4TH. ACTUATOR NO PAPER
15)-1
Ida_2T_03_338A

REINSTALLATION
ASSY 4TH.
of the PICK UP ASSY 4TH to the attaching hole of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER
in order to set up the ACTUATOR NO PAPER.
ASSY 4TH, and secure them with locks.
4. Install the PICK UP ASSY 4TH.


REMOVAL 4)
1. Draw out the CASSETTE. CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION
2. Remove the HOLDER ASSY RETARD.
3. Release the tab that secures the SHAFT ASSY RETARD to the HOLDER
ASSY RETARD and the CLUTCH ASSY FRICTION. SHAFT ASSY RETARD
ROLL ASSY RETARD

REINSTALLATION
C A U T IO N When installing the SHAFT ASSY RETARD, pay attention to its

orientation.
3)-2 3)-1
secure it with the tab.
4. Attach the HOLDER ASSY RETARD.
5. Install the CASSETTE. HOLDER RETARD Ida_2T_03_339A


3)-3
HOLDER ASSY RETARD

3)-2
REMOVAL CHUTE TURN CST

2)-1 3)-1
2. Press the two (right and left) tabs of the CHUTE TURN CST inward to release
them, and open the CHUTE TURN CST.
3. Release the tab that secures the HOLDER ASSY RETARD to the CASSETTE, 2)-2
rotate the HOLDER ASSY RETARD upward, and remove the HOLDER ASSY
RETARD toward left.
2)-1
REINSTALLATION
CASSETTE, attach HOLDER ASSY RETARD, and secure it with the tab.
2. Close the CHUTE TURN CST.
CASSETTE
Ida_2T_03_015B
Figure 4-179. Removing the HOLDER ASSY RETARD


REMOVAL PLATE ASSY BTM
1. Draw out the CASSETTE. 4) 5)

2
2. Hold down the PLATE ASSY BTM, release the hooks on both the STOPPER
1
LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R located on right-and-left bottom of the
3. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the STOPPER BLOCK to HOOK
the HOUSING CST. PLATE ASSY BTM
CST.
STOPPER BLOCK
3)
1
2
PLATE ASSY BTM
Ida_2T_03_340B

6. Release the hook of the GEAR MANUAL to remove the GEAR MANUAL.
7. Slide the KIT GUIDE SIDE L inward as far as it will go to remove upward. KIT GUIDE SIDE R
8. Slide the KIT GUIDE SIDE R inward as far as it will go to remove upward. KIT GUIDE SIDE R
C A U T IO N When removing the KIT GUIDE SIDE R, be careful not to lose the GEAR MANUAL
GUIDE STOPPER and the SPRING STOPPER GUIDE SIDE as 6)
they may come off. KIT GUIDE SIDE L
8) HOOK
7)
HOOK
REINSTALLATION
as it will go. [2)]
2. Attach the KIT GUIDE SIDE L to the HOUSING CST, tune the scale of the LEVER GUIDE KIT GUIDE
SIDE SIDE L
LEVER GUIDE SIDE to "8.5", and slide it outward as far as it will go.


4. Match the SPRING N/Fs with the hooks on the backside of the PLATE ASSY
BTM, and install them by securing with the hooks on the right side of the PLATE HOOKs
ASSY BTM.
Ida_2T_03_341A
hooks on both the STOPPER LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R. Figure 4-181. Removing the KIT GUIDE SIDE L and KIT GUIDE SIDE R (2)

4.12.36 KIT GUIDE END

PLATE ASSY BTM
REMOVAL
4) 5)
2
2. Hold down the PLATE ASSY BTM, release the hooks on both the STOPPER 1
LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R located on right-and-left bottom of the
HOOK
PLATE ASSY BTM
the HOUSING CST.
CST.
STOPPER BLOCK
3)
1
2
PLATE ASSY BTM
Ida_2T_03_340B

6. Release the notch of the ACTUATOR GUIDE END from the HOUSING CST,
3
KIT GUIDE END, and remove the ACTUATOR GUIDE END toward you.
7. Slide the KIT GUIDE END forward, release its hook from the HOUSING CST, KIT GUIDE END 6)
and remove the KIT GUIDE END upward. 2 HOOK

ACTUATOR GUIDE END
1
they may come off from the rear side.
REINSTALLATION
overleaping the hook.
Ida_2T_03_342B
slide it forward with its notch set in the HOUSIGN CST.
KIT GUIDE END
3. Match the SPRING N/Fs with the tabs on the backside of the PLATE ASSY BTM,
and install them by securing with the hooks on the right side of the PLATE ASSY
BTM.
4. Attach the STOPPER BLOCK with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm). 7)
2
hooks on both the STOPPER LINK PB L and the STOPPER LINK PB R. 1
HOOK
Ida_2T_03_343B

4.12.37 FOOT ASSY A, FOOT ASSY B

REMOVAL
C A U T IO N As the removal procedure described below is common to both the

right and left side, the procedure for the left side is omitted here.

3. Remove the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm) that secures the FOOT ASSY A/B to
the frame. 3)
4. Draw out the FOOT ASSY A/B from the frame to remove it.
REINSTALLATION
4)
1. Attach the FOOT ASSY A/B to the frame by inserting the projection on the FOOT
ASSY A/B to the concave portion on the bottom of the frame.
2. Secure the FOOT ASSY A/B to the frame with the screw (silver, tapping, 8 mm). 3)
FOOT ASSY B
Ida_2T_03_331C
Figure 4-184. Removing the FOOT ASSY A and the FOOT ASSY B

CHAPTER
5
ADJUSTMENT
EPSON Aculaser C4200 Revision A
5.1 Overview
This chapter describes the adjustment/action procedures required after repairing or
replacing certain parts in AcuLaser C4200.
5.1.1 Precautions
Be sure to observe the following precautions before starting adjustments/actions.
C A U T IO N Refer to “5.1.2 Adjustment Execution Timing (p.440)”, always

confirm the adjustment/action items and the orders for the
replaced/removed parts and units in advance.
Start adjustment after fully checking the Caution given in the
explanation area of each adjustment item. Incorrect work
may interfere with the product operations and/or functions.
Refer to Chapter 4 “ DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
(p.235)” for the disassembly/assembly procedures required to
perform the adjustment.
ADJUSTMENT Overview 439

5.1.2 Adjustment Execution Timing

The following table shows when the adjustment or resetting the counter is required.
Table 5-1. Adjustment Item List

Repaired Part or Situation Adjustment/Action Item Adjustment Method and Tool Remarks Reference
After placing the printer after purchase Adjust color registration adjustment Execute from the control panel Users can perform
See Page 441
this adjustment
After placing the printer again after transportation Adjust color registration adjustment Execute from the control panel Users can perform
See Page 441
this adjustment
When misaligned color registration in the main scanning Adjust color registration adjustment Execute from the control panel Users can perform
See Page 441
direction occurs this adjustment
After replacing the controller main board Write USB ID PPInitSetting --- See Page 442
After renewing the controller firmware Update the controller firmware Firmware Update Tool --- See Page 445
After renewing the engine controller firmware Update the engine controller firmware (+ Firmware Update Tool See Page 447 and
---
updating NVM) p450
ADJUSTMENT Overview 440

5.2 Adjustment/Action
5.2.1 Adjusting Color Registration Alignment
After placing/resetting the printer after purchase or after long-distance transport,
make sure to print out a color registration sheet to see whether the color registration is
properly aligned. If color registration misalignment occurs, perform the adjustment
described below.
Procedure
1. Turn the printer on.
2. Load a paper on the MP tray.
3. Make sure that the LCD panel displays Ready or Sleep, then press the [Enter] button
twice on the control panel.
4. Select Color Regist Sheet in the Information Menu and press the [Enter] button.
The printer starts to print a color registration sheet.
5. Check the alignment of the lines at the zero position for each color. If the color
segment of the line is in alignment with the black segments on either side to make
one straight line, no adjustment is required for that color. If the line segment are not
aligned, adjust the registration as explained below.
Adjustment
1. Enter Color Regist Menu.
2. Select XXXX Regist item for the color (Cyan, Magenta, or Yellow) that needs
adjustment, then press the [Enter] button.
3. On the color registration sheet, find the line segments that are most closely aligned,
then use the [Up] or [Down] button to display the number that corresponds to that
pattern. Press the [Enter] button to complete the adjustment.
4. If necessary, print another color registration sheet for confirmation.
Figure 5-1. Color Registration Sheet
ADJUSTMENT Adjustment/Action 441

5.2.2 Writing USB ID 5.2.2.1 Installing the Program and the Basic Operation
Aculaser C4200 comes with the USB interface as a standard, and the computer 1. Copy a set of files related to “PPInitSetting” program into a folder.
connected to the Aculaser C4200 via the USB interface identifies the printer by
referring to the USB ID information unique to each printer. C A U T IO N Be sure to store the setting information file (Setting.ini) in the same
Since this USB ID information is stored on EEPROM on the MAIN Board of the drive holder where the main program file is stored.
printer, you have to re-define the ID information by the procedure described below
when you have replaced the MAIN Board for repair.
When you repair the printer and re-define the USB ID information, 2. Double-click the program icon [ ] to start the program.
C A U T IO N
you have to tell the user to uninstall the previously installed printer 3. Select “AL- C4200” at the [Model Selection].
driver as it refers to an old USB ID information.
4. Select the port used to connect the printer at the [Port Selection].
C H E C K If you select “Auto”, connected printers are detected and

The program for USB ID input and a supported operating environment is as follows; P O IN T communication with the first detected one start automatically.
When connecting with 2 or more printers, specify the target port to
Program
avoid unexpected connection since the auto detection varies
PPInitSetting_Ver1x E.exe depending on the connection state.
Operating environment
Supported OS: Windows 95/98/ME/2000/XP
Port used: LPT, USB
Figure 5-2. Basic Operation

5.2.2.2 Writing Method

The method of writing USB ID differs according to the condition of the main board. Referring to the following table, figure out what to do depending on the conditions.
Follow the instructions shown in the program to do the writings.
Table 5-2. Writing Method

Writing Method
Condition of Main Board Check of the previous ID Descriptions
(Button Name)
Communication is impossible between The previous ID can be confirmed by a status sheet or Enter the previous ID to write it into the new Main Board.
Store optional ID
PC and the Main Board something else that has been already printed out.
There is no way to confirm the previous ID. Store auto-generated The program automatically creates the new ID from the serial
NEW ID number of the printer and write it into the new Main Board.
Communication is possible between PC (Can retrieve the previous ID from the previous Main Board) OLD ID Retrieval/ Retrieve the ID from the old board, and then enter the retrieved
and the Main Board Restore ID value into the new board.
Store optional ID OLD ID Retrieval/Restore
Store auto-generated NEW ID 5.2.2.3 Confirming the Writing

When completed to write USB-ID, print a status sheet to confirm that the serial number
printed on the sheet is identical to that on the label attached to the printer.
(Refer to “ 1.20 Status Sheet” (p.72))

5.2.3 Firmware Update

This section explains how to update the firmwares.
Main Controller Firmware
Engine Controller Firmware (+NVM)
OUTLINE
Operation
Unit Data Format
Panel Operation Tool
Main Controller RCC Not required Required
CRB Required Required
Engine Controller MOT Required Required
NVM DCC Not required Required
Tool
Firmware update is executed by transmitting data for updating the program from the
computer via USB or LPT using the exclusive software tool. Make sure to use the
software tool described below.
Tool Name: Firmware Update Tool

5.2.3.1 Main Controller Firmware Update
Method 1 Method 2
Procedure
(RCC) (CRB) LCD Panel
Check the current version. Print a status sheet, and check the current firmware Print a status sheet, and check the current firmware
1 ---
version. version.
Connect the printer with Connect the printer to the computer with a USB cable. After turning the power off for both the printer and
the computer. Confirm that the “Ready” is displayed on the LCD. computer, connect them with a USB cable.
2 C A U T IO N Before connecting the USB cable, make sure to ---
disconnect other interface cables from the
product.e.
Prepare the update data. Turn the computer on and copy the program update file Turn the computer on and copy the program update file
3 ---
(the extension is RCC) onto the computer. (the extension is CRB) onto the computer.
Start up the Printer. Turn the product ON while holding down the [Color
Start], [Reset], and [Down] buttons.The product will start Program Device
up in “Program ROM update” mode. Version XX.XX
Please Send Data
4 ---
Prepare to send the data. Start up the Firmware Update Tool. Specify the port and Start up the Firmware Update Tool.Specify the port and
5 the program update file on the selection window of the the program update file on the selection window of the ---
tool. tool.
Transmit the data. Click [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen. Click [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen.
Program Device
Version XX.XX
OLD: XXXX NEW: XXXX
6

Method 1 Method 2
Procedure
(RCC) (CRB) LCD Panel
Execute the update. Once file-receiving or rewriting operation is started on Confirm that both the old and new firmware versions are
the printer side, the data LED flashes and the message displayed on the LCD, and press the [Right] button on the Program Device
“ROM P Writing” is displayed on the LCD panel. control panel. Version XX.XX
Erasing Device
When the transfer is complete, “completed” window pops “Completion” pop-up window will be displayed when the
up. Click [OK]. data transfer is finished. Click on the [OK].
Program Device
Version XX.XX
PRG XXXXXXXX
Confirm the checksum. When the program update is finished, the checksum will
be indicated on the LCD panel. Program Device
Version XX.XX
Confirm the checksum.
Code=
8 --- XXXX, XXXX, XXXX, XXXX
Total=
XXXX, XXXX, XXXX, XXXX
Reboot the Printer. After confirming that the data LED of the printer is turned Pressing the [Right] button on the control panel reboots
9 off and the LCD panel displays “Ready”, turn the printer the product. ---
power off and turn back on again.
10 Print the status sheet. Prints the status sheet. Prints the status sheet. ---
Check the version on the Confirm that the program firmware version has been Confirm that the program firmware version has been
11 status sheet. updated correctly by comparing the status sheet with that updated correctly by comparing the status sheet with that ---
printed in step 1. Refer to “ 1.20 Status Sheet” (p.72) printed in step 1. Refer to “ 1.20 Status Sheet” (p.72)

5.2.3.2 Engine Controller Firmware Update

This printer requires the NVM version to be matched with the engine controller firmware version. Therefore, when updating the engine controller firmware, also update the NVM
values (parameters) on the engine controller. After updating the engine controller firmware, also update the NVM.
Procedure Method LCD Panel

1 Check the current version. Print a status sheet or engine status sheet, and check the current firmware version. ---
Connect the printer with the computer. After turning the power off for both the printer and computer, connect them with a parallel or USB
cable.
2 C A U T IO N Make sure to disconnect other unnecessary interface cables from the printer in advance. ---
Prepare the update data. After turning the computer back on, copy the program data for the update (file name.MOT) to any route
3 ---
directory of the computer.
Start up the Printer. Turn the printer on while pressing the [Up], [Down], [Job Cancel] and [Start/Stop] buttons.
Engine Firmware Update
EFU Ver. XXX
Please send EFU data


Prepare to send the data. Run the Firmware Update Tool.
Select the port and FW data file on the Firmware Update
Tool screen.
5 ---
Transmit the data. Click [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen.
send size=XXX
SENT SIZE=XXX
Type: XXX sum=XXX


Execute the update. Press the [Enter] button on the control panel of the printer.
A “Complete” pop-up window will appear when the transmission Writing: Erasing
is finished. Click the [OK].
Writing: Size=XXX
Confirm the checksum. When updating the program data is finished, the checksum will be indicated on the LCD panel.
TYPE: XXX SUM: XXX
Confirm the checksum.
9 Reboot the Printer. Turn the printer off and back on. ---
10 Print the status sheet. Prints the status sheet. ---
Check the version on the status sheet. Check the firmware version printed on the status sheet or engine status sheet and confirm that the
11 ---
firmware is updated.

5.2.3.3 NVM Version Update

1 Check the current version. Print a status sheet, and check the current NVM version. ---
Connect the printer with Connect the printer to the computer with a USB cable.
2 ---
the computer. Confirm that the “Ready” is displayed on the LCD.
3 Prepare the update data. Turn the computer on and copy the NVM update file (the extension is DCC) onto the computer. ---
Start up the Printer.
4 ---
5 Prepare to send the data. Start up the Firmware Update Tool. Specify the port and the program update file on the selection window of the tool. ---
Transmit the data. Click [Send] on the Firmware Update Tool screen.
Execute the update. Once file-receiving or rewriting operation is started on the printer side and the data
LED flashes.
When the transfer is complete, “completed” window pops up. Click [OK].
7
Reboot the Printer. After confirming that the data LED of the printer is turned off, turn the printer power off and turn back on again.
8 C A U T IO N Make sure to turn off the printer 10 seconds after the LED is turned off. ---
9 Print the status sheet. Prints the status sheet. ---

Check the version on the Confirm that the NVM version has been updated correctly by comparing the status sheet with that printed in step 1.
10 ---
status sheet. Refer to “ 1.20 Status Sheet” (p.72)

CHAPTER
6
MAINTENANCE
6.1 Overview
W A R N IN G Take extra care not to let the laser beam get into your eye, or
This section gives information necessary for maintaining the printer in its it could cause loss of sight.
optimum condition. While servicing the laser printer, never open any cover on
While at maintenance work, be sure to observe the following precautions. which a Warning Label for Laser beam is attached.
Use extreme caution to avoid injury of yourself and anyone
around you with a clear understanding of hazardous nature
W A R N IN G To prevent an electric shock, burn, injury, etc., always turn of the laser beam.
the printer off and unplug the power cord before starting When you need to work on the hot part or unit (Fuser unit,
maintenance work. for example), make sure to unplug the printer from power
When the power supply cable must be connected to measure outlet in advance. Do not start the work until the part or unit
voltage or for any other task, use extreme caution in working cools down sufficiently to avoid burn injury.
on electronic components. This printer produces a laser beam when the following
While the printer is operating, never touch the driving parts conditions are all satisfied.
such as the motor, sprockets and gears. • The printer is turned on.
Weight: Since this printer is heavy (about 32kg, • The interlock switches are OFF.
consumables and options not included), transferring must be
Do not use a general vacuum cleaner to clean spilt toner. To
done by two or more personnel making sure to knees down so
do so may cause the sucked toner particles to catch fire by
as not to throw out your back.
sparks of the electric contacts. If the toner has spilt on the
Safety devices: Special care must be taken to maintain safety floor, etc., clean it with a broom or wipe it with a cloth
devices such as fuse, INTERLOCK S/W, which are provided moistened with neutral detergent. If it is necessary to clean a
to prevent the printer from malfunction and accidents, and lot of spilt toner with a cleaner, use a cleaner exclusively
also carefully check the parts such as panel, covers, which are designed for toner.
directly operated by the user.
Do not disassemble the components (Fuser unit, Laser
Immediately after the printer has stopped operating, do not scanning unit, etc.) which do not have disassembly
touch the Fuser unit as it is extremely hot. procedures described in this manual.
Pay attention to the following when turning the printer back
on after servicing.
• Be careful not to get your hands and clothes caught up in
the rotating parts (various rollers and cooling fans) of the
printer.
• Never touch the electrical terminals and high-voltage
components. (HVPS or LVPS unit, etc.)
To avoid dust explosion or ignition, never bring any
consumables close to flame or throw them into fire.
MAINTENANCE Overview 452

C A U T IO N Always wear gloves for disassembly and reassembly to avoid

injury from sharp metal edges.
Do not disassemble the consumables.
Do not expose the Photoconductor unit to direct sunlight.
Do not touch the onboard components with bare hands to
prevent the ICs and other electrical components from being
damaged by static electricity. (When necessary, wear a wrist
strap.)
To ensure safety and workability, use the specified tools.
Do not turn the printer off until all motors stop completely.
Should the printer be transported, use the special packing
material, pallet, etc.
Never use chemical solvents, such as thinner, benzine, or
alcohol to clean the exterior or case parts of the printer.
These chemicals may deform or deteriorate the components
of the printer.
MAINTENANCE Overview 453

6.2 Cleaning Cleaning the Density Sensor
While at maintenance work, perform the following cleaning according to Be careful not to touch the fuser, which is marked CAUTION
W A R N IN G
the printer status. HIGH TEMPERATURE, or the surrounding areas.
1 If the printer has been in use, the fuser and the surrounding areas
Table 6-1. Cleaning
may be extremely hot.
No. Cleaning Point Cleaning Requirements Reference
1 Outer case When the exterior is stained (dirty or dusty) See Page 454
Density sensor When Clean Sensor is displayed on the 1. Turn the printer off.
2 See Page 454
LCD panel
2. Press the latch on cover A and open the cover.
3 Photoconductor unit If printouts have dots at every 30 mm See Page 455
3. Grasp the two orange tabs and pull the transfer unit out of the printer.
Cleaning the Outer Case
Turn off the printer and wipe it with a soft, clean cloth moistened with a mild
detergent.
C A U T IO N Never use alcohol or paint thinner to clean the outer case, these
chemicals can damage the components and the case.
Be careful not to get water onto the printer mechanism or any
electrical components.
MAINTENANCE Cleaning 454

4. Gently wipe the transparent plastic window on the density sensor with a dry soft cloth Cleaning the Photoconductor Unit
or cotton swab.
W A R N IN G Be careful not to touch the fuser, which is marked CAUTION

HIGH TEMPERATURE, or the surrounding areas.
If the printer has been in use, the fuser and the surrounding areas
may be extremely hot.
C A U T IO N Do not take too much time to clean the photoconductor. Exposing

the photoconductor unit to too much light may damage the printer.
1. Turn the printer off.

2. Press the latch on cover A and open the cover.
5. Hold the transfer unit by the orange tabs and lower it into the printer, making sure that
it fits into the guides. Push the transfer unit in and up until it clicks into place. 3. Raise cover D and hold the photoconductor unit by the handle, and slowly lift it
straight out of the printer.
6. Pull the transfer unit toward you and the orange tabs into place.
7. Close cover A.

4. Place the printout that has dots on it and the photoconductor unit on a flat table as
C A U T IO N Be careful not to scratch the surface of the drum and rollers.
shown below.
Also, avoid touching the drum and rollers since oil from your
skin may permanently damage their surface and affect print
quality.
Do not expose the photoconductor unit and the developer
cartridge to light any longer than necessary.
Do not store the photoconductor unit in an area subject to
direct sunlight.
6. Turn the grey part of the black roller to find the spot, and wipe the spot with a dry soft
cloth or cotton swab.
NOTE 1: Make sure to align the center of the printout and the center of the photoconductor unit
when positioning them.
2: Place the printout faceup so the short edge that comes out of the printer first is against
the photoconductor unit as shown in the figure.
5. Look for the roller that is the same color as the dots on the printout. Then, look for the
place on the roller that is vertically in the same position as the dots on the printout.
a
b
c
d
a: Yellow
b: Magenta
c: Cyan
d: Black
NOTE: The illustration indicates that the dots on the printout are magenta as an example.

7. Holding the handle firmly, lower the photoconductor unit into the printer, making sure
the posts on the sides of the unit slide into the slots.
8. Close covers D and A.

6.3 Maintenance Menu Clear Error Log
[Enter ( )] SW [Enter ( )] SW
C A U T IO N This menu is provided only for a service personnel to perform Print execution
Maintenance Menu Engine Status Sheet
maintenance and must not be disclosed to users.
[Up ( )] SW [Down ( )] SW
Information Menu Print Log Report Print execution

[Enter ( )] SW
The Maintenance Menu allows service personnel to print various sheets to know the
printer's status, reset the life counter when replacing the component, and so on. The Ready Reset C Dev Counter Clear execution
printer requires a special operation at power-on in order to enter the maintenance mode
to display the menu as the menu should be disclosed to users.
Reset M Dev Counter Clear execution
6.3.1 Entry into Maintenance Mode
1. While holding down the [Back ( )], [Up ( )], [Down ( )] and [Enter ( )] Clear execution
Reset Y Dev Counter
buttons, turn the printer on.
When the printer is turned on, all LEDs and LCD light up and the following
message is displayed. Reset K Dev Counter Clear execution
(When “MAINTENANCE MODE” appears, release your hand from the buttons.)
Reset Transfer Counter Clear execution

ROM CHECK **MB
SELF TEST MAINTENANCE MODE Ready
RAM CHECK **MB
Clear Error Log Clear execution
2. Refer to the Maintenance Menu process flowchart in Figure 6-1, perform each
function of the Maintenance Menu by operating the panel buttons.
NOTE 1: Engine-related service call errors are ignored when the Maintenance Mode Engine Status Sheet
starts. Before starting the printer in the Maintenance Mode and executing
printing, make sure that no error has occurred in the normal operating mode. Figure 6-1. Maintenance Menu Process Flowchart
2: To exit from the Maintenance Menu, make sure that the engine is not
operating and then turn the printer off.
3: Regardless of the language setting of the printer, all the messages displayed
in the Maintenance Mode will be in English.
MAINTENANCE Maintenance Menu 458

6.3.2 Maintenance Menu Items

C A U T IO N This menu is provided only for a service personnel to perform
maintenance and must not be disclosed to users.
The printer goes into the maintenance mode to display the Maintenance Menu by being
turned on while specified buttons are pressed down. It returns to the normal operating
mode when the power is turned off and back on by normal operation.
Table 6-2. Maintenance Menu Items

Item Explanation
Engine Status Sheet Before entering the maintenance mode, make sure that there is no
(Refer to Figure 6-2) engine-related service call error in the normal operating mode (not
maintenance mode).
After the printer enters into the maintenance mode, press the Enter
[ ] button to print an engine status sheet. The sheet is printed
according to the default settings, except RIT, toner save, and
resolution settings (current settings are applied for those settings).
While the printing is in progress, the LCD keeps flashing. The user
default environment (settings) does not change after the printing.
The contents of the engine status sheet are the counted values of
each unit which makes up the printer engine.
Print Log Report Prints a log file of printing status.
(Refer to Figure 6-3)
Reset C/M/Y/K Dev Resets the development unit’s life counter of each color and adds
Counter one to the number of replacement. The counter must be reset by a
service personnel after the transfer unit is replaced with a new one
(maintenance).
Reset TransferCounter Resets the transfer unit’s life counter and adds one to the number of
replacement. This operation is not required when replacing the
transfer unit after “Worn Transfer Unit“ or “Replace Transfer Unit”
is occurred.
Clear Error Log Clear error log list stored for display on Engine Status Sheet.
MAINTENANCE Maintenance Menu 459

6.4 Sheet for Servicing Photoconductor: Total number of pages printed with the
photoconductor unit up to the present, round
time, and dispense time.
6.4.1 Engine Status Sheet Photoconductor Change: Increased every time new photoconductor unit is
The Engine Status Sheet is provided only for a service personnel to detected.
C A U T IO N
perform maintenance and must not be disclosed to users. Fuser: Total number of pages printed with the fuser unit
up to the present.
Fuser Change: Increased every time new fuser unit is detected.
Transfer Unit: Total number of pages printed with the transfer
Engine Status Sheet Items unit up to the present. The value is reset by
Total Counts installing new transfer unit when the waste toner
box is full or sends warning.
Total Pages: Total number of pages printed up to the present.
Independent of paper size. Transfer Unit Change: Increased every time new transfer unit is
detected.
Total Planes: Total number of images printed up to the present.
Development Unit: Round time of the development unit. Should be
Color Pages: Total number of color pages printed up to the reset from the control panel when replacing the
present. Independent of paper size. development unit.
Jam Counts: Number of jams. Development Unit Change: Increased every time the round time is reset.
ET Cartridge (Toner Cartridge) Power On: Number of times power is turned on
C/M/Y/K Toner: Consumption of toner, total dots. Incremented Sleep: Number of times printer returns from sleep mode
every time the printer prints 4,096 dots.
MCU 10-digit number that starts with “MC” indicates
C/M/Y/K Toner Change: Increased every time new toner cartridge is the engine controller firmware and NVM
detected. version.
C/M/Y/K Toner Used: Increased every time toner ID is changed.
C/M/Y/K Toner ID: Displays 12-digits number “YYMMDDLLSSSS”.
“---” is displayed if the number cannot be obtained. 3012030100
YY:Year
MM:Month Last five digits : NVM Version
DD:Day (Ver. 3.0.10.0)
LL:Line number First five digits : MCU Version
SS:Serial number (Ver. 3.0.12.0)
MAINTENANCE Sheet for Servicing 460

Error Log: Information that contains messages displayed on

the panel and EJL status code of the error; total of
printed copies, JAM code, and size and type of
paper at the time of error; and date and time the
error occurred.
Jam code: The JAM code in the Error Log indicates the
location of the jam using an hexadecimal character
string.
Table 6-3. Jam Code
Bit Location of Jam
4 Duplex Jam
3 Fuser Jam
2 Reg Jam
1 Feed Jam
Paper Size: Shows English strings that is displayed on the

control panel to indicate the size.
Paper Type: Indicates the media by decimal number that is
specified to the engine controller.
Time Occurred: Displays “yy/mm/dd hh:mm” (year/month/day
hour:minute) by converting into the current local
time. “--/--/-- --:--” is displayed if not
synchronized.
Figure 6-2. Engine Status Sheet

ENGINE STATUS SHEET CONTENTS SUMMARY
Count processing
Information name and storage Range Unit Count conditions Clear conditions
location
Total Pages Controller 0 to 99,999,999 Pages During printing (EEPROM initialization)
Total Planes Controller 0 to 99,999,999 Planes During transfering (EEPROM initialization)
Color Pages Controller 0 to 99,999,999 Pages During printing (EEPROM initialization)
Jam Counts Controller 0 to 100,000 Times When a jam occurs (EEPROM initialization)
C Toner When supplying toner to
Dispense time Engine 0 to 99,999 the developer ---
Total dots Controller 0 to 2,147,483,647*1 Dots with toner (EEPROM initialization)
Change Controller 0 to 255 Times New C toner detected (EEPROM initialization)
Used Controller 0 to 2,147,483,647 Times ID change (EEPROM initialization)
ID Engine 040101000000 to ---
991231999999
M Toner When supplying toner to
Change Controller 0 to 255 Times New M toner detected (EEPROM initialization)
ID Engine 040101000000 to ---
991231999999
Y Toner When supplying toner to
Change Controller 0 to 255 Times New Y toner detected (EEPROM initialization)
ID Engine 040101000000 to ---
991231999999
K Toner When supplying toner to
Change Controller 0 to 255 Times New Ktoner detected (EEPROM initialization)
ID Engine 040101000000 to ---
991231999999

Count processing
Information name and storage Range Unit Count conditions Clear conditions
location
Photoconductor
Sheet Engine 0 to 999,999 Pages During printing ---
Round time Engine 0 to 999,999 During printing ---
Dispense time Engine 0 to 999,999 During printing ---
Photoconductor Change Engine 0 to 255 Times New photoconductor detected ---
Fuser Engine 0 to 999,999 Pages During printing ---
Fuser Change Engine 0 to 255 New fuser detected ---
Transfer Unit Engine 0 to 999,999 Pages During printing New transfer unit detected
Transfer Unit Change Engine 0 to 255 New transfer unit detected ---
C Development
Round time Engine 0 to 16,777,215 msec Panel
Change Controller 0 to 255 Times ---
M Development
Y Development
K Development
Power On Controller 0 to 99,999,999 Times At power-on (EEPROM initialization)
Sleep Controller 0 to 99,999,999 Times When returning from sleep mode (EEPROM initialization)
MCU Engine --- --- --- ---
Error Code 1 Controller --- --- When an error occurs SelecType, (EEPROM
Error Page 1 Controller --- --- When an error occurs initialization)
Jam Code 1 Controller When an error occurs
Page Size 1 Controller --- --- When an error occurs
Paper Type 1 Controller --- --- When an error occurs
Values enclosed in parenthesis in clear conditions means they are cleared as a result.
If values that are controlled by the controller side exceed the coverage, they are not guaranteed.
If the number of replacement controlled by the engine side exceed the coverage, the value goes back to zero and continue the operation.
Note*1:If total dots exceed the coverage, the value goes back to zero and continue the operation

6.4.2 Print Log Report

Print Log Report Items
S/N: Main unit serial number.

Date: yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm: (year/month/day hour:minute)
displayed in local time.
Not displayed when out-of-synchronization.
Toner Remain
C Toner: Amount of remaining C Toner in %.
M Toner: Amount of remaining M Toner in %.
Y Toner: Amount of remaining Y Toner in %.
K Toner: Amount of remaining K Toner in %.
Print of papers: Number of pages printed per paper size.
Total: Number of pages printed.
Mono Simplex: Number of printed monochrome simplex pages.
Duplex: Number of printed monochrome duplex pages.
Color Simplex: Number of printed color simplex pages.
Duplex: Number of printed color duplex pages.
Dummy: Number of pages added artificially for duplex printing.
Paper sizes not supported for duplex printing are
displayed as “---”.
Print of mode: Number of pages printed per printing mode.
Coverage Duty[%]: Average print ratio (number of printed dots per page)
of each color
Dots/1%[dots]: Number of dots printed with 1% of each toner.
Updated with every reduction of 1%.
Estimate [pages]: Number of printable pages with the remaining quantity
of each toner.
Estimation calculated from “Coverage Duty[%]” and
“Dots/1%[dots]”.
Figure 6-3. Print Log Report

PRINT LOG REPORT CONTENTS SUMMARY
Table 6-4. Print Log Report Contents Summary

Count Processing and
Information Name Range Unit Count Conditions Clear Conditions
Storage Location
Serial Number Controller xxxxxxxxxx – – None
Date Controller – – – When the power is turned on
C Toner Engine 0 to 100 % During printing New C toner detected
M Toner Engine 0 to 100 % During printing New M toner detected
Y Toner Engine 0 to 100 % During printing New Y toner detected
K Toner Engine 0 to 100 % During printing New K toner detected
Print [pages]
Total Controller 0 to 99,999,999 pages During printing (EEPROM initialization)
Mono Simplex Controller 0 to 99,999,999 pages During printing (EEPROM initialization)
Mono Duplex Controller 0 to 99,999,999 pages During printing (EEPROM initialization)
Color Simplex Controller 0 to 99,999,999 pages During printing (EEPROM initialization)
Color Duplex Controller 0 to 99,999,999 pages During printing (EEPROM initialization)
Dummy Controller 0 to 99,999,999 pages During printing (EEPROM initialization)
Coverage Duty[%] C, M, Y, K Controller 0.0 to 100.0 % During printing (EEPROM initialization)
Dots/1%[dots] C, M, Y, K Controller 00 to 2,147,483,647 dots During printing (EEPROM initialization)
NOTE 1: Values in parentheses in the “Clear conditions” column are cleared as result.
2: Printers whose values (pages) exceed the above range (only for the values controlled
by the controller) are not guaranteed.

6.5 Consumables and Components That Need Periodic Replacement
C A U T IO N The print page-based service life values of the Consumables and Periodical Replacement Parts are guidelines. The life could become less than a half of the
given numbers (printable pages) because there are many factors that decrease it; such as intermittent printing (repeating to print one or several copies for
each print job), paper type (especially thick paper), paper size, paper orientation, print data (image or document), frequent power-on/off, and so on.
6.5.1 Consumables
Table 6-5. Information on Consumables
Product Name Product Code Life (Pages) Service Life Indication Remarks
Toner Cartridge __Y_Toner Low ---
Yellow 0242 8,000
Replace Toner __Y_ ---
_M__Toner Low ---
Magenta 0243 8,000
Replace Toner _M__ ---
C___Toner Low ---
Cyan 0244 8,000
Replace Toner C___ ---
___K Toner Low ---
Black 0245 9,000
Replace Toner ___K ---
Photoconductor Unit Worn Photoconductor ---
1109 35,000
Replace Photoconductor ---
Fuser Unit Worn Fuser Even though the fuser unit has reached the end of life, it
does not make the engine stop operating.
3020/3021 100,000
Be sure to replace the fuser unit immediately with a new
one once the warning occurs.
Transfer Unit Worn Transfer Unit If the transfer unit is replaced before the warning or error
3022 35,000 Replace Transfer Unit occurs, execute “Reset TransferCounter” in the
Maintenance Menu to reset the life counter.
MAINTENANCE Consumables and Components That Need Periodic Replacement 466

Photoconductor unit Fuser unit
Toner cartridge
Transfer uni
Ida_00_012C
Figure 6-4. Consumables

6.5.2 Regular Replacement Parts

Table 6-6. Maintenance Information on Regular Replacement Parts
Service Life
Product Name Part Code Life (Pages) Action After Replacement Remarks
Indication
ROLL ASSY RETARD This roller is installed on each paper cassette.
Replace the roller if multi paper feeding happens at frequent
1409134 100,000 None None
intervals when feeding papers from paper cassettes, as the
numeric value of life explained here is just for reference.
DEVE ASSY Execute “Reset Y Dev Counter” in If two or more developer unit assys come to the end of life at the
Y 1409152 300,000 Service Req E201 the Maintenance Menu to reset the same time, combined error code will be displayed. Refer to
life counter Troubleshooting for details.
Execute “Reset M Dev Counter” in
M 1409153 300,000 Service Req E202 the Maintenance Menu to reset the
life counter
Execute “Reset C Dev Counter” in
C 1409154 300,000 Service Req E204 the Maintenance Menu to reset the
life counter
Execute “Reset K Dev Counter” in
K 1409155 300,000 Service Req E208 the Maintenance Menu to reset the
life counter
ROLL ASSY FEED Replace the assy if paper jam happens at frequent intervals when
1409140
45,000 None None feeding papers from the MP tray, as the numeric value of life
(TBD)
explained here is just for reference.
HOLDER ASSY RETARD Replace the assy if multi paper feeding happens at frequent
1409143 45,000 None None intervals when feeding papers from the MP tray, as the numeric
value of life explained here is just for reference.
CHUTE ASSY REGI Replace the assy if misalignment, skew, or registration
2103365 300,000 None None misalignment happens as the numeric value of life explained
here is just for reference.
ROLL ASSY FEED This roller is installed on each paper cassette.
1409148 Replace the roller if paper jam happens at frequent intervals
300,000 None None
(TBD) when feeding papers from paper cassettes, as the numeric value
of life explained here is just for reference.

CHUTE ASSY REGI
DEVE ASSY (Y/M/C/K)
ROLL ASSY FEED (CST)

HOLDER ASSY RETARD (MSI)
Ida_00_015B
Ida_00_013B
ROLL ASSY FEED
ROLL ASSY FEED
Ida_00_014A
Figure 6-5. Regular Replacement Parts

CHAPTER
7
APPENDIX
7.1 Connectors Table 7-1. MAIN UNIT

P/J Coordinates Remarks
Connects SENSOR FULL STACK and HARNESS ASSY
7.1.1 The List of Plugs and Jacks 134 F-106
FRONT/DUP
135 E-109 Connects SENSOR NO PAPER and HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP
MAIN UNIT
136 D-122 Connects HOLDER ASSY CTD and HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC
Table 7-1. MAIN UNIT 141 E-135 Connects HVPS and HARNESS ASSY HVPS
P/J Coordinates Remarks Connects SENSOR TNR FULL and HARNESS ASSY
142 E-122
Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY FRONT/ TNRFULL/FSR
13 H-143
DUP 144 H-121 Connects PWBA EEPROM and HARNESS ASSY EEPROM
Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and PWB CONTROLLER (PWB 151 H-120 Connects ROS ASSY and HARNESS ASSY ROS
14 G-142
ESS) 154 F-142 Not Connects
15 F-142 Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY ROS 160 I-128 Connects LVPS and HARNESS ASSY AC INLET
16 F-142 Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY HVPS 161 I-126 Connects LVPS and HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK
17 I-143 Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG 162 I-128 Connects LVPS and HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC
18 F-143 Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY REGISNS 163 I-126 Connects LVPS and HARNESS ASSY 24V
19 F-143 Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH 164 I-127 Connects LVPS and HARNESS ASSY LV RPG
20 F-143 Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY OHP MCU 165 I-127 Connects LVPS and HARNESS ASSY LV
21 E-142 Not Connects 166 I-126 Connects LVPS and FAN REAR
22 I-143 Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE SE 167 I-126 Not Connects
24 E-142 Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY TMP Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG and HARNESS ASSY
171 G-154
30 E-142 Flash Write OPFREC
31 F-142 Test Print 181 E-138 Connects SENSOR REGI and HARNESS ASSY REGISNS
34 F-142 Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY RFID 191 G-143 Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY EEPROM
36 H-143 Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC 191 F-138 Connects CLUTCH TURN and HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH
47 H-143 Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY FDR 192 F-138 Connects CLUTCH REGI and HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH
48 H-143 Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT Connects HARNESS ASSY SENSOR OHP and HARNESS ASSY
200 D-137
51 H-143 Connects PPWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY TNR OHP MCU
52 H-143 Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR 201 E-138 Connects SENSOR OHP and HARNESS ASSY SENSOR OHP
60 I-143 Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY 24V 220 C-106 Connects CONSOLE PANEL and HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE SE
61 H-143 Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY LV 231 B-153 Connects SENSOR HUM and HARNESS ASSY TMP
132 H-109 Connects SOLENOID FEED MSI and HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP 234 F-202 Connects WIRE ASSY FSR EARTH and DRIVE ASSY FSR
133 D-108 Connects SENSOR DUP JAM and HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP 235 G-203 Connects WIRE ASSY FSR EARTH and FRAME
APPENDIX Connectors 471

Table 7-1. MAIN UNIT Table 7-1. MAIN UNIT

P/J Coordinates Remarks P/J Coordinates Remarks
311 G-142 Connects PWBA MCU IDTN and HARNESS ASSY LV RPG 1322 H-196 Connects WIRE ASSY DUP EARTH and FRAME
Connects COIL ASSY CRUM READER and HARNESS ASSY 3411 F-106 Connects HARNESS ASSY RFID2 and HARNESS ASSY RFID
341 E-105
RFID2
Table 7-2. MAIN UNIT(High Voltage Terminals)
342 E-105 Connects COIL ASSY CRUM READER and HARNESS ASSY TNR
361 F-122 Connects FUSER ASSY and HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC Terminal Coordinates Remarks
471 H-154 Connects SWITCH ASSY SIZE and HARNESS ASSY FDR CF C-166 Connects PHD ASSY (RTC) and HSG ASSY BIAS
472 G-153 Connects SENSOR NO PAPER and HARNESS ASSY FDR CF B-173 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS
473 F-153 Connects SENSOR LOW PAPER and HARNESS ASSY FDR CF H-173 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and PHD ASSY (RTC)
474 G-153 Connects SOLENOID FEED and HARNESS ASSY FDR CF D-183 Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS
Connects DRIVE ASSY MAIN and HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/ CL1 D-166 Connects PHD ASSY (IDT1 Cleaner) and HSG ASSY BIAS
481 G-123
MOT CL1 B-172 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS
482 E-107 Connects FAN FRONT and HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT CL1 H-173 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and PHD ASSY (IDT1 Cleaner)
Connects HARNESS ASSY PHD2 and HARNESS ASSY FAN/ CL1 D-183 Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS
484 E-119
PHD/MOT CL2 E-166 Connects PHD ASSY (IDT2 Cleaner) and HSG ASSY BIAS
Connects DRIVE ASSY DEVE and HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/ CL2 B-172 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS
491 H-123
MOT
CL2 G-173 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and PHD ASSY (IDT2 Cleaner)
Connects MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM and HARNESS ASSY
501 C-107 CL2 D-183 Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS
FRONT/DUP
511 H-106 Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Y) and HARNESS ASSY TNR DA B-170 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS
512 I-106 Connects DISPENSER ASSY (M) and HARNESS ASSY TNR DA D-182 Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS
513 I-106 Connects DISPENSER ASSY (C) and HARNESS ASSY TNR DB B-171 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS
514 J-106 Connects DISPENSER ASSY (K) and HARNESS ASSY TNR DB D-182 Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS
Connects DRIVE ASSY FUSER and HARNESS ASSY DC B-171 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS
521 F-123
TNRFULL/FSR DC D-182 Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS
701 G-106 Connects SENSOR NO TNR (Y) and HARNESS ASSY TNR DD B-172 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS
702 H-106 Connects SENSOR NO TNR (M) and HARNESS ASSY TNR DD D-183 Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS
703 H-106 Connects SENSOR NO TNR (C) and HARNESS ASSY TNR Connects DEVE ASSY (C) (Magnet Roll (C)) and HSG ASSY
DEVE C C-164
704 I-105 Connects SENSOR NO TNR (K) and HARNESS ASSY TNR BIAS
Connects CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC and HARNESS ASSY DEVE C H-171 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and DEVE ASSY (C) (Magnet Roll (C))
710 D-119
PHD2 Connects DEVE ASSY (K) (Magnet Roll (K)) and HSG ASSY
DEVE K C-165
Connects WIRE ASSY DUP EARTH and PLATE EARTH OUT3/ BIAS
1321 F-196
SOLENID FEED MSI DEVE K H-172 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and DEVE ASSY (K) (Magnet Roll (K))

Table 7-2. MAIN UNIT(High Voltage Terminals) 550-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT
Terminal Coordinates Remarks
Table 7-3. 550-sheet paper cassette unit
Connects DEVE ASSY (M) (Magnet Roll (M)) and HSG ASSY
DEVE M C-164
BIAS Terminal Coordinates Remarks
DEVE M H-171 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and DEVE ASSY (M) (Magnet Roll (M)) 80 I-205 Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY SIZE
Connects DEVE ASSY (Y) (Magnet Roll (Y)) and HSG ASSY 81 J-204 Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY LOWP
DEVE Y C-163
BIAS
82 J-205 Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and DRIVE ASSY
DEVE Y H-170 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and DEVE ASSY (Y) (Magnet Roll (Y))
83 I-205 Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY OPFREC
ID1 D-166 Connects PHD ASSY (IDT1) and HSG ASSY BIAS
84 I-205 Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2
ID1 B-173 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS
85 J-204 Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY OPFDR
ID1 H-173 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and PHD ASSY (IDT1)
86 I-205 Not Connects
ID1 D-184 Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS
Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG and HARNESS ASSY
ID2 E-164 Connects PHD ASSY . (IDT2) and HSG ASSY BIAS 171 G-208
OPFREC
ID2 G-172 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and PHD ASSY (IDT2) Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2 and HARNESS ASSY
172 G-210
ID2 B-173 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS OPFREC2
ID2 D-184 Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS 821 H-209 Connects HARNESS ASSY SIZE and SWITCH ASSY SIZE
RF D-166 Connects PHD ASSY (Refresher) and HSG ASSY BIAS 822 G-209 Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFDR and SENSOR NO PAPER
RF B-173 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and HVPS 823 F-209 Connects HARNESS ASSY LOWP and SENSOR LOW PAPER
RF H-173 Connects HSG ASSY BIAS and PHD ASSY (Refresher) 824 H-209 Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFDR and SOLENOID FEED
RF D-183 Connects HVPS and HSG ASSY BIAS Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFDR and CLUTCH ELECTRO
825 G-209
MAGNETIC
RG B-181 Connects HVPS and WIRE ASSY REGI
TR B-181 Connects HVPS and WIRE ASSY BTR

1100-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT 7.1.2 P/J Layout Diagram

Table 7-4. 1100-sheet paper cassette unit
A B C D E F G H I J K L
Terminal Coordinates Remarks

101
80 I-205 Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY SIZE
81 J-204 Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY LOWP 102
82 J-205 Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and DRIVE ASSY

83 I-205 Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY OPFREC 103
701
3411 702
84 I-205 Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2 703
341 704
104
85 J-204 Connects PWBA OPTFDR 1T and HARNESS ASSY OPFDR
342
86 I-205 Not Connects
105 220
Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG and HARNESS ASSY
171 G-208
OPFREC
106
Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2 and HARNESS ASSY 514
172 G-210
OPFREC2
107
821 H-209 Connects HARNESS ASSY SIZE and SWITCH ASSY SIZE 501 513
822 G-209 Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFDR and SENSOR NO PAPER

108 512
823 F-209 Connects HARNESS ASSY LOWP and SENSOR LOW PAPER
511
824 H-209 Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFDR and SOLENOID FEED 109
Connects HARNESS ASSY OPFDR and CLUTCH ELECTRO

825 G-209
MAGNETIC 110
111
133 132
112
482
135
134
113
114
115
Ida_04_001A
Figure 7-1. Plug and Jack Layout for MAIN UNIT(1)

A B C D E F G H I J K L A B C D E F G H I J K L
116 131
141
117 484 151
132
118 710 133
119 134
120 135
121 136
144
192
122 137
491
191
123 138
124 139
125 136 140 201

161 181
142 200
361
521 31 15 311 14 61 36
126 481 166 141 34
163 154 51
167
127 165 142 16 22
164 24
17
162 30
128 143 60
21
160 47
144
20
129
18 19 191 13 48 52
130 145
Ida_04_002B Ida_04_003B
Figure 7-2. Plug and Jack Layout for MAIN UNIT(2) Figure 7-3. Plug and Jack Layout for MAIN UNIT(3)

146 161
147 162
FRAME ASSY DEVE
DEVE Y
148 163
DEVE M DEVE ASSY (Y)
149 164 DEVE C

DEVE ASSY (M)
473 DEVE K
ID2
150 472 165
DEVE ASSY (C)
474
CL2
151 166
231 DEVE ASSY (K)
CF
ID1 PHD ASSY
152 167
RF
CL1
153 168
154 169
HSG ASSY BIAS DEVE Y

471
DA
155 170
171 DB
DEVE M
DC
156 171 DEVE C
DD
CL2 ID2 DEVE K

157 172
CL1
CF
158 173
CF
RF
ID1 RF
159 174
ID2 CL2 ID1 CL1
160 175
Ida_Sec04_004GA Ida_04_006B

176 191
CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT
ELIMINATOR EXIT PLATE EARTH OUT1
177 192
178 193
SPRING BIAS IDT1
WIRE ASSY BTR

179 194 SPRING BIAS IDT1
PLATE EARTH OUT2
PLATE EARTH OUT4
180 195
REGISTOR GS1
SPRING EARTH OUT2
RG J1322
181 196
TR
PLATE EARTH OUT3
DA J1321
182 HVPS 197 SOLENOID FEED MSI
DB
WIRE ASSY DUP EARTH
DC
BTR ASSY
183 CL1 DD 198
CF CL2
RF
184 ID1 SPRING BTR L 199
ID2
185 200 CHUTE ASSY DUP IN
J234
186 201
WIRE ASSY REGI
DRIVE ASSY FUSER
187 202
J235
188 203
189 WIRE ASSY FSR EARTH

204
190
205
Ida_04_007B
Ida_04_008B

201 301
202 302 81
84
83
203 303
80
822 85
81 823 172
84 86 82
204 304 825
83
205 80 305
822 85
171 86 82
206 306
207 307 821
824
208 308
209 309
821
210 310
824
825 81
211 823 172 311 84
83
212 312
823 80
825
822 85
824 86 82
213 313
821
214 314
215 315
Ida_1T_04_101A Ida_2T_04_201C
Figure 7-8. Plug and Jack Layout for 550-FEEDER Figure 7-9. Plug and Jack Layout for 1100-FEEDER P/J

7.2 Wire Net
HARNESS ASSY TNR

HARNESS ASSY
DISPENSER FAN REAR
INTERLOCK
ASSY (Y) P161
SENSOR P166
P/J701 NO TNR (Y)
P163 LVPS
P/J511
DISPENSER
ASSY (M) P165
HARNESS ASSY RFID2
SENSOR
P/J702 NO TNR (M) P164
HARNESS ASSY LV
CONSOLE PANEL P162 P160
HARNESS ASSY LV RPG

P/J512
DISPENSER
ASSY (C) SENSOR
P/J703 NO TNR (C)
P/J220 HARNESS ASSY
HARNESS ASSY 24V

P/J513 AC INLET
HARNESS ASSY
DISPENSER
OPEPANE SE
SENSOR PWBA ESS MAIN
ASSY (K) P/J704 NO TNR (K) (PWB CONTROLLER)
P/J514
FUSER ASSY
P/J3411 P/J14 P/J22
P/J342 RFID2 RFID P/J311
P/J34 P/J17
P/J60 HARNESS ASSY
P/J341
HARNESS ASSY ROS P/J15 P/J51 FSR/ADC
COIL ASSY
P/J61
CRUM READER P/J154 P/J47
P/J16 P/J36
PWBA MCU P/J191 P/J361
HARNESS ASSY IDTN P/J13 P/J48 P/J52
P/J151 HVPS
HVPS P/J142
P/J24 P/J20 P/J18 P/J19
P/J136
P/J141
SENSOR HOLDER ASSY CTD
HARNESS ASSY
HARNESS ASSY
HARNESS ASSY
TNR FULL
HARNESS ASSY
TMP
TNRFULL/FSR
ROS ASSY P/J231
EEPROM
SENSOR HUM
FDR
HARNESS ASSY DRIVE ASSY SWITCH ASSY
SENSOR OHP HARNESS ASSY OHP MCU FUSER SIZE
P/J144 P/J471
P/J200 HARNESS ASSY REGISNS P/J521
P/J201 PWBA EEPROM
HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH
HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP P/J501 MOTOR ASSY

SENSOR OHP DUP 17PM
P/J181 P/J133 P/J134 P/J135 P/J132 P/J472 P/J473 P/J474
SENSOR REGI
DRIVE ASSY
SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR MAIN SENSOR SENSOR SOLENOID
SOLENOID
DUP JAM FULL STACK NO PAPER NO PAPER LOW PAPER FEED (Tray1)
FEED MSI
P/J481
P/J482
P/J710
HARNESS P/J484 HARNESS ASSY
P/J491
P/J191 P/J192 ASSY PHD2 FAN/PHD/MOT
CONN_ASSY_ FAN FRONT
CRUM_MC DRIVE ASSY
DEVE
CLUTCH TURN CLUTCH REGI
Ida_04_005D
(MSI)
Figure 7-10. MAIN UNIT
APPENDIX Wire Net 479

P/J172
HARNESS ASSY
SENSOR
OPFPLG2
LOW PAPER
HARNESS ASSY PWBA OPTFDR 1T HARNESS ASSY P/J823

P/J17 P/J171
OPFREC LOWP
HARNESS ASSY P83 P84 P81 CLUTCH

PWBA OPFPLG ELELCTRO
P80 P85 MAGNETIC
MCU IDTN
P82 P/J825
HARNESS ASSY
SWITCH P/J824 SOLENOID
ASSY SIZE
FEED
P/J821 HARNESS ASSY

SIZE
SENSOR
NO PAPER
DRIVE ASSY P/J822

(PL11.3.15)
Ida_1T_04_005A
Figure 7-11. 550-sheet paper cassette unit MAIN UNIT

P/J823 SENSOR
LOW PAPER

P17 P171 PWBA OPTFDR 2T
OPFREC2 LOWP2
HARNESS ASSY P/J83 P/J84 P/J81

J172 CLUTCH
PWBA OPFPLG ASSY
MCU IDTN P/J80 P/J85
P/J82 P/J825
HARNESS ASSY
P/J824 SOLENOID
SWITCH FEED
HARNESS ASSY OPF23

ASSY SIZE
P/J821 HARNESS ASSY

SIZE2
SENSOR
NO PAPER
P/J822
DRIVE ASSY 2ND
P/J823 SENSOR
LOW PAPER
SWITCH
ASSY SIZE HARNESS ASSY
P/J821 PWBA OPTFDR 2T
LOWP2
P/J83 P/J81
HARNESS ASSY SIZE2 CLUTCH ELECTRO
P/J80 P/J85 MAGNETIC
P/J825
HARNESS ASSY
P/J824 SOLENOID
FEED
SENSOR
NO PAPER
P/J822
Ida_2T_04_006B
Figure 7-12. 1100-sheet paper cassette unit

7.3 Wiring Connection Diagrams
7.3.1 Marks used in the Diagram

The table below shows how to interpret the Overall Wiring Connection Diagram given
on the following pages.
Table 7-5. List of the Marks

Marks Explanation
Indicates a connection between parts with a harness or wire.
Box without a part name in it indicates the connector (P/J).

XX Numeric value in the box indicates the connector No.
Indicates the connector (P/J) drawn separately in several places.

XX Numeric value in the box indicates the connector No.
Box with a part name in it indicates the part.

PWBA MCU IDTN
PL X.Y.Z
Indicates a section in Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts on

1 page XXX, and the section No.
Overall Wiring Connection Diagrams are given on the following pages.

MAIN UNIT
550-sheet paper cassette unit
1100-sheet paper cassette unit
APPENDIX Wiring Connection Diagrams 482

6 1
FUSER ASSY HARNESS ASSY AC INLET
P/J162 P/J160
MAIN UNIT
APPENDIX
PWBA
MCU IDTN
P/J361 P/J161
FAN REAR
P/J36 P/J166
EPSON AcuLaser C4200
SENSOR HUM
J231 P/J24
2
LVPS SWITCH ASSY SIZE
P/J471
7
ROS ASSY
P/J151 P/J15
SENSOR NO PAPER
P/J472
P/J60 P/J163
CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC P/J311 P/J164

P/J710 P/J484 P/J48
SENSOR LOW PAPER
P/J473
P/J61 P/J165
8 SOLENOID FEED
P/J474
HOLDER ASSY CTD
P/J136 P/J36
P/J47
SENSOR TNR FULL

P/J142 P/J52
3
MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM
P/J13 P/J501
PWBA EEPROM
J144 P/J191
DRIVE ASSY MAIN

P/J48 J481
PHD ASSY
HVPS FAN FRONT
P/J141 P/J16 P482
IDT2
IDT2 CLEANER DRIVE ASSY DEVE

J491
BTR ASSY
IDT1
IDT1 CLEANER DRIVE ASSY FUSER

BTR P/J52 J521
9 RFB
HTC
DEVE Y
DEVE M
Wiring Connection Diagrams

SENSOR NO TNR (Y)
4
DEVE C P/J51 P/J701
DEVE K
SENSOR NO TNR (M)
P/J702
10
SENSOR DUP JAM SENSOR NO TNR (C)
P/J133 P/J13 P/J703
SENSOR FULL STACK SENSOR NO TNR (K)

P/J134 P/J704
SENSOR NO PAPER COIL ASSY CRUM

P/J135 P/J342
READER
P/J34 P/J3411 P/J341
SOLENOID FEED MSI

P/J132
SENSOR REGI DISPENSER ASSY (Y)

5
P/J181 P/J18 P/J511
CLUTCH TURN
11 DISPENSER ASSY (M)
P/J191 PWBA ESS MAIN P/J512
P/J14
CLUTCH REGI DISPENSER ASSY (C)

P/J192 P/J19 CONSOLE PANEL P/J513
P/J22 P/J220
SENSOR OHP DISPENSER ASSY (K)

P/J201 P/J200 P/J20 P/J514
Ida_007_001D
483
Revision A
550-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT 1100-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT
Ida_1T_07_101A
CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC
2
SENSOR LOW PAPER

PWBA
SENSOR NO PAPER
SWITCH ASSY SIZE
OPTFDR 2T
SOLENOID FEED
HARNESS ASSY SIZE2
P/J80 P/J821 SWITCH ASSY SIZE
1
PWBA MCU IDTN HARNESS ASSY LOWP2

HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG P/J81 P/J823 SENSOR LOW PAPER
HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2

P/J17 P171 J172 P/J83
P/J821
P/J823
P/J822
HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2
HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2
P/J85 P/J825 CLUTCH ASSY
HARNESS ASSY LOWP
HARNESS ASSY SIZE
P/J825
P/J824
To 2 Tray Option Feeder Unit

HARNESS ASSY OPFDR
From Single Feeder Unit P/J172 P/J824 SOLENOID FEED
P/J172
P/J822 SENSOR NO PAPER
DRIVE ASSY 2ND P/J82
P/J84
P/J80
P/J81
P/J85
P/J84
HARNESS ASSY OPF23
PWBA OPTFDR 1T
3
PWBA
OPTFDR 2T
P/J83
P/J83
P/J82
HARNESS ASSY OPFREC
HARNESS ASSY SIZE2

P/J80 P/J821 SWITCH ASSY SIZE
HARNESS ASSY LOWP2

HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG
P/J81 P/J823 SENSOR LOW PAPER

P/J171
HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2

P/J85 P/J825 CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC
P/J17
P/J824 SOLENOID FEED

DRIVE ASSY
PWBA MCU IDTN
P/J822 SENSOR NO PAPER
Ida_2T_07_201A
1
APPENDIX Wiring Connection Diagrams 484

7.4 Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts 4. Developer section 1 (p495)

Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the COIL ASSY CRUM
READER
7.4.1 Configurations
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR NO TNR (Y)
MAIN UNIT Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR NO TNR (M)
The Overall Wiring Connection Diagram is divided into 11 sections as shown below to Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR NO TNR (C)
indicate the detailed connection between parts. Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR NO TNR (K)
1. Power section (p489)
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the LVPS 5. Developer section 2 (p495)
Connection between the LVPS and the FAN REAR
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the DISPENSER ASSY (Y)
Connection between the LVPS and the HARNESS ASSY AC INLET (Toner Motor: Y)
Connection between the LVPS and the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the DISPENSER ASSY (M)
(Toner Motor: M)
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the DISPENSER ASSY (C)
2. Cassette section (p491) (Toner Motor: C)
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SWITCH ASSY SIZE Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the DISPENSER ASSY (K)
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR NO PAPER (Toner Motor: K)
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR LOW PAPER
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SOLENOID FEED 6. Fuser section (p498)
(Tray 1)
Connection between the LVPS and the PWBA MCU IDTN
Connection between the LVPS and the FUSER ASSY
3. Drive section (p493) Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the FUSER ASSY
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the DRIVE ASSY MAIN Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR HUM
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the DRIVE ASSY DEVE
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the DRIVE ASSY FUSER 7. ROS section (p500)
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the MOTOR ASSY DUP
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the ROS ASSY
17PM
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the FAN FRONT
CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC
APPENDIX Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts 485

8. Xerographics section 1 (p502) 550-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT

Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR TNR FULL
The Overall Wiring Connection Diagram is divided into two sections as shown below
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the PWBA EEPROM to indicate the detailed connection between parts.
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the HOLDER ASSY CTD
1. Drive section (p508)

9. Xerographic section 2 (p503)
Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 1T and the PWBA MCU IDTN
Connection among the PWBA MCU IDTN, HVPS, PHD ASSY, and BTR
Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 1T and the DRIVE ASSY
ASSY
2. Cassette section (p509)

10. Paper feeder section (p505)
Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 1T and the SWITCH ASSY SIZE
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR DUP JAM
Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 1T and the SENSOR NO PAPER
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR FULL
STACK Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 1T and the SENSOR LOW PAPER
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR NO PAPER Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 1T and the SOLENOID FEED
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SOLENOID FEED MSI Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 1T and the CLUTCH ELECTRO
MAGNETIC
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR REGI
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the CLUTCH REGI
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the CLUTCH TURN (MSI) 1100-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR OHP
The Overall Wiring Connection Diagram is divided into three sections as shown below
to indicate the detailed connection between parts.
11. Controller section (p507)
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the PWB ESS
1. Drive section (p511)
Connection between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the CONSOLE PANEL
Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the PWBA MCU IDTN
Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the DRIVE ASSY 2ND

2. Cassette 2 section (p512)

Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the SENSOR LOW PAPER
Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the SOLENOID FEED
Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the CLUTCH ASSY
3. Cassette 3 section (p514)

Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the SENSOR LOW PAPER
Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the SOLENOID FEED
Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T and the CLUTCH ELECTRO
MAGNETIC
Connection between the PWBA OPTFDR 2T (Tray 2) and the PWBA
OPTFDR 2T (Tray 3)

7.4.2 Marks used in the Wiring Connection Diagram Table 7-6. List of the Marks
between Parts Mark Explanation
Indicates the function and the logical value (Low:
The table below shows how to interpret the Wiring Connection Diagram between Parts
L, High: H) of the signal when the function is
given on the following pages.Commonly used marks and symbols are omitted here. EXIT PAPER SENSED(L)+3.3VDC
detected. The voltage is the value when the signal is
Table 7-6. List of the Marks High. An arrow indicates the direction of the
signal.
Mark Explanation
Indicates cable-to-cable connection.
Indicates a plug.
Indicates the DC voltage when the PWBA MCU

Indicates a jack. I/L +24VDC
IDTN internal interlock switch is ON.
+5VDC Indicates DC voltage.
Indicates a PinYY or JackYY of the connector +3.3VDC
P/JXX PXX and JXX. SG Indicates a Signal Ground.
YY
Indicates a part.
PWBA MCU IDTN
Indicates a functional component in a part, and its

Heater name.
Indicates control inside of PWB, and a brief outline

Control of the control.
Indicates a connection between parts with a harness

DEVE_A
or wire, and its signal name/details. An arrow
indicates the direction of the signal.
Indicates the function and the logical value (Low:
REGI CLUTCH ON(L)+24VDC L, High: H) of the signal for enabling the function.
The voltage is the value when the signal is High.
An arrow indicates the direction of the signal.

MAIN UNIT LVPS

PWBA MCU
v IDTN
1. Power section Interlock

HARNESS ASSY 24V
+24VDC
P/J163 P/J60
I/L_+24VDC
+24V 1 1
Name of Signal Line Remarks 2
SG
2
I/L_+24VDC
3 3
24 OSC OFF +24 VDC output control signal (High: stops output) 4
SG
4
HEAT1 Main Lamp control signal in the FUSER ASSY (Lamp lights at
P/J161 HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK
High: HEAT1, Low: xHEAT1 ) +5VDC
xHEAT1 1
+5V
HEAT2 Main Lamp control signal in the FUSER ASSY (Lamp lights at P/J161
I/L_+5VDC
3
High: HEAT1, Low: xHEAT1 )
xHEAT2
P/J166
HEAT EN AC power control signals for both the Main and the Sub Lamp in 1
24V_FAN_REAR
FAN ALM_FAN_REAR
the FUSER ASSY (High: AC power output) CONTROL
2
SG
FAN REAR +5VDC
3
+3VDC
IL OPEN INTERLOCK SWITCH open/close signal (High: Switch Open) P/J164
HARNESS ASSY LV RPG
P/J311
3.3V_ESS
1 1
SLEEP Sleep Mode control signal (stops output of High: +24 VDC, +5 +3.3V_C
2
3.3V_ESS
2
5V_ESS
VDC, and +3 VDC) 3
GND_ESS
3
4 4
xREAR FAN STOP FAN REAR control signal (High: Fan rotates) 5
GND_ESS
5
xREAR FAN LOW FAN REAR control signal (High: Fan rotates at high speed, Low: P/J165
HARNESS ASSY LV
P/J61
24V_OSC_OFF +5VDC
1 18
Fan rotates at low speed) 5V
2 17
SG +3.3VDC
ALM FAN REAR FAN REAR alarm signal (High: Fan Fail) 3
3.3V
16
+3.3V_M 4 15
SG
xFRONT FAN STOP FAN FRONT control signal (High: Fan rotates) 5
HEAT1
14
6 13
xHEAT1
LV TYPE LVPS identifying signal 7
HEAT2
12
8 11
xHEAT2
ALM FAN FRONT FAN REAR alarm signal (High: Fan Fail) 9
HEAT_EN
10
10 9
IL_OPEN
11 8
SLEEP
12 7
xREAR_FAN_STOP
13 6
xREAR_FAN_LOW
14 5
ALM_FAN_REAR
15 4
xFRONT_FAN_STOP
16 3
LV_TYPE
17 2
ALM_FAN_FRONT
18 1
z P/J160 HARNESS ASSY AC INLET

AC SW
1
Heater Control
3
1 2 4 6 P/J162
Ida_Sec007_002FB
Table 7-7. Power Section Connection and Wiring Diagram

LVPS Overcurrent Protection

24 VDC, 5 VDC, and 3.3 VDC, which are the power voltage, stop all the outputs
when short-circuiting ocurred. Each output is restored by eliminating the cause of
the short-circuit, and turning the printer OFF and then back ON at specified time
interval. However, 5 VDC excluding the one for the controller board and the
control panel cannot be restored because of the fuse meltdown.
LVPS Overvoltage Protection
24 VDC, 5 VDC, and 3.3 VDC, which are the power voltage, stop all the outputs
when overvoltage ocurred. This overcurrent protection an be activated when 24
VDC, 5 VDC, and 3.3 VDC are less than 32 VDC, 7 VDC, and 4.4 VDC
respectively. Each output is restored by turning the printer OFF and then back ON
at specified time interval.
FAN Output Circuit
Output voltage of the FAN REAR ON (H) signal varies according to the
conditions of the FAN LOW signal and the FAN STOP signal.
FAN LOW FAN STOP FAN REAR ON(H)

High High 24V
Low High 15V
161
High Low 0V
311 61
166 Low Low 0V
163
165
164 Output Outage by the I/L Switch
+24 DVC output from the LVPS stops by turning off the I/L Switch that is
162 connected to the LVPS.
60 160
Ida_07_013B

2. Cassette section
PWBA MCU IDTN SWITCH ASSY
SIZE
Name of Signal Line Remarks HARNESS ASSY FDR
P/J47 P/J471
CST1 SIZE0 SWITCH ON/OFF detection signal for the upper switch on the SWITCH CST1 SIZE0 SWITCH ON(L)+3.3VDC
1 4
ON(L)+3.3VDC ASSY SIZE CST1 SIZE1 SWITCH ON(L)+3.3VDC
2 3
CST1 SIZE2 SWITCH ON(L)+3.3VDC
CST1 SIZE1 SWITCH ON/OFF detection signal for the middle switch on the SWITCH 4 1
SG
ON(L)+3.3VDC ASSY SIZE 3 2
CST1 SIZE2 SWITCH ON/OFF detection signal for the lower switch on the SWITCH +3.3VDC
ON(L)+3.3VDC ASSY SIZE
CST1 NO PAPER Detection signal for paper in the cassette by the SENSOR NO
P/J47 P/J472
SENSED(H)+3.3VDC PAPER (High: no paper) PULL UP +3.3VDC
5 3
CST1 LOW PAPER Detection signal for the remaining amount of paper in the cassette SG
6 2
SENSED(H)+3.3VDC by the SENSOR LOW PAPER (High: the remaining amount is CST1 NO PAPER SENSED(H)+3.3VDC
7 1
low)
SENSOR NO PAPER
+3.3VDC
CST1 FEED SOL Solenoid Feed ON/OFF control signal
ON(L)+24VDC
CLUTCH ASSY TURN ON/OFF control signal P/J47 P/J473
CST1 TURN CL PULL UP +3.3VDC
8 3
ON(L)+24VDC SG
9 2
CST1 LOW PAPER SENSED(H)+3.3VDC
10 1
SENSOR LOW PAPER

Interlock
+24VDC
P/J47 P474 J474

I/L +24VDC
11 2 1
CST1 FEED SOL ON(L)+24VDC
12 1 2
SOLENOID FEED
(Tray1)
Ida_Sec007_003FB
Table 7-8. Cassette Section Connection and Wiring Diagram

SWITCH ASSY SIZE Overview

The combination of the upper, middle, and lower switch ON/OFF conditions of
the SWITCH ASSY SIZE determines the paper size.
Switch
Paper Size
47
Upper Middle Lower
LEGAL14"(SEF) ON ON ON
LEGAL13"(SEF) ON ON OFF
EXECUTIVE(SEF) ON OFF ON
B5(SEF) ON OFF OFF
A4(SEF) OFF ON ON
LETTER(SEF) OFF OFF ON
A5 OFF ON OFF
474
471
472
473 Ida_07_014B

3. Drive section
PWBA MCU IDTN
Interlock MOTOR ASSY
DUP 17PM
Name of Signal Line Remarks +24VDC HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP
P/J13 P501 J501
I/L +24VDC
xMAIN MOT START MAIN MOTOR control signal (High: MOTOR stops) 1
I/L +24VDC
6 1
2 5 2
DUP_A
ALARM MOT MAIN MAIN MOTOR control signal (High: MOTOR error) 3
DUP_B
4 3
M
4 3 4
DUP_XA
CLK MAIN MOT MAIN MOTOR control signal 5 2 5
DUP_XB
6 1 6
MAIN H/L MAIN MOTOR control signal (High: rotates at high speed, Low: Interlock
rotates at low speed) +24VDC HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT DRIVE ASSY MAIN
+5VDC P/J48 P/J481
I/L +24VDC
ALM FAN FRONT FAN FRONT control signal (High: Fan Fail) A1
I/L +24VDC
10
A2 9
+5VDC
xDEVE MOT START DEVE MOTOR control signal (High: MOTOR stops) A6 5
SG
A3 8
ALARM MOT DEVE DEVE MOTOR control signal (High: MOTOR error) A4
SG
7
SG M
A5 6
CLK DEVE MOT DEVE MOTOR control signal A7
xMAIN_MOT_START
4
ALARM_MOT_MAIN
A8 3
DEVE H/L DEVE MOTOR control signal (High: rotates at high speed, Low: A9
CLK_MAIN_MOT
2
MAIN_H/L
rotates at low speed) Interlock
A10 1
+24VDC
xDEVE CW DEVE MOTOR control signal (High: CCW rotates) P/J48 P482 J482
24V_FAN_FRONT
A11 3 1
xFSR MOT START FUSER MOTOR control signal (High: MOTOR stops) A12
ALM_FAN_FRONT
2 2
SG
A13 1 3
ALARM MOT FSR FUSER MOTOR control signal (High: MOTOR error) FAN FRONT
Interlock
CLK FSR MOT FUSER MOTOR control signal +24VDC DRIVE ASSY DEVE
FSR H/L FUSER MOTOR control signal (High: rotates at high speed, Low: +5VDC P/J48
I/L +24VDC
P/J491
B34 1
rotates at low speed) B33
I/L +24VDC
2
+5VDC
B29 6
SG
B32 3
SG
B31 4
SG M
B30 5
xDEVE_MOT_START
B28 7
ALARM_MOT_DEVE
B27 8
CLK_DEVE_MOT
B26 9
DEVE_H/L
B25 10
xDEVE_CW
B24 11
Interlock
+24VDC
DRIVE ASSY FUSER
HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR
+5VDC P/J52 P/J521
I/L +24VDC
1 10
I/L +24VDC
2 9
+5VDC
6 5
SG
3 8
SG
4 7
SG M
5 6
xFSR_MOT_START
7 4
ALARM_MOT_FSR
8 3
CLK_FSR_MOT
9 2
FSR_H/L
10 1
Ida_Sec007_004FB
Figure 7-13. Drive Section Connection and Wiring Diagram

MOTOR ASSY DUP Overview

Motor type: Hybrid stepping motor
Step angle: 1.8×
Coil resistance: 3.3 Ω ± 10%/phase (25 degree C)
Excitation sequence: (*: excitation)
501 Step (2 phases)

Phase
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DUP_A * * *
491 DUP_XA * * *
DUP_B * * *
DUP_XB * * *
482
521
481
13 48 52
Ida_07_015B

4. Developer section 1
PWBA
MCU IDTN
Name of Signal Line Remarks
NOTNR(Y)(H)+3.3VDC SENSOR NO TNR (Y) remaining toner detection signal (High: no +5VDC HARNESS ASSY TNR
toner, Low: toner present) P/J51 P/J701
+5VDC
A9 1
NOTNR(M)(H)+3.3VDC SENSOR NO TNR (M) remaining toner detection signal (High: A8
NOTNR_Y(H)+3.3VDC
2
SG
no toner, Low: toner present) A7 3
SENSOR
NOTNR(C)(H)+3.3VDC SENSOR NO TNR (C) remaining toner detection signal (High: no NO TNR (Y)
toner, Low: toner present) +5VDC
P/J51 P/J702
NOTNR(K)(H)+3.3VDC SENSOR NO TNR (K) remaining toner detection signal (High: no A6
+5VDC
1
NOTNR_M(H)+3.3VDC
toner, Low: toner present) A5 2
SG
A4 3
TCRU_Y TCRU ASSY (Y) (Toner Bottle) presence detection signal (Low:
SENSOR
SENSED(L)+3.3VDC toner bottle present) NO TNR (M)
+5VDC
TCRU_M TCRU ASSY (M) (Toner Bottle) presence detection signal (Low: P/J51 P/J703
SENSED(L)+3.3VDC toner bottle present) +5VDC
A3 1
NOTNR_C(H)+3.3VDC
A2 2
TCRU_C TCRU ASSY (C) (Toner Bottle) presence detection signal (Low: A1
SG
3
SENSED(L)+3.3VDC toner bottle present) SENSOR
NO TNR (C)
TCRU_K TCRU ASSY (K) (Toner Bottle) presence detection signal (Low:
+5VDC
SENSED(L)+3.3VDC toner bottle present) P/J51 P/J704
+5VDC
A12 1
ANT_OUT Communication signal between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the A11
NOTNR_K(H)+3.3VDC
2
COIL ASSY CRUM READER (PWBA MCU IDTN output) A10
SG
3
ANT_IN Communication signal between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the SENSOR
NO TNR (K)
COIL ASSY CRUM READER (COIL ASSY CRUM READER
output)
COIL ASSY CRUM
READER
P/J51 P/J342
TCRU_Y (L)+3.3VDC
A14 4
TCRU_M(L)+3.3VDC
A15 3
TCRU_C(L)+3.3VDC
A16 2
TCRU_K(L)+3.3VDC
A17 1
SG
A13 5
HARNESS ASSY RFID2 Y

HARNESS ASSY RFID
P/J34 P3411 J3411 P/J341
ANT_OUT M
2 1 2 1
ANT_IN ANTENNA
1 2 1 2
C
Ida_07_005A
Figure 7-14. Developer Section 1 Connection and Wiring Diagram

701
34 11 702
703
341 704
342
34
51
Ida_07_016B

5. Developer section 2
PWBA MCU IDTN DISPENSER

ASSY (Y)
Interlock
+24VDC HARNESS ASSY TNR Toner Motor(Y)
P/J51 P511 J511 514
I/L +24VDC
B21 5 1
TMOT_Y_A
B22 4 2
TMOT_Y_B 513
B23 3 3 M
TMOT_Y_XA
B24 2 4
TMOT_Y_XB
B25 1 5 512
511
DISPENSER
ASSY (M)
Interlock
+24VDC Toner Motor(M)
P/J51 P512 J512
I/L +24VDC
B26 5 1
TMOT_M_A
B27 4 2
TMOT_M_B
B28 3 3 M
TMOT_M_XA
B29 2 4
TMOT_M_XB
B30 1 5
51
DISPENSER
ASSY (C)
Interlock
+24VDC Toner Motor(C) Ida_07_017B
P/J51 P513 J513
I/L +24VDC
B31
TMOT_C_A
5 1 Toner Motor Overview
B32 4 2
TMOT_C_B
B33
B34
TMOT_C_XA
3
2
3
4
M
Motor type: PM stepping motor
TMOT_C_XB
B35 1 5
Step angle: 7.5×± 0.5×
Coil resistance: 80Ω ± 10%/phase (20 degree C)
DISPENSER
ASSY (K) Excitation sequence: (*: excitation)
Interlock
+24VDC Toner Motor(K)
P/J51 P514 J514 Step (2 phases)
B36
I/L +24VDC
5 1 Phase
B37
TMOT_K_A
4 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TMOT_K_B
B38 3 3 M
B39
TMOT_K_XA
2 4
A * * * *
TMOT_K_XB
B40 1 5
B * * * *
Ida_Sec007_006FB XA * * * *
XB * * * *
Figure 7-15. Developer Section 2 Connection and Wiring Diagram

6. Fuser section
PWBA
MCU IDTN

+5VDC HARNESS ASSY TMP
RHV Humidity data inside the printer (analog value) P/J24
+5VDC
J231
4 1
RHV
TH2 Temperature data inside the printer (analog value) 3 2
SG SENSOR HUM
2 3
EXIT PAPER Paper detection signal by the Exit Sensor in the FUSER 1
TH2
4
SENSED(L)+3.3VDC ASSY(Low: paper present)
+3.3VDC
FUSER ASSY
EEPROM DATA EEPROM control signal HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC
P/J36 J361 P361 P323 J323 P/J327
EEPROM CLOCK EEPROM control signal 6
PULL UP +3.3VDC
A7 A1 3 1 3
SG
7 A6 A2 2 2 2
NSC VD Temperature data of the temperature control sensor (analog value) 8
EXIT PAPER SENSED(L)+3.3VDC
A5 A3 1 3 1
Exit Sensor
NSC VC Temperature data of the temperature control sensor (analog value) +3.3VDC P/J36 J361 P361 P/J144
EEPROM DATA
9 A4 A4 4
FUSER STS Temperature data of the high temperature detection sensor (analog EEPROM CLOCK
10 A3 A5 3 Fuser
value) 11
+3.3VDC
A2 A6 2 EEPROM
SG
12 A1 A7 1
HEAT1 Control signal for the Main Lamp in the FUSER ASSY
xHEAT1 (Lamp lights at High: HEAT1, Low: xHEAT1 ) P/J36 J361 P361 P331 J331
NCS_VD
15 B4 B3 1 3
NCS_VC
14 B5 B2 2 2
HEAT2 Control signal for the Sub Lamp in the FUSER ASSY SG
Fuser NCS
13 B6 B1 3 1
xHEAT2 (Lamp lights at High: HEAT1, Low: xHEAT1 )
P/J36 J361 P361 P321 J321
FUSER_STS
16 B3 B4 2 1 STS
SG
17 B2 B5 1 2
P/J61
xHEAT1
12
HEAT1
13
10
11 HARNESS ASSY LV
HEAT2
xHEAT2

LVPS Heater
P/J165 P/J162 P/J361 P3613
AC N SUB
9 6 4 1
Heater AC N MAIN
8 4 1 1
Control
7 P3611
AC L(230V)
6 2 3 P3612 Thermostat
AC L(120V)
1 2 1
P/J160 1 3
HARNESS
ASSY AC
INLET
Ida_Sec007_007FB
Figure 7-16. Fuser Section Connection and Wiring Diagram

Rated voltage of the Heater

Main: 550 ± 27.5 W (120 VAC/230 VAC)
Sub: 330 ± 15.0 W (120 VAC/230 VAC)
165
Temperature for the Thermostat to disconnect the contact point: 180 ± 5 degree C
162
160
231
24
61
361 36
Ida_07_018B

7. ROS section
PWBA MCU IDTN ROS ASSY
Name of Signal Line Remarks HARNESS ASSY ROS QBLD PWB Scanner
P/J15 P/J151 P/J152 Motor
XPDATA_A_Y Pixel data singal to make the Quad Beam Laser Diode, which is 20
XPDATA_A_Y
1 1
XPDATA_B_M
XPDATA_B_M provided for each of the four colors, in the ROS ASSY emit light 19 2 2
XPDATA_C_C
XPDATA_C_C 18
XPDATA_D_K
3 3
XPDATA_D_K 17 4 4 M
MO_A_Y
16 5 5
MO_B_M
MO_A_Y LD light intensity adjutment control signal for each color 15 6 6
MO_C_C
MO_B_M 14
MO_D_K
7 7
13 8
MO_C_C VL1_A_Y
12 9
MO_D_K 11
VL1_B_M
10 P/J153 SOS PWB
VL1_C_C
VL1_A_Y LD light intensity adjustment voltage for each color 10
VL1_D_K
11 1 1
9 12 2 2
VL1_B_M SG
8 13 3 3
VL1_C_C 7
LD_+5V
14
Interlock SCANNER MOTOR CLOCK
VL1_D_K +24VDC 6 15
SOS SENSED(L) +3.3VDC
5 16
LD_+5VDC The line to supply +5 VDC to the ROS ASSY from the PWBA 4
I/L +24VDC
17
MCU IDTN by way of the PHD ASSY SG
3 18
SCANNER MOTOR ON(L)+5VDC
2 19
SOS SENSED(L) Scanning start reference signal generated according to the laser SG
1 20
+3.3VDC beam that enters the SOS Sensor in the SOS PWB
SCANNER MOTOR Scanner Motor ON/OFF control signal in the ROS ASSY
ON(L)+5VDC HARNESS ASSY FAN/PHD/MOT
CRUM DATA CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC write/read data P/J48
LD_+5V
P484 J484 P/J710
B18 6 1 6 CONN_ASSY_
CRUM CLOCK CONN_ASSY_CRUM_MC clock frequency CRUM DATA
+3.3VDC B19 5 2 5 CRUM_MC
CRUM CLOCK
B20 4 3 4
+3.3VDC
+5VDC B21 3 4 3
SG
B22 2 5 2
+5VDC
B23 1 6 1
HARNESS ASSY PHD2
Ida_Sec007_008FB
Figure 7-17. ROS Section Connection and Wiring Diagram

484
151
710
15
48
Ida_07_019B

8. Xerographic section 1

BTR_TONER_FULL(L)+3 Waste toner bottle full detection signal by the SENSOR TNR
.3VDC FULL
ADC_VOUT Measured data by the ADC Sensor in the HOLDER ASSY CTD
(analog value)
ADC_MON Monitor output signal by the ADC Sensor in the HOLDER ASSY
CTD
GLED LED control signal in the HOLDER ASSY CTD (analog value)
CLOCK PWBA EEPROM clock frequency 144
DATA PWBA EEPROM write/read data
PWBA MCU IDTN
+5VDC HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC

P/J36 P/J136
+5VDC
1 5
ADC_VOUT 136
2 4
3
GLED
3 142 36
HOLDER ASSY CTD
ADC_VMON
4 2
SG
5 1
+5VDC
HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR
P/J52 P/J142
13
+5VDC
1
191
BTR_TONER_FULL(L)+3.3VDC 52
12 2 SENSOR TNR FULL
SG
11 3
Ida_07_020B
+3.3VDC
HARNESS ASSY EEPROM
P/J191 P/J144
+3.3VDC
3 2
SG
4 1
CLOCK PWBA EEPROM
2 3
DATA
1 4
Ida_07_009A
Figure 7-18. Xerographic Section 1 Connection and Wiring Diagram

9. Xerographic section 2
PWBA MCU IDTN HVPS

Interlock RG
CLOCK Control signal for taking in the data sent from the PWBA MCU +24VDC
HARNESS ASSY HVPS TR
P/J16 P/J141 ID2
IDTN into the HVPS 1
I/L +24VDC
8
+5VDC CL2
SG
DATA Control signal for adjusting output value and output timing of the 2
+5V
7 ID1
+3.3VDC 3 6 CL1
HVPS 4
SG
5 RF
+3.3V
5 4 CF
HV_MON_BTR_V Voltage monitor signal for the BTR output (analog value) 6
CLOCK
3 DA
DATA
IDT2 Output for second transfer from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU 7
HV_MON_BTR_V
2 DB
8 1 DC
IDTN to the IDT2 DD
IDT2 CLEANER Output from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU IDTN to the IDT2
DEVE K
Cleaner DEVE C
DEVE M
IDT1 Output for primary transfer from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU DEVE Y
IDTN to the IDT1 HTC
RFB
IDT1 CLEANER Output from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU IDTN to the IDT1 IDT1 CLEANER
Cleaner IDT1
IDT2 CLEANER
RFB Output from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU IDTN to the Refresher IDT2
BTR
HTC Output for charging from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU IDTN to REG ROLL
the HTC
BTR ASSY
DEVE Y Output from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU IDTN to the
Developer Y (Magnet Roll)
DEVE M Output from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU IDTN to the IDT1
Developer M (Magnet Roll)

IDT2 BTR
DEVE C Output from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU IDTN to the
Developer C (Magnet Roll)
IDT1
DEVE K Output from the HVPS in the PWBA MCU IDTN to the CHUTE ASSY REGI
Developer K (Magnet Roll)

BTR Output for third transfer from the HVPS to the BTR in the BTR
ASSY PHD ASSY
REG ROLL Output for third transfer from the HVPS to the Regi Roll in the Ida_07_010A
CHUTE ASSY REGI

Figure 7-19. Xerographic Section 2 Connection and Wiring Diagram

141
16
Ida_07_021B

10. Paper Feeder Section

PWBA MCU IDTN

+3.3VDC
DUP JAM Paper detection signal of the duplex section by the SENSOR DUP HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP
SENSED(H)+3.3VDC JAM (High: paper present) P/J13 P/J133
PULL UP +3.3VDC
7 3
FULL STACK Full stack detection signal of the paper eject section by the SG SENSOR DUP JAM
8 2
SENSED(L)+3.3VDC SENSOR FULL STACK (Low: paper full) 9
DUP JAM SENSED(H)+3.3VDC
1
+3.3VDC
MSI NO PAPER Detection signal for paper in the manual cassette by the SENSOR
SENSED(H)+3.3VDC NO PAPER (High: no paper) P/J13 P/J134
PULL UP +3.3VDC
10 3
MSI FEED SOL SOLENOID FEED MSI ON/OFF control signal SG SENSOR FULL STACK
11 2
ON(L)+24VDC 12
FULL STACK SENSED(L)+3.3VDC
1
REGI PAPER Paper detection signal of the registration section by the SENSOR +3.3VDC
SENSED(L)+3.3VDC REGI P/J13 P/J135

PULL UP +3.3VDC
13 3
REGI CLUTCH Regi Clutch ON/OFF control signal in the CHUTE REGI ASSY SG SENSOR NO PAPER
14 2
ON(L)+24VDC 15
MSI NO PAPER SENSED(H)+3.3VDC
1
MSI TURN CLUTCH CLUTCH TURN (MSI) ON/OFF control signal

ON(L)+24VDC Interlock
+24VDC
P/J13 P132 J132
I/L +24VDC SOLENOID
16 2 1
MSI FEED SOL ON(L)+24VDC FEED MSI
17 1 2
+3.3VDC
HARNESS ASSY REGISNS
P/J18 P/J181
PULL UP +3.3VDC
1 3
SG SENSOR REGI
2 2
REGI PAPER SENSED(L)+3.3VDC
3 1
HARNESS ASSY OHP MCU HARNESS ASSY SENSOR OHP

P/J20 P200 J200 P/J201
PWM
1 4 1 4
SG
2 3 2 3
S2 SENSOR OHP
3 2 3 2
S1
4 1 4 1
Interlock
+24VDC HARNESS ASSY FRONTCLH
P/J19 P191 J191
I/L +24VDC CLUTCH TURN
1 2 1
MSI TURN CLUTCH ON(L)+24VDC (MSI)
2 1 2
Interlock
+24VDC
P/J19 P192 J192
I/L +24VDC CLUTCH REGI
3 3 1
REGI CLUTCH ON(L)+24VDC
4 2 2
5 1 3 NC
Ida_07_011C
Figure 7-20. Paper Feeder Connection and Wiring Diagram

134
20
18 19
13
132
133
201 192
200 181 191
135
Ida_07_022B

11. Controller Section
PWBA MCU IDTN PWB CONTROLLER

(PWB ESS)
P/J14
1
60
CONSOLE PANEL
HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE2

P/J22 P/J220
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
Ida_Sec007_012FB
Figure 7-21. Controller Section Connection and Wiring Diagram

550-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT
1. Drive section
17
TXD Communication signal between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the
RXD PWBA OPTFDR 1T
171
PWBA MCU IDTN PWBA OPTFDR 1T
Interlock Interlock 83
+24VDC HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG +24VDC
P/J17 P171 J171 P/J83 P/J82
I/L+24VDC I/L +24VDC
10 1 10 1 1
SG FDR_A
9 2 9 2 2
I/L+24VDC FDR_B
+3.3VDC 8 3 8 3 +3.3VDC 3 82
SG FDR_XA
7 4 7 4 4 Ida_1T_07_104B
SG FDR_XB
6 5 6 5 5
+3.3VDC
5 6 5 6 DRIVE ASSY
SG
4 7 4 7
TRY_SNS
3
2
TXD
8 3
9 2
8
9
DRIVE ASSY Overview
RXD
1 10 1 10
Motor type: Hybrid stepping motor
HARNESS ASSY OPFREC
Ida_Sec007_102FB
Step angle: 1.8×± 0.09×
Coil resistance: 1.8 Ω ± 10%/phase (25 degree C)
Step (2 phases)
Phase
1 2 3 4
FDR_A * *
FDR_B * *
FDR_XA * *
FDR_XB * *

2. Cassette section
PWBA OPTFDR 1T
SWITCH ASSY
Name of Signal Line Remarks HARNESS ASSY SIZE
SIZE
P/J80 P/J821
OPTION TRAY2 SIZE0 ON(L) +3.3VDC
OPTION TRAY2 SIZE0 ON/OFF detection signal for the upper switch on the SWITCH 1 4
ON(L)+3.3VDC ASSY SIZE 2
3
4 1
SG
OPTION TRAY2 SIZE1 ON/OFF detection signal for the middle switch on the SWITCH 3 2
ON(L)+3.3VDC ASSY SIZE 5 NC
OPTION TRAY2 SIZE2 ON/OFF detection signal for the lower switch on the SWITCH
ON(L)+3.3VDC ASSY SIZE +3.3VDC
HARNESS ASSY LOWP

OPTION TRAY2 NO Detection signal for the remaining amount of paper in the cassette P/J81 P/J823
PULL UP +3.3VDC
PAPER ON(H)+3.3VDC by the SENSOR NO PAPER (High: no paper) 1
SG
3
2 2
OPTION TRAY2 LOW Detection signal for the remaining amount of paper in the cassette 3
OPTION TRAY2 LOW PAPER ON(H) +3.3VDC
1
PAPER ON(H)+3.3VDC by the SENSOR LOW PAPER (High: the remaining amount is SENSOR LOW PAPER
low) Interlock
+24VDC
OPTION TRAY2 FEED Solenoid Feed ON/OFF control signal HARNESS ASSY OPFDR
ON(L)+24VDC P/J85
I/L +24VDC
P825 J825
1 2 1
OPTION TRAY2_TURN ON(L) +24VDC
OPTION TRAY2 TURN CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC ON/OFF control signal 2 1 2
CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC
+24VDC
P/J85 P824 J824

I/L +24VDC
3 2 1
OPTION TRAY2 FEED ON(L) +24VDC
4 1 2
SOLENOID FEED
+3.3VDC
P/J85 P/J822
PULL UP +3.3VDC
5 3
SG
6 2
OPTION TRAY2 NO PAPER ON(H) +3.3VDC
7 1
HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG2 SENSOR NO PAPER

P/J84 P/J172
RXD
1 10
TXD
+3.3VDC 2 9
TRY_SNS_2
3 8
SG
4 7
+3.3VDC
5 6
SG To 2 Tray Option Feeder Unit
Interlock 6 5
+24VDC SG
7 4
I/L +24VDC
8 3
SG
9 2
I/L +24VDC
10 1
11 NC
Ida_1T_07_103B
Figure 7-23. Cassette Section Connection and Wiring Diagram


81 The combination of the upper, middle , and lower switch ON/OFF conditions of
84 the SWITCH ASSY SIZE determines the paper size.
Switch
Paper Size
80 Upper Middle Lower
822 85 LEGAL14"(SEF) ON ON ON
B5(SEF) ON OFF OFF
A4(SEF) OFF ON ON
A5 OFF ON OFF
821
824
825
823 172
Ida_1T_07_105B

1. Drive section
17
TXD Communication signal between the PWBA MCU IDTN and the
RXD PWBA OPTFDR 1T
PWBA MCU IDTN PWBA OPTFDR 2T 171
172
Interlock Interlock
+24VDC HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG +24VDC
P/J17 P171 J172 P/J83 P/J82
I/L+24VDC I/L +24VDC
10 1 10 1 1 172
SG FDR_A
9 2 9 2 2
I/L+24VDC FDR_B
+3.3VDC 8 3 8 3 +3.3VDC 3
SG FDR_XA
7 4 7 4 4
SG FDR_XB
6 5 6 5 5
+3.3VDC
5 6 5 6 DRIVE ASSY 2ND
SG
4 7 4 7 83
TRY_SNS
3 8 3 8
TXD
2 9 2 9
RXD
1 10 1 10
HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 82
P172 J172 P/J83 Ida_2T_07_205B

1 10 1
2 9 2
3 8 3
4 7 4
From Single Feeder Unit 5 6 5 DRIVE ASSY 2ND Overview
6 5 6
7 4 7 Motor type: Hybrid stepping motor
8 3 8
9 2 9 Step angle: 1.8×± 0.09×
10 1 10
Coil resistance: 1.8Ω ± 10%phase (25 degree C)
Ida_Sec007_202FB

Step (2 phases)
Phase
1 2 3 4
FDR_A * *
FDR_B * *
FDR_XA * *
FDR_XB * *

2. Cassette 2 section
PWBA OPTFDR 2T
SWITCH ASSY
Name of Signal Line Remarks HARNESS ASSY SIZE2
SIZE
P/J80 P/J821
OPTION TRAY2 SIZE0 ON/OFF detection signal for the upper switch on the SWITCH 1 4
ON(L)+3.3VDC ASSY SIZE 2
3
4 1
SG
OPTION TRAY2 SIZE1 ON/OFF detection signal for the middle switch on the SWITCH 3 2
ON(L)+3.3VDC ASSY SIZE 5 NC
OPTION TRAY2 SIZE2 ON/OFF detection signal for the lower switch on the SWITCH
ON(L)+3.3VDC ASSY SIZE +3.3VDC
HARNESS ASSY LOWP2

OPTION TRAY2 NO Detection signal for the remaining amount of paper in the cassette P/J81 P/J823
PULL UP +3.3VDC
SG
3
2 2
OPTION TRAY2 LOW Detection signal for the remaining amount of paper in the cassette 3
1
PAPER ON(H)+3.3VDC by the SENSOR LOW PAPER (High: the remaining amount is SENSOR LOW PAPER
low) Interlock
+24VDC
OPTION TRAY2 FEED Solenoid Feed ON/OFF control signal HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2
ON(L)+24VDC P/J85
I/L +24VDC
P825 J825
1 2 1
OPTION TRAY2 TURN CLUTCH ASSY TURN ON/OFF control signal 2 1 2
CLUTCH ASSY
+24VDC
P/J85 P824 J824

I/L +24VDC
3 2 1
4 1 2
SOLENOID FEED
+3.3VDC
P/J85 P/J822
PULL UP +3.3VDC
5 3
SG
6 2
7 1
HARNESS ASSY OPF23 SENSOR NO PAPER

P/J84 P/J83
RXD
1 10
TXD
+3.3VDC 2 9
TRY_SNS_2
3 8
SG
4 7
+3.3VDC
5 6
SG
Interlock 6 5
+24VDC SG
7 4
I/L +24VDC
8 3
SG
9 2
I/L +24VDC
10 1
11 NC
Ida_Sec007_203FB
Figure 7-25. Cassette 2 Section


81 The combination of the upper, middle, and lower switch ON/OFF conditions of
84
822 80 Switch
85 Paper Size
823
825 Upper Middle Lower
B5(SEF) ON OFF OFF
821 A4(SEF) OFF ON ON
824
A5 OFF ON OFF
83
Ida_2T_07_206B

3. Cassette 3 section
HARNESS ASSY
PWBA OPF23 PWBA SWITCH ASSY
OPTFDR 2T OPTFDR 2T SIZE
HARNESS ASSY SIZE2
Name of Signal Line Remarks P/J84 P/J83 P/J80 P/J821
1 10 1 4
OPTION TRAY3 SIZE0 ON/OFF detection signal for the upper switch on the SWITCH 2 9 2
3
ON(L)+3.3VDC ASSY SIZE 3 8 4
1
SG
4 7 3 2
OPTION TRAY3 SIZE1 ON/OFF detection signal for the middle switch on the SWITCH 5 6 5 NC
7 4
OPTION TRAY3 SIZE2 ON/OFF detection signal for the lower switch on the SWITCH 8 3 +3.3VDC
HARNESS ASSY LOWP2
10 1 P/J81 P/J823
OPTION TRAY3 NO Detection signal for the remaining amount of paper in the cassette 11 NC 1
PULL UP +3.3VDC
3
SG
2
3 1
OPTION TRAY3 LOW Detection signal for the remaining amount of paper in the cassette SENSOR LOW PAPER
PAPER ON(H)+3.3VDC by the SENSOR LOW PAPER (High: the remaining amount is Interlock
low) +24VDC
HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2
P/J85 P825 J825
OPTION TRAY3 FEED Solenoid Feed ON/OFF control signal 1
I/L +24VDC
2 1
ON(L)+24VDC 2
1 2
CLUTCH ELECTRO
OPTION TRAY3 TURN CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC ON/OFF control signal Interlock MAGNETIC
+24VDC
ON(L)+24VDC
P/J85 P824 J824
I/L +24VDC
3 2 1
4 1 2
SOLENOID FEED
+3.3VDC
P/J85 P/J822
PULL UP +3.3VDC
5 3
SG
6 2
7 1
SENSOR NO PAPER
Ida_2T_07_204A
Figure 7-26. Cassette 3 Section


The combination of the upper, middle, and lower switch ON/OFF conditions of
84
Switch
Paper Size
Upper Middle Lower
B5(SEF) ON OFF OFF
A4(SEF) OFF ON ON
A5 OFF ON OFF
81
83
823
825 80
822 85
824
821 Ida_2T_07_207B

7.5 Service Parts List Table 7-9. Main Unit

Ref No. Part Name
Parts list for EPSON AcuLaser C4200 02-01-11 CHUTE TURN CST
02-01-13 ROLL ASSY RETARD
MAIN UNIT
02-01-16 HOLDER RETARD
Table 7-9. Main Unit 02-01-17 SPRING RETARD
Ref No. Part Name 03-01-10 SCREW M3X110
01-01-01 COVER ASSY TOP 03-02-03 STOPPER CST
01-01-02 COVER TOP 03-02-04 FOOT
01-01-03 COVER TOP STOPPER 03-02-05 SWITCH ASSY SIZE
01-01-04 COVER TOP MAIN 03-02-11 HARNESS ASSY OPFPLG
01-01-05 CONTROL PANEL 03-02-12 CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
01-01-06 COVER ASSY FRONT HEAD 03-02-13 COVER CST
01-01-08 COVER ASSY TOP PHD 03-02-80 KIT FEEDER L
01-01-12 LATCH TOP L 03-02-81 KIT FEEDER R
01-01-14 LATCH TOP IR R 03-03-01 PICK UP ASSY
01-01-15 LATCH TOP R 03-03-02 ROLL ASSY TURN
01-01-18 COVER REAR 03-03-07 EXIT SENSOR
01-01-19 FAN REAR 03-03-11 SOLENOID FEED
01-01-20 COVER SIDE R ASSY 03-03-14 ACTUATOR LOW PAPER
01-01-22 COVER FRONT R 03-03-18 ROLL ASSY FEED
01-01-23 TRAY ASSY MSI BASE 03-03-20 ACTUATOR NO PAPER
01-01-25 COVER ASSY MSI 03-03-22 HARNESS ASSY FDR
01-01-26 TRAY MSI SLIDE 04-01-01 ACTUATOR REGI
01-01-28 COVER FRONT L ASSY 04-01-03 SENSOR UPPER PASS
01-01-30 COVER SIDE L ASSY 04-01-08 SENSOR OHP
02-01-01 CASSETTE ASSY 500 04-01-13 HOLDER ASSY RETARD
02-01-04 SPRING N/F 04-01-20 CHUTE ASSY REGI IN
02-01-05 GUIDE SIDE L 04-02-01 CHUTE ASSY REGI
02-01-07 GUIDE SIDE R 04-02-04 ROLL REGI RUBBER
02-01-08 GUIDE END 04-02-07 CLUTCH REGI
02-01-10 ACTUATOR SIZE 04-02-09 CLUTCH TURN
APPENDIX Service Parts List 516

Table 7-9. Main Unit Table 7-9. Main Unit

Ref No. Part Name Ref No. Part Name
04-02-10 ROLL TURN MSI 06-01-02 ROS ASSY
05-01-05 STRAP 06-01-07 HSG ASSY BIAS
05-02-01 CHUTE ASSY DUP IN 07-01-17 DEVE ASSY(Y)
05-02-11 LATCH L 07-01-18 DEVE ASSY(M)
05-02-19 HOLDER ASSY CTD 07-01-19 DEVE ASSY(C)
05-02-20 SENSOR TNR FULL 07-01-20 DEVE ASSY(K)
05-02-25 DRIVE ASSY FUSER 07-02-01 DISPENSER ASSY(Y)
05-02-26 WIRE ASSY FSR EARTH 07-02-02 DISPENSER ASSY(M)
05-02-27 LATCH R 07-02-03 DISPENSER ASSY(C)
05-02-28 HARNESS ASSY FSR/ADC 07-02-04 DISPENSER ASSY(K)
05-02-30 HARNESS ASSY TNRFULL/FSR 07-02-05 SENSOR NO TNR
05-02-80 KIT ROLL PINCH DUP 07-02-12 BOX ASSY CRUM READER
05-02-81 KIT ROLL PINCH TURN 07-02-16 HARNESS ASSY FDID2
05-03-01 CHUTE ASSY DUP OUT 07-02-17 HARNESS ASSY FDID
05-03-09 SOLENOID FEED MSI 07-02-18 HARNESS ASSY TMR
05-03-14 SENSOR UPPER PASS 08-01-01 DRIVE ASSY DEVE
05-03-15 ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI 08-01-02 DRIVE ASSY MAIN
05-03-20 ROLL ASSY FEED 09-01-06 LVPS 230V
05-03-27 HARNESS ASSY OPEPANE SE 09-01-07 HARNESS ASSY AC INLET
05-03-28 HARNESS ASSY FRONT/DUP 09-01-12 PWBA EEPROM
05-03-29 WIRE ASSY DUP EARTH 09-01-13 CLAMP GUIDE HARNESS
05-03-31 FAN FRONT 09-01-16 PWBA MCU IDTN
05-03-38 PLATE EARTH OUT3 09-01-20 SENSOR HUM
05-04-01 SENSOR UPPER PASS 09-01-21 HVPS
05-04-02 ACTUATOR FULL STACK 09-02-02 "BOARD ASSY., MAIN"
05-04-05 MOTOR ASSY DUP 17PM 09-02-03 "BOARD ASSY.,MEMORY"
05-04-13 ACTUATOR DUP 09-02-04 PANEL ESS L
05-04-15 ROLL DUP 09-02-05 PANEL ESS R
05-04-16 ROLL EXIT 09-02-23 GUIDE RAIL
05-04-80 KIT ROLL PINCH EXIT 09-02-24 NETWORK BOARD

550-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT Table 7-10. 550-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT
Ref No. Part Name
Table 7-10. 550-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT
01-04-10 ACTUATOR SIZE
Ref No. Part Name 01-04-11 CHUTE TURN CST
01-01-06 HARNESS ASSY OPFREC 01-04-13 ROLL ASSY RETARD
01-01-10 PWBA OPTFDR 1T 01-04-16 HOLDER RETARD
01-01-11 COVER RIGHT 01-04-17 SPRING RETARD
01-01-15 CHUTE ASSY FEEDER
01-01-16 COVER LEFT
01-01-17 COVER CST
01-01-18 SPRING EARTH
01-02-01 FEEDER ASSY LEFT
01-02-04 FOOT
01-02-05 FEEDER ASSY RIGHT
01-02-06 SWITCH ASSY SIZE
01-02-08 HARNESS ASSY SIZE
01-03-01 PICK UP ASSY
01-03-02 ROLL ASSY TURN
01-03-04 CLUTCH ELECTRO MAGNETIC
01-03-07 EXIT SENSOR
01-03-11 SOLENOID FEED
01-03-15 DRIVE ASSY
01-03-16 ACTUATOR LOW PAPER
01-03-20 ROLL ASSY FEED
01-03-22 ACTUATOR NO PAPER
01-03-24 HARNESS ASSY OPFDR
01-03-25 HARNESS ASSY LOWP
01-04-01 CASSETTE ASSY 500
01-04-04 SPRING N/F
01-04-05 GUIDE SIDE L
01-04-07 GUIDE SIDE R
01-04-08 GUIDE END

1100-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT Table 7-11. 1100-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT
Ref No. Part Name
Table 7-11. 1100-SHEET PAPER CASSETTE UNIT
Ref No. Part Name 01-05-07 EXIT SENSOR
01-01-02 COVER ASSY LEFT 01-05-11 SOLENOID FEED
01-01-03 COVER ASSY RIGHT 01-05-14 ACTUATOR LOW PAPER
01-01-04 CASTER ASSY-S 01-05-18 ROLL ASSY FEED
01-01-06 COVER ASSY FRONT 01-05-20 ACTUATOR NO PAPER
01-01-08 CASTER ASSY 01-05-80 KIT PICK UP ASSY 4TH
01-01-13 FOOT ASSY A 01-06-01 CASSETTE ASSY 500
01-01-14 FOOT ASSY B 01-06-04 SPRING N/F
01-02-01 FEEDER ASSY LEFT 01-06-05 GUIDE SIDE L
01-02-04 FEEDER ASSY RIGHT 01-06-07 GUIDE SIDE R
01-02-06 SWITCH ASSY SIZE 01-06-08 GUIDE END
01-02-07 CHUTE ASSY FEEDER 01-06-10 ACTUATOR SIZE
01-03-01 HARNESS ASSY OPFREC2 01-06-11 CHUTE TURN CST
01-03-03 PWBA OPTFDR2T 01-06-13 ROLL ASSY RETARD
01-03-04 HARNESS ASSY OPF23 01-06-16 HOLDER RETARD
01-03-05 HARNESS ASSY SIZE2 01-06-17 SPRING RETARD
01-03-06 HARNESS ASSY LOWP
01-03-07 HARNESS ASSY OPFDR2
01-03-09 DRIVE ASSY 2ND
01-03-12 SPRING EARTH
01-04-07 EXIT SENSOR
01-04-11 SOLENOID FEED
01-04-15 ACTUATOR LOW PAPER
01-04-19 ROLL ASSY FEED
01-04-21 ACTUATOR NO PAPER
01-04-80 KIT PICK UP ASSY 3RD

7.6 Exploded diagram

MAIN UNIT
(Total: 18 pages)
APPENDIX Exploded diagram 520

C 600-C AS E -001 T he parts to which no reference number
is as s igned will not be available as
after-s ale s ervice parts .
1 (with 2, 3)
2 3
P L5.3.27 5
(P 220)
(J 220)
6 4
18
12
30
19
14
15
(J 166)
20
22
23
28
25
26
Ida_05_001A
F OR E P S ON AcuLas erC 4200DN(1.1) R ev.01 C 600

C 600-E LE C -001 T he parts to which no reference number
24
23 21
Ida_05_018B

C 600-ME C H-001 T he parts to which no reference number
1 (including all this page)
4 8
5 4
7 10
10
10
13 11
16
17
Ida_05_002A

10
10
10
[R ef P L3.3.1]
Ida_05_003A

13
5
80 P L3.3.22 (P 471)
(J 471)
4 12 4
(J 17)
4
81 11
(P 171)
Ida_05_004A

1 (including all number except 22)
7 NO P AP E R (P 472)
S E NS OR
18
20
(P 473)
18 7 LOW PAP E R
S E NS OR
11 (J 474)
14
(J 47)
22
(J 473)
(J 471)
(J 472)
(P 474)
Ida_S ec05_005G B

[R ef P L4.2.1]
(J 19)
(P 192)
(J 192)
a
(P 191)
1 (J 191)
3 S E NS OR R E G I
(J 181)
20
(P 181)
(J 18)
8 S E NS OR
13 OHP
(P 201)
(J 20)
(J 201)
Ida_05_006A

1 (including all this page+P L4.1.a)
(P 192)
(J 192)
9 (P 191)
P L4.1.a
(J 191)
10
Ida_05_007A

(J 361)
P L5.2.28
(P 361)
[R ef P L5.2.1]
[R ef P L5.3.1]
Ida_05_008A

1 ( including all number except 80,81 ) (J 361)
28
(J 136)
(J 36)
(J 162)
19
27 80
(P 136)
25 (with 26)
(J 234)
26 11
(P 521)
(J 235)
30
(P 142)
(J 521)
(J 142)
20 TONE R F ULL
S E NS OR
81
(J 52)
Ida_05_009A

1 ( including all this page, P L5.4,P L10.1.9 )
(J 220)
(C N2)
31 27
(J 134)
[R ef P L5.4] (P 501)
(J 133)
(J 482)
P L10.1.9
(P 482)
(J 22)
(C N1)
(J 135)
(J 13)
28
(P 132)
38 (J 1322)
(J 1321)
9 29
(P 135)
(J 132)
15 14
MS I NO P AP E R
S E NS OR
20
Ida_05_010C

80
P L5.3.28
(P 134) P L5.3.28
(P 501)
(J 134)
1 F ULL S TAC K (J 501)

S E NS OR 5
2
16
15
13
(J 133)
1 J AM S E NS OR
P L5.3.28
(P 133)
Ida_05_011A

2
(J 151)
[R ef P L7.1]
(J 15)
Ida_05_012A

P L10.1.9 after-s ale s ervice parts .
(P 484)
(J 484)
(J 710)
17
18
19
20
Ida_05_013A

T he parts to which no reference number
C 600-ME C H-013 is as s igned will not be available as
(P 701) (Y )
(P 702) (M)
(P 703) (C ) 5 NO TONE R
(P 704) (K ) S E NS OR
(J 511) (Y )
(J 512) (M)
(J 513) (C )
(J 514) (K )
1 (Y ) , 2 (M) , 3 (C ) , 4 (K )
12
(P 341)
(P 342)
(J 704)
(J 703)
(J 702)
(J 701)
(P 514)
(J 342) (P 513)
(P 512)
(J 341) (P 511)
16
(J 3411 )
18
(P 3411)
17
(J 51)
(J 34)
Ida_05_014B
(P 491)
(J 491)
P L10.1.9
(P 481)
(J 481)
P L10.1.9
2
Ida_05_015B

[R ef P L9.2]
23
21
6
7
(J 160)
(P 144)
(J 144)
(J 161)
P L10.1.8
P L10.1.4
12
13 13
(P 231)
13
(J 231)
20 13
16
Ida_05_016C

(HV P S )
[R ef P L9.1.21] (R G )
(T R ) (P 161)
(P 166)
(P 163)
(P 167)
(P 141) (P 165)
(P WB A MC U IDT N) (P 164)
[R ef P L9.1.16]
(P 31)
(P 311) (P 162)
(P 34) (P 15) (P 61)
(P 154) (P 14) (P 51)
(P 16) (P 36)
(P 24) (P 22) (P 160)
(P 30)
(P 21) (P 17)
(P 18) (P 60)
(P 20) (P 19) [R ef P L9.1.6]
(P 13) (P 47)
(P 52) (LV P S 100/120V /
(P 191)
(P 48) LV P S 230V )
(J 163)
1
(J 165)
6
(J 60)
2 (J 164)
7 (J 1911)
(J 61)
3 (J 231)
8
(J 311) (P 482)
(J 191) (P 484)
4 (J 141)
(J 24) (J 481)
5
(J 48)
(J 16) (J 491)
9 Ida_05_017A

(Total: 4 pages)

C 802-OP T I-138 T he parts to which no reference number
(J 171)
(J 83)
6
18
[R ef P L11.3.1]
(P 81)
(P 84)
(P 85)
(P 83) P L11.3.25
10 (P 82)
(J 81)
(P 80)
(J 85)
17 (P 86) P L11.3.24
(J 80)
[R ef P L11.2.1] (J 82)
P L11.2.8
P L11.3.15
16
[R ef P L11.2.5]
15 11
(J 84)
(P 172)
[R ef P L11.4.1]
Ida_1T _05_101B
F OR 550-S heet P aper C as s ette Unit(1.1) R ev.01

(J 80)
(J 821)
6
1
(P 821)
Ida_S ec05_102G A

(J 85)
1 ( including all number except 15,24,25 )

(J 822)
2 (P 824) 24
(P 825)
(J 825)
7 NO PAP E R
S E NS OR
(P 822)
20
22
(P 823)
20
7 LOW PAP E R
S E NS OR
11 (J 824)
16 (J 82)
15
(J 81)
(J 823)
25
Ida_1T _05_103A

8
4
5 4
7 10
10
10
13 11
16
17
Ida_1T _05_002A

(Total: 6 pages)

6
3
14
6
4
4
8
13
8
13
[R ef P L12.6.1]
14
[R ef P L12.6.1]
Ida_2T _05_201D

T he parts to which no reference number
C 802-OP T I-143 is as s igned will not be available as
1
4
(P 821)
(J 821)
P L12.3.5
7
1
4
(P 821)
(J 821)
P L12.3.5
7
Ida_2T _05_202A

(P 81)
(P 84)
(P 83)
(P 80) (P 85)
(P 82)
(P 86)
(J 81)
(J 172)
12 (J 80)
5
(J 85)
1 3
(J 84) (J 821)
(J 822)
(J 83)
4 6
(P 824)
(J 823)
(J 83)
(P 825) 7
(J 81)
(J 80)
5 (J 85)
3
(J 822) (J 821)
6
(P 824)
(J 823)
(P 825) 7
(J 82)
9
Ida_2T _05_203A

(J 825)
(P 825)
P L12.3.7
7 NO PAP E R
P L12.3.7
S E NS OR
(P 822)
(J 822)
19
21
P L12.3.6
19
7 (P 823) (J 823)
P L12.3.7
LOW PAP E R
S E NS OR
15
(P 824)
11 (J 824)
Ida_2T _05_204B

(J 825)
4
(P 825)
P L12.3.7
7 NO PAP E R
P L12.3.7
S E NS OR
(P 822)
(J 822)
18
20
P L12.3.6
18
7 (P 823) (J 823)
P L12.3.7
LOW PAP E R
S E NS OR
14
(P 824)
11 (J 824)
Ida_2T _05_205C

8
4
5 4
7 10
10
10
13 11
16
17
Ida_2T _05_002A

7.7 Circuit Diagram

C600 Main Board (Total: 6 pages)
APPENDIX Circuit Diagram 551

GND
Model : AcuLaser C4200

Note; Parts encircled in dotted lines are not installed.
Board : C600 Main
Rev. :A
Sheet : 1/6
Board : C600 Main
Rev. :A
Sheet : 2/6
Board : C600 Main
Rev. :A
Sheet : 3/6

Board : C600 Main
Rev. :A
Sheet : 4/6

Board : C600 Main
Rev. :A
Sheet : 5/6

Board : C600 Main
Rev. :A
Sheet : 6/6

Epson Aculaser c4200 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Epson Aculaser c4200 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

A4 Full Color Laser Printer

EPSON AcuLaser C4200

Copyright © 2005 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

WARNING Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.

Manual Configuration Symbols Used in this Manual

[A] [D] [I]

(to continue to next page)

Power Supply Mechanical Components

High Temperature Assembly

W A R N IN G As the inside of the printer is high-temperature state immediately

 Caution Label for High-temperature Surface

W A R N IN G Do not pick up dropped toner with a general vacuum cleaner.

Revision Date of Issue Description

4.2 COVERS ........................................................................................................... 242 4.5.5 ROLL ASSY RETARD............................................................................ 282

1.1 Overview 1.1.2 Controller Features

 Paper eject capacity is 250 sheets, face-down only

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Overview 7

1.1.3 Software Features

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Overview 8

1.2 Basic Specifications PRINTING SPEED MODE

Table 1-1. Printing Speed Mode

 Color mode: Use four toners (CMYK) to print in full color.

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 9

PRINTING MODE BY PAPER TYPE FIRST PRINT TIME

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 10

CONTINUOUS PRINTING SPEED  Duplex printing

Envelop/DL/ISO-B5/ MP tray – 17.6 – –

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 11

 Color mode*1  Duplex printing

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 12

PAPER FEED COMBINATION WITH OPTIONAL CASSETTE

106 to 163 g/m2

Duplex unit A4, A5, LT, B5, Executive,

550-sheet A4, A5, LT, B5, Executive,

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 13

SUPPORTED PAPER SIZE, TYPE AND ORIENTATION

Table 1-10. List of Supported Paper Size, Type and Orientation

GLT 266.70 (10.50") 203.20 (8.00") { – SEF –

A4: 297.00 A4: 210.00 { – SEF –

DL 110.00 220.00 – LEF –

ISO-B5 250.00 176.00 {*3 – SEF –

Note *1: : Feeding is possible and paper size is automatically detected.

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 14

 Envelope orientation PAPER EJECT CAPACITY

 Printing surface set direction

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 15

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT  Dimensions and weight with options installed

550-sheet paper cassette 429 509 154 7 Main unit

Note 1: Manufacturing tolerance is ± 5 mm in dimensions and ± 0.5 kg in weight. Main unit

Note 1: Manufacturing tolerance is ± 5 mm in dimensions and ± 0.5 kg in weight.

Figure 1-1. Dimensions (Main Unit)

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 16

CONSUMABLES AND PERIODIC REPLACEMENT UNIT POWER CONSUMPTION

 550-sheet paper cassette (option)

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 17

Item Printing Mode Standby Mode Sleep Mode

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 18

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Paper Specifications 19

1.3.3 Available Paper by Feeder 1.3.4 Printing Area

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Paper Specifications 20

1.4 Reliability and Serviceability PRINTING START POSITION ACCURACY

Table 1-20. Printing Start Position Accuracy

Caution Label for High-temperature Surface

Paper eject capacity is 250 sheets, face-down only

Color mode: Use four toners (CMYK) to print in full color.

CONTINUOUS PRINTING SPEED Duplex printing

Color mode*1 Duplex printing

Note *1: : Feeding is possible and paper size is automatically detected.

Envelope orientation PAPER EJECT CAPACITY

Printing surface set direction

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT Dimensions and weight with options installed

550-sheet paper cassette (option)

2 kV: No damage to parts Table 1-28. Withstand Voltage

120 V: 3.5 mA or less

Toner: Have no affect on human body (conforms to OSHA,

1.13 Life Details Color mode

Slot A: P5C ROM module

Printer mode 1.15.3 External Interface Specifications

Main System Type: MTP1200dpi, PW10200dt1200dpi, PRG (*****) rev,